HP Smartstream Production

HP SmartStream Production
Pro Print Server
User Guide
HP SmartStream Production
Pro Print Server
User Guide
HP SmartStream Production Pro Print Server
User Guide
Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright and License
© 2002 – 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard

Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation

without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Copyright © 1999–2003 The Apache

Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1999–2001 Intalio Inc. All rights

reserved.
Copyright © 2000–2002 Bob McWhirter &

James Strachan. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All

rights reserved.
Copyright © 2001 Bret McLaughlin & Jason

Hunter. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 2000–2001 Werken Digital. All

rights reserved.
Edition 1, 5/2008
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®

are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun

Microsystems, Inc.
CA394-00200

Table of contents
1 System Building Blocks

Overview — a system map .................................................................................................................. 1
The Production Pro System Manager .................................................................................................. 2
The Production Pro RIP System .......................................................................................................... 3
Press controllers for PrintLink presses ................................................................................................. 3
PrintLink presses .................................................................................................................................. 4
Press controllers for non-PrintLink presses .......................................................................................... 5
Non-PrintLink presses .......................................................................................................................... 6
The Jobs Share .................................................................................................................................... 6
Production Pro NAS (Network Attached Storage) ................................................................................ 6
External storage for RIP output (Folder devices) ................................................................................. 7
The HP Remote Production Client ....................................................................................................... 7
The Content Store ................................................................................................................................ 8
2 Tour of Production Pro Print Server

The main window ................................................................................................................................. 9
The Job Manager panel ..................................................................................................................... 10
The System panel .............................................................................................................................. 11
The Master Jobs list ........................................................................................................................... 12
Production Queue .............................................................................................................................. 14
Related Press Jobs list ....................................................................................................................... 14
Press views — PrintLink presses ....................................................................................................... 14
The press status panel ....................................................................................................................... 15
Press controller views ........................................................................................................................ 16
Searching and Sorting Lists ............................................................................................................... 17
Searching ........................................................................................................................... 17
Sorting ............................................................................................................................... 18
Using the Thumbnail panel ................................................................................................................. 18
The log viewer .................................................................................................................................... 19
Using UNC network paths .................................................................................................................. 20
Customizing the main window ............................................................................................................ 21
Resizing the panels ........................................................................................................... 21
Customizing list columns ................................................................................................... 22
Keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 23
3 Initial setup and administration

Installing the remote client .................................................................................................................. 24
Starting the remote client ................................................................................................................... 25
Connection and version information ................................................................................................... 25
Setting up devices — quick reference ................................................................................................ 26
Setting up Production Pro Print Server accounts — quick reference ................................................. 26
Configuring user access to the Jobs Share ........................................................................................ 26
Configuring networking on a Mac OS client ....................................................................................... 27
iii

Setting up RIPs — quick reference .................................................................................................... 28
Setting up Ticket Templates — quick reference ................................................................................. 28
Setting up resources — quick reference ............................................................................................ 29
Setting up one or more Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS) ........................................ 29
4 HP Remote Production Client user accounts

Introduction to HP Remote Production Client user accounts ............................................................. 30
Changing your password .................................................................................................................... 30
Editing your user preferences ............................................................................................................ 31
Built in user roles and permissions ..................................................................................................... 31
System locks ...................................................................................................................................... 32
5 Submitting jobs
Overview of job submission ................................................................................................................ 33
How Master Jobs get submitted ........................................................................................ 33
What is an input method? .................................................................................................. 33
What is a Ticket Template? ............................................................................................... 33
Supported file types ............................................................................................................................ 34
Using Ticket Templates ...................................................................................................................... 36
Ticket Templates and Job Tickets ..................................................................................... 36
Using hot folders ................................................................................................................................ 36
Location of hot folders ....................................................................................................... 37
Sub-folders of hot folders ................................................................................................... 37
Success and error folders .................................................................................................. 37
Submitting static Master Jobs ............................................................................................ 38
How copy counts are specified during hot folder job submission ...................................... 38
Submitting Master Jobs requiring variable data ................................................................. 38
Using the JDF hot folder ..................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Import Job dialog box ......................................................................................................... 39
How copy counts are specified during job import .............................................................. 40
How Internet (ISV) jobs get submitted ................................................................................................ 40
The Internet job submission process ................................................................................. 41
Importing a press job .......................................................................................................................... 41
Submitting and processing archive (zip) files ..................................................................................... 42
Throttled Master Job submission ....................................................................................................... 43
Submitting Master Jobs using a network printer ................................................................................ 43
Network printer files ........................................................................................................... 43
Spooling ............................................................................................................................. 44
Setting up and using a network printer .............................................................................. 44
Network printer configuration (PC) ..................................................................................................... 44
Network printer configuration (Macintosh) .......................................................................................... 45
6 Managing Master Jobs

What is a Master Job? ........................................................................................................................ 46
The relationship between a Master Job and its press job(s) ............................................. 46
Workflow of Master Jobs .................................................................................................................... 47
Job names and IDs ............................................................................................................................ 48
How Master Jobs are named ............................................................................................. 48
Renaming Master Jobs ...................................................................................................... 48
iv

ISV Master Jobs ................................................................................................................ 49
Master Job status ............................................................................................................................... 49
Master Job priority .............................................................................................................................. 49
Initial priority ....................................................................................................................... 49
How priority affects Master Jobs ........................................................................................ 49
Changing the Master Job priority ....................................................................................... 50
Managing inactive jobs ....................................................................................................................... 50
Monitoring job progress ...................................................................................................................... 50
Workflow for enhanced jobs ............................................................................................................... 50
List of Enhancement Features ........................................................................................................... 51
Holding and resuming Master Jobs .................................................................................................... 51
When can Master Jobs be held? ....................................................................................... 51
Putting new Master Jobs on hold ....................................................................................................... 52
Finding the press jobs for a Master Job ............................................................................................. 52
Dealing with Master Jobs held for review ........................................................................................... 53
Approving or failing the Master Job ................................................................................... 53
Reprocessing a job ............................................................................................................................. 54
Locking jobs ....................................................................................................................................... 54
Resubmitting a job .............................................................................................................................. 54
Canceling jobs .................................................................................................................................... 55
Automatic Master Job Cancellation ................................................................................... 56
Throttling processors .......................................................................................................................... 56
Using OPI for high resolution images ................................................................................................. 56
Configuring OPI ................................................................................................................. 57
Activating OPI .................................................................................................................... 57
OPI search paths ............................................................................................................... 57
How jobs are set to complete ............................................................................................................. 58
Automatically completing Master Jobs .............................................................................. 58
Setting a Master Job to complete when its press job is set to printing
done .................................................................................................................. 58
Setting a Master Job to complete when a press job is deleted ......................... 58
Manually completing Master Jobs ..................................................................................... 58
Deleting jobs manually ....................................................................................................................... 59
Deleting jobs automatically ................................................................................................................. 59
7 The Job Ticket

Overview of Job Tickets ..................................................................................................................... 61
Ticket Templates ............................................................................................................... 61
How Ticket Templates are used ........................................................................................ 61
Ticket Template information copied to the Job Ticket ....................................................... 61
Managing Ticket Templates ............................................................................................... 62
Opening a Job Ticket ......................................................................................................................... 62
Modifying a Job Ticket ........................................................................................................................ 62
Setting the press job destination ........................................................................................................ 63
Specifying the substrate(s) in the Job Ticket ...................................................................................... 63
Selecting substrates .......................................................................................................... 64
Substrate settings in Ticket Templates .............................................................................. 64
Specifying RIP color management in the Job Ticket .......................................................................... 64
ICC profiles ........................................................................................................................ 64
Rendering intents ............................................................................................................... 65

Miscellaneous color management options ......................................................................... 66
Color management settings in Ticket Templates ............................................................... 66
Specifying RIP color separations in the Job Ticket ............................................................................ 66
Pre-separated jobs ............................................................................................................ 66
Indigo transparency ........................................................................................................... 67
Overprint options ............................................................................................................... 67
Screen frequency ............................................................................................................... 68
Separation mode ............................................................................................................... 68
LUTs .................................................................................................................................. 69
Default job LUT for separations ........................................................................ 69
Light cyan and magenta inks ............................................................................................. 70
Color separation settings in Ticket Templates ................................................................... 71
Overprint behavior .............................................................................................................................. 71
Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket ......................................................................................... 71
Default page size ............................................................................................................... 72
Pad smaller jobs ................................................................................................ 72
Scale .................................................................................................................................. 73
PDF Options ...................................................................................................................... 73
Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 74
Page settings in Ticket Templates ..................................................................................... 74
Specifying job control parameters in the Job Ticket ........................................................................... 74
Missing RIP font ................................................................................................................. 74
OPI (Open Prepress Interface) .......................................................................................... 75
Print properties .................................................................................................................. 75
Job control settings in Ticket Templates ............................................................................ 75
Using light inks ................................................................................................................................... 76
Specifying Imposition in the Job Ticket .............................................................................................. 76
Imposition templates .......................................................................................................... 77
Media size properties ......................................................................................................... 77
Imposition settings in Ticket Templates ............................................................................. 77
Viewing and interpreting the job log ................................................................................................... 77
Job log content .................................................................................................................. 77
Printing a Job Ticket ........................................................................................................................... 78
Using the order form in the Job Ticket ............................................................................................... 78
8 Press job destinations and workflows

Introduction to press job destinations ................................................................................................. 79
Selecting a destination press ............................................................................................................. 79
PrintLink presses — choosing a destination list ................................................................................. 79
Legacy presses — choosing a destination list ................................................................................... 80
ICF formats and post-RIP destinations .............................................................................................. 81
ICF formats and press destinations ................................................................................... 81
ICF formats and press controllers ...................................................................................... 81
ICF formats and folder devices .......................................................................................... 81
ICF formats and press groups ........................................................................................... 81
Using press groups ............................................................................................................................ 82
Using Folder devices .......................................................................................................................... 82
Using press controllers as the destination .......................................................................................... 83
9 Enhanced printing options
vi

Overview of enhanced printing options .............................................................................................. 84
Support for enhanced printing options ............................................................................................... 84
Multiple resolution RIP and print ........................................................................................................ 85
Object-level resolution ........................................................................................................................ 85
Line smoothing ................................................................................................................................... 86
Line thinning ....................................................................................................................................... 86
Support for larger sheet size .............................................................................................................. 87
Adaptive halftoning ............................................................................................................................. 87
10 Color and substrate workflow

Overview of color management .......................................................................................................... 89
To set color options ........................................................................................................... 90
Priority of options ............................................................................................................... 90
Configuring color for RIPping ............................................................................................................. 90
Color management options ................................................................................................ 91
Color separations options .................................................................................................. 91
Managing ICC profiles ........................................................................................................................ 92
Pantone® emulation ........................................................................................................................... 92
PANTONE® emulation with Indichrome Inks .................................................................... 93
PANTONE® emulation with CMYK Inks ............................................................................ 93
HP Professional Pantone® Emulation (Auto PantonePlus) .............................. 93
PANTONE® CMYK Licensed Lookup Table ..................................................... 94
Compatibility mode ............................................................................................ 94
Process CMYK colors from job ......................................................................... 94
Managing RIP LUTs ........................................................................................................................... 95
Black point compensation .................................................................................................................. 95
Color management of press jobs — an overview ............................................................................... 96
Creating and managing press job Look Up Tables (LUTs) ................................................................ 96
Overview of substrate workflow .......................................................................................................... 97
Setting the substrate prior to RIP ....................................................................................................... 98
Using the Substrate Catalog .............................................................................................................. 99
Modifying the substrate post-RIP ..................................................................................................... 100
Using intended substrate names ...................................................................................................... 100
11 Managing press jobs

What is a press job? ......................................................................................................................... 101
Press jobs and Master Jobs ............................................................................................ 101
Press job components ..................................................................................................... 101
Where are press jobs stored? .......................................................................................................... 101
Jobs sent to PrintLink presses ......................................................................................... 102
Jobs sent to non-PrintLink presses .................................................................................. 102
Jobs sent to press groups ................................................................................................ 102
Jobs sent to press controllers .......................................................................................... 102
PrintLink presses — Print Queue and Held Jobs list ........................................................................ 102
The Press Controller Jobs list .......................................................................................................... 103
non-PrintLink presses - the Held (Loaded) Jobs list and Print Queue ............................................. 103
Print Queue ...................................................................................................................... 103
Held (Loaded) Jobs list .................................................................................................... 103
Moving (re-ordering) jobs in the Print Queue ................................................................................... 104
Priority and the Print Queue ............................................................................................ 104
vii

Moving jobs between lists ................................................................................................................ 104
Modifying jobs in the press controller views ..................................................................................... 105
Duplicating press jobs ...................................................................................................................... 105
Exporting a press job ........................................................................................................................ 106
Finding the Master Job for a press job ............................................................................................. 107
Deleting press jobs ........................................................................................................................... 107
Modifying press job imposition ......................................................................................................... 108
Printing a proof ................................................................................................................................. 108
Setting after-print behavior for press jobs ........................................................................................ 109
Setting a press job to Printing Done ................................................................................................. 109
How setting Printing Done affects Master Job status ...................................................... 110
Grouping press jobs ......................................................................................................................... 110
Why group jobs? .............................................................................................................. 111
Sending a job to another press or press controller ........................................................................... 111
Using the retain list ........................................................................................................................... 112
12 Modify press job properties

Getting it right — finding and fixing errors ........................................................................................ 115
Setting the printing range ................................................................................................................. 116
Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT jobs .......................................................... 116
Setting simplex/duplex for a press job .............................................................................................. 119
Specifying the workflow and retention for a press job ...................................................................... 120
Modifying the substrate(s) for a press job ........................................................................................ 120
Setting the stacking order for a press job ......................................................................................... 120
Adjusting image orientation and size for a press job ........................................................................ 121
Modifying the color LUT for a press job ............................................................................................ 122
Using the press controller's LUT library ........................................................................................... 122
Making color corrections .................................................................................................................. 123
Editing the separations of a press job .............................................................................................. 123
Specifying the printing ink order ....................................................................................................... 124
Modifying linework and resolution settings for a press job ............................................................... 124
Recording comments for a press job ................................................................................................ 124
Viewing the press job log ................................................................................................................. 125
Legacy presses — editing press job properties ............................................................................... 125
13 Previewing and editing press jobs

Previewing a press job ..................................................................................................................... 126
Previewing jobs with special named colors ...................................................................................... 126
Saving a PDF preview ...................................................................................................................... 127
Editing Press Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 127
Creating a New Press Job ................................................................................................................ 128
14 The Log Viewer

Viewing system logs ......................................................................................................................... 129
Choosing the log type ....................................................................................................................... 129
Monitor and History Modes .............................................................................................................. 129
Monitor mode ................................................................................................................... 129
History mode .................................................................................................................... 130
Severity of logged events ................................................................................................................. 130
viii

Filtering system logs ......................................................................................................................... 130
The Production System Log ............................................................................................................. 131
The Master Job Log ......................................................................................................................... 131
Master Job Log ................................................................................................................ 132
The RIP Log ..................................................................................................................................... 132
The Press System Log ..................................................................................................................... 132
The Press Consumables Log ........................................................................................................... 134
Refreshing a log in History mode ..................................................................................................... 134
Setting the expiration time for log entries ......................................................................................... 135
Configuring pop-up log messages .................................................................................................... 135
Exporting a system log ..................................................................................................................... 135
15 Variable data (VDP) jobs

Overview of variable data jobs ......................................................................................................... 137
Submitting variable data jobs ........................................................................................... 137
Components of a variable data job .................................................................................. 137
Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders ................................................................................ 138
Submitting variable data jobs using the Import dialog ...................................................................... 140
The Workflow for PPML and Variable JLYT Jobs ............................................................................ 142
Variable JLYT, PPML/T, and PPML workflow ................................................................. 143
Using the Jobs Share for VDP assets .............................................................................................. 144
Reusing Job Components in Variable Data Jobs ............................................................................. 144
Matching Database Files to Variable Job Files ................................................................................ 144
Exporting and reprinting variable data jobs ...................................................................................... 145
Exporting variable data jobs ............................................................................................ 145
Reprinting jobs with new variable data ............................................................................ 145
Restricting RIPping of VDP jobs ....................................................................................................... 145
ISV job submission of VDP jobs ....................................................................................................... 146
16 The Production RIP Manager

Overview of the Production RIP Manager ........................................................................................ 147
How the Production RIP Manager handles jobs .............................................................. 147
What happens during RIP? .............................................................................................. 148
Opening the Production RIP Manager window ................................................................................ 148
Viewing RIP engine status ............................................................................................................... 148
Viewing RIP job status ..................................................................................................................... 149
Re-RIPping a job .............................................................................................................................. 149
Controlling RIPping with the RIP processor ..................................................................................... 150
Pausing the RIP processor .............................................................................................. 150
Setting the hold behavior of the RIP processor ............................................................... 150
Managing RIP fonts .......................................................................................................................... 151
Adding fonts using the fonts hot folder ............................................................................................. 152
Rebuilding RIP font lists ................................................................................................................... 152
Manually rebuilding the substitute font list ....................................................................... 153
Proofing RIP Fonts ........................................................................................................................... 153
Managing RIP disk space ................................................................................................................. 154
Handling missing fonts ..................................................................................................................... 154
Font emulation .................................................................................................................................. 155
Creating and editing RIP groups ...................................................................................................... 155
Taking a RIP group off-line ............................................................................................................... 156
ix

RIP group priority ............................................................................................................................. 156
Partitioning jobs across multiple RIP engines .................................................................................. 157
Using fast reaggregation .................................................................................................................. 157
Creating and editing RIP engines ..................................................................................................... 158
Taking a RIP engine offline .............................................................................................................. 159
17 General administration
The delete behavior for press jobs ................................................................................................... 161
Configuring order completion ........................................................................................................... 161
Setting the default units .................................................................................................................... 162
System settings ................................................................................................................................ 162
Default hot folders ............................................................................................................ 162
Exporting system data ...................................................................................................................... 163
Managing impositions ....................................................................................................................... 163
Configuration backup/restore ........................................................................................................... 164
Dealing with RIP synchronization issues ......................................................................... 166
A synchronization scenario ............................................................................. 166
Handling synchronization issues ..................................................................... 167
Scheduling Automatic Backups ....................................................................................... 167
Backing up SNAP fonts .................................................................................................................... 167
Releasing a system lock ................................................................................................................... 167
Managing remote connections ......................................................................................................... 168
How processors work ....................................................................................................................... 168
Configuring processor behavior ....................................................................................................... 169
Controlling re-RIP with the RIP processor ....................................................................... 169
Pausing a processor ......................................................................................................................... 170
Changing a Production Pro NAS hostname ..................................................................................... 170
18 Managing Job Input

Overview of input methods ............................................................................................................... 171
What is an input method? ................................................................................................ 171
Input methods and Ticket Templates ............................................................................... 171
Example of using input methods ...................................................................................... 171
Creating and editing hot folders ....................................................................................................... 172
Before you start ............................................................................................................... 172
Components of a hot folder ............................................................................................. 172
Creating and editing hot folders ....................................................................................... 172
Setting default locations for hot folders ............................................................................................ 174
Managing Ticket Templates ............................................................................................................. 174
Creating a new Ticket Template ....................................................................................................... 175
Creating and editing network printers ............................................................................................... 175
Before you start ............................................................................................................... 175
Adding and Editing a Networked Printer .......................................................................... 176
Creating and editing Internet input methods .................................................................................... 176
Before you start ............................................................................................................... 176
Creating and editing Internet input methods .................................................................... 177
19 User Administration
Adding users .................................................................................................................................... 178

Managing user roles ......................................................................................................................... 178
Modifying a users role (permissions) ................................................................................................ 179
Setting permissions for a role ........................................................................................................... 179
Resetting user passwords ................................................................................................................ 180
20 Managing devices
Adding and deleting presses ............................................................................................................ 181
Modifying the properties of an existing press ................................................................................... 182
Adding press controllers ................................................................................................................... 182
Mapping presses and press controllers ............................................................................................ 183
Creating and managing press groups .............................................................................................. 183
Load balancing ................................................................................................................................. 184
Creating folder devices for RIP output ............................................................................................. 184
Deleting folder devices ..................................................................................................................... 185
21 Press Controller administration

Managing SNAP fonts on a press controller .................................................................................... 186
Automatic SNAP font creation .......................................................................................................... 186
Adding SNAP fonts to a press controller .......................................................................................... 186
Importing and exporting SNAP fonts ................................................................................................ 187
The press controller Look Up Table (LUT) library ............................................................................ 188
Press Controller Configuration ......................................................................................................... 188
Viewing system parameters of a press controller ............................................................................. 188
22 Administering ISV accounts

Overview of ISV accounts ................................................................................................................ 189
Creating and editing ISV accounts ................................................................................................... 189
Creating RPP profiles ....................................................................................................................... 190
Creating image server profiles ......................................................................................................... 191
Before you add an image server profile ........................................................................... 191
Testing ISV accounts ....................................................................................................................... 192
Polling for Jobs at an ISV ................................................................................................................. 192
Automatically polling RPP servers ................................................................................... 193
Manually Polling RPP Servers ......................................................................................... 193
Troubleshooting ISV account problems ........................................................................................... 193
23 ICF Formats and Production Pro Print Server Workflows

What is ICF? ..................................................................................................................................... 195
ICF format and press controller configuration .................................................................................. 195
Determining the press job ICF format for static jobs ........................................................................ 196
Determining the press job ICF format for VDP job ........................................................................... 196
Copying press jobs to other devices (ICF format issues) ................................................................. 197
Exporting and importing press jobs (ICF format issues) .................................................................. 198
Exporting .......................................................................................................................... 198
Importing .......................................................................................................................... 198
24 Main window and panels reference

Production Pro Print Server tab and Master Jobs list ....................................................................... 199
xi

Log Viewer tab ................................................................................................................................. 199
Thumbnail preview ........................................................................................................................... 200
Master Jobs List columns ................................................................................................................. 201
Held (Loaded) Jobs list and Print Queue columns ........................................................................... 202
Press controller view columns .......................................................................................................... 204
Press status panel ............................................................................................................................ 204
25 General user dialog boxes reference

Copy Job to and Move Job to dialog boxes ..................................................................................... 205
Retained Jobs dialog box ................................................................................................................. 205
View Options dialog box ................................................................................................................... 206
Group Jobs dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 206
Import Job dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 207
Export dialog box .............................................................................................................................. 207
Specify Asset Locations dialog box .................................................................................................. 208
Administer Processors dialog box .................................................................................................... 209
System Settings dialog box .............................................................................................................. 209
Log Settings dialog box .................................................................................................................... 210
Data Export dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 211
Create Composition Preview dialog box .......................................................................................... 211
Export Current Log dialog box .......................................................................................................... 212
26 Resource Management reference

Substrate Catalog reference ............................................................................................................ 213
Manage LUTs dialog box ................................................................................................................. 213
Manage ICC Profiles dialog box ....................................................................................................... 214
Manage Impositions dialog box ........................................................................................................ 214
SNAP Font Manager dialog box ....................................................................................................... 214
Add SNAP Fonts dialog box ............................................................................................................. 215
Job LUT Library dialog box .............................................................................................................. 215
Save LUT dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 216
27 Device management dialogs reference

Manage Devices dialog box — Presses tab ..................................................................................... 217
New Press dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 217
Edit Press dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 217
Manage Devices dialog box – Press Controllers tab ........................................................................ 218
New Press Controller dialog box ...................................................................................................... 218
Edit Press Controller dialog box ....................................................................................................... 218
Map Press Controller dialog box ...................................................................................................... 219
Manage Devices dialog box — Press Groups tab ............................................................................ 219
Add/Edit Press Group dialog box ..................................................................................................... 220
Manage Devices dialog box — Folder Devices tab .......................................................................... 220
New/Edit Folder Device dialog box .................................................................................................. 221
28 Input methods reference

Manage Input Methods dialog box ................................................................................................... 222
New/Edit Input Method dialog box .................................................................................................... 222
New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box ........................................................................................................ 222
xii

New/Modify Networked Printer dialog box ....................................................................................... 224
Modify Port 6000 Input Method dialog box ....................................................................................... 224
New/Modify Internet Input Method dialog box .................................................................................. 224
Test Connection Results dialog box ................................................................................................. 225
Manage ISV Accounts dialog box .................................................................................................... 225
ISV Account Properties dialog box ................................................................................................... 225
ISV Account Properties - General tab .............................................................................................. 226
ISV Account Properties - RPP Profiles tab ....................................................................................... 226
ISV Account Properties - Image Server Profiles tab ........................................................................ 227
Manual Poll Results dialog box ........................................................................................................ 228
29 Job Ticket reference

Manage Ticket Templates dialog box ............................................................................................... 229
Ticket Template dialog box .............................................................................................................. 229
Job Ticket dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 230
Ticket Template - General tab .......................................................................................................... 231
Job Ticket - General tab ................................................................................................................... 231
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Substrate tab .................................................................................... 232
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab ................................................................................ 232
New/Edit Color Separation dialog box .............................................................................................. 234
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab ..................................................................... 235
The Color Workflow ......................................................................................................... 235
Color Management Areas ................................................................................................ 236
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Page tab ........................................................................................... 238
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Imposition tab ................................................................................... 240
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Job Control tab ................................................................................. 242
Job Ticket - Job Log ......................................................................................................................... 244
Order Form tab ................................................................................................................................. 244
Order Form tab - Customer Information ........................................................................................... 244
Order Form tab - Billing Information ................................................................................................. 245
Order Form tab - Shipping Information ............................................................................................. 246
Order Form tab - Finishing ............................................................................................................... 247
30 Press job properties and editing reference

Job Properties dialog box - General page ........................................................................................ 248
Job Properties dialog box - Substrate page ..................................................................................... 249
Job Properties dialog box - Imposition page .................................................................................... 250
Job Properties dialog box - Stacking page ....................................................................................... 251
Job Properties dialog box - Image Placement page ......................................................................... 252
Job Properties dialog box - Color Control page ............................................................................... 253
Job Properties dialog box - Separations page ................................................................................. 254
Job Properties dialog box - Linework and Resolution page ............................................................. 256
Job Properties dialog box - Comments tab ...................................................................................... 256
Job Properties dialog box - Job Log tab ........................................................................................... 256
Job Preview window ......................................................................................................................... 256
Special Colors dialog box ................................................................................................................. 258
31 User account reference

My Account dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 259
xiii

Change Password dialog box (users) .............................................................................................. 259
Manage Remote Accounts dialog box .............................................................................................. 259
New Remote Account dialog box ..................................................................................................... 260
Edit Remote Account dialog box ...................................................................................................... 260
Change Password dialog box (administrators) ................................................................................. 260
Edit Remote Role dialog box ............................................................................................................ 260
Manage Remote Roles dialog box ................................................................................................... 261
Locked function dialog box ............................................................................................................... 261
Login dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 261
User Preferences dialog box ............................................................................................................ 262
Manage Remote Connections dialog box ........................................................................................ 262
32 Production RIP Manager reference

The Production RIP Manager ........................................................................................................... 263
Configure RIP Groups dialog box ..................................................................................................... 263
Edit RIP Group dialog box ................................................................................................................ 264
Configure RIP Engines dialog box ................................................................................................... 265
New/Edit RIP Engine dialog box ...................................................................................................... 265
Font Manager dialog box .................................................................................................................. 266
Configure Disk Space Management dialog box ............................................................................... 267
33 Status and processor reference

Master Job status icons .................................................................................................................... 268
Master Job progress states .............................................................................................................. 268
Press job status and icons ............................................................................................................... 269
RIP engine status icons .................................................................................................................... 270
Press status icons ............................................................................................................................ 270
System processors ........................................................................................................................... 270
Processor status and icons .............................................................................................................. 271
34 Built-in settings reference

Built-in imposition templates ............................................................................................................. 272
Built-in LUTs ..................................................................................................................................... 276
CMYK input profiles .......................................................................................................................... 276
RGB input profiles ............................................................................................................................ 277
Press output profiles ......................................................................................................................... 278
Color separation modes ................................................................................................................... 279
Pre-installed RIP Fonts .................................................................................................................... 280
Fonts that can be emulated .............................................................................................................. 281
Error Handling .................................................................................................................................. 293
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 294
xiv

1 System Building Blocks
Overview — a system map

HP SmartStream Production Pro Print Server (or Production Pro Print Server) encompasses a set of
networked components that work together to provide end-to-end digital press workflow:
● The Production Pro System Manager on page 2
● The Production Pro RIP System on page 3
● Press controllers:
◦ Press controllers for PrintLink presses on page 3
◦ Press controllers for non-PrintLink presses on page 5
● Presses:
◦ PrintLink presses on page 4
◦ Non-PrintLink presses on page 6
● Production Pro NAS (Network Attached Storage) on page 6
● External storage for RIP output (Folder devices) on page 7
● The HP Remote Production Client on page 7
Overview — a system map 1

The Production Pro System Manager
The Production Pro System Manager provides the centralized services for configuring and managing
the system. A Production Pro Print Server system includes one Production Pro System Manager.
Functionality provided by the Production Pro System Manager include:
● The overall view into the Production Pro Print Server system. It provides the underlying databases
for managing jobs.
● Connection to the HP Remote Production Client. When users log into the system, they are
connecting to the Production Pro System Manager.
● Job submission. All jobs submitted to the system using the regular input methods (hot folders, ISV
inputs, job import, and networked printers) are entered into the Production Pro System Manager's
Master Job list.
● Workflow management. The Production Pro System Manager manages the workflow of jobs from
initial job submission through printing.
● RIP Management (see The Production Pro RIP System on page 3).The Production Pro System
Manager does not do actual RIPping. However, it controls the flow of jobs to the RIPs.
● System and user account administration.
● Connectivity between the system components.
2 Chapter 1 System Building Blocks

The Production Pro RIP System
The RIPs are scalable high performance engines that manage the rendering of jobs to make them press
ready.
The RIP system includes these components:

● The Production Pro RIP Manager.
The Production Pro RIP Manager is part of the Production Pro System Manager. It is responsible
for the overall management and scheduling of the RIP resources.
● RIP Servers.
A RIP Server is the hardware that runs one or more RIP engines.
Press controllers for PrintLink presses

Each PrintLink press is mapped to a press controller. There is a 1:1 relationship between the press and
press controller; a single press controller is mapped to a single PrintLink press.
The primary responsibilities of the press controller are:
● Storing press-ready jobs assigned to the press.
● Sending a job reference to the press. The job reference contains the job information necessary for
the press operator to see the job in the press software.
● Transferring jobs to the press during printing.
The Production Pro RIP System 3

When a job is being printed on a PrintLink press, the press controller and press are in constant high-
speed communication. The press controller sends the data corresponding to individual sheets of the job
as the press needs it.
Since Production Pro Print Server supports multiple presses, it also supports multiple press controllers.
In addition to storing and transferring jobs, press controllers provide the these features:
● Job modification (via the Job Properties dialog box).
● Job previewing (via the Job Previewer).
● SNAP font management.
● LUT library management.
Press controllers provide an additional feature unrelated to their press mapping. They provide a location
to which press jobs can be sent without assigning those jobs to a particular press.
PrintLink presses
PrintLink presses use a new architecture that increases printing speed by allowing the press to
concentrate on the task of printing. In this architecture, the press controllers take over the role of storing
press jobs, creating and managing SNAP fonts, interacting with the RIPs, and communication between
presses.

Each PrintLink press runs its own press software. When a press has been added to the Production Pro
Print Server, two-way communication is set up that provides mechanisms for:
● Sheet-by-sheet printing. When a job is being printed, the job content is sent from the press controller
to the press as it is needed.
● Making jobs on the press controller visible within the press software. This makes it possible for the
press operator to preview the job and modify the job properties.
● Communicating press status throughout the system.
Press controllers for non-PrintLink presses

Each non-PrintLink press in the system must be mapped to a press controller. However, multiple non-
PrintLink presses can be mapped to a single press controller.
The press controllers for non-PrintLink presses play a somewhat different role than those for PrintLink
presses. Since press jobs sent to legacy presses are loaded into press memory, legacy press controllers
do not manage the high-speed, sheet-by-sheet transfer of information to the press when a job is printing.
The non-PrintLink press controllers provide these features:
● VDP job processing. They manage the RIPping of the various assets for the job.
● SNAP font management.
● Support for workflows with off-press job storage. You can create workflows that assign jobs to a
non-PrintLink press but keep the job on the press controller until it is manually sent to the press.
Press controllers for non-PrintLink presses 5

Additionally, like PrintLink press controllers, non-PrintLink press controllers provide a location to which
press jobs can be sent without assigning those jobs to a particular press.
Non-PrintLink presses
The major architectural difference between non-PrintLink and PrintLink presses is that non-PrintLink
presses store and manage press jobs.
When a workflow assigns a job to a non-PrintLink press, the press job is loaded into press memory
(unless the workflow instructs the system to keep the job on the press controller). At that point, the press
operator has complete control of the job. The job is still visible in the Production Pro Print Server view
of that press, but the actions that can be performed on it are limited.
The Jobs Share

Since workflows involve multiple network components, Production Pro Print Server requires a file system
location that can be accessed by users and by all the processes that need job assets. This location is
called the Jobs Share.
The Jobs Share is created during installation as a Windows folder with the Share name Jobs.
● If your system includes a Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS), the Jobs Share is
created there.
● If your system does not include a Production Pro NAS, the Jobs Share is created on the Production
Pro System Manager.
The Jobs Share provides storage for:
● Hot folders.
● VDP image assets.
● Folder devices.
● OPI assets.
● Any other data that needs to be accessible to all systems in the Production Pro Print Server network.
(For example, it is a convenient location for exporting and re-importing SNAP fonts, ICC profiles,
etc.)
NOTE: There can be multiple job shares and Production Pro NAS systems but most installations need
only one.
Production Pro NAS (Network Attached Storage)

Production Pro Print Server provides the ability to configure a Production Pro NAS as external storage
for pre-RIP job assets.
Configuration of the Production Pro NAS occurs at installation. The installation scripts:
● Create the Jobs Share in the storage unit's file system. See The Jobs Share on page 6.
● Make sure the Production Pro NAS, RIP servers, and press controllers know the network locations
of one another.

The Production Pro NAS contains these storage components:
● The Jobs Share. The default location for hot folders is on the Production Pro NAS. See The Jobs
Share on page 6 for more information.
● The content store. The content store is an internal component used by the system for the temporary
storage of file assets. See The Content Store on page 8 for more information.
External storage for RIP output (Folder devices)

Production Pro Print Server provides the ability to save press jobs to the file system immediately after
they are created by the RIPs. This functionality is called Folder devices.
Folder devices are added and managed like other devices in the system — using the Manage Devices
dialog box. Furthermore, each folder device must be mapped to a press controller. See Creating folder
devices for RIP output on page 184.
The HP Remote Production Client

The Production Pro System Manager is a server. Like most servers, it is designed to be used by multiple
users at the same time.
Access to the server is provided by an application called the HP Remote Production Client. The
HP Remote Production Client gets installed on users' systems. It provides:
● Connection and login to the Production Pro System Manager.
● The user interface.
● The locking mechanisms to prevent multiple users from editing the same data at the same time.
External storage for RIP output (Folder devices) 7

The HP Remote Production Client is compatible with both Windows and MacOS systems.
The Content Store

The content store is an internal component. In most cases, you will never have to interact with it.
However, being aware of the content store helps you to understand how jobs are handled in the system.
When a job is submitted, the job file plus additional VDP templates and database files are automatically
placed in the content store. At the same time, the system database records the location of the files so
that they can be retrieved by the RIPs.
When ISV job submission is used to acquire assets, the downloaded files are placed directly in the
content store.
The system manages all aspects of the content store. Assets may be cached for reuse by multiple jobs.
The content store also manages its disk space and removes files from the system when they are no
longer in use and disk space is needed.
The content store is created during installation:
● If the system includes a Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS), the content store is
created there.
● If your system does not include a Production Pro NAS, the content store is created on the
Production Pro System Manager.

2 Tour of Production Pro Print Server
The main window

The user interface for the HP Production Pro Print Server runs as an application called the HP Remote
Production Client. When you start the HP Remote Production Client, the main window opens.
The main window has two major tabs — the Production Manager and the Log Viewer.
● The Production Manager tab lets you find and view all the jobs in the system. It also lets you monitor
the status of the RIPs and other system processors.
● The Log Viewer lets you find and view all the log messages created by system components.
Job Manager panel. See The Job Manager panel on page 10.
Search panel. See Searching and Sorting Lists on page 17.
System panel. See The System panel on page 11.
The main window 9

Thumbnail. See Using the Thumbnail panel on page 18.
Production Manager/Log Viewer tabs. Click the Log Viewer tab to see system logs.
List view area. The contents of this area depends on the current selection in the Job Manager panel.
Toolbar
Clear search button. Appears as a magnifying glass icon, with an “X” in it. Clears any search filters that have
been set.
The Job Manager panel

The Job Manager panel has several functions:
● It is a navigation tool to find and manipulate jobs.
● It shows the status of all the presses, press groups, and press controllers in the system. See Press
status icons on page 270.
The Job Manager is arranged as a tree view. When an item is a heading for sub-entries, click and
to expand and contract the view.
To operate the Job Manager:
● Click Production Queue to view all currently active jobs.

◦ Below the Production Queue, click RIP Queue and Router Queue to view a list of jobs that
are in the state of being RIPped or routed, respectively. Click Needs Attention to view all jobs
in a state of Needs Attention.
● Click Master Jobs list to view a list of all the jobs in the system.
◦ After expanding the Master Jobs list, click Cancelled and Completed to see the list of jobs
in these states.
● Expand Presses, Press Groups, or Press Controllers to see a list of all these devices.
● Click a press or press controller to view the jobs on that device.
● To get more information about a press, press group, or press controller, move the mouse pointer
over it.
● The Presses, Press Groups, and Press Controllers use two icons to reflect the status of their
sub-entries:
All sub-entries operating properly.
10 Chapter 2 Tour of Production Pro Print Server

One or more sub-entries may require attention.
Displays all active jobs (jobs not cancelled or completed), queued in

the order in which they were submitted, by timestamp. Jobs marked
as Rush are given priority and moved to the top of the queue. Two or
Production Queue (number of active jobs)
more Rush jobs are listed at the top of the queue according to the
order of their submit time. To set a Rush priority, right-click on a job
in the Production Queue and select Rush from the pop-up menu.
RIP Queue (number of active jobs) Displays all jobs in a state of being RIPped.
Displays all jobs in a state of being routed to storage or to press

Router Queue (number of active jobs)
controllers.
Needs Attention list (number of jobs) Displays the Master Jobs that are in a state of Needs Attention.
Master Jobs (number of Master Jobs) Displays a list of all jobs in the system. Columns can be sorted by
clicking the heading of any column. The list can also be filtered, using
the Search panel described further in this table.
Cancelled Lists those jobs that have been cancelled. You can set up the system
to automatically delete Master Jobs that are cancelled. See Deleting
jobs automatically on page 59
Completed Lists those jobs that are completed. You can set up the system to
automatically delete Master Jobs that are complete. See Deleting jobs
automatically on page 59
Shows all the registered presses. Click and to expand and

Presses contract the list of presses. When the status icon is , one or more
presses may need attention.
Press Groups Shows all press groups.
Click to display the press view of that press. The status icon indicates
press name the press status (see Press status icons on page 270). You can copy
press jobs from other presses by dragging the jobs here.
press group name Click to display the presses within a press group.
Click and to expand and contract the list of Production Pro Press
Press Controllers Controllers. When the status icon is , one or more controllers may
need attention.
Click to display the jobs on that press controller. The icon indicates
press controller name the controller's status. You can copy press jobs from other presses
by dragging the jobs here.
The System panel

The System panel shows the status of important workflow processing components.
The System panel 11

Click and to expand and contract the list of RIP Engines. When the status icon is , one or more
RIP Engines controllers may need attention.
RIP engine Shows the name of the RIP engine and its status.
name
The processors control the workflow of jobs. Click and to expand and contract the list of
Processors processors. When the status icon is , one or more processors may need attention. See How
processors work on page 168 for more information.
Shows the name of the processor and its status.

processor name
Folder Device (not Shows the name of the folder device and its status. Only visible if one or more folder devices are
shown) connected.
The Master Jobs list

When a job file is submitted, the system creates a Master Job. The Master Jobs list displays all the
Master Jobs in the system.
The Master Jobs list lets you:
● View existing Master Jobs and their status.
● Modify the Job Ticket. To open the Job Ticket, double-click the Master Job in the list.
● Monitor Master Jobs as they proceed through their workflow.
● View the press jobs generated by the Master Job. (See Related Press Jobs list on page 14.)
● Search and sort the list. (See Searching and Sorting Lists on page 17.)

Use the Job Manager to switch job views. See The Job Manager panel
Job Manager panel on page 10
Searching shortens the list by showing only the jobs that match the criteria
Search panel you specify. See Searching and Sorting Lists on page 17.
Displays a list of all the Master Jobs in the system that match the current
Master Jobs List search criteria. The icon to the left of the job name indicates the status
(see Master Job status icons on page 268. The Progress column indicates
where the job is in its workflow (see Master Job progress states
on page 268.
List of press jobs related to the selected Master Job. If the selected Master
Related Press Jobs list Job has generated a press job, the press job is shown here. If the press
job has been duplicated, the duplicates are also shown. Click the name of
a press job to navigate to it in a press or press controller view.
Displays a small, low-resolution image of the press job associated with the
Thumbnail Panel Master Job. See Using the Thumbnail panel on page 18. Nothing is
displayed if the Master Job has not been RIPped yet.
Appears as a magnifying glass icon, with an “X” in it. It removes any search
Clear Search button filters that have been set.
Click the button to expand the width of the job list to the full width of the
Panel resize bar window.
The Master Jobs list 13

Production Queue
The Production Queue shows all Master Jobs that are not canceled or complete. This list cannot be
sorted, but it can be filtered.
The Production Queue displays jobs in the order they will be processed. The location of jobs in the list
is determined first by priority. If jobs have the same priority, the submittal time determines the order
among those jobs.
The Production Queue lets you:
● View existing Master Jobs and their status.
● Modify the Job Ticket. To open the Job Ticket, double-click the Master Job in the list.
● Monitor the Master Jobs as they proceed through their workflow.
● View the press jobs generated by the Master Job. (See Related Press Jobs list on page 14.)
Related Press Jobs list

When you select a job in the Master Jobs list or Production Queue, the system checks to see whether
the Master Job is associated with any press jobs in the system. If press jobs are found, they are listed
in the Related Press Jobs list.
Conversely, if you select a press job in the Related Press Jobs list, that job will be highlighted under its
particular press.
Press views — PrintLink presses

There is a separate press view for each PrintLink press added to Production Pro Print Server. To display
a press view, click the press name in the Job Manager.
The press view contains the press status panel plus three list of jobs.

See The press status panel on page 15.
The Print Queue contains press jobs that are queued to print. The press operator can see and
manipulate these jobs using the press software.
The Held Jobs list contains press jobs that are in the Held list of the press. The press operator can
see and manipulate these jobs, but they are not queued to print.
The Press Controller Jobs list contains press jobs that are assigned to the press but are not yet visible
in the press software. Therefore, the press operator cannot see or manipulate these jobs.
The press status panel

Each press view includes a status panel that reports the current press status. If the press is currently
printing, printing progress is shown.
The press status panel 15

Ready. The press is ready to print a job, but is not currently
printing.
Hold. Typically, this occurs when a door is open.
Printing. A job is currently being printed.
Initializing. The press and its software is initializing.
Information
A warning is in effect. Warnings typically occur when a

consumable (such as substrate or ink) is running low or
requires adjustment. Printing can continue.
An error has occurred that stopped the press. Errors must be

handled before printing can continue.
Press controller views

There is a press controller view for each press controller in the system.

A press controller view lists the jobs routed explicitly to the press controller by the Job Ticket.
Searching and Sorting Lists

Searching
The Search panel is located on the left side of the main window. You can use the Search panel to locate
entries in many of the system jobs lists. However, you cannot search the Print Queues.
When you use the Search panel, you create a search expression that defines which list items will be
displayed. It uses this syntax:
column condition value
For example:
column condition value
Job Name contains ABC
Due Date on or before Month:05 Day:25 Year:2007
Progress equals complete
Choices in the search fields depend on the selections you make. Some search fields only appear for
specific choices; for example, when the condition between is chosen, two date fields appear.
Searching and Sorting Lists 17

To search a list:
1. In the Search Panel, select a column name from the first list.
2. Select a condition from the second list.
3. Supply value(s) in the remaining search fields by typing or selecting from more lists.
4.
Click the Search button. Several things happen:
● The list hides all items that do not match the search expression.
● The title bar above the searched list becomes yellow and contains the current search criteria.
To cancel the search and restore the full view of the list, do one of the following:
●
Click the Clear button in the Search panel.
●
Click the Clear button at the upper right of the list.
Several things happen:
● The full list view is restored.
● The title bar above the list is restored to its original color.
Sorting
Sorting a list arranges the list items by the values in a selected column.
The Print Queue and Production Queue cannot be sorted. See Moving (re-ordering) jobs in the Print
Queue on page 104.
To sort a list:
● Click a column header to sort items by the values in the column.
● Click the header repeatedly to alternate between ascending and descending order.
An arrow icon in the column header indicates which column is being used for sorting, and whether the
sort is ascending or descending .
Text items are sorted alphabetically. Numbers are sorted numerically. Date/time items are sorted in
chronological order.
Using the Thumbnail panel

The Thumbnail panel displays a small image of the selected job.
Thumbnail images show press jobs. Thus, if you select a job in the Master Jobs List, the thumbnail is a
view of the corresponding press job. If the Master Job has multiple press jobs, the first one is shown.
Thumbnails are not available for a press job that is being printed, imposed, edited, archived, or sent to
another press.

To use the Thumbnail panel
1. Select a job.
2. Click the View Thumbnail button in the Thumbnail panel to open the image.
3. Use the navigation controls in the panel to page through multi-spread documents.
The log viewer

The Log Viewer provides a single location for viewing messages generated by the system.
The log viewer 19

There are two log modes.
Log Viewer Settings
● Monitor mode displays messages as they are received. Monitor
mode is useful for debugging problems.
● History mode lets you search for previous messages. You can
use filter settings to help you find the information you need.
Select the type of log you want to view. If you select a press-related
Log type log, you must also specify the press. See Choosing the log type
on page 129.
For selecting which messages are shown. The filter is only active in
Filter settings History mode. See Filtering system logs on page 130
You can save the current log view to a comma-separated data file.
Export button See Exporting a system log on page 135
Displays all messages matching the filter criteria in a sortable table.

Log list The columns shown depend on the type of log.
This displays the entire contents of the selected message as multi-

Message details panel line text.
Using UNC network paths

Because Production Pro Print Server is composed of multiple networked systems, it requires a way to
specify locations that can be resolved across the network. Drive letter file paths, such as D:\myfolder
\myfile, cannot be used because each system has its own mapping for drive letters.
When Production Pro Print Server needs a common location across the network, it requires that you
enter the location in UNC format.
The syntax for UNC format for a path is:
\\computername\sharename\path\filename
computername The name of the remote system on which the file or folder is located.
If all systems are within a single domain, you can use a simple hostname — for
example, mymainserver.
If your system includes multiple domains, you must use a fully-qualified hostname —
for example, mymainserver.essexprinting.cv.com.
sharename Typically, this Share name is given to a folder when it is shared using the folder
properties dialog box.
Examples:
● \\MyStorageUnit\Jobs\myhotfolder
● \\ImageServer123.essexprinting.cv.com\JPEGS\myphoto.jpg
To specify a UNC path on a Windows system:

1. Click Browse to open the file browser dialog box.
2. The file browser will automatically open to a default location in My Network Places.

3. If necessary, use the browser to go to a different location within the network.
4. In some cases, a Make New Folder button allows you to create a new folder.
● Select the folder that will become the parent of the new folder.
● Click Make New Folder to create the new folder. It will be highlighted in the tree so that you
can change the name
● Type a new name (ignore the Folder text box field) and click OK.
To specify a UNC path on a Mac OS system:

1. Click Edit to open the Edit UNC Path dialog box.
2. Type a UNC path in the correct syntax and click OK.
In general, UNC paths are required when the file or folder must be found by both the Production Pro
System Manager and the RIP servers. This includes:
● Paths to hot folders and their supporting folders: Images folder, Database folder, Template folder,
On success folder, On error folder.
● File name locations entered in the Import Job dialog box.
● Image asset locations entered in the Specify Asset Locations dialog box.
● OPI search paths entered in Job Tickets and Ticket Templates.
Customizing the main window

You can customize the window to use available screen space most effectively for your needs.
Resizing the panels

Use the resize sashes to set the relative sizes for the panels.
Customizing the main window 21

Customizing list columns
You can customize the columns for most job lists:
● Master Jobs List
● Held (PrintLink presses) and Loaded (non-PrintLink press) Jobs Lists
● Print Queue
● Press Controller Jobs Lists.
To configure the columns in a list:
1. In the View menu, click Options to open the View Options dialog.
2. Select the List to modify.
3. Select the columns to show in the list:
● To show a column, select it in the Available fields list and click Add >.
● To hide a column, select it in the Show these fields in this order list and click < Remove.
(Some columns cannot be removed.)
4. To change left-to-right order of columns:
a. Select a heading in the Show these fields in this order list.
b. Click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move the column left or right.

Keyboard shortcuts
Ctrl+C Duplicate the selected job
Del Delete the selected job
Ctrl+I Open the Import Job dialog
Ctrl+A Select all jobs
F1 Open online help
Esc Cancel dialog
Keyboard shortcuts 23

3 Initial setup and administration
Production Pro Print Server is a highly configurable system. Most configuration tasks require that you
be logged into a user account that has been assigned the Administrator role.
● Installing the remote client
● Starting the remote client
● Connection and version information
● Setting up devices — quick reference
● Setting up Production Pro Print Server accounts — quick reference
● Configuring user access to the Jobs Share
● Configuring networking on a Mac OS client
● Setting up RIPs — quick reference
● Setting up Ticket Templates — quick reference
● Setting up resources — quick reference
● Setting up one or more Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS)
Installing the remote client

Supported operating systems:
● Microsoft Windows Vista®

● Microsoft Windows® XP
● Microsoft Windows® 2000
● Microsoft Windows® Server 2003
● Mac OS X v10.4 or later
Disk space:
● Microsoft Windows operating systems: 96.4 MB for the first installation, somewhat smaller for
installation on additional remote systems.
● MacOS systems: 47.8 MB
Additional requirement
● MacOS systems: Java™ Runtime Environment (JRE) - version 1.5.0 (SE 5.0) or later
24 Chapter 3 Initial setup and administration

To install the remote client
1. Open a browser window on the system onto which you want to install the remote client.
2. Navigate to the home page of the Production Pro System Manager's server. For example, if the
Production Pro System Manager is on a system named vpsc.printcol.com, go to the URL
http://vpsc.printcol.com.
3. Follow the installation instructions on the web page.
Starting the remote client

Starting the remote client is a two-step process:
● A connection module runs, which makes sure the connection can be properly established with a
specified Production Pro System Manager server. See Connection and version information
on page 25.
● The Login dialog box is displayed, which allows users to log in to their accounts. See Introduction
to HP Remote Production Client user accounts on page 30.
Each Production Pro System Manager server manages its own set of remote user accounts; users need
separate accounts on each server to which they want to connect.
You can run more than one remote client at the same time to connect to different servers.
To start the remote client:

1. Double-click the HP Remote Production Client desktop icon to run the connection module, which
opens the Select Server dialog box.
On Microsoft Windows systems, you can select Start > All Programs > Hewlett Packard >
HP Remote Production Client.
2. Enter the name of the Production Pro System Manager server to which you want to connect. Select
a server name from the history list, if available, or type a host name or IP address.
3. Click Connect. The connection module will attempt to connect to the server. If the connection is
made, the Login dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Login dialog box, enter your User ID and Password for your Production Pro Print Server
account.
5. Click Log in.
Connection and version information

In order for the remote client to connect to the server, the software versions of the two must be
compatible.
When a remote system is used to connect to more than one server, the following rules apply:
● If the servers are all running the same version of the server software, the matching version of the
remote client can be used to connect to all the servers.
● If the servers are running different versions of the server software, the remote system must install
multiple versions of the remote client.
All versions of the remote client share a single connection module that makes the connection to the
server and checks version information.
Starting the remote client 25

The connection module:
1. Attempts to make a connection to the server.
2. If the connection succeeds, the module determines the version of software running on the server.
3. The module then determines whether a compatible version of the remote client is installed on the
local system.
4. If all the conditions are met, the connection module runs the proper version of the remote client
and opens the login window.
If the proper version of the remote client is not found, a dialog box opens asking whether you want
to install the compatible version.
Setting up devices — quick reference

The procedures for adding and configuring SmartStream devices are covered in these topics:
● Adding presses. See Adding and deleting presses on page 181.
● Adding press controllers. See Adding press controllers on page 182.
● Mapping press controllers to presses. See Mapping presses and press controllers
on page 183.
● Creating press groups. See Creating and managing press groups on page 183.
● Creating folder devices for storing RIP output. See Creating folder devices for RIP output
on page 184.
Setting up Production Pro Print Server accounts — quick

reference
Each user must have a Production Pro Print Server user account. The user account provides a login
name, password, task permissions, and user preferences.
NOTE: This is not the same account as the user's machine or network login.
● Creating user accounts. See Adding users on page 178.

● Defining user roles and permissions. See Modifying a users role (permissions) on page 179.
Configuring user access to the Jobs Share

When Production Pro Print Server is installed, a shared folder is created. This folder and its subfolders
constitute the Production Pro Print Server Jobs Share.
The Jobs Share must be available to all users who:
● Submit jobs using hot folders.
● Submit image assets that will be used by VDP jobs submitted using the Import dialog box.
● Perform administrative tasks such as creating hot folders, OPI search paths (in Ticket Templates),
and centralized error/success folders.
It is recommended that all users have access to the Jobs Share.

Jobs Share names and location
● If your system includes a Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS), the installation scripts
will place the Jobs Share in the Production Pro NAS file system.
● If your system does not include a Production Pro NAS, the Jobs Share is created in the file system
of the Production Pro System Manager. The default location is S:\jobs.
● The assigned share name is Jobs. This name should never be modified, since the system uses it
to automatically retrieve job assets.
To make the Jobs Share available to all users:
Jobs Share permissions can be set up on a per-user basis. This method simplifies the process by
creating a user group.
1. Use the Windows Computer Management tools to create a Group for all users who will need access
to the Jobs Share. Add those users to the group.
2. From the Windows File Manager, open the Properties window for the Jobs folder.
a. On the Sharing tab, click Permissions. Add the newly-created group and give it rights to
Change.
b. On the Security tab, add the newly-created group and give it rights to Modify.
3. On each user's Windows system, add a network place for the Jobs Share. This will make it easy
for users to browse to the Jobs Share, and will ensure that the proper UNC path gets used (for
example, \\myNAS.mycompany.com\jobs\myfolder\myfile).
4. On each user's Macintosh system, add a Favorite Server for the Jobs Share. This makes it easy
for users to connect to the Jobs Share, and it will ensure that the proper path gets used. In Finder,
choose Go > Connect to Server... For users connecting to the Jobs Share using the Windows
share name, specify a server address such as “smb://myNAS.mycompany.com/Jobs/myfolder/
myfile”. For users connecting to the AppleTalk Jobs Share, specify a server address such as “afp://
myNAS.mycompany.com/myNAS_Jobs/myfolder/myfile”. Click the + button to add the server
address to the Favorite Servers list.
Configuring networking on a Mac OS client

The Production Pro Print Server Installer configures file sharing on the Production Pro System Manager
to allow file access and transfer within the system. The Installer configures a Windows share name for
the Jobs share to which current versions of OS X can connect.
The Installer also configures an AppleTalk share name for each Jobs share to enable job submission
from older Macintosh client workstations. If the file server for Macintosh service is executing on the
Production Pro System Manager server, Macintosh client workstations can use this share name and
security permissions to access the share.
For job submittal, on each user's Macintosh system a Favorite Server can be added for the Jobs shares.
This makes it easy for users to connect to a Jobs share, and it ensures that the proper path gets used.
In Finder, choose Go > Connect to Server.... For users connecting to the Jobs Share using the Windows
share name, specify a server address such as “smb://myNAS.mycompany.com/Jobs/myfolder/myfile”.
For users connecting to the AppleTalk Jobs Share, specify a server address such as “afp://
myNAS.mycompany.com/myNAS_Jobs/myfolder/myfile”. Click the + button to add the server address
to the Favorite Servers list.
Where the Production Pro Print Server requests a UNC path from the user, the Mac user must type a
path in the form of “\\myNAS.mycompany.com\Jobs\myfolder\myfile”.
Configuring networking on a Mac OS client 27

Setting up RIPs — quick reference
NOTE: Before a RIP can be added in Production Pro Print Server, the RIP software must be installed
on the RIP hardware by running an installer. This software installation copies the necessary files to the
physical RIP server, and it also verifies that a valid license is available, that all required network paths
resolve properly, and that all necessary accounts and permissions are created.
The procedures for configuring RIPs in Production Pro Print Server are covered in these topics:
● Adding RIPs. See Creating and editing RIP engines on page 158
● Using RIP groups to manage RIP workflow. See Creating and editing RIP groups
on page 155
Setting up Ticket Templates — quick reference

Every Master Job submitted into the system acquires a Job Ticket. The Job Ticket assigns important
workflow information to the job.
The contents of the Job Ticket are derived from a Ticket Template stored in the system.
There is no limit to the number of Ticket Templates that can be defined. When a new input method is
created (for example, a new hot folder), a particular Ticket Template is assigned to it. Then, all Master
Jobs submitted using that hot folder will get their initial Job Ticket settings from the Ticket Template.

The Job Ticket (and Ticket Template) contains a large number of settings, including:
● RIP settings: color, separations, page properties, and imposition.
● Workflow (job control) settings.
● Settings that become associated with the press job created from the order (for example, substrate
information.)
See Managing Ticket Templates on page 174.
Setting up resources — quick reference

The procedures for setting up required job resources are described in these topics:
● Color profiles for the RIPs. See Managing ICC profiles on page 92.
● Imposition templates. See Built-in imposition templates on page 272.
● RIP fonts. See Managing RIP fonts on page 151.
● Substrates and their properties. See Overview of substrate workflow on page 97.
● Press SNAP fonts. See Managing SNAP fonts on a press controller on page 186.
● Press LUTs. See Using the press controller's LUT library on page 122.
Setting up one or more Production Pro Network Attached

Storage (NAS)
If you need more storage for processing jobs, you can add one or more Production Pro Network Attached
Storage (NAS) to the system.
If your system currently does not have any Pre-RIP Storage Servers attached, the HP installer handles
the addition of the first server almost transparently.
If your system already has one or more these servers, the HP installer adds a new server to the system
but does not move any hot folders to the new server. You will need to add hot folders with corresponding
Ticket Templates for the new device.
To add a Production Pro NAS:
1. Verify that an HP support technician has installed the hardware for expanding the system.
2. On first boot of the storage server, assign a host name to the device and (if DHCP is not being
used) manually assign it an IP address.
3. Start the Production Pro System Manager (if it is not already started) and a HP Remote Production
Client UI.
4. Define any user accounts and permissions needed for remote access of the Jobs share on the
Production Pro NAS.
5. Use the administration dialogs to create hot folders and associated Ticket Templates on the new
storage server. Then test that you can drop a job file from the Production Pro System Manager
server into the hot folder and that it processes successfully.
NOTE: Do not change a Production Pro NAS host name after it is installed. This procedure requires
special support from HP and may mean interrupting production.
Setting up resources — quick reference 29

4 HP Remote Production Client user
accounts
Introduction to HP Remote Production Client user

accounts
Your user account permits you to use the HP Remote Production Client to log into the Production Pro
System Manager.
When you log into your account:
● The HP Remote Production Client connects to the server.
● Your account preferences are activated — for example, your chosen locale and units of
measurement.
● The tasks you can perform depend on the user role you have been assigned. See Built in user
roles and permissions on page 31.
If your print shop has multiple Production Pro System Managers:
● Each HP Remote Production Client window can interact with one Production Pro System Manager
at a time.
● You can run more than one HP Remote Production Client window at a time with each one
connected to a different Production Pro System Manager.
● Your access to each Production Pro System Manager is a separate account. Your administrator
may provide you with the same user ID and password to each Production Pro System Manager
server. However, because these are different accounts, changing your preferences on one will not
affect your account on any others. In addition, you may be assigned different roles on different
Production Pro System Managers.
The user account contains:
● Active/inactive status. When a user account is inactive, the user cannot log in and use the account.
However, the account information is maintained so that the account can be easily reactivated.
● Profile information: the login name (user ID), email address, and password. Users can modify this
information.
● The user role. The role defines a set of permissions granted to the user.
The system provides four built-in roles; additional roles can be added. In the default set of roles, only
the administrator role provides permission to add new users and modify user permissions.
Changing your password

Your password is part of your account on the HP Remote Production Client.
30 Chapter 4 HP Remote Production Client user accounts

To change your password:
1. In the Admin menu, click My Account.

2. In the My Account dialog box, click Change password.
3. Type your old password.
4. Type your new password, and retype it in Confirm password.
5. Click OK. Your new password takes effect immediately.
If you forget your password, contact your system administrator to obtain a temporary one.
Editing your user preferences

Your user preferences set:
● The locale (language)
● The default units of measurement.
To change your user preferences:

1. In the Admin menu, click User Preferences.
2. Select a Locale and Default unit of measurement.
3. Click OK.
4. If you have changed locale, you must exit HP Remote Production Client and log in again to activate
the locale change.
Built in user roles and permissions

Production Pro Print Server provides four built-in user roles for remote users. The properties of these
roles can be modified by the system administrator. Additional roles can be added.
The following table describes the default permissions of the four built-in roles. For more detailed
information about roles, display the Manage Remote Roles dialog box. (In the Admin menu, click
Remote Accounts, then click Remote Roles.)
Role View permissions Task permissions Not permitted to perform

these tasks…
Press Operator All lists Order management Most administration tasks.
Edit Job Tickets Release locks
Manipulate press jobs on local Modify press jobs on remote

press. See note, below. presses. See note, below.
Export data
Pre-press Orders List, Held/Loaded Order management Manipulate press jobs

Jobs List, Log Viewer, Print
Queue Edit Job Tickets Release locks
Export press jobs
Composition preview
General administration
Editing your user preferences 31

Role View permissions Task permissions Not permitted to perform
these tasks…
Administrator All All —
Production Orders List, Held/Loaded Order management Manipulate press jobs

Jobs List, Log Viewer, Print
Queue Edit Job Tickets Administration
Export press jobs Release locks
Composition preview
For non-PrintLink presses, remote users cannot:

● Create and edit remote press jobs (job editor, job properties, imposition editor).
● Group remote press jobs.
NOTE: A “remote” press job is a press job located on a system other than the one running the
HP Remote Production Client. When the HP Remote Production Client is installed on a press, press
jobs on that press are local and can be modified.
System locks
Since the server lets multiple users interact with the server simultaneously, there is a mechanism to
prevent users from “colliding” with one another. This mechanism is called locking.
For example, the system must prevent two users from simultaneously editing the Job Ticket for the same
order. Thus, if user A is editing an order's Job Ticket, that Job Ticket is locked to prevent anyone else
from editing the ticket. If another user tries to open the Job Ticket, the system displays a dialog box
announcing that the Job Ticket is already in use and cannot be opened. The lock is removed when user
A closes the Job Ticket dialog box.
In addition to Job Tickets, locking is applied in most other instances where simultaneous editing could
put the system in an indeterminate state. For example, two users cannot edit the same input method or
Ticket Template at the same time; the System Settings dialog box can be edited by only one user at a
time.
System administrators have permission to release system locks (see Releasing a system lock
on page 167). In the unlikely event that the system administrator releases the lock on a dialog box you
currently have open, the system displays an error message informing you that you cannot save your
changes.
The View Options dialog box allows you to add columns to the Order List for lock status of orders.
32 Chapter 4 HP Remote Production Client user accounts

5 Submitting jobs
Overview of job submission

Submitting a Master Job to the system:
● Creates a Job Ticket using information from the Ticket Template.
● Enters the Master Job into the Master Jobs list.
● Initiates the Master Job's workflow. See Workflow of Master Jobs on page 47.
How Master Jobs get submitted

There are two basic ways to submit a job:
● Using the Import Job dialog box. See Using the Import Job dialog box on page 39.
● Using an input method.
What is an input method?

An input method is a pre-configured way to submit a Master Job.
There are three types of input methods:
● Hot folders
● Network printers
● Internet (ISV submission)
There can be multiple input methods of each type. For example, there may be many hot folders; each
is considered a separate input method.
Creating and managing input methods is done using the Manage Input Methods dialog box. See Manage
Input Methods dialog box on page 222.
What is a Ticket Template?

When an input method is created, it is assigned a Ticket Template. Any Master Jobs submitted using
that input method acquire the settings stored in the Ticket Template. This is done by copying the Ticket
Template settings into the new Job Ticket.
Overview of job submission 33

A Ticket Template contains information that specifies how Master Jobs will be processed during their
workflow. Once you have created a Ticket Template, you can use it for multiple input methods.
Production Pro Print Server supports an unlimited number of Ticket Templates. They are created and
managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box. See Manage Ticket Templates dialog box
on page 229.
An input method can have only one Ticket Template assigned to it.
Supported file types

The following types of files can be submitted to the Production Pro Print Server.
File type Details Processors Allowed input methods
Static Internet submission
PostScript 1/2/3 1, 2, 3 RIP ● hot folder
Network printer translates ● Import Job dialog box

source files and PDFs to
PostScript. ● network printer
PDF 1.2,1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 RIP ● hot folder
PDF/X-1a:2001, PDF/ ● Import Job dialog box

X-3:2002
● network printer
archived JLYT none ● hot folder
● Import Job dialog box
● Yours Truly Designer
JPEG RIP ● hot folder
● network printer
34 Chapter 5 Submitting jobs

File type Details Processors Allowed input methods
TIFF TIFF 6, TIFF/IP-PI RIP ● hot folder
● network printer
EPS RIP ● hot folder
● network printer
DCS DCS, DCS2 RIP ● hot folder
● network printer
XPS RIP ● hot folder
● network printer
Variable
variable JLYT Database and images can be RIP ● hot folder

embedded or in separate
asset files. ● Import Job dialog box
● Yours Truly Designer
PPML/T Database and images can be ● download (for variable ● hot folder
embedded or in separate data jobs)
asset files. ● Import Job dialog box
● RIP
● Internet
PPML Does not use database asset ● download ● hot folder

file; text data is embedded;
images can be in separate ● RIP ● Import Job dialog box
asset files.
● Internet
CSV Comma-separated database RIP ● hot folder

files for variable jobs.
● Import Job dialog box -
file size limit is 20 MB.
● Internet
TXT Tab-separated database files RIP ● hot folder

for variable jobs.
● Import Job dialog box -
● Internet
ZIP Archive file containing a ● download ● hot folder

PPML job file and the assets
required for the VDP job. ● ZIP ● Import Job dialog box -
● RIP
● Internet
Supported file types 35

Using Ticket Templates
A Ticket Template is a collection of information that specifies how a Master Job is processed during its
workflow.
A Master Job acquires the information through this process:
1. When a Master Job is submitted, it is assigned a Ticket Template.
● Hot folders, network printers, and Internet submissions: Each input method (for example, each
hot folder) is associated with a single Ticket Template.
● Import Job dialog box: the user chooses a Ticket Template from a list of available templates.
2. The settings in the assigned template are copied into the Master Job's newly-created Job Ticket.
Ticket Templates are created and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box. In the
Admin menu, click Ticket Templates to open this dialog box.
Input methods are created and managed using the Manage Input Methods dialog box. In the Admin
menu, click Input Methods to open this dialog box.
Ticket Templates and Job Tickets

Although they look similar, Ticket Templates and Job Tickets serve different purposes and need to be
managed separately.
● A Ticket Template is a collection of settings intended for repeated use. Creating and managing
Ticket Templates is an administrative task. When a Ticket Template is modified, the changes apply
to all jobs subsequently submitted using any input methods that use that Ticket Template.
● A Job Ticket is job-specific. When a Job Ticket is edited, the settings apply only to that job. Editing
Job Tickets is a typical user task, done when the original settings, acquired from the Ticket
Template, need to be modified.
There are additional differences:
● Custom Ticket Templates can be edited. (The built-in ones are read-only.) Since they do not apply
to specific jobs, their settings can be changed at any time. However, this should be done with
caution, since the changes will be propagated to all new Master Jobs using that template.
● The settings in a Job Ticket are “consumed” as the job proceeds through its workflow. You can see
this; portions of the Job Ticket get inactivated (grayed out) as the Master Job is processed.
● The Job Ticket includes the Job Log and the Order Form. The Order Form information is provided
on a per-Master Job basis.
Using hot folders

A hot folder is a folder used to submit Master Jobs to Production Pro Print Server.
NOTE: You must have access to the Production Pro Print Server Jobs Share in order to use hot folders.
The system monitors the contents of hot folders. When a file is placed in one, the system initiates the
processes necessary to obtain that file and create a Master Job.
When a Master Job is submitted via a hot folder, a Job Ticket is created and filled using the settings in
the Ticket Template assigned to that hot folder. All hot folders are associated with a Ticket Template.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you name job files using appropriate extensions. The
Production RIP Manager uses extensions to identify file types and assign files to RIP groups.

Hot folders can be used to submit:
● Static Master Jobs (jobs that have no variable information).
● Variable job files where the job file references images that must be provided as separate files.
● Variable job files in which the job file references a database file. The job file may also reference
image files.
Files can be placed in hot folders (and their sub-folders) using:
● Drag and drop.
● The operating system file copy command.
● The operation system file move command.
Location of hot folders

The hot folders created during installation are located in the Jobs Share.
If the system includes one or more Production Pro Network Attached Storage (NAS) for additional
storage, there will be an additional Jobs Share on each Production Pro NAS. Your system administrator
should set up your system to access the appropriate one.
Administrators can create hot folders in locations outside the Jobs Share, although this is not
recommended. If necessary, contact your administrator for additional information.
Sub-folders of hot folders

Each hot folder is closely associated with three additional folders that are used to submit variable data
jobs:
● images. The images folder is used to supply image assets needed by personalized jobs.
● db. The db (database) folder is used to supply the database files used by variable data jobs.
● template. The template folder is used to supply a variable job file when the job is initiated by
dropping a database file on the hot folder.
By default, these three folders are sub-folders of the hot folder. Their locations can be configured in the
New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box.
Success and error folders

When a hot folder is created, success and error folders may be assigned to it. These folders are used
to provide feedback on the progress of the Master Job:
● When the Master Job status is set to complete, a copy of the original file is placed in the success
folder.
● If the Master Job is canceled, a copy of the original job file is placed in the error folder.
There are several settings that define how success and error folders are used:
● The default location for the success and error folders is specified in the System Settings dialog
box.
● The New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box specifies success/error behavior for the particular hot folder:
◦ Whether or not success/error folders are used for that hot folder.
◦ Whether the hot folder uses the default success/error locations or a different location.
Using hot folders 37

Submitting static Master Jobs
To submit a static Master Job using a hot folder:
● Place the job file into the hot folder.
The Master Job is usually submitted within five seconds.
How copy counts are specified during hot folder job submission
● For non-PostScript static jobs, the copy count is derived from the Default copies field in the Ticket
Template assigned to that hot folder.
● For PostScript jobs, the copy count depends on the Use the quantity embedded in the job
PostScript file check box in the Ticket Template:
◦ If the box is checked, the quantity contained in the file is used.
◦ If the box is unchecked, the copy count is set to the quantity in the Default copies field in the
Ticket Template.
● For variable data jobs, the copy count may be embedded in the job file. If no copy count is present,
the copy count is set to 1.
● For previously archived JLYT files, the copy count is embedded in the file.
Submitting Master Jobs requiring variable data

See Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders on page 138.
Using the JDF hot folder

The Jobs Share includes a JDF hot folder. This hot folder can be used to submit JDF tickets.
JDF is an industry standard for electronic Job Ticketing. JDF Job Tickets must conform to HP's
Integrated Digital Printing Implementation Specification. Production Pro Print Server uses a special JDF
processor to accept JDF Job Tickets through this hot folder.

Jobs submitted using the JDF hot folder acquire their Job Ticket settings from two sources:
● Parameters included in the incoming JDF ticket are copied to the matching Production Pro Print
Server Job Ticket.
● Parameters that are not included in the incoming JDF ticket are supplied from a Ticket Template:
◦ If the JDF ticket includes a JobSpec assignment in the form:
<Comment Name=”JobSpec”>input_method_name</Comment>
then the Ticket Template associated with the specified input method is used.
◦ If the JDF ticket does not include this JobSpec assignment, then Ticket Template associated
with the input method templateStaticDoc is used. This input method is installed with the
system. It's default template assignment is 4colors_template.
Job Tickets that can not be processed are move to the error subfolder. Information about the failure may
be written to the job file logs\jmf.log in the Jobs Share.
There is no success folder. JMF queries and signals can be used to monitor the progress of the job
through the system.
Using the Import Job dialog box

The Import Job dialog box provides a way to submit new Master Jobs without using hot folders or other
pre-configured input methods. It provides the most opportunity to customize each Master Job as it is
submitted.
When importing a job, the user:
1. Browses for the job file(s).
2. Chooses a Ticket Template and modifies it to create the Master Job's Job Ticket. If you import
multiple job files at the same time, all will use the same Ticket Template.
3. Supplies basic Master Job information, like shipping and billing addresses.
The Import Job dialog box handles nearly all supported file types. JDF Job Tickets cannot be imported.
Like a hot folder, the Import Job dialog box tests incoming job files to determine if they are:
● Variable data jobs (PPML, PPML/T, variable JLYT).
● Archived press jobs that were exported from the press as JLYT files.
The import process is slightly different for these job types.
To submit new jobs through the Import Job dialog box:
1. If you are submitting a Master Job, place any image assets required by the job into a single folder
on the Jobs Share.
2. Open the Import Job dialog box:
a. In the Job menu, click Import, or
b.
Click the Import Job toolbar button.
3. Click Browse.
Using the Import Job dialog box 39

4. In the Open dialog box, browse to the folder containing the job and select it.
● Windows users: If the Jobs Share was added as a Network Place, use My Network Places
to navigate to the folder containing the job.
● When you've selected the file to import, click Open to place the file in the File name list.
5. For each file in the File name list:
a. Select the file.
b. Change the Master Job name, if desired, and the Quantity.
For archived job, the Quantity field is disabled and set to the number of copies specified in
the file. For other file types, the number specified in the Ticket Template is default. This number
can overwrite the value of the number of copies specified in the file.
c. Each file generates a separate Master Job, even if the Master Job names are the same.
6. Specify the Job Ticket settings for the Master Jobs:
a. Choose a Ticket Template.
b. If necessary, click Edit Job Ticket to make changes to the Job Ticket. The most common
change is specifying the Press Job Destination on the Job Control tab.
c. If multiple files are imported, the resulting Master Jobs will have identical Job Tickets.
7. Provide a Needed by date and choose a priority for the Master Jobs.
8. If you are importing variable data jobs, select Prompt to confirm the location(s) of variable data
assets to view or change the location of the assets that need to be imported with the job file. If you
are importing multiple variable data jobs, you will have an opportunity to view and modify the asset
location for each job separately. See Submitting variable data jobs using the Import dialog
on page 140
9. Click Import to create the new Master Jobs.
How copy counts are specified during job import

● For non-PostScript static jobs, the initial copy count is specified in the Master Job quantity field
in the Import Job dialog box.
● For PostScript jobs, the initial copy depends on Use the quantity embedded in the job PostScript
file check box in the Ticket Template:
◦ If the box is checked, the quantity contained in the file is used.
◦ If the box is unchecked, the copy count is set to the Quantity field in the Import Job dialog
box.
● For variable data jobs, the copy count may be embedded in the job file. If no copy count is present,
the copy count is set to 1.
● For previously archived JLYT files, the copy count is embedded in the file.
How Internet (ISV) jobs get submitted

An ISV is a third party, usually a customer, that can connect to Production Pro Print Server over the
Internet.

The ISV uses a compatible software application to create an incoming Job Ticket called an intent ticket,
which includes Master Job information and pointers to the image files needed to print the job. Production
Pro Print Server connects to the ISV to find new intent tickets and create production Master Jobs from
them.
The Internet job submission process
New master
job
1. Production Pro Print Server polls the account's RPP server(s) at specified intervals.
2. If intent tickets are waiting on the RPP server, Production Pro Print Server downloads the first ticket
in the queue or all tickets, depending on the RPP server settings in the ISV account.
3. Production Pro Print Server examines the intent ticket. If it is valid, a production Master Job is
submitted.
4. The Job Ticket for the new Master Job is filled with information from two sources:
● The intent ticket. When a field in the intent ticket matches a field in the Job Ticket, the
information is copied from the intent ticket to the Job Ticket.
● The Ticket Template. The intent ticket must include the name of an Internet input method.
The input method specifies the Ticket Template to use for the job. Values from the Ticket
Template are used when they are not included in the intent ticket.
5. The download processor connects to the image server specified in the intent ticket and downloads
the required files for the new Master Job.
6. The Master Job now proceeds to the next required processor (merge processor, RIP processor,
etc.).
Importing a press job

When a press job is exported, it is saved as a JLYT archive file. These files can be imported to create
new Master Jobs. Because these files are press-ready, they require no workflow processing.
The procedure for importing press jobs is the same as for importing other job files. The Import Job dialog
box detects press-ready job files during import.
Importing a press job 41

To import press jobs:
1. Open the Import Job dialog box:

b.
Click the Import toolbar button.
2. Click Browse.
3. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Jobs Share and select one or more previously archived JLYT
files to import.
4. For each previously archived job in the File name list:
a. Select the file.
b. Enter a Master Job name (defaults to file name).
c. Each file generates a separate production Master Job, even if the Master Job names are the
same.
5. Select a Ticket Template.
6. Click Edit Job Ticket to open the Job Ticket. Use the Job Control tab to specify the destination.
7. Return to the Import Job dialog box and provide a Needed by date and a Priority for the Master
Jobs.
8. Click Import.
A Master Job is created for each press job. Because they have already been processed, the jobs are
loaded directly onto the press.
Submitting and processing archive (zip) files

Archive (zip) files provide an efficient way to submit PPML jobs and their assets. Archive files can be
submitted using hot folders, the Import Job dialog box, and ISV accounts.
After the archive file is submitted, it is immediately extracted and decompressed by the ZIP processor.
The original zip file is maintained in the system until the Master Job is removed. If the Master Job is
resubmitted as new, the zip file is used.
The archive file must obey these rules:
● It can contain only one PPML job. (PPML/T is not supported.)
● The PPML file must be at the top level of the archive file's hierarchy.
● Its folder structure must match the relative path(s) specified within the PPML file.
● The PPML file must use the naming convention: *.ppml.
● The file names cannot include quotation marks nor the characters * / \ : < > ? |
● The first character of a file name cannot be a dot (.).
● All files in a particular folder must have unique file names. There is no case sensitivity; for example,
the names myfile.eps and MyFile.eps cannot be present in the same folder.
● File names must be 31 characters or less.

● The maximum length of the relative path for an asset must be 127 characters or less.

Additional guidelines:
● Each zip file submitted generates a single Master Job.
● When a zip file is submitted, the system assumes that all the required assets are contained within
the zip file.
◦ Hot folder submission: The system will not attempt to acquire assets from the images sub-
folder.
◦ Import Job dialog box: The Specify Asset Locations dialog box is not opened.
● For ISV submission, the incoming intent ticket can reference only one zip file.
If a Master Job is canceled while it is being processed by the zip processor, the cancellation is done
after the extraction is complete.
Throttled Master Job submission

Production Pro Print Server monitors both memory and disk space usage. When the disk space allocated
to Master Jobs gets too low, the system automatically puts a hold on submission of new Master Jobs.
When job submission is throttled:
● The color of the Job Manager icon for the Master Jobs list changes to orange.
● An annotation beside the Master Jobs list indicates the throttled state.
Usually, you will have to delete some existing Master Jobs to clear the throttled status. (Deleting a Master
Job removes it entirely from the system. Deleting a Master Job cannot be undone.)
Submitting Master Jobs using a network printer

A network printer input method allows a digital press to behave like a shared printer on the print shop
intranet. Users can submit jobs from their intranet computers (workstations) using their regular
application print functions.
● For example, a pre-press specialist can open a source file in a page layout program and adjust the
color balance.
● From the same program, the specialist can print the file to the network printer.
● Production Pro Print Server receives the file and creates a new Master Job.
Printing a file to a network printer does not actually send the file directly to the press. It submits a Master
Job, which is processed in the same way as other incoming Master Jobs.
A network printer cannot be used to submit variable data jobs.
Network printer files

The network printer input method accepts files from Windows and Macintosh applications. There is no
need to save files in a special format first. The print driver in the network printer converts them to
Postscript (.ps) format before they are submitted to Production Pro Print Server.
The network printer input method supports static jobs only.
Throttled Master Job submission 43

Spooling
Jobs sent to Production Pro Print Server using a network printer use the standard operating system
spooler. Production Pro Print Server does not provide the ability to change the spooler location.
Success and error folders cannot be set up for network printing to Production Pro Print Server.
Setting up and using a network printer

Each network printer input method is linked to a Ticket Template, just like a hot folder. To enable network
Master Job submission with different Ticket Templates, create a network printer for each Ticket
Template and add them to the workstations as separate printers or simply edit the existing network
printer to assign a different Ticket Template.
To set up Master Job submission via network printer:
1. If necessary, create a Ticket Template to be used by jobs submitted using networked printers.
If you want the Master Job quantity to equal the number of copies set in the application's printer
dialog box, check Use the Master Job quantity embedded in the job Postscript file on the
General tab of the Ticket Template dialog box. If the box is left unchecked, the Master Job quantity
will be set to the Default copies value in the Ticket Template dialog box.
2. Create a network printer method.
3. Add the network printer to each intranet workstation's printer list.
● To configure a printer for a PC, see Network printer configuration (PC) on page 44.
● To configure a printer for a Mac, see Network printer configuration (Macintosh)
on page 45.
To send a job to a press from an intranet workstation:

1. Open the job file on the workstation and edit, if desired.
2. Print the file from the editing application, selecting a network printer in the print options.
Network printer configuration (PC)

To set up a PC workstation to submit Master Jobs over the intranet using the Print command, add the
network printer input method(s) to the list of available printers on the workstation.
To add a network printer to a Windows PC

1. Make sure that you know the hostname of the Solution Controller.
2. On the PC workstation, follow the Windows help directions for adding a new printer.
a. Choose network printer.
b. Browse to the hostname and select the network printer.
c. Be careful not to use the network printer as the default.

Network printer configuration (Macintosh)
Setting up a Macintosh workstation to submit Master Jobs over an AppleTalk network includes two steps:
● Install the HP Integer Scalable RIP PPD (Postscript Printer Description) file.
● Create a desktop printer for each network printer input method.
An additional step is required on Mac OS 9.x before creating the desktop printer:
● Install the AdobePS print driver.
To install the PPD:
1. Locate the HP Integer Scalable RIP PPD file, which is installed with Production Pro Print Server in
the prodflow\tools\RIP\ppd folder.
2. Copy the PPD file to the appropriate folder on the Macintosh:
● Mac OS 9.x:
System Folder/Extensions/Printer Descriptions
● Mac OS X v10.x (Administrator):
System/Library/Printers/
● Mac OS X v10.x (other users):
Users/<user name>/Library/Printers/
To install the AdobePS printer driver (Mac OS 9.x only):
1. Download the AdobePS Installer file.

2. Copy the file to the Macintosh hard disk or insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click on the file name and follow the wizard instructions to install the driver.
To add a network printer:
1. Before you start, you will need to know the hostname of the Production Pro Print Server.
2. If your AppleTalk network uses zones, find the zone on the Production Pro Print Server.
a. In the Start menu, click Programs.
b. Click PC MACLAN, then Apple Talk Settings.
c. Use the Selected Zone name if required during printer creation.
3. For Mac OS 9.x, follow the Mac Help directions for selecting/creating a Postscript printer.
a. Select the hostname from the list of available printers.
b. Click Setup to select the HP Integer Scalable RIP PPD.
4. For Mac OS 10.x, follow the Mac Help directions for creating an AppleTalk printer.
a. Activate AppleTalk.
b. Select the hostname from the list of available printers.
c. Select HP for the printer model and then select HP Integer Scalable RIP.
Network printer configuration (Macintosh) 45

6 Managing Master Jobs
What is a Master Job?

In Production Pro Print Server, a Master Job is the primary representation of an item that needs to be
printed.
A Master Job is generated when:
● A job file is submitted via a hot folder or the Import Job dialog box.
● A file is “printed” to Production Pro Print Server using a network printer.
● An ISV (Internet) account polls a “registered” server and receives an intent ticket.
Once a Master Job is created, it remains in the system until it is deleted. The Master Jobs list is a
comprehensive list of all the Master Jobs in the system.
You can think of a Master Job as a container for all the elements required to process and print the item.
This includes:
● The job file (document) that was submitted.
● Any additional assets required, such as images or database files for variable data jobs.
● A Job Ticket. The Job Ticket is created when the Master Job is created. It contains information
needed to process the job.
● Workflow and processing instructions. Production Pro Print Server automatically assigns an
appropriate workflow to each Master Job. The workflow ensures that the submitted job file is
properly processed and sent to the press.
● Status and progress information. As the Master Job is processed, the system monitors where it is
in its workflow and whether or not it is proceeding properly. Each Master Job has a job log.
The relationship between a Master Job and its press job(s)

While Production Pro Print Server tracks Master Jobs throughout the workflow from submission to the
press, the press itself consumes press jobs.
46 Chapter 6 Managing Master Jobs

In the most common workflow, a press job is created when a Master Job's job file is RIPped. The press
job has its own set of properties that control how the job is printed.
Production Pro Print Server maintains a connection between the Master Job and its associated press
job(s).
● Certain changes to the status/state of the press job are reflected in the Master Job progress.
● Deleting a Master Job deletes its press jobs. Deleting a press job can delete the Master Job or
change its status.
● The Master Job Status panel provides a way to quickly navigate between the Master Job and the
press job in the user interface.
You can easily navigate between a Master Job and its associated press job(s):
● In the Master Jobs list, selecting a Master Job displays its press jobs below the Master Jobs list.
Click the press job name switches to a view of the press job at its location.
● In the press view, the pop-up menu for press jobs contains a command Go to Master Job.
Workflow of Master Jobs

When a job is submitted, it becomes a Master Job. This initiates a workflow that ultimately results in a
press job being created and printed.
These are the workflow steps:
1. A job file is submitted via a hot folder, network printer, or ISV account (Internet), or by using the
Import Job dialog box. It becomes associated with a Ticket Template.
● Each hot folder, network printer, and Internet submission method has a Ticket Template
assigned to it.
● The Import Job dialog box requires the user to select a Ticket Template.
● The Ticket Template contains processing and printing information, such as color settings,
imposition instructions, and workflow instructions.
● The Ticket Template also specifies the destination of the press job — a press, press group,
press controller, or Folder Device.
2. A Master Job is created and placed in the Master Jobs list. The content of the Ticket Template is
copied into the Master Job's Job Ticket. The Job Ticket accompanies the Master Job through its
workflow.
3. Depending on the type of job, the Master Job may go through a series of processors that prepare
it for the RIP.
4. The Master Job flows to the RIP processor, which handles sending jobs to the Production RIP
Manager.
5. The Production RIP Manager assigns the job to an appropriate RIP group and queues the job to
RIP.
6. The output from the RIP engine streams to the destination specified in the Job Ticket. Printing-
related information in the Job Ticket is transferred to the press job's job properties.
If the destination is a PrintLink press, the actual press job file is loaded onto the press controller
for that press.
Workflow of Master Jobs 47

7. When a press job has been printed, it can be manually set to printing done on some presses.
There is also a system setting automatically report back to the Master Job that the press job has
printed full run.
8. The press job's printing done state is communicated to the Master Job, which is allowed to
proceed to the next step in its workflow, usually complete.
9. When the Master Job information is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the Master Jobs list.
The system can be set up to automatically delete completed Master Jobs.
Job names and IDs

Every job in the system is identified by:
● A Master Job name. Duplicate Master Job names are allowed.
● An internal ID. This is a unique identifier provided by the system. It cannot be modified.
How Master Jobs are named

The default Master Job name depends on how the Master Job was submitted. The maximum length of
the job name is 210 characters.
Submission method Default Master Job name
hot folder File name without the extension.
Import dialog box File name. The Master Job name can be changed in the Import
dialog box.
networked printer File name without the extension.
Internet Defined in the intent ticket. See How Internet (ISV) jobs get
submitted on page 40.
Certain file types name Master Jobs differently:

● .csv or .txt database files use the database filename.
● .jlyt files use the job name in the jlyt template.
● PPML files have two string values used to create a job name, PPML label and JOB label:
◦ If the PPML label does not exist, the Master Job name is the file name.
◦ If both labels exist, the Master Job name is a string containing the PPML label plus the JOB
label.
◦ If only the PPML label exists, the Master Job name is the PPML label.
Renaming Master Jobs

Once a Master Job is submitted, its name can be modified in the Job Ticket. The Import Job dialog box
lets you type a name of your choice.

To rename a Master Job:
1. Open the Job Ticket for the Master Job. The Job Ticket opens to the General tab.
2. Enter a new Master Job name.
3. Click OK.
ISV Master Jobs

In addition to a Master Job name and ID, ISV jobs may be identified by a Customer job name and an
External job ID. These are defined in the Master Job's intent ticket, and copied into the General tab of
the Job Ticket. They cannot be modified.
Master Job status

A Master Job's status indicates whether or not it requires attention before it can continue processing. It
provides information about the condition of the Master Job. Master Job status states are: normal, needs
attention, held, awaiting review, canceling, canceled, and complete.
Master Job status is indicated by the Master Job icon. See Master Job status icons on page 268 for
descriptions of the Master Job status icons.
Master Job priority

The priority setting provides user control over how a particular Master Job is handled during the
automated workflow. There are four priority settings for Master Jobs: rush, high, medium, and low. Rush
is the highest priority.
Initial priority
Every Master Job has a priority. This information is displayed on its Job Ticket and is carried through to
the press. When a Master Job is submitted, it is assigned an initial priority based on its input method.
Job input method How the priority is set
hot folder The Ticket Template assigned to the hot folder.
import dialog box Set explicitly in the Import Job dialog box.
networked printer The Ticket Template assigned to the networked printer.
Internet The Ticket Template assigned to the ISV input method.
How priority affects Master Jobs

Master Jobs with higher priority are processed before Master Jobs with lower priority. When Master
Jobs have the same priority, those submitted earlier are processed first. This behavior applies to all the
processor queues, including the RIP.
A Master Job that is already processing is not interrupted, even if a higher priority job enters the system.
The Production Queue lists Master Jobs in overall processing order.
Master Job status 49

Changing the Master Job priority
Master Job priority can be changed:
● In the Ticket Template, where it provides an initial value for all the Master Jobs that use that
template.
● In the Job Ticket, where it is applied to that job only.
To change the priority of a Master Job:

1. Open the Job Ticket for the Master Job.
2. On the General tab, select a new job priority.
3. Click OK.
To change priority in a Ticket Template:

1. In the Admin menu, click Ticket Templates.
2. Select the Ticket Template to be changed.
3. Click Edit to open the Ticket Template dialog box.
4. On the General tab, select a new priority.
5. Click OK.
To change the priority of a press job, see Moving (re-ordering) jobs in the Print Queue on page 104.
Managing inactive jobs

Inactive jobs are jobs that have been are canceled or completed.
The system can be set up to automatically delete canceled and completed Master Jobs. See Deleting
jobs automatically on page 59.
If the system is not set up for automatic deletion, the easiest way to manage inactive jobs is using the
Inactive Jobs view (by clicking Inactive Jobs in the Job Manager panel.)
Monitoring job progress

The Master Job progress state provides information about where a Master Job is in its workflow. The
Progress column of the Master Jobs list gives the Master Job's progress state. You may need to
customize your column view to see this column. See Customizing the main window on page 21.
See Master Job progress states on page 268 for detailed descriptions of the progress states.
Workflow for enhanced jobs

Enhanced features specified in the Job Ticket can only be implemented on the enhanced presses.
If an installation includes both enhanced and non-enhanced presses, care must be taken to direct jobs
requiring enhanced features to a press that can implement them.
Production Pro Print Server includes features that help ensure that jobs will be printed properly.

Action Behavior
Attempt to save a Ticket Template that uses print Error displayed. Ticket Template cannot be saved.
enhancements but specifies a non-enhanced press.
Automated workflow attempts to send an enhanced job from a Send is stopped and press job is sent to Post-RIP storage.
RIP to a non-enhanced press
User attempts to move or copy an enhanced press job to a non- Warning displayed.
enhanced press.
User attempts to import (using the Import dialog) an enhanced Error displayed. The press will not be able to load the job.
press job to a non-enhanced press.
List of Enhancement Features

● Multiple Resolution Workflow: RIPs and delivers jobs in multiple resolutions. Jobs and elements in
jobs can be sent at resolutions of: 1200 dpi, 800 dpi, 600 dpi, 400 dpi, and 200 dpi.
● Linework Smoothing (RET): Smooths solid line - works at 200 dpi, 400 dpi, and 600 dpi resolutions.
● Line Thinning: Compensates solid Line-work line width for dot gain changes. Prints Microprints and
fine White text on Black background.
● Adaptive halftoning: Specifies job with halftoning on or off or default.
● Large media: s13x19 paper size support.
● ICF96 and ICF05 format: New ICF library supports both format based on product configuration.
Holding and resuming Master Jobs

Normally, Master Jobs move automatically from submission through processing to the specified post-
RIP destination. Putting a Master Job on hold prevents it from moving to the next step in processing.
You may want to put a Master Job on hold so you can edit its Job Ticket before RIPping or manually
control the workflow.
In the Master Jobs list, the status icon identifies held Master Jobs.
When can Master Jobs be held?

A Master Job can be put on hold:
● When it is submitted.
● When it is in a processor queue waiting to be processed. Note: Depending on the number of jobs
in the queue, this could be a very short period of time.
● After processing. This hold state is called Awaiting review or Hold for review. See Dealing with
Master Jobs held for review on page 53.
A job cannot be put on hold when:
● It is currently being processed.
● It is in an error state.
● It is completed, canceled, or deleted.
List of Enhancement Features 51

Master Jobs can be placed on hold manually, or processors can be set to hold Master Jobs
automatically.
To manually put a Master Job on hold:
● Right-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and select Hold from the pop-up menu.
●
Select the Master Job and click the Job Hold toolbar button.
The Systems Settings dialog box provides a way to put all new Master Jobs on hold automatically.
To configure a processor to hold Master Jobs automatically before or after processing:
1. From the Admin menu, click Processors. The Administer Processors dialog box opens.
2. Select the processor to be configured from the table.
3. Check the box Hold before or Hold for review.
To resume a held Master Job:
● Right-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Release.
●
Select the Master Job and click the Release toolbar button.
To resume a Master Job held for review:
● See Dealing with Master Jobs held for review on page 53.
Putting new Master Jobs on hold

You can configure the system to place all newly-submitted Master Jobs on hold. This may be desirable
if you frequently need to modify Job Tickets after Master Jobs are submitted.
To configure the system to hold new Master Jobs:

1. In the Admin menu, click System Settings
2. Check the box Place all newly-submitted Master Jobs on hold
3. Click OK
Finding the press jobs for a Master Job

To locate the press jobs associated with a Master Job:
1. Select the Master Job in the Master Jobs list.
The press jobs associated with the Master Job are displayed in the Press jobs for Master Job list
below the Master Jobs list. This does not include any press jobs in the Retained Jobs list.
2. Click the press job name.
The view switches to the press with the press job selected in the Loaded Jobs list or Print Queue.

Dealing with Master Jobs held for review
Processors can be configured to automatically put Master Jobs on hold when they finish processing at
that processor. This provides a way to:
● Manually control the workflow of a Master Job. A Master Job held for review must be manually
approved before it can continue through its workflow.
● Closely monitor Master Jobs to see if they require reprocessing. For example, the user has an
opportunity to check the Job Log or Production System Log before proceeding.
Master Jobs held for review have the status icon . Master Jobs held for review are handled by:
● Approval. This allows the Master Job to proceed to the next step in its workflow.
● Failing approval. The Master Job status is changed to Needs attention.
Approving or failing the Master Job

Note for remote users: Your user permissions determine whether or not you can perform these tasks.
To approve the Master Job:

2. In the Actions menu, click Approve and release.
The Master Job will proceed through its workflow.
To fail approval:
2. In the Actions menu, click Fail Approval.
The Master Job status will change to Needs attention . The Master Job can now be:
● Reprocessed. This sends the Master Job back through the current processor. See Reprocessing
a job on page 54.
● Resubmitted. This starts the Master Job's workflow from the beginning. See Resubmitting a job
on page 54.
● Canceled. The Master Job is placed in Canceled status . See Canceling jobs on page 55.
Dealing with Master Jobs held for review 53

Reprocessing a job
Reprocessing a Master Job sends the job file back through the most recent processor.
In Master Job to be reprocessed, a Master Job must have the status Needs attention .
To reprocess a Master Job:

1. If the Master Job status is Awaiting review , fail the approval (in the Actions menu, click Fail
Approval). This sets the status to Needs attention .
2. If the problem is due to an incorrect setting in the Job Ticket, open the Job Ticket dialog box and
make necessary changes.
3.
Click the Reprocess toolbar icon or click Reprocess in the Actions menu. The Needs
attention state is cleared, and the Master Job is sent back through the processor.
Locking jobs
Locking Master Jobs is necessary in a multiuser system. It prevents “collisions” caused by two users
trying to modify a Master Job at the same time.
When a user opens a Master Job's Job Ticket, that Master Job becomes locked. While the Master Job
is locked:
● The Job Ticket cannot be edited by other users. (Administrators have permission to release locks.)
● The Master Job will not proceed to the next step in its workflow.
Locking is an automatic system function. Users cannot manually control Master Job locking.
Resubmitting a job
Resubmitting a Master Job:
● Creates a new Master Job using the original job file.
● Creates a Job Ticket for the new Master Job by copying the initial Job Ticket of the original Master
Job. (The copied ticket does not reflect changes made to the original Master Job's Job Ticket after
it was submitted.)
A Master Job cannot be resubmitted if it is complete or canceled.

Note for remote users: Your user permissions determine whether or not you can perform this task.
To resubmit a Master Job:
1. Select the Master Job.

2. In the Actions menu, click Resubmit as new.
a. The New Job Ticket dialog box opens. Settings from the original Master Job's initial Job Ticket
have been copied into the new ticket.
b. Optional: you can edit the Master Job name.
c. Make any other necessary changes and click OK.
NOTE: You should not change the specified Press Job Destination on the Job Control tab.
Doing so may cause the Master Job to be improperly processed and put into a Needs Attention
state.
Canceling jobs
Canceling a Master Job permanently halts its workflow. A canceled Master Job cannot be reactivated.
Canceling a Master Job is a useful operation when you want to stop a job immediately and permanently,
perhaps due to a known error. A Master Job can be canceled at any time in the workflow before
completion, whether it is in a ready or a progress state.
A Master Job that is in progress must be canceled before it can be deleted. See Deleting jobs manually
on page 59.
When a Master Job is canceled:
● The Master Job status is set to canceled.
● Depending on the workflow setting in the System Settings dialog box, the Master Job may remain
in the Master Jobs list, or it may automatically be deleted.
● Press jobs associated with the Master Job are deleted, unless the press job is currently being
printed.
The only actions you can perform on a canceled Master Job are:
● Delete the Master Job. See Deleting jobs manually on page 59.
● View its Job Ticket.
Canceling jobs 55

To cancel a Master Job:
● Right-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Cancel from the pop-up menu, or
● Select the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Cancel in the Actions menu.
The Master Job status changes to Canceling and then Canceled, with the status icon . Any
associated press jobs are deleted.
Automatic Master Job Cancellation

The system can be configured to automatically set Master Job status to Canceled when the Master
Job's press job is deleted. If there are multiple press jobs, the Canceled status is set when the all the
press jobs have been deleted.
To configure automatic Master Job cancellation:

1. Open the System Settings dialog box by clicking System Settings in the Admin menu.
2. Under System “Delete Press Job” Behavior, select Cancel the Master Job.
3. Click OK.
Throttling processors
Production Pro Print Server monitors system status and adjusts the flow of Master Jobs through the
system when necessary by placing one or more components into the “throttle” state.
The major components that can be throttled are:
● The general system processor that controls Master Job submission. The most common reason for
throttling this processor is low free disk space allocated for Master Jobs. Old Master Jobs must be
deleted before new ones can be submitted.
When Master Job submission is throttled, the Master Jobs list icon changes to an orange color and
a “throttled” message is displayed in the System Explorer.
● One or more non-PrintLink presses. The most common reasons for press throttling are:
◦ Press memory is full. There is insufficient memory to load additional press jobs.
◦ The maximum number of jobs allowed on the press has been reached.
When a press is throttled:
◦ Its icon changes to an orange color and a “throttled” message is displayed in the System
Explorer.
◦ The press can continue operating. However, additional press jobs cannot be loaded.
Using OPI for high resolution images

OPI (Open Prepress Interface) is a technology that allows the low-resolution images embedded in input
files to be replaced with high-resolution files. The objective is to render better quality images and to
reduce file size. Until they are needed, the high-resolution images are stored on a file server so that the
original input files can be smaller.

The OPI option can be specified:
● Per job, using the Job Ticket's Job Control tab.
● In the Ticket Template. All Master Jobs using that template will use OPI.
To use OPI, you activate the use of OPI and specify:
● The search path for the high resolution images.
● The behavior of the system if it can't find the high resolution files. The job can be canceled or not.
● Whether to require an exact file name match. By default, file substitution proceeds when files names
are a “fuzzy” match. (Usually, this means that the file names have the same root name but different
extensions.)
Configuring OPI
Before the OPI feature can be used, the system administrator must ensure that the RIP servers have
read access to the files on an OPI server.
An easy way to do this is to give Everyone Read access to the OPI server share. The system
administrator establishes these permissions on the share: Sharing: Everyone - Read; Security:
Everyone - Read & Execute, List Contents, Read.
If the OPI data is sensitive, the system administrator may elect to follow a procedure similar to one of
the procedures for configuring Folder Devices in order to more specifically control which accounts have
read access to the OPI share.
Activating OPI
To activate the use of OPI and its options:
1. Open the Job Ticket for the Master Job and click the Job Control tab.
2. Under the heading OPI (Open Prepress Interface), check Use OPI for jobs.
3. Specify OPI behavior:
● Abort job when replacement file(s) not found. Check this box to enable this behavior. If
the box isn't checked, the job will RIP without the replacement files.
● Require an exact file name match. Check this box to require the filenames of the high-
resolution (high-res) assets to exactly match the names specified in the OPI comments of the
job. If the box is not checked and a high-res file with an exact file name match can't be located,
OPI is allowed to substitute a file that has a different extension but the same root name. For
example, myImage.eps or myImage.tif may be substituted for myImage.jpg. The root name
is case sensitive.
OPI search paths

When multiple paths are defined, the OPI subsystem will search each path until a file matching the
requested resource is found.
To specify the search path for the high-resolution files:

1. Open the Job Ticket for the Master Job and click the Job Control tab.
2. Select the OPI option. Click Options. Click Add.
Using OPI for high resolution images 57

3. In the browse window, use My Network Places to locate the folder you want to add to the search
path, and click OK. Make sure the Folder path is shown in UNC syntax.
4. Click OK.
5. Repeat this process for each folder you want to add to the search path.
To delete a search path:

Select it and click Delete.
How jobs are set to complete

Completing a Master Job means that its progress is set to complete at the end of its workflow.
The system settings determine whether a Master Job's status is set to complete automatically or
requires manual intervention:
Automatically completing Master Jobs

Setting a Master Job to complete when its press job is set to printing done
Production Pro Print Server can be configured to automatically set Master Job progress to complete
when the user manually sets a press job to printing done. The ability to set a job to printing done is
available on non-PrintLink presses running the Production Pro Print Server.
In order for this to happen:
● The print processor must be the last processor in the workflow. (This is the case unless a custom
processor has been added after the print processor.)
● In the System Settings dialog box, the workflow setting set the Master Job to complete must be
selected.
Setting a Master Job to complete when a press job is deleted

Production Pro Print Server can be configured to automatically set a Master Job to complete when a
Master Job's press job is deleted. If there are multiple press jobs for the Master Job, this behavior applies
to deletion of the last remaining press job.
In order for this to happen:
● The print processor must be the last processor in the workflow. (This is the case unless a custom
processor has been added after the print processor.)
● Set following options in the System Settings dialog box:
1. Under System “Delete Press Job” Behavior, select:
● Move the Master Job to the next step in the workflow, or
● Ask - allow the user to choose
2. Under Workflow Settings, select Set the Master Job to “complete”
Manually completing Master Jobs

Production Pro Print Server can be configured to require manual intervention before a Master Job is set
to complete.

If the print processor is the last processor in the workflow (the default configuration), use these settings
in the System Settings dialog box:
1. Under System “Delete Press Job” Behavior, select:
● Move the Master Job to the next step in the workflow, or
● Ask - allow the user to choose
2. Under Workflow Settings, select Set the Master Job to “awaiting review.”
3. If a custom processor has been added: In the Manage Processors dialog box, set the processor's
Hold Behavior to Hold for review.
To manually complete a Master Job:
1. Select a Master Job in the Master Jobs list that has:

● Finished its last processing step (typically the press), and
● Has status held awaiting review.
2. Do one of the following:
● Right-click and select Approve and release from the pop-up menu.
● In the Actions menu, click Approve and release.
Deleting jobs manually

Deleting a Master Job removes it entirely from the system. Deleting a Master Job cannot be undone.
When a Master Job is deleted:
● The Master Job is removed from the Master Jobs list.
● Any press jobs associated with the Master Job are deleted. (If a press job is currently being printed,
it will not be deleted.)
● All the assets associated with the Master Job are removed, including files and the Job Ticket.
● Any log entries related to the Master Job are erased.
To delete a Master Job:

Right-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Delete from the pop-up menu, or select
the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Delete in the Job menu.
There may be cases where the system cannot delete the associated press jobs (for example, because
a press controller is offline or if there is a network disruption). The delete Master Job confirmation dialog
box provides an option for canceling Master Job deletion if the press job(s) cannot be deleted.
Deleting jobs automatically

You can set up the system to automatically delete Master Jobs that are complete or canceled. To
automatically delete a complete Master Job, all its press jobs must already have been deleted.
Deleting jobs manually 59

To automatically delete complete and canceled Master Jobs:
1. In the Admin menu, click System Settings to open the System Settings dialog box.
2. Under Workflow Settings:
a. Select Set the Master Job to complete as the action taken when a Master Job completes
its last processing step. Unless you've added a custom finishing processor, printing is the last
processing step.
b. Check Automatically delete Master Jobs when (1) they are canceled, or (2) they are
complete.
NOTE: If the system has been set up to return Master Job status information to customers submitting
ISV jobs, this setting may cause an incorrect canceled status to be returned to the customer.

7 The Job Ticket
Overview of Job Tickets

Each Master Job in the system has a Job Ticket. The Job Ticket describes:
● The destination for the press job created by the RIP — a press, press controller, press group, or
folder device.
● General information about the Master Job, such as due date and quantity.
● Information needed by the RIP, such as color settings and page size.
● Imposition settings
● Information that will be passed on to the press properties, such as the substrate.
● Additional ordering information.
● A job log that records the processing that has been done on the Master Job.
To display the Job Ticket for a Master Job, see Opening a Job Ticket on page 62.
If the Master Job is locked, the Job Ticket can be displayed but not edited.
Ticket Templates
An input method is a way of getting a Master Job into the system, such as a particular hot folder or
network printer. Each input method is associated with a Ticket Template. You can think of a Ticket
Template as a set of defaults on how the Master Job will be processed.
How Ticket Templates are used

When a Master Job is submitted:
1. A Job Ticket is created for the Master Job.
2. A Ticket Template is copied into the new Job Ticket.
● If the job is submitted via a previously configured job input method (hot folder, network printer,
Port 6000, or Internet), the input method has an assigned Ticket Template.
● If the job is submitted using the import dialog box, the user selects the template from a list of
existing templates.
3. The information in the Job Ticket can now be edited on a per-job basis.
Ticket Template information copied to the Job Ticket

The Ticket Template and Job Ticket dialog boxes have seven tabs in common. Information on these
tabs is copied from the Ticket Template into the Job Ticket.
Tab Description
General Default general settings, such as Master Job quantity and job
priority.
Overview of Job Tickets 61

Tab Description
Imposition Settings for imposition used with the RIP and Press.
Color Management Color profiles and intents used for the RIP.
Separations Color separations and separation properties used by the RIP.
Page Page size and resolution used for the RIP. Substrate size for
information only.
Job Control Workflow settings and general printing properties, propagated

to the press job properties.
Substrate Intended substrate is used by the press to select substrates

when printing.
In addition, the Job Ticket has an Order Form tab and a Job Log tab. These tabs are for information
only, and are not used by the RIP.
Managing Ticket Templates

Ticket Templates are created and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box. Open this
dialog box by selecting Ticket Templates from the Admin menu. If you use specific settings repeatedly,
it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template and input method to automatically apply these settings
to new Master Jobs.
Opening a Job Ticket

If the Master Job is locked for single user editing, the Job Ticket can be displayed but not edited.
Use any of the following actions to open the Job Ticket dialog box for a Master Job:
● Double-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list.
● Right-click the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and select Job Ticket from the pop-up menu
●
Select the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click the Job Ticket toolbar button
● Select the Master Job in the Master Jobs list and click Job Ticket from the Job menu.
Modifying a Job Ticket

When a Job Ticket is initially created, most of its settings can be modified. As a Master Job is processed,
however, various settings become inactive after they are “consumed” by the processors. For example,
once the job file for a Master Job is RIPped, settings in the Job Ticket that specify RIP parameters (page,
separations, imposition, and color management ) are grayed out.
To ensure that you can change Job Tickets before they RIP, you can hold new Master Jobs as they
enter the system.
Some settings in the Job Ticket can't be modified at all. For example, the system-generated job
identification number in the General tab can't be changed.
If the Master Job is locked, the Job Ticket can be displayed but not edited.
62 Chapter 7 The Job Ticket

To modify the Job Ticket for a Master Job:
1. Open the Job Ticket dialog box.

2. Click the tab for the settings you want to modify.
3. Make your changes.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
Setting the press job destination

The Job Ticket contains routing information for the press job generated by the RIPs.
To specify the destination of the press job after RIP:

1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Job Control tab.
2. Choose one of the following options:
● Press. Select from the list of registered presses. See Selecting a destination press
on page 79.
● Press group. Select from the list of previously created press groups. See Using press groups
on page 82.
● Press controller. Select from a list of registered press controllers. Sending a job to a press
controller provides a way to delay the press assignment until later in the workflow. See Using
press controllers as the destination on page 83.
● Folder Device. This option saves the press job into a file that can later be imported. The
folders in the list are locations previously configured in the Manage Print Destinations dialog
box. See Using Folder devices on page 82.
3. Select whether the press job will be placed in the Loaded Jobs List or Print Queue.
This setting will be stored within the press job and later applied when the job is sent to another
press or exported and re-imported.
Specifying the substrate(s) in the Job Ticket

You can use the Substrate tab in the Job Ticket to specify the substrate(s) to be used for the job. When
the press job is created, the substrate information in the Job Ticket gets copied to the job properties for
the press job.
To specify a single substrate for the entire job:
1. From the Substrate tab in the Job Ticket, select a Default job substrate from the drop-down list.
2. Make sure the table in the Additional Substrate area is empty.
Setting the press job destination 63

To specify multiple substrates for a job:
1. From the Substrate tab in the Job Ticket, select a Default job substrate from the list. This substrate
will be used for all sheets except those specified in Additional Substrates.
2. For each additional substrate:
a. Select a substrate from the Substrate list.
b. In the Sheets box, specify the sheets to which the substrate should apply. Use commas to
separate page numbers, and hyphens to indicate page ranges; for example, 1,4–6,12 applies
the selected substrate to pages 1, 4, 5, 6, and 12.
c. Click Add.
To specify whether to use the substrate specified in the Job Ticket:

Check the For personalized JLYT, use the substrate specified in the job check box.
Selecting substrates
For more information on selecting substrates, see:
● Overview of substrate workflow on page 97
● Setting the substrate prior to RIP on page 98
● Using the Substrate Catalog on page 99
Substrate settings in Ticket Templates

If you use specific substrate settings repeatedly, you can create a Ticket Template and input method to
automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs.
Specifying RIP color management in the Job Ticket

The Color Management tab of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template lets you select a job's ICC profiles
and rendering intents, and other color management options.
ICC profiles
An ICC profile is a cross-platform file definition based on the specifications of the International Color
Consortium. It describes transforms between a device's color space and the CIELab (or XYZ) color
space, an internationally recognized device-independent color model.
Colors display differently on different devices. ICC profiles are used to transform from one device's color
space into CIELab and then into another device's color space. The object is to print color as true as
possible to the specified color and intent.
● An input profile is used to convert from the color space described in a print document into CIELab
(or directly into the press CMYK color space for device link profiles).
● An output profile describes the print device and is used to convert from CIELab into the printer's
CMYK color space.
● An emulation profile describes an alternate output device which the press is to emulate.

To use a preloaded ICC profile for a Master Job:
1. In the Color Management tab of the Job Ticket, in the Default ICC Profiles area, select the desired
profile(s) from the drop-down lists. See Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab
on page 235 if necessary.
2. Next to the profile type, select the desired profile from the list of available profiles. See Job Ticket /
Ticket Template - Color Management tab on page 235 if necessary.
3. If the desired profile isn't available, add it as described below.
To add ICC profiles:
From the Color Management tab in the Job Ticket, click the ICC Profile Manager button to open
a dialog box for adding profiles. See Managing ICC profiles on page 92.
Rendering intents
An output ICC profile often contains more than one transform in the printer's color space. The transform
to use is chosen based on the desired rendering intent. The ICC defines rendering intents as:
● Perceptual - best for good reproduction of images and RGB inputs
● Saturation - useful for colorful business graphics where color accuracy is not as important as
saturation
● Relative Colorimetric - best for proofing or accurate color reproduction of CMYK colors
● Absolute Colorimetric - similar to Relative Colorimetric, except that color can be added to white
areas to simulate the media color defined in the input profile
The system lets you set rendering intents for the whole Master Job, and if desired, separate rendering
intents for the Master Job's CMYK images or RGB images.
To specify the rendering intent for the whole Master Job:

1. From the Color Management tab in the Job Ticket, in the Intents area, select a Rendering
intent from the drop-down list.
2. Select the desired rendering intent.
Leave the check boxes blank for CMYK image rendering intent and RGB image rendering intent.
To specify separate rendering intents for a Master Job's CMYK or RGB images or both:
1. If desired, select a Rendering intent for the whole Master Job, as described above.
2. From the Color Management tab in the Job Ticket, in the Intents area, check the box next to the
kind of intent you want to specify separately, either CMYK rendering intent or RGB image
rendering intent or both. Checking the boxes activates their respective lists.
3. Select the desired rendering intent(s) from the list(s).
To use black point compensation:

From the Color Management tab in the Job Ticket, click the Use Black Point Compensation check
box in the Intents area. For more information, see Black point compensation on page 95.
Specifying RIP color management in the Job Ticket 65

Miscellaneous color management options
To specify the method of PANTONE® emulation:
See Pantone® emulation on page 92.
To specify 100% black:

Check the box Preserve 100% process black to use 100% black ink only rather than blacks
created with cyan, magenta, and yellow inks. This will avoid visual artifacts if the press has any
misregistration of the ink planes. The “black only” substitution only applies to pure black (e.g.
RGB=0,0,0) text and graphics objects which are not being color managed (e.g. deviceRGB color
space).
To override color management:

Uncheck the box Use embedded profiles to disregard any CIE based CMYK, RGB, or Gray color
spaces included in the job file, and use the color conversion specified in the input profiles section
of the Job Ticket instead.
To specify a color management type:

1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Color Management tab.
2. From the Color management type list:
● Choose Better to provide the most accurate color conversions.
● Choose Faster to improve the speed of the color conversions. Don't use this option for
documents with large solid fills of colors that need color management.
Color management settings in Ticket Templates

If you use specific color management settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template
and input method to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are
created and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
Specifying RIP color separations in the Job Ticket

Set options for RIP color separations in the Separations tab of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template.
These options control pre-separated jobs, Indigo transparencies, overprinting, screen frequency,
separation mode, and LUTs.
Pre-separated jobs
Selecting the check box Pre-separated jobs allows pre-separated jobs to be RIPped and the
separations recombined on each page as expected. If the box is not selected, pre-separated jobs
produce a page of output for each separation.
● PDF jobs require that DSC (Document Structuring Convention) comments be included in the
original job file Master Job for separations to be prepared correctly for print.
● Although composite jobs normally work when this option is selected, it may cause problems with
PDF 1.4 transparency and pattern color spaces.
● Pre-separated PDFs will not be partitioned among RIPs. See The Production RIP Manager
on page 147.

To allow pre-separated jobs to recombine:
1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Separations tab.

2. Check the box Pre-separated jobs.
For best system behavior, leave the box clear for non-separated jobs.
For DCS files, you must specify the separations. If a DCS file includes data for a separation that is not
available in the Job Ticket, the separation is ignored.
Indigo transparency
Checking the box Indigo transparency makes the unpainted pixels of the rasterized pages transparent
so they can be overlaid on one another. Leaving the box unchecked causes unpainted pixels to be
rendered as white. This box should normally be left unchecked unless you intend to overlay different
pages on top of each other using the Job Editor, and you want unpainted areas to be treated as
transparent. This check box does not affect transparency of objects within a PDF or Postscript file; only
the transparency of the resulting rasterized pages themselves.
To enable Indigo transparency in a job:

2. Check the box Indigo transparency.
Overprint options
Overprint is a property of an object that can be set to true or false within Postscript and PDF documents.
The overprint properties of the document will always be honored between spot colors and between spot
and CMYK colors. However, overprint of CMYK on top of CMYK requires a special overprint mode. This
special CMYK overprint mode allows only the separations with color tints to replace the colors beneath
them; any 0 color value leaves whatever was already there in that separation.
For example, if you overprint blue on magenta - printing a CMYK value of 100,80,0,0 (blue) on 0,100,20,0
(magenta) - you get 100,80,20,0. The cyan and magenta separations from the blue replace the cyan
and magenta separations from the magenta, but the yellow remains because 0 does not knock out
existing color when overprint is enabled.
Within PDF documents, the OPM parameter controls this special CMYK overprint mode. When this
parameter is included in a PDF document, it will be honored. If the OPM parameter is not specified in
the PDF, or for Postscript documents which do not have an equivalent parameter, the “Enable overprint”
checkbox is used to enable or disable the special CMYK overprinting mode. Although the name of this
checkbox seems to imply control over all overprinting, it actually only controls the CMYK on CMYK
overprint mode that is used in cases where the embedded OPM parameter is not available.
To enable CMYK overprint for objects with overprint set to true:

2. Under RIP Overprint Options, check the box Enable Overprint.
● Leave the check box deselected to ignore the overprint of CMYK objects on top of CMYK.
Specifying RIP color separations in the Job Ticket 67

3. With Enable Overprint active, you can also:
● Check Drop white objects to cause the RIP to do nothing when white (CMYK 0,0,0,0) is
drawn with the overprint property set to true.
● Check Overprint gray to cause the RIP to overprint gray, that is, to treat device Gray as a
CMYK color with tints on the K channel.
4. The Enable Overprint options can be used with the Overprint black options.
To enable overprint of black:

2. Under RIP Overprint Options, check the box Overprint black to cause any color with a 100%
black component to overprint 100% black ink over the previous CMY planes regardless of the
overprint property of the object painted with that color.
3. Checking Overprint Black activates the option Overprint black only. If desired, check this box
to limit the forced black overprint to objects with CMYK = 0,0,0,100%.
Screen frequency
Ink dots do not have different tints, so to generate tints of a color, line screens are used to form patterns
of dots that can vary in size and therefore apparent tint. The line screen frequency defines the cell size
of clumps of dots used to make the tints.
The screen frequency options are: Sequin (144 lpi), HDI-160 (160 lpi), HDI-175 (175 lpi), HDI-180 (180
lpi), HDI_set_2 (230 lpi), and default. The default option means that a line screen is not specified in
the Job Ticket and the press default value is assigned to the job.
The value of the screen frequency is passed to the press job properties only and can be edited later on
the press.
To set the line screen frequency:

2. Select the desired line screen frequency from the Screen frequency list.
Separation mode
Production Pro Print Server defines four separation modes:
CMYK Includes black, cyan, magenta, and yellow separations.
IndiChrome Includes black, cyan, magenta, yellow, orange, violet, and

magenta1 separations.
Grayscale A black separation.
Custom Can include any set of inks, such as spot color for a company
logo, or duo-tones or tri-tones using only two or three inks.
Separation modes can be selected in the Separations mode list. The mode's separations are displayed
in the table beneath the menu.
Separations can be added or deleted only when the Separations mode is Custom. The other
separation modes are fixed, but the properties of the individual separations can be edited.

To edit a separation:

2. Select the desired SmartStream Separation mode from the list.
3. Select the separation to be modified from the list of separations in the table.
4. Click Edit to open the Edit Color Separation dialog box.
5. Fill in the Edit Color Separation dialog box.
To create a new color separation:

2. Select Custom or Indichrome from the Separation mode list. Note: you can only create a new
color separation when the Separation mode is Custom or Indichrome.
The CMYK separations are displayed in the separation mode table as a basis for the custom mode.
3. Click New to open the New Color Separation dialog box.
4. Fill in the New Color Separation dialog box.
To use the color separation specified in the job:

2. Check the For personalization jobs use the separators specified in the job check box.
To delete a color separation:

2. Select Custom from the Separation mode list.
The CMYK separations display in the separation mode table as a basis for the custom mode.
3. Select the separation to be deleted from the list of separations in the table.
4. Click Delete.
NOTE: You can only delete color separations when the Separation mode is Custom.
LUTs
All CMYK data is processed through the job LUT tables. A LUT table is a list of correction values that
simulate dot gain on a press. Documents designed for a high dot gain may print too light, while
documents assuming a low dot gain may print too dark. The job LUT can be used to adjust the print for
a specific document.
Default job LUT for separations

Production Pro Print Server comes with six available LUTs to choose from. Five LUTs provide increasing
dot gain from linear to cromalin as follows: linear (0%), exp_025 (7.1%), exp_05 (14%), exp_075
(20.3%), and cromalin (25%). Industry standard dot gain falls between 10 to 20%. The default LUT is
exp_05.
Specifying RIP color separations in the Job Ticket 69

The sixth LUT is CMYKPlus. The CMYKPlus job LUT produces:
● A slight contrast increase over exp_05.
● Output consistent with offset presses.
● Consistent color appearance across all CMYKPlus-enabled HP printers.
However, the default CMYKPlus LUT is an approximation. Correct use of CMYKPlus requires the
following LUTS specific to each separation:
Separation Specific Job LUT
Cyan CMYKPlus_cyan
Magenta CMYKPlus_magenta
Yellow CMYKPlus_yellow
Black CMYKPlus_black
When the CMYKPlus default Job Ticket Template is chosen, CMYKPlus is properly configured with a
different job LUT for each separation. Otherwise, the LUTs must be applied manually to each separation.
To apply a LUT to all the separations in a selected separation mode:

2. Select the Separation mode from the list. The separations display in the separation mode table.
3. Select the desired LUT from the list Default job LUT for separations.
To apply a LUT to an individual separation:

2. Select the Separation mode from the list. The separations for that mode display in the separation
mode table.
3. Select the separation to which you want to apply a specific LUT.
4. Click Edit to open the Edit Color Separation dialog box.
5. In the Edit Color Separation dialog box, under Separation LUT, select Separation-specific
LUT.
6. Choose the desired LUT from the list, and press OK.
To import a custom LUT:

Custom LUTs are imported using the Manage LUTs dialog box.
Light cyan and magenta inks

For information on using light cyan and magenta inks on supported presses, see Using light inks
on page 76.

Color separation settings in Ticket Templates
If you use specific color separation settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template
and input method to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are
created and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
Overprint behavior
The Separations tab contains editable overprint options for the HP Production RIP. The table shows
which RIP overprint control, when active, causes the color in the list to overprint, and whether the object's
overprint property must be OFF or ON to cause it to overprint. In general:
● If Overprint black is active, then any black object (CMYK color with 100% K) overprints, regardless
of the setting of the overprint property for the object in the Postscript or PDF file.
● If Enable overprint is active, then overprint is controlled by the overprint property of the object.
Overprint is controlled by the Postscript Level 2 setoverprint operator.
The table shows examples of colors that will overprint if the job and RIP settings shown are true.
Color To Be Printed Over a Color Value of the Color To Setting of Job Object Active HP Production RIP
Solid Background Fill Be Printed Overprint Property Overprint Control
Black 0 0 0 100 OFF Overprint black
Rich Black 40 0 0 100 OFF If Overprint black is checked

but Overprint black only is
unchecked, this color will
overprint.
Rich Black 40 0 0 100 OFF If Overprint black only is

selected, this color overprints
as if it were 0 0 0 100.
Gray CMYK 0 0 0 50 OFF None
Black 0 0 0 100 ON Enable overprint
Rich Black 40 0 0 100 ON Enable overprint
Gray CMYK 0 0 0 50 ON Enable overprint
Magenta 0 100 0 0 ON Enable overprint
Half Magenta 0 50 0 0 ON Enable overprint
Blue 100 100 0 0 ON Enable overprint
White 0000 ON Drop white object
Gray Solid 0* ON Overprint gray
Gray Tint 50 ON Overprint gray

* Note that the Gray colorspace is additive and a value of 0 is equivalent to 100% black.
Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket

The Page tab of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template dialog boxes lets you set options for page size,
scale, orientation, and adaptive halftoning.
Overprint behavior 71

Additional settings are available for advanced presses, including resolution options, line thinning and
line smoothing.
The pre-defined page size A3Plus is also provided for presses that support a larger media size.
The default page size is used by the press, where it becomes the Job Dimensions in the Press Job
Properties.
Default page size

There are several sizes defined for a Master Job:
● The image size is the job size of the raster output from the RIP, normally defined in the input file.
● The default page size is the page size defined on this tab. It is the maximum size allowed for the
image described in the input file. Images can be cropped or expanded to fit the default page size
using features on the Page tab.
● The media size is the size of the paper on which an imposed page will be output. The media size
is displayed on the Imposition tab. It is used to define the space available for imposed pages when
defining an Imposition template for the job. See Specifying Imposition in the Job Ticket
on page 76
The default page size works with the Pad smaller jobs and Scale options below to set the final
dimensions of the RIPped job. The final press job can't be larger than Default page size. Output is
cropped if the image described in the incoming job is larger than Default page size. The default page
size is not supported for VDP jobs.
To specify the default page size:
1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Page tab.

2. Under Default page size, choose one of the following options:
● Pre-defined size. Select from a list of supported page sizes.
● Custom size. Choose a unit of measure from the Units list and enter a custom Width and
Height in the text boxes. Changing the unit of measure automatically recomputes width and
height.
NOTE: The Pre-defined size list include a 13 x 19 entry if the Press Job Destination specified in the
job control tab supports that substrate size.
Pad smaller jobs

To place a job on a page that is larger than the image size, set the default page size and use Pad
smaller jobs:
● When Pad smaller jobs is selected, the image is placed in the center of the press job that is the
size of the Default page size. It's like adding a page-size wrapper on the image. The job itself is
not scaled up, and extra data (0's padding) is not added to the resulting output.
● When Pad smaller jobs is not selected, the image is loaded onto the press's default media
according to the current press configuration; normally, it is centered. The job dimensions will match
the image size specified in the job file.

To pad smaller jobs:

2. Check the box Pad smaller jobs. This option can be used with either Pre-defined size or Custom
size.
Scale
The Scale options allow you to configure the image size relative to the default page size:
● When Fit to page is selected, oversized images are scaled down to fit the default page size. Scale
is computed for both the length and width, and the smallest scale factor is used for both length and
width to maintain the image aspect ratio and fit the tightest dimension of the image on the page.
Jobs that fit on the page are not altered.
● When Fit to page is not selected, the RIPped job is equal to the image size from the job file. If the
image size is larger than the default page size, the job is cropped so it can't exceed any dimension
of the specified default page size. By default, Fit to page is not selected.
● When Scale is selected, you can manually set both horizontal and vertical percentages of images
to fit the page. Orientation is not considered; the first measure of a job is always the width and the
second is the length. By default, Scale is 100%. Scale options are not supported for VDP jobs.
Fit to page and Scale deactivate one another. Fit to page and Scale work with Auto-rotate.
● The Auto-rotate option is for landscape jobs. It adds a 90-degree rotation to a job if needed to fit
the page. Auto-rotate assumes that the press uses portrait-type pages that are longer than they
are wide. It does not rotate portrait jobs to fit pages that are wider than they are long. By default,
Auto-rotate is set to on.
Fit to page is executed after Auto-rotate.
To specify scale:
2. Under the heading Scale, choose one of the following options:
● Fit to page
● Scale. If you choose this option, enter percentages for both the Horizontal scale and the
Vertical scale.
To specify auto-rotate:

2. Under the heading Scale, check the box Auto-rotate.
PDF Options
PDF Options provides a way to define the criteria used to determine the page size for the final imaged
page size output by the RIP.
This is useful for jobs that will be imposed, since the job's media size is often larger than the image that
needs to be imposed and printed.
Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket 73

PDF version 1.3 offers several options for defining rectangular areas on a PDF page. A PDF file may
set values for one or more of these areas:
● Media Box (default)
● Bleed Box
● Trim Box
● Art Box
● Crop Box
These boundary marks may be added when documents are prepared for print production. The marks
are not actually added to the Adobe PDF file; however, they are included in the PostScript output and
override the embedded settings.
Orientation
Orientation determines how the image is positioned on the RIPped page. There are three options:
Rotate, Negative print, and Mirror.
NOTE: If the job has imposition specified, Rotate and Auto-rotate settings in the Page tab are ignored.
To specify orientation:
2. Under the heading Orientation:
● If desired, select a rotation angle for the page.
● Check the box Negative print to print a negative image of the Master Job.
● Check the box Mirror to print a mirror image of the Master Job. To use the Mirror setting in
the job, check the Use Mirror Settings in job check box. Rotate and Negative prints are not
supported for VDP jobs.
Page settings in Ticket Templates

If you use specific page settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template and input
method to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are created and
managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
Specifying job control parameters in the Job Ticket

The Job control tab of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template dialog boxes defines properties for controlling
a Master Job's missing font behavior, image quality, press workflow, and print properties.
Missing RIP font

When the RIP starts to process a Master Job, it checks that all required files are present. The Missing
Font properties let you specify how the RIP treats a Master Job with a missing font.
This setting is applied to static jobs; variable data (VDP) jobs ignore this setting.

To specify how the RIP handles missing fonts:
2. Under Missing Font, choose one of the following options:
● Stop and change the Master Job status to Needs Attention. The system stops RIPping
the Master Job, and the job status becomes Needs Attention. To continue, the font must be
added to the RIP, and the Master Job must be resubmitted.
● Continue with a substitute font. The system logs a message to the Job Log, but continues
to RIP with the specified font. In the list next to this option, choose the substitute font. If the
required size of this substitute font isn't already available as a SNAP font, that SNAP font size
will be auto-created and stored in SNAP Font Manager when the font is RIPped.
● Use Font emulation. There are two options
◦ If unsuccessful, stop and change the Master Job status to Needs Attention. To
continue, the font problem must be resolved and the Master Job must be resubmitted.
◦ If unsuccessful, continue with a substitute font. The system logs a message to the
Job Log, but continues to RIP with the specified font. For more information, see Font
emulation on page 155.
OPI (Open Prepress Interface)

See Using OPI for high resolution images on page 56.
Print properties
Print properties are absorbed into job properties when the press job is created.
To specify duplex, collation, and print Master Job for the press job:
2. Under Print Properties, select the desired option from the list for each property: Duplex,
Collate, or Reverse Master Job.
To specify tumble:
The tumble setting turns the back side of every duplex sheet 180 degrees.
2. Under Print Properties, go to Duplex and select yes. The Tumble option becomes active.
3. Check the box for Tumble.
NOTE: If the job has imposition specified, the Duplex/Tumble options are ignored.
Job control settings in Ticket Templates

If you use specific job control settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template and
input method to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are created
and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
Specifying job control parameters in the Job Ticket 75

Using light inks
Some presses support printing with light cyan and light magenta inks. These inks provide significant
image quality improvements for photo printing. To print with these inks, the press splits the Cyan and
Magenta separations into two separations, one for the light version of the ink and one for the normal
“dark” ink.
The Job Ticket Separation tab provides an option that supports this feature. The control Use light cyan
and light magenta inks if they are available on press has three values:
● On
● Off
● Use press default
The parameter is passed through to the press as an initial setting in Job Properties.
In order to specify use of light inks:
● The Separations list must specify use of one of the following options:
◦ Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black
◦ Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
● The separation mode can be CMYK or Custom.
● # of ink applications for each separation must be set to 1.
● You must use the default ink printing order.
NOTE: This condition applies only to Job Properties Dialog, separation page.
Specifying Imposition in the Job Ticket

Imposition is the positioning of pages on a signature (spread). Imposition for a Master Job can be set
on the Imposition tab of the Job Ticket or the Ticket Template. Imposition can also be set through Job
Properties.
Media size and default page size (see Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket on page 71 ) interact
with imposition settings to determine image placement:
● If the selected imposition template is None, no imposition will be applied to the file when it goes to
the press.
● If an imposition template is applied to the job, the RIP includes information on the size of the media
to render to and instructions describing the desired rotation in the rendered file. This information
is used by the press during imposition.
● The media size and default page size are used in imposition as the size of the sheet and the size
of the pages imposed on it. For example, a media size of 12 x 18 inches and a page size of 11 x 8.5
inches allow a 2-up imposition. See Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket on page 71
● If the imposition includes crop marks, like most of the built-in impositions, the page size will
increase. The total page size may be greater than the default page size defined on the Page tab.
In the example above, if the 2-up imposition template includes .5 inch crop marks, the total page
size increases to 12 x 9.5 inches; the job will not fit twice on a 12 x 18 inch sheet. Imposition is not
supported for VDP jobs.

Imposition templates
Production Pro Print Server maintains a set of imposition templates, including:
● Built-in imposition templates that are shipped with the product.
● Additional impositions that you add. New impositions can be created in Yours Truly Designer™ by
Indigo® and added using the Manage Impositions dialog box.
The Imposition tab lets you choose an imposition template that will be applied when the job goes to the
press. The imposition for press jobs can always be set or modified prior to printing, since the imposition
information resides outside of the RIP.
To specify an imposition for a Job Ticket:

1. Right-click on a Job Ticket under a Production Queue or Master Jobs list, and click Job Ticket
from the pop-up menu.
2. From the Imposition tab in the Job Ticket, select an Imposition template (other than None) from
the Imposition Template drop-down list.
Media size properties

Media size is the size of the material printed on, usually paper. It can be either a standard pre-defined
size or a custom size. Media settings chosen here are used by both the RIP and the press.
To set a Master Job's media size:
On the Media tab of the Ticket Template, choose one of the following two options:
● Select a standard size media from the Pre-defined size list. The width and length appear in points
to the left of the list.
● Click Custom size to specify a custom media size. In the text boxes, you must then set the
Units of measure, and numerical values for the Width and Height.
Imposition settings in Ticket Templates

If you use specific imposition settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template and
input method to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are created
and managed using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box. See Manage Ticket Templates dialog
box on page 229.
Viewing and interpreting the job log

The Job log tab of the Job Ticket dialog box is your primary resource on the processing history of each
job.
To view the Job log:
Open the Job Ticket and click the Job log tab.
Job log content

The job ID appears at the top of the Job log, followed by a table that lists the events associated with the
job in descending Master Job by audit time. Severity is indicated by an icon.
Viewing and interpreting the job log 77

If a column's content is truncated, you can see the entire value by adjusting the column width, or by
momentarily positioning the cursor on that cell. Select a row to display the entire contents of the
Detail column in the text box below the Job Log table.
You can also view job-related events in the Log Viewer tab.
Printing a Job Ticket

To print the information in the Job Ticket:
1. In the Production Manager tab, select a Master Job.
2. In the Jobs menu, click Printable Job Ticket.
-or-
Click the Printable Job Ticket toolbar button .

This opens a window of your default web browser, containing the information in the Job Ticket.
3. Use the browser's printing capabilities to print the information.
Using the order form in the Job Ticket

The order form of the Job Ticket stores contact information for the customer and finishing information
for the job.
● For ISV jobs, some information is entered automatically when the job enters the system.
● For jobs that enter the system through hot folders, network printers, or the Job Import dialog box,
you must enter information manually.
The order form makes customer information accessible at all times, until the Master Job is deleted.
However, the order form cannot be edited for jobs that are completed or canceled.
The order form provides information only. It does not affect the workflow or processing of a Master Job.
For example, finishing information does not enter the RIP or job properties.
The order form contains four views: Customer Information, Billing Information, Shipping
Information, and Finishing.
To edit the Master Job form:
1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Order Form tab. The order form opens in the Customer
Information view.
2. Choose the desired view.
3. Fill in the desired fields.
● All fields are editable but not required.
● There is no user input validation.

8 Press job destinations and workflows
Introduction to press job destinations

The Job Ticket contains routing information for the press job generated by the RIPs.
See Setting the press job destination on page 63 for information on how to use the Job Ticket to specify
the workflow destination for the press job.
Selecting a destination press

When a press has been added to Production Pro Print Server, the press name appears in the Press
list on the Job Ticket Job Control tab. If your system includes both PrintLink and non-PrintLink presses,
both types are listed.
To assign a job to a press:

1. Open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Job Control tab.
2. Select the Press radio button and choose a press from the list.
NOTE: The press must be mapped to a press controller in order to receive press jobs.
3. You can make the assignment but delay sending the job to the press by checking the box Keep
the job on the Press Controller. This will place the job in the Press Controller Jobs list. The job
will also be listed in the Press Controller view.
4. Select the Print Queue or Held (Loaded) Jobs list as the destination press list. This setting
becomes a property of the press job and determines:
● The post-RIP destination if the Keep the job on the Press Controller box is unchecked.
● Where the press job gets placed when it is copied to another press.
For more information, see:
● PrintLink presses — choosing a destination list on page 79
● Legacy presses — choosing a destination list on page 80
PrintLink presses — choosing a destination list

When a press job is assigned to a PrintLink press, there are three possible destinations:
Print Queue The press job appears in the Print Queue of the press view. It also appears in the Print Queue of the
press software.
To send a job to the Print Queue:
On the Job Control tab of the Job Ticket or Ticket Template:
1. Make sure the check box Keep the job on the press controller is unchecked.
2. Select the Print Queue option.
Introduction to press job destinations 79

NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press controller. A job reference has been sent to the
press; thus, the press operator can see and manipulate the job.
Held Jobs list The press job appears in the Held Jobs list of the press view. It also appears in the Held Jobs list of the
press software.
To send a job to the Held Jobs list:
On the Job Control tab of the Job Ticket or Ticket Template
2. Select the Held (Loaded) Jobs list option.
NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press controller. A job reference has been sent to the
press; thus, the press operator can see and manipulate the job.
Press Controller Jobs The press job is assigned to the press and appears in the Press Controller Jobs list of the press view.
list It also appears in the press controller view.
The job is not visible in the press software.
To send a job to the Print Controller Jobs list,
1. Check the box Keep the job on the press controller.
2. You can select either option — Print Queue or Held (Loaded) Jobs list. This setting is written to
the job properties for the press job and gets used whenever the job is moved or copied to another
press.
NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press controller. No job reference is sent to the press;
thus, the press operator cannot see the job.
Legacy presses — choosing a destination list

When a press job is assigned to a non-PrintLink press, there are three possible destinations:
Print Queue The press job appears in the Print Queue of the press view. It also appears in the Print Queue of the
press software, so the press operator can see and manipulate it.
To send a job to the Print Queue:
2. Select the Print Queue option.
NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press.
Loaded Jobs list The press job appears in the Loaded Jobs list of the press view. It also appears in the Loaded Jobs list
of the press software.
To send a job to the Loaded Jobs list:
2. Select the Held (Loaded) Jobs list option.
NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press.
Press Controller Jobs The press job is assigned to the press and appears in the Press Controller Jobs list of the press view.
list It also appears in the press controller view. The press software does not show the job.
To send a job to the Print Controller Jobs list,
80 Chapter 8 Press job destinations and workflows

1. Check the box Keep the job on the press controller.
2. You can select either option — Print Queue or Held (Loaded) Jobs list. This setting is written to
the job properties for the press job and gets used whenever the job is moved or copied to another
press.
NOTE: Internally, the press job file is on the press controller. The press operator cannot see it.
ICF formats and post-RIP destinations

There are two internal formats used by presses and press controllers:
● ICF 96. This format is used by the HP Indigo Press 5000 and older presses.
● ICF 05. This format is used by the HP Indigo 5500 and newer presses. ICF 05 provides support
for certain printing enhancements: multiple resolution, line thinning, line smoothing, and adaptive
halftoning.
The RIPs are capable of producing press jobs in either format.
For more information on ICF issues, see What is ICF? on page 195.
ICF formats and press destinations

When the Job Ticket specifies a press as the destination:
● Static jobs — the press job is created in the ICF format of the press.
● VDP jobs — the press job is created in the ICF format of the press controller.
ICF formats and press controllers

Press controllers can be configured to support either ICF 96 or 05. This configuration determines the
file format created when the Job Ticket specifies a press controller as the destination device.
ICF formats and folder devices

When the Job Ticket specifies a folder device as the destination:
● Static jobs — the press job is created in the ICF format configured for the designated folder. The
ICF format of a folder is determined when the folder is created in the Manage Devices dialog box.
● VDP jobs — the press job is created in the same ICF format as the press controller mapped to the
Folder device.
ICF formats and press groups

When the Job Ticket specifies a press group as the destination:
● Static jobs — the system determines which press in the group will receive the press job, and then
creates the press job in the matching format.
● VDP jobs — the system determines which press in the group will receive the press job, and then
creates the press job ICF format of the press controller for that press.
ICF formats and post-RIP destinations 81

For more information see:
● What is ICF? on page 195
● ICF format and press controller configuration on page 195
● Determining the press job ICF format for static jobs on page 196
● Determining the press job ICF format for VDP job on page 196
Using press groups

Press groups are used for load balancing. When a press group is specified as the destination, a load
balancing mechanism determines which press in the group will receive the job. There are two built-in
load balancing mechanisms.
Press groups are created and configured using the Manage Devices dialog box. The configuration
includes selecting which load-balancing mechanism to use. See Creating and managing press groups
on page 183 for more information.
When a Job Ticket specifies a press group destination, you can use the Press jobs for Master Job list
(below the Master Jobs list) to learn which press received the job.
Press groups are used only for post-RIP load balancing. You cannot move or copy press jobs to press
groups.
To specify a press group as the press job destination:

2. Select the Press group radio button and choose a press group from the list.
Using Folder devices

Folder devices provide a way to save press jobs created by the RIP to the file system so that they can
be loaded back into the system at a later time.
The press jobs are saved as JLYT files.
It is important to understand the difference between folders and folder devices.
● Folders are the containers created in the file system — for example, by using the New Folders
command in Microsoft Windows.
● Folder devices are folders that have been set up as locations to accept RIP output. Folder devices
are configured in the Manage Devices dialog box in Production Pro Print Server. See Creating
folder devices for RIP output on page 184.
To specify a Folder device as the press job destination.
2. Click the Folder device radio button and choose a folder device.
For additional information, see ICF formats and post-RIP destinations on page 81.
NOTE: The RIP features of partitioning and fast reaggregation are supported for static jobs whose
destination is a Folder device only if the jobs are routed through a press controller.
82 Chapter 8 Press job destinations and workflows

Using press controllers as the destination
The Job Ticket allows you to specify a press controller as the press job destination. This is useful when
you want a workflow that:
● Delays making a press assignment until after the press job has been created. The press job will
not be visible on any press.
● Keeps the job in the system (as opposed to Folder devices, which export the press job to a file).
● Does not allow the press operator to see or modify the job right away.
When you route a press job to a press controller:
● It cannot be seen or modified by the press operator.
● You can view the job in either of these places:
◦ In the Press Controller view.
This view is useful if you want to view all the jobs on a single press controller in one large list.
◦ In the Press Controller Jobs list of the press view. For example, if the press controller is
mapped to pressABC, the job will appear in the press view of pressABC.
This view is useful if you want to move the job to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or Print Queue
of that press.
● It is RIPped to be compatible with the ICF format of the press controller.
The Job Ticket allows you to specify a press controller as the destination for press jobs. This feature
allows you to manually assign press jobs to presses after they have been created by the RIPs.
To specify a press controller as the destination

On the Job Control tab of the Job Ticket (or Ticket Template), click Press Controller and choose
a press controller from the list.
Using press controllers as the destination 83

9 Enhanced printing options
Overview of enhanced printing options

Enhanced printing options are a set of features supported by Production Pro Print Server and some
presses.
The enhanced printing options are:
● Multiple resolution: the ability to control density of dots created by the RIP and press. See Multiple
resolution RIP and print on page 85.
● Linework:
◦ Line smoothing: smoothing solid lines for low resolution printing (less than 800 dpi). See Line
smoothing on page 86.
◦ Line thinning: compensation for dot gain changes. See Line thinning on page 86.
● Support for 13 x 19 (A3Plus) sheet size. See Support for larger sheet size on page 87.
● Adaptive halftoning: increases edge sharpness. See Adaptive halftoning on page 87.
The use of enhanced printing options are set in two places:
● The Page tab of the Job Ticket.
● The Linework and Resolution page of job properties.
In the job workflow:
● The resolution and page size information in the Job Ticket are passed to the RIPs. These settings
determine how the job is RIPped.
● The other settings on the Job Ticket are copied into the job properties when the press job is created.
● The non-resolution settings can be modified post-RIP by editing the job properties.
When an enhanced press job is exported, the enhancement instructions are exported along with the
job. If the job is re-imported, the import should be to a press capable of enhanced printing.
For more information, see Workflow for enhanced jobs on page 50.
NOTE: Support for multiple resolution and linework enhancements is provided by the ICF 05 press
format. For more information, see What is ICF? on page 195.
Support for enhanced printing options

In order to use enhanced printing options, you must have both a press and software that support these
options.
The enhanced printing functionality is implemented in the format named ICF 05. The earlier format,
ICF 96, does not support the enhanced options.
84 Chapter 9 Enhanced printing options

Products that support ICF 05 include:
● All PrintLink presses
● HP Indigo 5500 presses
● Upgraded HP Indigo 5000 presses
● HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server version 2.6
● HP Indigo Production Manager version 1.1
● HP Remote Production Client, when connected to a version of Production Pro Print Server that
supports ICF 05.
For more information about ICF formats, see What is ICF? on page 195.
Multiple resolution RIP and print

NOTE: This feature requires a press that supports it. See Support for enhanced printing options
on page 84.
The multiple resolution capability provides the ability to set the RIP resolution for a job.
The resolution options are:
● 1200 dpi (48 dots/mm)
● 800 dpi (32 dots/mm) (default)
● 600 dpi (24 dots/mm)
To set the resolution for a job:

1. In the Job Ticket or Ticket Template, click the Page tab.
2. Use the Specify resolution list to select a resolution.
3. On the Job Control tab, make sure the specified destination supports enhanced resolution options.
For VDP jobs, this resolution will be used for all RIPped assets, unless object-level resolution has been
implemented (see Object-level resolution on page 85).
NOTE: If your print shop has both ICF 96 and ICF 05 presses, there may be limitations on copying
and re-importing press jobs. See Copying press jobs to other devices (ICF format issues)
on page 197 and Exporting and importing press jobs (ICF format issues) on page 198.
Object-level resolution
on page 84.
Object-level resolution refers to object-specific resolution values embedded in the incoming PPML or
PPML/T job file. Generally, these embedded resolution values are: Low, Medium, Normal, and High.
If you activate the check box for object-level resolution, you must then specify the specific RIP resolution
values that correspond to the embedded values.
Multiple resolution RIP and print 85

Line smoothing
on page 84.
Line smoothing is used to enhance the quality of line work. It is useful for enhancing linework and text
when jobs are RIPped at relatively low resolution. The line smoothing method used is based on
HP Resolution Enhancement Technology (RET).
To specify line smoothing for a job:

2. Set Line smoothing to:
● On
● Off (default)
● Not set here. (If an instruction is embedded in the incoming job file, it will be used. Otherwise,
the press default it used.)
3. For setting=On, you must specify (on the Job Control tab) a destination device capable of
supporting line smoothing.
4. After the press job has been generated, you can use job properties to modify the setting.
Line smoothing is implemented entirely on the press. The setting is saved into the press job (JLYT file)
and becomes part of the press job properties.
Regardless of the line smoothing setting, the press does not do line smoothing on jobs RIPped at high
resolution (1200 dpi). Line smoothing is available only to jobs with resolution lower than 800 dpi.
If the incoming job file includes embedded line smoothing instructions, the Job Ticket settings On or Off
will override them.
Line thinning
NOTE: This feature requires both a version of Production Pro Print Server and a press that supports
it. See Support for enhanced printing options on page 84.
Line thinning is a method to compensate for the inherent dot gain generated by the print engine. It
improves the consistency in line thickness, and is effective for solid line work and text.

To specify line thinning for a job:

2. Set Line thinning to:
● On
● Off (default)
● Not set here. (If an instruction is embedded in the incoming job file, it will be used. Otherwise,
the press default it used.)
3. For setting=On, you must specify (on the Job Control tab) a destination device capable of
supporting line thinning.
4. After the press job has been generated, you can use job properties to modify the setting.
Line thinning is implemented on the press. The setting is saved into the press job (JLYT file) and
becomes part of the press job properties.
If the incoming job file includes embedded line thinning instructions, the Job Ticket setting On or Off will
override them.
Support for larger sheet size

Some presses support a sheet size of 13 x 19 inches (329 x 483 mm, A3Plus).
The page size is set in the Page tab of the Job Ticket.
The system displays a warning if you attempt to send a press job that requires 13 x 19 media to a press
that does not support that sheet size. If you ignore the warning and print the job on that press, the image
will be clipped.
Adaptive halftoning
Halftoning is a technique for reproducing continuous tone images with a small number of ink colors using
dot size and placement. In non-adaptive halftoning the frequency of the halftone is kept constant across
the image.
In adaptive halftoning, the frequency of the halftone is modified across the image based on image
content. The result is increased edge sharpness.
Adaptive halftoning is supported by both ICF 96 and ICF 05 presses. In Production Pro Print Server the
ICF version is set via the Press Controllers tab of the Manage Devices dialog box, and it affects the
output of the RIP and press controller.
Support for larger sheet size 87

To specify adaptive halftoning for a job:

2. Set Adaptive halftoning to:
● On
● Off (default)
● Not set here. If an instruction is embedded in the incoming job file, it will be used. Otherwise,
the press default it used.
After the press job has been generated, you can modify the settings for adaptive halftoning by editing
the job properties, which are made available by the press controller that is mapped to the press. Note
that a press controller can be mapped to multiple presses. If the job is sent to a Series 2 5000 or 5500
press, the adaptive halftoning will be honored. For all other Indigo Series2 presses, the adaptive
halftoning setting will be ignored because adaptive halftoning is not supported on those presses.
Adaptive halftoning is implemented on the press. The setting is saved into the press job (JLYT file) and
becomes part of the press job properties.
If the incoming job file includes embedded adaptive halftoning instructions, the Job Ticket setting On or
Off will override them.

10 Color and substrate workflow
Overview of color management

Production Pro Print Server provides both automatic color management and advanced color options for
users needing full control over the color workflow.
Automatic color management. Production Pro Print Server produces state-of-the-art color “out of the
box” without operator involvement. The HP Production RIP accepts:
● Traditional CMYK offset print jobs.
● Untagged RGB color files from the office.
● Color-managed documents.
Depending on the document creation application, untagged device color can be CMYK, Grayscale, or
RGB. The HP Production RIP automatically detects and renders these colors:
● Untagged RGB data is accepted and automatically color-managed using HP sRGB technology.
◦ sRGB is an international standard created by HP and Microsoft to represent a typical monitor.
It is widely used as the default RGB color definition.
◦ HP sRGB rendering produces a perceptual screen appearance match that adapts the monitor
primaries to print primaries, and leverages the color capabilities of the press.
● Untagged, device CMYK and Grayscale data is sent directly to the press with an Exp_05 job LUT.
This produces color output that uses the full gamut of the press with a tone response consistent
with offset press standards.
ICC-based color management is now supported by most graphic art document creation applications.
Generally accepted “best practices” require color management information describing the source color
spaces to be included in the print document. This includes Postscript Color Space Arrays (CSAs), PDF-
calibrated color, and ICC profiles included in PDF, TIFF, and JPG files. This information is honored by
the HP Production RIP, which then renders the colors properly for the press inks and media.
Advanced features. The automatic behavior defaults can be changed with the color management and
color separation options of the Job Ticket:
● Preloaded ICC profiles can be assigned to deviceCMYK, deviceRGB, and deviceGray inputs.
● Custom profiles can be imported.
● Emulation profiles can be used to simulate desired devices.
● Output profiles can be imported to optimize the press output for different media types.
● Different rendering intents can be specified separately for RGB and CMYK images.
The system manages all types of color data from incoming files - Postscript, PDF, JPG, TIFF, and others
- down to the component level for individually embedded color elements. By default, the system honors
all color information in the job file, but can also be set to override color management.
Overview of color management 89

Other advanced features include support for OPI image servers, overprint options, and preservation of
100% process black. In addition:
● Pre-separated jobs can be recombined and printed.
● Spot colors can be separated to custom ink separations or rendered as process colors.
● Preloaded LUTs can be assigned to individual separations, and custom LUTs can be imported.
● Pantone-named colors can automatically use the Pantone-licensed Indichrome or CMYK values.
● Pantone-named colors can use color management to determine the process color substitution.
To set color options

Color options can be set before and after an order is RIPped. See Configuring color for RIPping
on page 90.
A good procedure is to set an order's color options as accurately as possible before RIPping and then
print a proof from the press job file. If necessary, many color adjustments can be made on the press
without re-RIPping the job.
Before RIPping:
● Pre-RIP options are located on the Separations tab and the Color Management tab of the Job
Ticket and the Ticket Template dialog boxes.
● If you expect to edit most Job Tickets before RIPping, you may want to put new orders on hold
automatically.
After RIPping:
1. Print a proof from the press job file.
2. Adjust color settings if desired. Post-RIP options are located in the Job Properties dialog box.
Priority of options
Color options can be set in the Ticket Template, the Job Ticket, the job properties, and the press. To
determine which color options take precedence, use this guideline:
● The Job Ticket overrides the Ticket Template.
● Job Properties override the Job Ticket.
● Options set in Production Pro Print Server override the press defaults. To view press defaults, click
Press Configuration in the press Options menu.
Configuring color for RIPping

Color management and separations options for static jobs should be set before an order is RIPped.
These pre-RIP options are located in the Job Ticket or the Ticket Template dialog boxes:
● Set color management options using the Color Management tab.
● Set color separations options using the Separations tab.
NOTE: Not all settings apply to variable data jobs.
90 Chapter 10 Color and substrate workflow

Color management options
The native color capabilities of devices vary widely because color is produced with different
technologies, physical processes, and ink colors. The color workflow in Production Pro Print Server
transforms color from an input color space definition through a device-independent color space and
back to the output device's color space. The object of the transforms is to output color as true as possible
to the specified color.
Options in the Color Management tab let you select the transforms used in the color workflow. These
transforms should be set before RIPping:
● CMYK input profile
● RGB input profile
● Gray input profile
● Emulation profile
● Press output profile
For the press output profiles, you can select rendering intents for a whole job, and if desired, select a
different rendering intent for CMYK and RGB images. In addition to the preloaded profiles, you can
import custom profiles as needed using the RGB input profile. Input profiles are used for input colors
that have no embedded color management specified (e.g. DeviceRGB). Input colors that do have
embedded color management (e.g. CIE based color spaces) will be converted to CIELab color space
using the embedded color management specification and then be converted to press CMYK using the
Press output profile. If this is not desired, uncheck the “Used embedded profiles” check box. Note that
the input profiles may be device link profiles which allow transforming the input color directly to the Press
CMYK. This effectively bypasses the Press output profile for inputs of that type. For example, the default
RGB input profile is sRGBLinkGlossExp05.icc (which is a device link profile). So device RGB inputs are
directly translated to press CMYK. Changing the Press output profile or rendering intent would have no
effect on the rendering of device RGB inputs. If this is not desired, you can change the RGB input profile
to sRGBColorSpace.icm which is not a device link profile. Then device RGB inputs would be converted
to CIELab values and then translated to Press CMYK using the Press output profile.
Other pre-RIP color management options include:
● Automatic Pantone® Substitution
● Preserve 100% process black
● Override Color Management
● Black Point Compensation
Color separations options

The Separations tab lets you set numerous pre-RIP options for color separations including:
● Allow pre-separated jobs
● Indigo transparency
● Overprinting
● Screen frequency
● LUTs
● Use light cyan and light magenta
Configuring color for RIPping 91

Separations can be added or removed to allow the use of custom inks or to create prints with less than
four colors. The separation properties of each color can be edited. A default job LUT can be applied to
all of an order's separations, or individual LUTs can be applied to individual separations. Custom job
LUTs can be added or deleted from the list of preloaded job LUTs.
Managing ICC profiles

An ICC profile is a cross-platform file definition based on the specifications of the International Color
Consortium. You can set ICC profiles for an order in the Color Management tab of both the Job Ticket
and the Ticket Template dialog boxes. The Color Management tab contains lists of preloaded CMYK
input profiles, RGB input profiles, Gray input profiles, and output profiles.
Other profiles, including emulation profiles, can be added and deleted using the ICC Profiles Manager.
To open the ICC Profile Manager:
● Open the Job Ticket for the order, click the Color Management tab, and click ICC Profile
Manager.
● Or, in the Admin menu, click ICC Profiles.
To view a description of a profile:
1. In the Admin menu, click ICC Profiles.

2. Select the type of profile you want to view. The list of profiles appears in the left-hand text box.
3. Select the profile you want to view. The description appears in the right-hand text box.
To add ICC profiles to the preloaded profiles:

2. Choose the type of profile you want to add.
3. Click Import. A file browser window opens.
4. Browse to the ICC profile you want to import, and then click Open. The browser window closes
and a confirmation dialog appears. After clicking OK, the name of the new ICC profile appears in
the ICC Profiles Manager. The profile becomes available from the menu in the Color Management
tab when the ICC Profile dialog box is closed.
To delete an ICC profile:

2. Select the profile to be deleted.
NOTE: Built-in (pre-loaded) profiles cannot be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
Pantone® emulation
PANTONE® emulation processes are built into the RIP. The Indigo press now supports the new Pantone
GOE color names. The processes use these Pantone color names included in a job file to provide the
best simulation of the Pantone color that the press can produce.

Most professional graphics applications supply Pantone color pickers to color objects using a Pantone
color name. When the document is converted to Postscript or PDF, both the Pantone name and a
recommended process CMYK color value are included in the file.
The PANTONE Emulation settings let you specify how the objects assigned color names/values in the
job file will be printed.
PANTONE® emulation with Indichrome Inks

The HP Indigo presses are licensed by Pantone® for emulation of the Pantone colors using Indichrome
inks. The Indichrome Pantone lookup table in the RIP provides a wide-gamut matching for Pantone
colors.
To print Pantone-certified colors with Indichrome inks:
1. In the Separations tab of the Job Ticket, select Indichrome separation mode.
2. In the Color Management tab, specify Pantone Indichrome licensed lookup table.
In Indichrome separation mode, the RIP substitutes the Pantone-certified Indichrome values for each
Pantone name.
PANTONE® emulation with CMYK Inks

When Indichrome printing is not feasible, other methods must be used for color matching.
There are four CMYK emulation options:
● HP Professional Pantone Emulation
● Pantone CMYK Licensed Lookup Table
● Compatibility mode
● None
HP Professional Pantone® Emulation (Auto PantonePlus)

HP Professional Pantone® Emulation is preferable when:
● It is not feasible to use Indichrome inks.
● The document creator used a Pantone color picker while creating the document. Thus, the Pantone
names are included in the Postscript or PDF file.
● The customer desires the printed colors to match the Pantone Coated, Matte, or Uncoated
swatches as closely as possible.
To use Professional Pantone® emulation

1. In the Separations tab of the Job Ticket, select CMYK or Custom Colors separation mode.
2. In the Color Management tab, click HP Professional Pantone Emulation.
3. Select an option from the CMYK Press Profile list.
This list includes all Press output profiles available from the ICC Profile Manager. In general, this
profile should be the same as the Press output profile. However, it is possible to use a different
profile for the Pantone Emulation. For example: to use a profile with a different kind of black
separation.
Pantone® emulation 93

When HP Professional Pantone Emulation is selected, the RIP reads the Pantone color names in the
PDF or Postscript file and searches the named color lookup tables for matching names. In the lookup
table, the name is paired with a particular device-independent color (CIELAB color). With this option,
the Pantone name suffix is used to select the Matte, Coated or Uncoated Pantone library of colors. The
Lab color is sent to a built-in Professional Pantone Emulation utility for conversion to press CMYK values.
This utility uses an HP-proprietary scheme to determine the best simulation of the Pantone value for a
good visual match of the color. It uses a custom technique to map out-of-gamut colors rather than using
the gamut mapping technique built into the ICC profile.
PANTONE® CMYK Licensed Lookup Table

The PANTONE® CMYK Licensed Lookup Table is preferable when:
● The customer is more concerned with maintaining the differences between adjacent colors than
the actual match with the Pantone swatches.
To use the PANTONE® CMYK Licensed Lookup Table
1. On the Separations tab of the Job Ticket, choose CMYK or Custom separation mode.
2. On the Color Management tab of the Job Ticket, click the PANTONE CMYK licensed lookup
table radio button.
With these settings, the Pantone licensed lookup table for Coated Pantone colors on Gloss media is
used to provide a mapping between Pantone colors and press CMYK values. The mapping does not
depend on the ICC profiles or substrate chosen in the Job Ticket.
Compatibility mode
Compatibility mode is preferable when:
● It is necessary to match colors that were printed using the Automatic Pantone Substitution mode
feature in previous versions of Production Pro Print Server.
To provide backwards compatibility with previously printed jobs
1. Make sure all other colors settings in the Job Ticket are the same as the settings used for previous
printings.
2. In the Color Management tab of the Job Ticket, click the Compatibility Mode radio button.
Process CMYK colors from job

In the Color Management tab of the Job Ticket, the None radio button under Pantone Emulation causes
the RIP to use the alternate process CMYK color values included with the Pantone name instead of
doing color emulation. This is useful for situations when the CMYK value is the preferred color because
it matches other CMYK colors in the job that do not include the Pantone name.
If the Grayscale separation is specified, the alternate CMYK value is used and then converted to a
grayscale color.

Managing RIP LUTs
Production Pro Print Server contains built-in LUTs (see Built-in LUTs on page 276).
Additional LUT files can be added.
● LUT files are ASCII text files
● LUT files contain a list of X,Y pairs of numbers between 0 and 1 on each line.
● The first pair must be 0 0.
● The last pair must be 1 1.
● The x and Y sets of values must be monotonic.
Custom LUTs can be added and deleted using the Manage LUTs dialog box.
To add a custom LUT:

1. In the Admin menu, click LUTs to open the Manage LUTs dialog box.
2. Click Import.
3. Browse to the LUT to be imported and click Open.
4. Click Close.
The new LUT is displayed in the Separations tab of the Job Ticket, in the drop-down list Default job
LUT for separations.
To delete a custom LUT:
In the Admin menu, click LUTs, select the LUT to be deleted and click Delete.
NOTE: Built-in LUTs cannot be deleted.
Black point compensation

Black point compensation (BPC) can be turned on in the Color Management tab of the Job Ticket and
Ticket Template. It causes the RIP color management engine to normalize the black points of the input
and output profiles by mapping input black to output black.
BPC affects the relative colorimetric rendering intent only.
When BPC is turned off, the black of the input device is emulated.
BCP is particularly useful when:
● The input black is darker than the output black, causing poor differentiation of shadows.
● Shadow blocking problems occur when RGB input content is color managed to CMYK using the
relative colorimetric intent.
● Version 2 and version 4 ICC profiles are used together.
● Mixing version 2 profiles from different vendors.
Managing RIP LUTs 95

Color management of press jobs — an overview
Color management of press jobs occurs in two places:
● The Job Properties dialog box. Use controls on the Color Control page to adjust LUTs, dot area,
optical density, brightness, and contrast.
To open the Job Properties dialog box, double-click a press job in a press or press controller view.
NOTE: The Job Properties dialog box is not available for press jobs in the Loaded Jobs list and
Print Queue of non-PrintLink presses.
● Color management provided by the press software. This may vary among different presses, but it
generally includes LUTs and color matching.
Creating and managing press job Look Up Tables (LUTs)

Each press controller maintains a library of Look Up Tables (LUTs). These LUTs can be loaded into
press jobs on that press controller.
To open the LUT Library for a press controller:

1. Open the job properties for a press job on that press controller.
● On PrintLink presses, the job can be in the Held Jobs list, Press Controller Jobs list, or press
controller view.
● On non-PrintLink presses, the job can be in the Press Controller Jobs list or press controller
view.
2. On the Color Control page, click LUT Library.
Each LUT in the library has:
● A unique name. (Names are unique only within that library.)
● A list of separation names. Each separation name corresponds to a LUT ( a curve of x,y values).
Therefore, if multiple separation names are shown, the LUT name actually refers to a set of LUTs
— one for each separation.
To save a single LUT curve for a separation

1. In the Color Control page in the Job Properties dialog box, select the separation. Then edit the LUT
for the separation. See Modifying the color LUT for a press job on page 122.
2. Click Save LUT As.
3. In the Save Job LUT dialog box, type a Job LUT name.
4. Select the Selected separation option.
5. Click OK.
If you now open the LUT library, you will see the LUT listed with its separation.
To save a set of LUTs for multiple separations

1. in the Color Control page in the Job Properties dialog box, create the LUTs for each of the
separations in a press job. See Modifying the color LUT for a press job on page 122.
2. Click Save LUT As.

3. In the Save Job LUT dialog box, type a Job LUT name.
4. Select the All separations option.
5. Click OK.
If you now open the LUT library, you will see the LUT listed. The For Separations column will list all the
separations in the job, indicating that multiple LUT curves have been saved. Each curve is internally
stored with both its Job LUT name and its separation name.
To load a single LUT into a separation

1. Open the job properties for the press job, select the Color Control tab and click LUT Library.
2. In the table, select the LUT you want to load into the job.
You can select any of the listed LUTs. For example, even if the For Separations column lists only
cyan for a LUT, you can load that LUT into a magenta separation.
If you select a set of LUTs (multiple separations are listed for it), only the LUT for the separation
you select in the next step will be loaded.
3. Select the separation into which the LUT will be loaded and click OK.
To load a set of LUTs into multiple separations

1. Open the job properties for the press job, select the Color Control tab and click LUT Library.
2. In the table, select the LUT you want to load into the job.
You can select any of the listed LUTs. For example, even if the For Separations column lists only
cyan for a LUT, you can load that LUT into all separations.
If you select a set of LUTs (multiple separations are listed for it), the individual LUTs in the set will
be loaded into their corresponding separations.
3. Select All from the Load job LUT to selected separation(s) list and click OK.
To copy a press job LUT to another press controller

Because press job LUTs are usually specific to a particular press (and press controller), there is no
mechanism for directly copying a LUT from one press controller to another. However, this can be done
indirectly by copying the press job.
1. Copy the press job to another press. The LUT values associated with the separations are part of
the press job and will be copied.
2. Open the job properties for the copied job and save the LUT(s) to the LUT Library on that press
controller.
Overview of substrate workflow

Substrate workflow describes how one or more substrates are assigned to a job, and how that
information is implemented in the workflow from job submission to printing.
The substrate workflow for PrintLink presses is somewhat different than for non-PrintLink presses.
General substrate concepts
Substrates are defined separately on each press. Each press manages its own list of substrates and
their property definitions.
Overview of substrate workflow 97

Production Pro Print Server communicates with each press and obtains a list of substrates on that press
and the properties of that substrate as defined on that press. That information is aggregated into the
Substrate Catalog.
For PrintLink presses, the system also acquires the drawer contents, so it knows which substrates are
actually loaded.
The system includes a list of pre-defined intended substrate names, provided for compatibility with non-
PrintLink presses that support substrate mapping.
Substrate workflow for PrintLink presses
● The initial substrate assignment(s) are obtained from the Ticket Template associated with the hot
folder or other input method.
The Ticket Template should specify an actual substrate name (intended substrates are not
supported on PrintLink presses) or the press default substrate.
● Prior to RIP, the Job Ticket can be edited to change the substrate(s). You can select any substrate
listed in the Substrate Catalog, regardless of whether or not that substrate is defined on the
destination press.
● When the press job is created, the substrate information in the Job Ticket is written to its job
properties.
● When the press job arrives at the press controller for the press, the system checks to see whether
the substrate(s) specified in the job properties are defined on the press. If they are not, the job is
flagged as needing attention and placed in the Press Controller Jobs list.
● The substrate(s) for press jobs can be modified in the Job Properties dialog box. If the press job
has been assigned to a press, substrate selection is limited to substrates defined on that press.
● When the press job is placed in the Held Jobs List or Print Queue, the substrate information is part
of the job reference sent to the press. The press operator can edit the substrate using the press
software.
Substrate workflow for non-PrintLink presses
● The initial substrate assignment(s) are obtained from the Ticket Template associated with the hot
folder or other input method.
The Ticket Template can specify an actual substrate, an intended substrate, or the press default.
● Prior to RIP, the Job Ticket can be edited to change the substrate(s). You can select any substrate
listed in the Substrate Catalog, regardless of whether or not that substrate is defined on the
destination press.
● When the press job is created, the substrate information in the Job Ticket is written to its job
properties.
● When the press job is loaded onto the press, the press software handles substrate mapping and
availability.
Setting the substrate prior to RIP

The Substrate tab of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template allow you to specify one or more substrates
for the job. This allows you to automate substrates to some extent.

To specify the substrate(s) for jobs in the Job Ticket or Ticket Template
1. Open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Substrate tab.
2. Use the Default job substrate list to select the substrate that will be used by all sheets except
those specified in Additional Substrates. You can use the Substrate Catalog to view the full range
of choices. See Using the Substrate Catalog on page 99.
3. If the job uses multiple substrates, for each additional substrate:
a. Select a substrate from the Substrate list.
b. Type a sheet range for that substrate.
c. Click Add.
NOTE: For personalized JLYT, use the substrate specified in the job. If not specified, the press
default substrate is used.
4. Repeat step 3, if necessary, to specify additional substrates.
NOTE: The substrates included in the pull-down lists are the first 20 entries in the Substrate Catalog.
The contents of the lists cannot be configured.
Using the Substrate Catalog

The Substrate Catalog is used to:
● View an aggregated list of substrates defined on all presses.
● Locate specific substrates.
● Assign a specific substrate to a job, either pre-RIP or post-RIP.
To open the Substrate Catalog
● On the Substrate tab of the Job Ticket (or Ticket Template), click Substrate Catalog from the
Default job substrate or Substrate lists.
● On the Substrate page of the Job Properties dialog box, select Substrate Catalog from the
Substrate list. In this view, the list is filtered to include only the substrates defined on the press(es)
to which the press controller is mapped.
To locate a substrate
1. Open the substrate catalog from the Job Ticket or Job Properties.
2. Click the Substrate column header to sort the list by substrate name.
To view a list of all the substrates on a particular press.

1. Open the substrate catalog.
2. If necessary, click the Press column header to sort the list by press name.
To select a substrate for a job
1. Open the substrate catalog from the Job Ticket or Job Properties dialog.
2. Select the substrate and click Select Substrate.
Using the Substrate Catalog 99

NOTE: When you select a substrate from the catalog, only the substrate name is saved into the
Job Ticket or job properties. Additional information in the catalog (properties and press name) are
not saved.
In the Job Ticket, the substrate selection is independent of the press job destination.
Modifying the substrate post-RIP

When the press job is created, the substrate information in the Job Ticket becomes part of the press
job properties. You can use the Job Properties dialog box to modify the assigned substrates. This is
important if a press job's status is Needs Attention because the specified substrate is not available on
the assigned press.
NOTE: For workflows to non-PrintLink presses: Once the press job has been loaded onto the press
(in the Loaded Jobs list or Print Queue), the substrate can no longer be modified in the Production Pro
Print Server.
For information on modifying the substrate(s) in job properties, see Job Properties dialog box - Substrate
page on page 249.
Using intended substrate names

NOTE: Intended substrates and substrate mapping is provided for compatibility with non-PrintLink
presses. Substrate mapping is not supported on PrintLink presses.
An intended substrate is a general substrate name that gets mapped to an actual substrate when the
press job is loaded onto the press. The mapping is done by the press software.
Production Pro Print Server has a set of pre-defined intended substrate names. These names appear
in the Substrate Catalog. There are no properties (for example, length, width, weight) associated with
intended substrates, and no press is listed in the Press column.
To view the pre-defined intended substrate names:

1. Open the Substrate Catalog.
2. Click the Press column header to sort the list. The substrates with no press name are intended
substrates.
When you specify an intended substrate in the Job Ticket:
● If the job is loaded onto a non-PrintLink press, the press software will map the intended name to
the name of an actual substrate. If the mapping does not exist on the press, the job status is set
to Needs Attention.
● If the job is assigned to a PrintLink press, Production Pro Print Server will treat the intended name
as though it were an actual substrate name. If there is no actual substrate with that name defined
on the assigned press, the job status is set to Needs Attention.

11 Managing press jobs
What is a press job?

When a Master Job is submitted, its job file is usually not in a format the press can use. The purpose of
automated workflows is to create print-ready files — files in a format that can be consumed by the press
— and route them to a destination press. These press-ready files are called press jobs. The file format
is called JLYT (pronounced J-light).
Usually, there is a single press job created for each Master Job. However, a Master Job may eventually
have multiple press jobs associated with it.
Press jobs are generated in several ways:
● By the RIP. When a non press-ready job file is imported, it flows to the press via pre-RIP processors.
● When a press-ready job file is imported. Since the file does not require RIPping, it flows to the press
without using the pre-RIP processors or the Production RIP Manager.
● When an existing press job is duplicated or copied to another press. In this case, the two press
jobs are associated with the same Master Job.
Press jobs and Master Jobs

A press job is always associated with a single Master Job, although a Master Job can have multiple
press jobs.
When you select a Master Job in the Master Jobs list, its press job(s) are shown in the Press jobs
for list beneath the Master Jobs list.
The press job and Master Job status are related:
● Deleting a Master Job deletes all associated press jobs.
● Completing or deleting a press job can affect the associated Master Job.
Press job components

A press job is made up of:
● A printable image. These are the spreads of the press job. The Job Previewer provides the ability
to view the details of the printable image.
● A set of instructions for printing: for example, color, substrate, stacking, image placement, and
imposition. The Job Properties window provides the ability to modify these instructions.
Where are press jobs stored?

When a press job is created, it is sent to the destination specified in the Job Ticket.
Internally, the press job is a JLYT file. It is useful to understand where this file is physically located, since
its location has some affect on how you interact with it.
What is a press job? 101

Jobs sent to PrintLink presses
When a job is sent to a PrintLink press, the actual job file is loaded onto the press controller for that
press.
When the job is sent to the Held Jobs list or Print Queue, the press controller sends a job reference to
the press. This makes the job visible in the press software so that it can be modified and printed by the
press operator. The job does not appear in a press controller view because it is considered to be “at a
press.”
The system maintains the proper relationship between the job and its job reference. For example,
moving a job from the Print Queue to the Press Controller Jobs list retracts the job reference so that the
job is no longer visible in the press software.
Jobs sent to non-PrintLink presses

When a job is sent to a non-PrintLink press, the location of the job file depends on which list it is in:
● If the job is sent to the Print Queue or Held (Loaded) Jobs list, the job file gets loaded directly onto
the press.
● If the job is sent to the Press Controller Jobs list, the job is loaded onto the press controller. The
job is not visible in the press software. In the press controller view of jobs, the job is listed as having
been assigned to the press.
Moving the file to or from the Press Controller Jobs list involves transferring the job file between press
memory and the press controller. Depending on the size of job, there may be a delay.
Jobs sent to press groups

There is no system storage associated with press groups.
When the Job Ticket specifies a press group as the destination, the load-balancing utility internally
makes a press assignment prior to sending the job to the RIPs. After the job has been RIPped, it is sent
to the designated press.
Jobs sent to press controllers

If a job is sent to a press controller:
● The press controller does not send a job reference to the press.
● In the Press Controller Jobs list, the job is shown as not assigned to a press.
PrintLink presses — Print Queue and Held Jobs list

Both the Held Jobs list and Print Queue display jobs that are also visible to the press operator. The job
files reside on the press controller; however, a job reference has been sent to the press, and the jobs
are visible in the press software.
Since these jobs are visible in both Production Pro Print Server and the press software, there are locking
mechanisms to prevent them from being modified in two places at the same time. See System locks
102 Chapter 11 Managing press jobs

The Press Controller Jobs list
This list displays jobs that have been routed to the press controller by the Job Ticket. These jobs are
visible only in the press controller view, which means that the press operator cannot see or interact with
the jobs. The jobs are print-ready and can be sent to a press or exported as needed.
non-PrintLink presses - the Held (Loaded) Jobs list and

Print Queue
Both the Held (Loaded) Jobs list and Print Queue display jobs that are currently loaded into press
memory.
● The jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list are stored in the press memory but are not queued to be
printed.
● The jobs in the Print Queue are waiting to be printed. If the press is running, the job at the top of
the queue is usually being printed.
Press jobs automatically move from the Print Queue to the Load List when:
● The job is printed (if the job properties are set to return the job to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list).
● The press software is shutdown and restarted. All jobs in the Print Queue are moved.
Press jobs automatically move from the Load List to the Print Queue when:
● The job is checked for proofing in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list. See Printing a proof on page 108.
● The Job Ticket is set to move the job to the Print Queue as soon as it is loaded.
Print Queue
The Print Queue makes jobs available to the press software for printing. It displays jobs in print: the job
at the top of the queue is either printing or next to be printed.
Jobs are placed in the Print Queue automatically when loaded (based on a setting in the Job Ticket) or
manually from the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
● If the jobs are placed automatically, they are added to the end of the set of jobs of the same priority
according to the time they finish loading.
● If the jobs are placed manually, they are added to the end of the set of jobs of the same priority or
to the position to which they are dragged.
● You can move jobs to specific positions in the Print Queue to change the print order.
When the press is running in Continuous mode, it prints each job as it reaches the top of the queue.
When the press is in Step mode, it waits to start printing each job until the operator clicks Print. After a
job is printed, it is removed from the Print Queue and is either deleted, retained, or returned to the Held
(Loaded) Jobs list, depending on its job properties.
Held (Loaded) Jobs list

The Held (Loaded) Jobs list holds jobs in press memory that are not queued to print. This list can be
filtered or sorted on any column. New jobs arriving in the list are displayed according to the current filter/
sort.
Jobs can be moved to the Print Queue, sent to another press or press controller, exported to an archive
file, completed, or deleted in this list.
The Press Controller Jobs list 103

Moving (re-ordering) jobs in the Print Queue
You can reorder jobs in the Print Queue to change the order in which they are printed. You cannot sort
the Print Queue by the values in a column.
Priority and the Print Queue

You can customize the Print Queue and Held (Loaded) Jobs list to display the Priority column. Priorities
are expressed as a number between 1 and 100.
A press job usually inherits its priority from the Job Ticket (low = 25, medium = 50, high = 75, rush =
100). The job's priority can be changed in the General tab of the Job Properties dialog box.
The job's priority determines where it goes when it first enters the Print Queue.
● By default, jobs are arranged by priority, with the highest priority job at the top.
● Jobs with equal priorities are arranged in the order they were received.
Moving a job in the Print Queue overrides a job's priority without changing it.
To move jobs up or down in the Print Queue:

1. Select the job(s) to move.
● In the Queue menu, click Move up or Move down.
● Right-click and select Move up or Move down from the pop-up menu.
●
Click Move up or Move down in the toolbar.
● Drag the job(s) to a new location in the queue.
Moving jobs between lists

Moving a job from the Held (Loaded) Jobs list to the Print Queue schedules the job for printing. Moving
a job from the Print Queue to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list takes it off the print schedule.
To manually move jobs from the Held (Loaded) Jobs list to the Print Queue:
1. Select one or more jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
a. In the Queue menu, click Move to Print Queue.
b. Right-click and select Move to Print Queue from the popup menu.
c.
Click the Move loaded to print toolbar button.

When the jobs arrive in the Print Queue they are sorted, first by priority and then by received
time.
d. Drag the job(s) to the Print Queue (Microsoft Windows systems only).
i. If the jobs are dragged to a specific highlighted location in the queue, they are put in that
location.
ii. If the jobs are dragged to the Print Queue area with no highlighted location, they are
sorted by priority and received time.
To manually move jobs from the Print Queue to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list:
1. Select one or more jobs in the Print Queue.

a. In the Queue menu, click Move to Held (Loaded) List.
b. Right-click and select Move to Held (Loaded) List from the pop-up menu.
c.
Click the Move from print to loaded toolbar button.
d. Drag the job(s) to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
When the jobs arrive in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list, their locations depend on how the list is already
sorted.
Modifying jobs in the press controller views

You can perform the following operations to press jobs listed in a press controller view:
● Modify the job properties.
● Modify the job imposition.
● View the job in the Job Previewer.
● Group multiple jobs and modify the properties of the new grouped job.
● Copy the job to another press controller or press.
● View a composition preview.
● Duplicate the job.
● Move the job to the Held (Loaded) list.
● Move the job to the Print Queue.
● Open the Job Editor for the job.
● Delete the press job.
● Export the press job.
Duplicating press jobs

Duplicating a press job creates a copy that can be used to print with different job properties. The duplicate
job is associated with the same Master Job as the original job.
Modifying jobs in the press controller views 105

To duplicate a press job:
● Right-click the job in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list and select Duplicate from the popup menu, or
●
Select the job and click the Duplicate toolbar button.
The duplicate job has the original job's name followed by an index number. If a press job is duplicated
multiple times, the index value increases by one each time. For example, the first duplicate will have
“#1” appended, the second will have “#2” appended, and so on. If a duplicate is duplicated, an additional
index is appended, such as #1#1, and so on. You can change the job name and other specifications in
the Job Properties dialog box.
Exporting a press job

Exporting a press job saves the job as a press-ready JLYT file. The exported file can be imported as a
new job on this or another press.
When a variable data job is exported, the resulting JLYT file is not variable. See Exporting and reprinting
variable data jobs on page 145.
An exported press job contains all the press job property information. However, the Job Ticket is not
saved with the exported press job.
To export a press job:
1. In a press or press controller view, select a single job.

NOTE: Press jobs cannot be exported from the Print Queue.
2. Open the Export Job dialog box by any of the following methods:
● In the Job menu, click Export.
● Right-click the job and select Export from the pop-up menu.
●
Click the Export Job toolbar button.

3. Browse to the folder where you want to save the archive file.
For export, the local file system is the system running the application. For example, if you are using
the remote client, exporting to the C: drive will export the file to your local file system.
4. You can use the default name or enter a different name for the file.
The default name is the press job name (characters not allowed in file names are replaced by
underscore characters).
5. Click Save.
Finding the Master Job for a press job

To locate the Master Job associated with a press job:
1. Select the job in a press or press controller view.
2. Select Go to Master Job in the popup menu.
The Master Jobs list is displayed with the Master Job selected.
NOTE: HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server and Production Pro Print Server use different
databases to store Master Jobs. Therefore, they cannot “see” each other's Master Jobs. For example,
if a Master Job was submitted using HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server, the Go to command in
Production Pro Print Server will not find that Master Job.
Deleting press jobs

To release press memory, press jobs can be deleted:
● From the Retained Jobs dialog. In a press view, click the Retained Jobs toolbar button, or click
Retained Jobs in the Job menu. Then select the jobs to delete and click Delete. Note that jobs
are only visible in this list after they have been printed.
● Manually from the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or Print Queue
● Automatically after printing, using settings in the General tab of the Job Properties dialog box.
A deleted job cannot be brought back, but a new Master Job can be created for the same job files:
● If the Master Job is still in the Master Jobs list, it can be resubmitted.
● If the press job was saved in the Retained Jobs list after printing, it can be reactivated. See Using
the retain list on page 112
● If the job was exported, the archived job file can be re-imported.
To delete a press job manually:

1. Select one or more jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or Print Queue.
● In the Job menu, click Delete.
● Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
●
Click the Delete toolbar button.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Finding the Master Job for a press job 107

3. If requested, choose a delete option.
4. Click OK. The press job(s) are deleted. The effect on the associated Master Job(s) depends on
system and processor settings.
Modifying press job imposition

Press jobs are post-RIP jobs that have been associated with a particular press. Even though these jobs
are post-RIP, the imposition for these jobs can still be set or modified since imposition exists outside of
the RIP.
NOTE: Press jobs loaded onto a press cannot be modified on systems remote from that press. In
Production Pro Print Server, jobs in Post-RIP Storage can be modified on the server.
To change the imposition of a press job:

1. In the Job Manager, select a press.
2. In the Print Queue or Held Jobs Panels, right-click on a job and select Job Properties.
3. In the Job Properties dialog box, click the Imposition tab (along the left).
4. Select an Imposition template from the drop-down list at the top of the Imposition dialog box.
5. Update the imposition's default settings as required for this job. Changes are shown in the layout
area.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
Printing a proof
The Check as Proof function marks a press job to print a single copy of all pages when it reaches the
press. The proof copy does not count against the total number of copies to print.
Jobs can be checked for proof in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or Print Queue. To see which jobs are
checked for proof, use the View Options dialog box to add the Proof column.
To check a job and print a proof:
1. Select a job in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.

2. Mark the job to proof by using any of the following methods:
a. Right-click on the job and select Check as Proof from the pop-up menu
b. In the Queue menu, click Check as Proof
c.
Click the Check as Proof toolbar button.
3. The marked job is placed at the top of the Print Queue, beneath any job that is currently printing
(non-PrintLink only).

4. The press prints one full copy of the marked job:
a. If the press is in Continuous mode, it will print one full copy of the marked job when the job
reaches the top of the queue.
b. If the press is in Step mode, you must click the Print or Proof button when the marked job
reaches the top of the queue.
5. After the proof copy is printed, the job remains in the Print Queue in Waiting for print status. It is
still marked for proof.
NOTE: To print the job after approval, remove the proof marking and print normally.
To remove the “Check as Proof” marking:

Select the marked jobs in the Print Queue (non-PrintLink presses), or move the jobs to the Held (Loaded)
Jobs list (PrintLink presses), and then do any of the following:
● Right-click the jobs and select Uncheck as Proof from the pop-up menu.
● In the Queue menu, click Uncheck as Proof.
●
Click the Uncheck as Proof toolbar button.
Setting after-print behavior for press jobs

By default, press jobs on PrintLink presses go to the Retained Jobs list after they are printed. Jobs on
non-PrintLink presses return to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list. This behavior can be changed in the job
properties of individual press jobs.
To modify after-print behavior for a press job:

1. While the job is in the Held (Loaded) list, select it and open the Job Properties dialog to the General
tab.
2. Choose an option:
● To delete the job automatically, click Remove press job from press.
● To save a copy in the retain list, type the length of time to retain in the Day, Hr., or Min. fields.
After printing, the job will be disconnected from its Master Job. While it is in the retain list, it
is available to reactivate as a new Master Job. After the indicated time elapses, the job is not
recoverable.
3. Click OK.
Setting a press job to Printing Done

Production Pro Print Server provides a Printing Done command that allows you to indicate that printing
activity is completed for a press job.
The Printing Done command is available:
● On HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server.
● For local press jobs on HP Remote Production Client connected to Production Pro Print Server.
Setting after-print behavior for press jobs 109

When a press job is set to Printing Done:
● A green check mark appears over the press job status icon—for example, .
● The status of the press job is not changed.
● The value in the Printing Done column is set to yes.
● All other press jobs for the same Master Job are also set to Printing Done.
NOTE: Printing Done is not one of the default columns. To change the columns, click Options
in the View menu.
● The Master Job associated with the press job is released to move to the next step in its workflow.
Printing Done is usually set manually for non-PrintLink presses. However, it is set automatically for
jobs that enter the retain list.
There is no undo command for Printing Done; when printing done is set to yes, it cannot be reset to
no.
Note to remote users: Your user permissions determine whether or not you can perform this task.
To set press job(s) to Printing Done:
1. Select one or more press jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or Press Controller Jobs list.
● Right-click and select Set to Printing Done from the pop-up menu.
● In the Actions menu, click Set to Printing Done.
How setting Printing Done affects Master Job status

If the press is the last processor in the workflow, setting a job to Printing Done changes the status/
progress of the associated Master Job to complete or awaiting review. See How jobs are set to
complete on page 58 for more information.
Grouping press jobs

Grouping makes a new press job based on the content of a selected set of press jobs. The new job is
independent of the original jobs.
● The new grouped job has a single set of job properties.
● Moving, deleting, or changing the status of the grouped job has no effect on the original jobs.
● The grouped job is an ordinary press job: You can change its job properties, send it to the Press
Queue, print a proof, duplicate it, or export it.
NOTE: You cannot edit the job properties for a grouped job if the job is on a non-PrintLink press.
The system creates a new Master Job for the new grouped job. The grouped job has no connection to
the original Master Jobs.
NOTE: Remote press jobs on non-PrintLink presses cannot be grouped. Remote press jobs on
PrintLink presses cannot be grouped while the jobs are in the print queue.

Why group jobs?
Group jobs to simplify handling of large numbers of jobs. A typical candidate for a grouped job is a book,
where all the chapters have been sent to the press as individual jobs.
Jobs should not be grouped when:
● Information from every job's original Master Job form is needed for finishing, shipping, or billing.
● Keeping the history of the original Master Jobs is important (for example, when measuring average
master-job processing times).
To group press jobs:

1. Select two or more press jobs (the jobs cannot be in the Print Queue).
2. In the Job menu, click Group Jobs.
3. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons, if necessary, to reorder the list. The order has
significance:
● The job properties for the grouped job are derived from the first job in the list.
● The grouped job is built from the original jobs in the order they are listed.
4. If you need to remove a job from the group, select the job and click Delete. (This does not delete
the original job.)
5. Enter a name for the new grouped job (the default is the first job's name followed by _group_ and
the number of original jobs).
6. If you want to remove the original jobs from the Held (Loaded) Jobs list, click Delete original
jobs.
7. Click OK.
Sending a job to another press or press controller

Sending a job from one press or press controller to another creates a copy of the press job on the
destination press or press controller. The new press job contains all the job property information of the
original job.
To copy press jobs to other presses or press controllers:
You can use the Job Manager as a quick way to copy press jobs between presses and between presses
and Post-RIP Storage.
1. Select one or more press jobs in a press view.
2. Drag the job(s) to the destination in the Job Manager.
Sending a job to another press or press controller 111

To copy jobs from one press to another (Production Pro Print Server and HP SmartStream OnBoard Print
Server):
1. In a press view, select one or more jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
● Do not select jobs from the Print Queue.
2. Open the Send to Press dialog box:
● In the Actions menu, click Copy Job to, or
● Right-click the job(s) and select Copy Job to from the pop-up menu, or
●
Click the Copy Job to toolbar button .
3. Specify the destination:
● Select a destination from the menu.
● Type a hostname (example: indigo_3) or IP address (example: 15.405.223.004).
4. Click OK.
● The original press jobs remain in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
● If the copy operation fails, the other press might not be online, or the hostname or IP address
may not be valid. Check with the other press's operator or the network administrator.
To copy jobs from one press or press controller to another press or press controller (Production Pro Print
Server):
1. In a press controller view or press view, select one or more jobs in the list.
2. Open the Copy Job to dialog box:
● In the Actions menu, click Copy Job to, or
● Right-click the job(s) and select Copy Job to from the pop-up menu, or
●
Click the Copy Job to toolbar button .
3. Specify the destination press or press controller:
● Select a destination from the menu.
● Type a hostname (example: indigo_3) or IP address (example: 15.405.223.004).
4. Click OK. The job is copied to the specified destination.
● The original press job remains in the list.
● If the copy operation fails, the other press or press controller might not be online, or the
hostname or IP address may not be valid. Check with the other press's operator or the network
administrator.
Using the retain list

The retain list is a short-term storage solution that saves press job files for re-printing.
When a job is placed in the retain list, it is automatically set to printing done.

A job in the retain list can be reactivated by moving it back to the Held (Loaded) Jobs list or the Print
Queue. Reactivating a job:
● Removes the job from the retain list.
● Creates a new press job from the retained job (like importing an archived job).
● Creates a new Master Job for the new job.
The General tab of the Job Properties dialog box contains settings that specify whether the job will be
sent to the retain list after printing and how long it will be retained.
To delete or reactivate retained jobs:

1. Open the Retained Jobs dialog box by either of the following methods:
● In the Job menu, click Retained Jobs
●
Click the Retained Jobs toolbar button.
2. The Retained Jobs dialog box shows a list of saved jobs and the length of time (days, hours, or
minutes) each job will be stored after printing.
NOTE: The retention time doesn't “count down” until after the job is printed.
3. Select a job from the list and choose an action:

● Click Move to Load List or Move to Print Queue to reactivate the job in the appropriate
location.
● Click Delete to remove the job from press memory.
4. Repeat for additional jobs and click Close when finished.
Using the retain list 113

12 Modify press job properties
Job Properties refers to the settings of a press job that determine how it is printed on the press.
Job Properties can be edited when a press job is in the following locations:
● PrintLink press: In the Press Controller Jobs list or the Held list.
● non-PrintLink press: In the Press Controller Jobs list or the Loaded (non-PrintLink) list.
You can edit the Job Properties for a group of press job files. Even though there is no limitation on the
number of jobs you can select for that group, for performance reasons, you should choose less than
300 jobs.
To edit the Job Properties of multiple press jobs

1. Use the Job Manager to open a press view.
2. In a press view, select multiple press jobs from the Held list or Press Controller Jobs list (use Ctrl
+ Click, or Shift + Click to select multiple press jobs.)
3. On the Job menu, click Job Properties.
When editing the Job Properties of multiple press jobs, the only tabs available for editing are the General
tab, the Substrate tab, the Stacking tab, and the Comments tab.
Not all fields within these tabs are editable. Non-editable fields appear grayed out.
For editable fields of the General tab, the Substrate tab, the Stacking tab and the Comments tab, the
following rules apply:
If all jobs in the group share the same setting, that value is displayed, and if editable, any value you
enter in that field will be applied to all jobs in the group, overwriting each job's current setting.
If all jobs in the group do not share the same setting, no value is displayed, and if editable, any value
you enter in that field will be applied to all jobs in the group, overwriting each job's current setting. If you
do not enter a value for that particular field's setting, no changes will be made to that setting for the
individual jobs.
When you click OK at the bottom of the Job Properties dialog box, any changes you have made to the
group of job files will be applied.
See the rest of this chapter for more information on the settings for each tab.
Edit the Job Properties of a single press job

2. In a press view, select a press job from the Held list or Press Controller Jobs list.
3.
Double-click the press job, or click on the toolbar, or right-click on the job or Job menu and
click Job Properties.
When you open the job properties for a press job, that job becomes locked to other users; it cannot be
modified or copied.
See these topics for instructions on using the Job Properties dialog box:
114 Chapter 12 Modify press job properties

● Getting it right — finding and fixing errors
● Setting the printing range
● Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT jobs
● Setting simplex/duplex for a press job
● Specifying the workflow and retention for a press job
● Modifying the substrate(s) for a press job
● Setting the stacking order for a press job
● Adjusting image orientation and size for a press job
● Modifying the color LUT for a press job
● Using the press controller's LUT library
● Making color corrections
● Editing the separations of a press job
● Specifying the printing ink order
● Modifying linework and resolution settings for a press job
● Recording comments for a press job
● Viewing the press job log
● Legacy presses — editing press job properties
Getting it right — finding and fixing errors

The Job Properties dialog has an on-the-fly error-checking system that alerts you when you have entered
an invalid value in a field. When the system notices an invalid value, it displays a popup message that
indicates the value is invalid and sometimes indicates how it can be fixed.
The system can also display a cumulative list of errors from all pages and tabs in the Job Properties
dialog. To view this list, press Enter while the cursor is in any field that contains an invalid value or simply
click OK. Each error is hyperlinked so you can click the error type and go directly to the error location.
Getting it right — finding and fixing errors 115

Setting the printing range
Static jobs
1. Open the Job Properties dialog for the desired job.

2. In the Number of copies field, type the number of copies to print, or use the spinner to select the
number.
3. Under Sheet range per copy, click All or enter a range of sheets to print.
The Total sheets to print label indicates how many sheets will be printed based on your copy and
sheet-range settings.
Personalized JLYT jobs

2. In the Number of copies field, type the number of copies to print, or use the spinner to select the
number.
3. Under Print Range Per Copy, click All or Specify Sheet/Cycle Range.
4. If you are printing a range, under Sheet range per copy click All or enter a range of sheets to
print.
5. If you are printing a range, under Cycles choose the cycle range to print.
The Total sheets to print label indicates how many sheets will be printed based on your copy and
sheet-range settings.
See Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT jobs on page 116 for an explanation of
sheets and cycles.
Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT

jobs
When working with a variable JLYT file, the Job Properties dialog offers sheet and cycle controls that
allow you to print selected portions of the personalized job.
● A sheet is a piece of substrate (usually paper) that contains a spread on one side (simplex) or both
sides (duplex).
● A cycle is the number of sheets that must be printed in order to print one full record of the
personalized job.
The following tables shows some example sheet and cycle scenarios for various impositions. Assume
that you are using a database file that has 1000 customer names (records) in it. The accompanying
illustrations show the content of one cycle.

Imposition Pages per record Simplex or Sheets per record Total sheets Total cycles
duplex
1 up 1 Simplex 1 1000 1000
J. Smith
Imposition Pages Simplex or Sheets per record Total sheets Total cycles
duplex
2 up 1 Simplex 1 500 500
J. Smith
D. Jones
duplex
1 up 2 Simplex 2 2000 1000
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 1 Page 2
Sheet 1 Sheet 2
Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT jobs 117

duplex
1 up 4 Duplex 2 2000 1000
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 1 Page 3
Sheet 1 Sheet 2
Side A Side A
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 2 Page 4
Sheet 1 Sheet 2
Side B Side B
duplex
2 up 4 Simplex 4 2000 500
J. Smith J. Smith J. Smith J. Smith
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4
D. Jones D. Jones D. Jones D. Jones
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4
duplex
2 up 4 Simplex 2 2000 1000
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 1 Page 3
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 2 Page 4
Sheet 1 Sheet 2

duplex
2 up 4 Duplex 2 1000 500
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 1 Page 3
D. Jones D. Jones
Page 1 Page 3
Sheet 1 Sheet 2
Side A Side A
J. Smith J. Smith
Page 2 Page 4
D. Jones D. Jones
Page 2 Page 4
Sheet 1 Sheet 2
Side B Side B
Using the Sheets and Cycles controls on the General tab of the Job Properties dialog, it is therefore
possible to print only sheet 3 of cycle 50, all sheets of cycle 123, or the last sheet of all cycles.
Setting simplex/duplex for a press job

If the job contains more than one sheet, the duplex option is available.
2. In the Duplex/Simplex box, choose Simplex or Duplex.
3. If the duplex option is selected, choose a duplex type from the accompanying box. Duplex types
are:
● Both: Both sides of the duplex sheet(s) are sent to the press.
● Side 1: Only side 1 of the duplex sheet(s) is sent to the press, and the press prints these odd-
numbered sheets on only one side of the substrate.
● Side 2: Only side 2 of the duplex sheet(s) is sent to the press, and the press prints these even-
numbered sheets on only one side of the substrate.
4. When printing both sides of the duplex sheet, choose the Tumble option to print the second side
of the sheet by turning the sheet top to bottom so that the opposite edge is the lead edge.
Setting simplex/duplex for a press job 119

Specifying the workflow and retention for a press job
You can specify what you want to happen to a job when it is sent to the press. You can also specify
what you want to happen to the job after it is printed.
2. In the List Selection box, choose one of the following options:
● Print Queue: The job is queued and will print whenever all jobs higher in the queue have been
printed.
● Held (Loaded) Jobs List: The job is moved to the Held Jobs list (PrintLink) or Loaded list
(non-PrintLink) and needs to be manually placed in the print queue before it can be printed.
3. In the Job Retention box, specify what should happen to the job after it has been printed:
● Retain press job on press for: The press job is retained on the press for the specified amount
of time. At the end of that time, it is deleted.
● Retain press jobs on press indefinitely: The press job is retained on the press until you
manually delete it.
● Delete the job: The press job is removed from the press immediately after it is printed.
Modifying the substrate(s) for a press job

A job gets its initial substrate information from the Ticket Template that is used to create the Job Ticket.
After a job is sent to the press, the substrate information can be changed on the Substrate tab of the
Job Properties dialog.
2. Click the Substrate tab. The current substrate information is displayed in the Substrate
Selection box.
3. In the Sheet Range field, type the sheet range for which you want to change the substrate.
4. In the Substrate list, choose a substrate name. The names in the list are the substrates in the
substrate catalog for assigned press. The first twenty substrates in the catalog are displayed in the
list. To view the full substrate catalog, click the Substrate Catalog link at the bottom of the list.
After choosing a substrate name, the Feeder (Drawer)/Forced - Feeder (Drawer) control updates
to display the drawer number that contains the chosen substrate.
-or-
In the Feeder (Drawer)/Forced - Feeder (Drawer) list, select the drawer that you want to force
the press to use. The Substrate list updates to display the substrate in that drawer.
5. Click Apply.
Setting the stacking order for a press job

2. Click the Stacking tab.
3. If you are printing multiple copies, click Collate to collate the copies.

NOTE: If you are printing a personalized JLTY job, the collation setting determines whether
cycles are collated; the value in the Number of copies field is always set to 1 for personalized
JLYT jobs.
4. Use the Destination list to select a specific stacker on this press. Other choices include Stacker
1, Stacker 2, Stacker 3, Proof Tray, and Divert Path.
5. Select a print order and orientation:
Simplex options
● Page up; Last to first: Sheets are stacked page up with the first sheet of the job on top.
● Page up; First to last: Sheets are stacked page up with the last sheet of the job on top.
● Page down; Last to first: Sheets are stacked page-down with the first sheet of the job on
top.
NOTE: Using this option with a 4-separation job might lower print speed.
● Page down; First to last: Sheets are stacked page-down with the last sheet of the job on
top.
NOTE: Using this option with a 4-separation job might lower print speed.
Duplex options
● Odd up; Last to first: Sheets are stacked odd-page up with the first sheet on top.
● Odd up; First to last: Sheets are stacked odd-page up with the last sheets on top.
● Even up; Last to first: Sheets are stacked even-page up with the first sheet on top.
● Even up; First to last: Sheets are stacked even-page up with the last sheet on top.
6. Select Stack with jog offset if desired. Jogging helps the operator assess the number of sets/
copies/sheets printed by shifting the position of the printed output. Use the Jog offset interval field
to specify the number of sets/copies/sheets to be collected in the stacker before the stacker jogs
the stack.
Adjusting image orientation and size for a press job

2. Click the Image Placement tab.
3. Use the Orientation controls to adjust how the image is placed on the sheet.
● Mirror flips the image horizontally.
● Rotate 180° rotates the image by 180° on the sheet.
● Mirror and Rotate 180° used together flip the image horizontally and rotate it 180°.
4. In the Dimensions box, use the Image size list to select a different image size. The sample image
and dimensions are updated on the preview sheet shown on the left side.
Adjusting image orientation and size for a press job 121

Modifying the color LUT for a press job
2. Click the Color Control tab. The Job LUT field displays the current LUT.
3. Use the Select a separation to view/edit list to select the separation for which you want to edit
the LUT. The LUT graph and the LUT input/output values table update to reflect the currently
selected LUT. The following options affect the contents of the LUT graph:
● Show all: Displays the LUT curves for all separations. The LUT points for the selected
separation are surrounded by squares.
● Show diagonal: Displays a diagonal line from the 0,0 point to the 100,100 point.
4. Modify the job LUT information as needed:
● To add a LUT pair, click the existing LUT pair that is immediately below where you want to
add the new pair. Then click . A new LUT pair is added between the selected pair and the
pair above it, with its initial values determined by interpolation.
● To edit a LUT pair, select the pair and then use the two spinners below the table to edit the
input and output values. When editing LUT pairs, the resulting LUT point must fall in between
the LUT points above and below it, thus resulting in a steadily increasing LUT curve.
●
To delete a LUT pair, select the pair and then click .
● To copy the LUT pair values of the currently selected separation to all other separations in
the job, click Copy to All Seps.
●
To smooth the LUT curve, click . This will adjust the LUT points where necessary to
eliminate spikes or dips in the LUT curve.
If you want to save the customized LUT so it can be used on future jobs, click Save LUT as. You will
need to give the LUT a name and then specify whether the LUT should be saved for all separations or
only the current one in use. If you select all separations, the LUTs of each separation are saved as a
set. Note that the saved LUT will only be available for jobs on the press controller associated with the
job you are currently editing.
Using the press controller's LUT library

The LUT Library dialog is used to select a saved LUT to use on the current job or to delete a saved
LUT.
2. Click the Color Control tab. The Job LUT field displays the name of the current LUT set.
3. Click LUT Library. The list shows the existing LUTs for the press controller and the separation(s)
for which it was originally saved. Five asterisks (*****) in the Separations column indicates that
the LUT is system provided.
4. To load a LUT for the current job, select the LUT name, select the separation to which it should be
applied, and then click Select. Note that if you choose to load the LUT to all separations, the LUT
list is filtered so that it only shows the saved LUT sets that have the same separations marked for
printing as the currently selected job.
-or-

To delete a saved LUT, select the LUT name, and then click Delete. This will not affect any jobs
that are currently using the LUT because the LUT values are already embedded in the press job.
You cannot delete a system LUT.
Making color corrections

2. Click the Color Control tab. The Job LUT field displays the current LUT.
3. Use the Dot Area (DA) of 50% field or accompanying slider to adjust the dot area value for the
current LUT. Dot area is the percentage of an area covered by a halftone dot, ranging from no dot
at 0% to a solid ink density at 100%. The size of the dots is stated in percentage of the area
occupied. This setting determines what the dot area will be at the 50% mark on the LUT graph.
4. Use the Optical density adjustment of 100% field or the accompanying slider to adjust the optical
density for the current LUT. Optical density is a measure of the relative difference between a white
area and a toned or black area. It is inversely proportional to the amount of light reflected or
transmitted through the sample.
5. Use the Contrast field or the accompanying slider to adjust the contrast of the current LUT. The
Contrast controls are only active if the job consists of CMY or CMYK separations marked for
printing. Otherwise, the Contrast controls are disabled.
6. Use the Brightness field or the accompanying slider to adjust the brightness of the current LUT.
The Brightness controls are only active if the job consists of CMY or CMYK separations marked
for printing. Otherwise, the Brightness controls are disabled.
Editing the separations of a press job

2. Click the Separations tab. The Separation Properties box lists all current separations.
3. Select the separation that you want to edit.
4. Click Edit. The Edit Separation Properties dialog opens.
5. Edit the following settings as needed:
● Print: Choose whether the separation is printed.
NOTE: If all separations print of a job is turned off, a warning dialog box is displayed.
● Ink: Choose the ink name to be used for the separation. For more information on how to set
light ink, see Using light inks on page 76.
● Screen angle: Choose the screen angle to use for this separation. Screen angles are
predefined in screen sets that are designed to provide the best print results for each ink.
● Double hit: Choose whether the separation is double hit. When a separation is double hit,
the press doubles the separation levels during printing for the selected ink, and it also doubles
the repeat levels of the ink in the printing order. Separation levels or repeat levels for one ink
cannot be more than 32.
6. Click OK.
Making color corrections 123

Specifying the printing ink order
2. Click the Separations tab. The Printing Ink Order box lists the current inks and their printing order.
3.
To move an ink in the printing order, select the ink and then use the or buttons.
4.
To add an ink, click . The ink is added to the list and given a Repeat value of 1. The Repeat
value is the number of ink repetitions for the separation.
5.
To delete a separation, select the separation and then click . You cannot delete an ink from
the ink-printing order if it is the only instance of an ink that is marked for printing.
You can edit the Repeat value of an ink by clicking the existing value and typing a new number.
If Use default ink printing order is selected, the ink printing order is automatically reset to the value
you choose from the Use ink printing order list. Each PrintLink press has one default ink printing order
defined on the press. non-PrintLink presses can have more than one default ink printing order defined
on the press. Because default ink-printing order definitions are press specific, the default ink-printing
controls are disabled if the job is not assigned to a press.
Modifying linework and resolution settings for a press job

These options are not available for some non-PrintLink presses.
2. Click the Linework tab. The existing job resolution is displayed at the top of the page.
3. Turn on Adaptive Halftoning if desired. When using HP Adaptive Halftoning, the system analyzes
text and images as they are being printed, adding dots to fill gaps at the edges to produce sharp
text and images that enhance the quality of printed pieces without affecting color stability.
Halftoning should be available for all presses.
4. Turn on Line smoothing (RET) if desired. This option smooths solid lines if the resolution is less
than 800 dpi. It is not available if the resolution (or all of the resolutions for multi-resolution jobs) is
over 800 dpi.
5. Turn on Line thinning if desired. Then use the accompanying slider to set the thinning adjustment.
Line thinning compensates solid linework width for dot gain changes.
Recording comments for a press job

The Comments tab allows the DFE operator to type comments that can be viewed by the press operator.
2. Click the Comments tab.
3. Type comments in the text box. Capacity is 128 characters.

Viewing the press job log
2. Click the Log tab.
Legacy presses — editing press job properties

After a press job is loaded on a non-PrintLink press, the job properties can no longer be edited within
Production Pro Print Server. Jobs assigned to a legacy press that are still on a press controller can be
edited within Production Pro Print Server. The procedure for editing these jobs is to open the Job
Properties dialog the same as if the job were assigned to a PrintLink press.
If Production Pro Print Server is run locally on non-PrintLink press, the job properties can be edited via
the old MMI job properties dialog box.
Viewing the press job log 125

13 Previewing and editing press jobs
Previewing a press job

Use the Job Preview to preview spreads before a job is sent to the press. The Job Preview does not
allow you to make changes to the job. You can open up to three Job Preview dialogs at the same time.
When the preview dialog is open for a job, the job is locked and cannot be opened by another user.
NOTE: The Job Preview dialog is only available for jobs on a press controller or PrintLink press.
Use the following procedure to open the Job Preview dialog.

2. In the press view, select a press job.
3. Right-click and select Job Preview, or click Job Preview in the Job menu. or click the Job
Preview button on the toolbar .

In the Job Preview dialog you can do the following:
● Preview individual separations— In the Separations box, select the separation name to view the
job with only the selected separation visible. Multiple separations can be selected at the same time.
Select Composite to view the composite of all separations. Special colors are indicated by a star
(an RGB definition exists for it) or a questions mark (no RGB definition exists). See Previewing
jobs with special named colors on page 126 for more information about special colors.
● View individual spreads— In the Spread Preview box, click the spread to preview, or use the
Spread arrows to advance through the spreads in sequence. For variable JLYT jobs, use the
Cycle spinner to change the cycle you are previewing.
● Change the preview image quality— Select an image quality from the Quality list. Choices are
best, normal (recommended), and fast. Best provides the highest quality preview image with the
slowest load time, whereas fast has the fastest load time but provides the lowest quality preview
image.
● Change the preview image size and orientation— Use the Zoom control to choose an image size,
or use the magnification controls to adjust the image size. Click to fit the preview
image to the Job Preview dialog. Click to rotate the preview image 90° clockwise.
Previewing jobs with special named colors

If a press job contains a special color, that special color must have a special-color RGB definition saved
in the system in order for the special color to be represented in the on-screen preview. In the
Separations list in Job Preview dialog, a special color that has been defined is accompanied by a star
, whereas an undefined special color is accompanied by a question mark . Undefined special-color
definitions appear as gray in the image preview.
126 Chapter 13 Previewing and editing press jobs

Use the following procedure to define a special color for image previewing purposes:
1. Open the Job Preview dialog for a job. If the job contains an unrecognized special color, the
Undefined Special Colors dialog informs you of this and asks if you want to define the color.
2. Click Define Colors. The Special Colors dialog appears. Existing special-color definitions are
listed. The special color list is a system-wide list, which means you define a special color once and
it is available to preview any jobs on any devices.
NOTE: The Special Colors dialog can also be opened by clicking Special Colors in the Job
Preview dialog.
3. Click Add. A new line is added in the list.
4. Click the Special Color cell of the new line and type a name for the new special color.
5. Click the Red, Green, and Blue cells of the new line and type the desired color values, or click
Color Chooser and use the color picker to select or create an RGB color.
6. Click OK.
Saving a PDF preview

You can save a high-resolution PDF preview of a press job. The file is page-broken by spreads, and
you can select which spreads to save.
To save a PDF composition preview

1. Select a press job in the Loaded Jobs list.
2. In the Actions menu, click Composition preview.
3. In the Create Composition Preview dialog box:
a. Select the spread range — all spreads or a range of spreads.
b. Specify a destination file. The file name defaults to the press job name.
c. Click OK.
Editing Press Jobs

NOTE: Press jobs loaded onto a press or a press controller cannot be modified on systems remote
from that device.
The press software provides the ability to edit press jobs using the Job Editor. The Job Editor lets you:
Legacy:
● View a job exactly as it will be printed on the press (print preview).

● Change the position of items in a job.
● Align groups of items.
● Copy and paste items to the same or a different job.
● Delete spreads, elements, or channels in a job.
● Add crop marks to a job.
● Repeat an item across the page (step and repeat).
Saving a PDF preview 127

● Perform job imposition.
● Create a simple personalization job by inserting a multiple-spread job as a channel.
● View the hierarchy of spreads, elements, and channels within a job.
● Create a new blank job.
To open the Job Editor:
1. In a press view, select a press job in the Loaded or Press Controller Jobs list or select the job in
the Press Controller View. You cannot edit jobs in the Print Queue.
2.
Click the Job Editor toolbar button or click Job Editor in the Job menu.
To get online help for the Job Editor:
● In the Job Editor window, click Help on the Job Editor in the Help menu.
● If you opened this help window from the Production Pro Print Server's Help menu, you can find
Job Editor information using the help table of contents, index, or search.
Creating a New Press Job

The New job function can be used to create a blank press job in the Loaded Jobs list.
● On HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server — in the Loaded Jobs list a new press job can be
created.
● On Production Pro Print Server — in press controller.
A corresponding order is placed in the Order List.
The blank job can be modified with the Job Properties dialog box and Job Editor to create:
● Press test jobs.
● Ganged print files.
To create a new press job:
1.
Click the New Job toolbar button or click New in the Job menu.
● The new press job, called New_Job#1 (2, 3, etc.), appears in the Held/Loaded Jobs list.
Default properties for the new job are defined in the Press Configuration dialog box and Hot
Folder Parameters dialog boxes. Both of these dialog boxes can be opened from the
Options menu of the Press Control panel.
● A placeholder order with the same name appears in the Orders list. Because the order does
not go through pre-RIP processing or RIP, it is not editable.
2. Use the Job Properties See Legacy presses — editing press job properties on page 125 dialog
(see Legacy presses — editing press job properties on page 125) to define the job name, sheet
size, and other print specifications.
● Always define the new job's properties before working on the job in the Job Editor.
3. Use the Job Editor window (see Editing Press Jobs on page 127) to build the job layout. For
example, copy and paste existing print-ready images to create a ganged job.
128 Chapter 13 Previewing and editing press jobs

14 The Log Viewer
Viewing system logs

The Log Viewer provides access to the logs generated by Production Pro Print Server and the press
(es).
To open the Log Viewer, click the Log Viewer tab.
The Log Viewer contains three major areas:
● Log Viewer Settings. Use this area to choose the log mode, select the log type, and filter the entries
to make it easier to find information.
● The log entries. You can use the column headings to sort the entries.
● Details. When you select an entry, additional details are displayed in the pane below the list.
Choosing the log type

There are five types of logs:
● Production System log— system messages generated by Production Pro Print Server.
● Master Job Log — messages pertaining to specific Master Jobs.
● Press System Log — messages generated by the press and press controller software.
● Press consumables log.
● RIP Log - messages generated by the Production RIP Manager.
To choose the log type:

1. Select a log type from the Log type list.
2. If additional options are available, a list is displayed. For example, selecting Press System Log
displays a list for selecting the press.
Monitor and History Modes

The Log Viewer has two basic modes:
● Monitor mode
● History mode
Monitor mode
In Monitor mode:
● The log listing is updated each time a new message of the chosen log type is generated.
● The maximum number of messages displayed is 50.
Viewing system logs 129

To use Monitor mode:
1. Select the Monitor mode radio button.

2. Choose a Log type.
History mode
In History mode:
● The log listing must be updated (refreshed) manually. See Refreshing a log in History mode
on page 134 The easiest way to refresh the log listing is to click Filter Log.
● The log filter is active.
● The maximum number of entries is set by Maximum entries.
To use History mode:

1. Select the History mode radio button.
2. Choose a Log type.
3. Use the Maximum entries list to set the maximum number of messages to be displayed.
4. Optional: use log filters to help locate particular messages. See Filtering system logs
on page 130 .
5. Click Filter Log.
Severity of logged events

Each logged message is assigned a severity rating.
Information Useful information that is not related to a particular problem; for example, RIP has a status
of o.k. Requires no user intervention.
Warning Potentially harmful situation; for example,The Content Store has reached WARNING
levels! May soon require user intervention.
Error An error event has occurred:
● For non-fatal errors, the Master Job or application may still be able to continue; for
example, Failed to start processor: RIP - restart may be necessary.
● If a very severe error has occurred, it may abort the Master Job or application; for
example, Job file is corrupt - job aborted.
Filtering system logs

Log filtering applies to History mode only.
In all cases, the displayed log listing is also limited by the Maximum entries setting.
To filter system logs:

1. Select History mode.
2. Set the Maximum entries.
130 Chapter 14 The Log Viewer

3. Select the time criteria:
● Since last startup: only messages generated since the last startup will be displayed. The
displayed log listing is also limited by the Maximum entries setting. For example, if you select
Maximum entries=20, you will see only the most recent 20 entries recorded since the last
startup.
● Most recent: the most recent entries (subject to Maximum entries). Messages from previous
sessions (startups) may be included.
● Generated on a specific day: select the month, day, and year.
4. Select the severity levels you want to see: Information, Warning, and/or Error.
5. For the Press System Log, click Advanced if you want to do further filtering by Machine State,
Machine Mode, Service Category, or Error Urgency. You can also search for a specific Event
ID.
The Production System Log

The Production System Log contains events and errors generated by the Production Pro Print Server
processors. Messages can be filtered by date and severity.
The Production System Log contains these columns:
● Severity icon
● Date
● Description
These columns cannot be configured.
To display the Production System Log:

1. Display the Log Viewer tab.
2. Select Production System Log from the Log type list.
To filter Production System Log messages, see Filtering system logs on page 130.
To view a message in detail, select it. The entire message appears in the Details panel.
The Master Job Log

The Master Job Log contains Master Job-related errors and events occurring within Production Pro Print
Server.
Master Job Log messages can be filtered by date, severity, and processor. Processor categories filter
messages according to where they occur in the workflow: Product (signifies beginning or end of the
workflow), Approval, Download, Merge, Printing, and RIP. If All is selected, Master Job Log
messages in all processor categories are displayed.
The Master Job Log contains these columns:
● Severity icon
● Date
● Master Job Name
● Processor
The Production System Log 131

● Description
● Internal ID
Master Job Log

The Master Job Log displays the same messages as the Job Log of the Job Ticket. However, the Master
Job Log displays messages for all Master Jobs, whereas the job log displays messages for one Master
Job. To find the errors associated with a particular Master Job, it may be more convenient to view the
Job Log.
To group a Master Job's messages together in the Master Job Log, click the column heading Internal
ID. You can also sort the column Master Job Name, but this is not a unique identifier.
To display the Master Job Log:

1. Click the Log Viewer tab.
2. Select Master Job Log from the Log type list.
To find errors associated with a particular Master Job:
● Click the column heading Internal ID or Master Job Name.
● See Viewing and interpreting the job log on page 77.
The RIP Log

The RIP Log contains basic errors and events pertaining to the Production RIP Manager and RIP
engines.
The RIP Log is a subset of the Production System log. In other words, the RIP Log includes the RIP
messages from the Production System Log.
The RIP Log does not include RIP-related messages from the Master Job Log; those messages pertain
specifically to Master Jobs.
RIP Log messages can be filtered by date and severity.
To display the RIP Log:

2. Select RIP Log from the Log type list.
The Press System Log

The Press System Log contains events and errors occurring within the presses and press controllers.
Press System Log messages have an extensive filtering system. They can be filtered by date and
severity, like all other log messages. They can also be filtered by Machine State, Machine Mode,
Service Category, Error Urgency, or Event ID.
The Press System Log contains the following columns:
Severity icon See Severity of logged Indicates whether or not an event requires attention.
events on page 130

Date Time when the described event occurred.
Description Message about a press event.
Event ID Unique identifier associated with an event message. Often used by technical support to
define a customer's problem.
Record No. The record number of the event in the database, mainly for internal use.
Impression Counter The number of impressions the press has printed since it left the factory. One impression
is one color layer, so a normal four-color (CMYK) picture needs four impressions.
Job ID The internal ID of the job as used by the press.
Paper Counter The number of sheets the press has printed since it left the factory.
Impression counter Number of impressions made by the press since it left the factory.
Record No. Unique identifier for the log entry.
To display the Press System Log:

2. Select Press System Log from the Log type list in the System Log Filter.
3. Select a press.
To filter the Press System Log by date and severity, see Filtering system logs on page 130.
To use the advanced filters:

1. Check Advanced.
2. Select any of the following filter criteria by choosing a value from the list:
a. Machine State - the state of the press.
b. Machine Mode - sub-states of the press, showing what state the press is currently at. Most
of these sub-states occur during Get-Ready or Print.
c. Service Category - a rough categorization of the cause of the problem, such as initialization,
Iserve, or jobs.
d. Error Urgency - a measure of how critical the problem is:
ERRURG_IMMEDIATELY The press stops as quickly as possible.
ERRURG_SEPARATION The press stops as soon as it finishes the current impression.
ERRURG_SIDE The press stops as soon as it finishes all the impressions on the current side.
ERRURG_SHEET The press stops as soon as it finishes the current sheet.
ERRURG_BOOKLET The press stops as soon as it finishes the current collated copy.
ERRURG_NONE The press is not stopped.
The Press System Log 133

To locate a Press System message by Event ID:
1. Select Press System Log from the Log type list and select a press or press controller.
2. Check the Advanced check box.
3. Check the Event ID check box and type the Event ID.
4. Click Filter Log.
The Press Consumables Log

NOTE: This log may not be available for some presses.
The Press Consumables log contains messages on resources used by the press.
Press Consumables log messages can be filtered by date, severity, and subsystem. Subsystem
categories include: BID, Inks, Substrate, Blanket, and PIP.
The Press Consumables log contains the following columns:
● Date and Description (BID)
● Date and Description (Blanket)
● Date and Description (PIP)
● Date, Ink, and Impression Counter (Inks)
● Date, Media Name, and Impression Counter (Substrate)
● Date, Event ID, and Impression Counter (Corona)
To display the Press Consumables log:

2. Select Press Consumables Log from the Log type list.
3. Select a subsystem.
Refreshing a log in History mode

Each time you display a particular log, the messages are read from the log's database.
While a log is being viewed in History mode, new entries are not written to the display. Refreshing the
log updates the log listing to match the database of log entries.
NOTE: In Monitor mode, the log listing is automatically updated.
To manually refresh a log listing in History mode:

● Click Filter Log
● Switch to Monitor mode, then back to History mode
● Switch to another tab, and then back to the Log Viewer tab

Setting the expiration time for log entries
The logs should be cleaned up periodically to:
● Conserve system disk space.
● Make it easier to find the log message you need by removing obsolete ones.
To set the expiration time for log entries:
1. Click Log Settings in the Admin menu to open the Log Settings dialog box.
2. Under Log Cleanup Settings, select the number of days.
Configuring pop-up log messages

You can configure Production Pro Print Server to display a message window when various types of
messages are written to the system log.
To configure pop-up messages:
1. Choose Log Settings from the Admin menu to open the Log Settings dialog box.
2. Choose an option that describes which messages should display pop-up windows:
● Fatal, error, warning, and info (all messages).
● Fatal, error, and warning (excludes information messages).
● Fatal and error (both fatal and non-fatal errors).
● Fatal only (only fatal errors).
● Custom message pop-up options. You can choose different severity criteria for the different
types of events:
◦ Check the check box for the type(s) of events.
● Choose a severity from the list.
3. Click OK.
Exporting a system log

Exporting log entries saves them in .csv (comma-separated values) format. You can save selected
messages or all the displayed messages.
To export log data:

1. Display the log entries you want to export. You can choose the mode, log type, and filters.
2. Optional: select the specific entries you want to export.
3. Click the Export button in the upper right corner of the Log Viewer.
4. If you want to save only the selected items from Step 2, check Selected Items Only.
Setting the expiration time for log entries 135

5. Specify the Export To destination.
● Click Browse to specify a location and file name for the export file and click Save in the
browser window.
● Type a path and file name.
6. Click Export in the Export Current Log dialog box.

15 Variable data (VDP) jobs
Overview of variable data jobs

Variable data (VDP) jobs allow the customer to customize the text, images, or both for a print job. For
example:
● A single custom book cover with the image and text supplied by the purchaser.
● A thousand-copy run of a personalized marketing mailer with a different name, address, and photo
in each copy.
There are three types of VDP jobs: PPML, PPML/T, and variable JLYT.
Submitting variable data jobs

Variable data jobs can be submitted through:
● Hot folders. Component files (images, databases, or templates) are put in sub-folders before the
primary job file is dropped in the hot folder. See Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders
on page 138.
● The Import Job dialog - During import, the system prompts for the location of component files. See
Submitting variable data jobs using the Import dialog on page 140.
● Internet input methods (ISV) - Submission is the same as for static ISV jobs, except that the intent
ticket lists all the files needed for the job. After the files are downloaded, processing follows the
workflow for the variable job file type (PPML or JLYT).
● Yours Truly Designer (YTD) - YTD can be configured to send PPML/T or JLYT jobs directly to the
press using its Create Job function and a YTD-configured “printer” (not the same as a network
printer input method). For instructions, see the Yours Truly Designer documentation.
Variable data jobs cannot be submitted via a network printer.
Components of a variable data job

All variable data jobs have a job file, a template, and some variable data, but these components may
not be in separate files.
● The variable job file controls how data is merged to create the final printed job. It includes references
to variable text or images, which may be embedded in the job file or referenced in external asset
files. Files can be in JLYT, PPML, or PPML/T format.
● The template is the unchanging “background” of the printed job. The variable job file is usually the
template.
● The database contains text and image references to personalize a job. The variable data is merged
with the template one row at a time to create a complete set of spreads for each row. Database
asset files must be in a delimited text format like .csv (comma-separated values) or properly
formatted .txt.
● The images used in a variable data job can be in JPEG, TIFF, PS, EPS, or PDF format, and JLYT
encapsulating ICF.
Overview of variable data jobs 137

See Supported file types on page 34 for details about the variable job file types.
Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders

A hot folder submits a variable data job when either the variable job file or the database file is placed in
the hot folder. To trigger order submission, the file must be placed in the hot folder itself, not one of its
sub-folders. Hot folders accept:
● Job files: Variable JLYT, PPML, and PPML/T.
● Database files: CSV and delimited text (.txt) databases. PPML/T jobs can also use xml database
files.
NOTE: Job files for VDP jobs must be named using appropriate extensions. Otherwise job submission
will fail.
All necessary components of the job must be in place and correctly named before dropping the database
or job file on the hot folder:
● Images - All variable image files must be placed in the appropriate images folder for the hot folder.
Matching occurs by file name; the names of the image files must match the names specified in the
variable job file.
● Database - If the file to be placed in the hot folder is the variable job file (template), the database
file must first be placed in the designated database folder. When the job file is dropped in the hot
folder, it searches the database folder for a database with an exactly matching name. See Matching
Database Files to Variable Job Files on page 144.
● Template - If the file to be placed in the hot folder is the database file, the template (variable job)
file must first be placed in the designated template folder. When the database file is dropped in the
hot folder, it searches the template folder for a job file with a matching name. See Matching
By default, the images, db, and template folders are sub-folders of the hot folder. Their locations can
be configured in the New/Edit Hot Folder dialog.
To submit a Master Job requiring variable images only:

1. PPML and PPML/T job files: Put the image files into the images sub-folder.
JLYT files: If the JLYT file contains embedded absolute paths, place the images in the folders
specified by those paths. If the file contains relative paths, use the images sub-folder as the root.
For example, if the relative path is jpegs/hi_res, place the images in a folder: <hotfolder>/images/
jpegs/hi_res.
2. Put the variable job file into the hot folder. The job is submitted automatically, usually within 5
seconds.
NOTE: The job file must be named with the appropriate file name extension.
138 Chapter 15 Variable data (VDP) jobs

master job
To submit a Master Job requiring a database file - Method 1:

1. Put any required images into the images sub-folder.
2. Put the database file (.csv or .txt) into the database sub-folder.
NOTE: The database file name must match the template file name exactly, excluding file type
extensions.
3. Put the template file into the hot folder. The Master Job is submitted.
The database file remains in the database folder until it is manually deleted. It can be reused by putting
another matching template file in the hot folder.
master job
Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders 139

To submit a Master Job requiring a database file - Method 2:
This method is convenient when you have a Master Job that gets reprinted with different database files.
1. Put any required images into the images sub-folder.
2. Put the template file (.jlyt, .ppml, .ppm) into the template sub-folder.
NOTE: The template file and database file must have matching or similar name. See Matching
3. Put the database file into the hot folder. The Master Job is submitted.
The template file remains in the template folder until it is manually deleted. It can be reused by putting
another matching database file in the hot folder.
master job
If files are missing from the images folder:

1. When an image is referenced in the template that has no matching file in the images sub-folder,
the file fails.
2. To correct missing images in a failed order:
a. Find the missing image file(s) and copy them to the images sub-folder.
b. Right-click on the Master Job and select Resubmit as new.
c. A new order is created and should be processed successfully.
Submitting variable data jobs using the Import dialog

There are two ways to submit variable data jobs using the Import Job dialog:
● Select a variable job file and let the system prompt you for database and image locations.
● Select a database file and let the system prompt you for the variable job file (template) and image
locations.

The Import Jobs dialog accepts: variable JLYT, PPML, and PPML/T job files and CSV and delimited
text databases.
● Variable JLYT, PPML, and PPML/T job files.
● CSV and delimited text files. The size limit for CSV and TXT files is 20 MB.
● For PPML/T jobs: xml database files.
To submit variable data jobs through the Import Job dialog:

1. Prepare your files for import.
Make sure your job file (and database file, if applicable) is named with an appropriate file extension.
If the job file name does not have an appropriate extension, it will be treated as a static job and the
RIP will fail to process the job properly.
2. Ensure that the asset files for VDP jobs are on a share that the target Press Controller software
(also known as iPC) can read.
3. Open the Import Job dialog:
b.
Click Import in the toolbar.
4. In the file browser, select one or more files to import.
● You can browse repeatedly to select files from multiple locations.
● For each variable data job, select the Master Job file or the database file, but not both.
5. For each file in the File name list:
a. Select the file.
b. Change the default job name, if desired, and enter the number of copies to print.
c. The Quantity field is disabled and set to the number of copies specified in the Ticket Template
for non-archived JLYT files. For archived JLYT files, the number of copies are parsed from
the file.
d. Each file generates a separate Master Job.
6. Specify the Ticket Template. For non-archived JLYT files, the template will be copied to the Job
Ticket; it provides a way to choose the post-RIP destination. For archived JLYT files, other settings
in the Job Ticket will be ignored. If necessary, click Edit Job Ticket to make modifications.
7. If any of the files being imported require additional asset files, select the Prompt to confirm the
location(s) of variable data assets radio button.
8. Click Import.
9. The system evaluates the job files as they are imported. If Prompt to confirm is selected, the
Specify Asset Locations dialog box opens for the first order that requires additional asset files.
The Specify Asset Locations dialog provides a way to specify the Image folder, Template file,
and Database file. If the job definitely does not require an asset, the Browse button is disabled.
If the asset is required or the system is not sure, the Browse button is enabled.
10. If the job uses assets in an Image folder, click Browse and select the folder containing the image
assets.
Submitting variable data jobs using the Import dialog 141

All image folder paths must use UNC syntax (for example, \\myserver\share_name\mysubfolder
\myfile). The path cannot include a drive letter (for example: C:\Jobs\myfolder\myfile).
Windows users: If the Jobs Share was added as a Network Place, use My Network Places to
navigate to the folder containing the job.
11. If you submitted a database file, you will need to specify the location of the template file. This can
be a UNC or drive letter path.
12. If you submitted a template file that requires a database, you will need to specify the location of
the database file. This can be a UNC or drive letter path.
13. Use the database display to review the data.
● If the database file is not comma-delimited, indicate the character used to separate values.
● Check Has header row to skip the database's first row.
14. Do one of the following to select the rows to include from the database:
● Click All, or
● Click Selected records and check the rows to include in the database display, or
● Click Record range, enter the rows to include (example, 1,4-6,12), and click Update to check
the rows.
15. Click Next to locate assets for the next variable order in the list. After the last order, click Finish.
Cancel stops the import process for all the job files in the list.
The Workflow for PPML and Variable JLYT Jobs

The variable JLYT, PPML/T, and PPML formats are flexible in the ways they manage variable data.
● The template is usually the variable job file itself.
● Images for all job file types can be separate asset files or embedded in the job file.
● Databases for personalized JLYT and PPML/T jobs can be separate asset files or embedded in
the job file in their original delimited text format.
● If a PPML job is personalized, its database has already been merged with the job file. There is no
separate or embedded database.
PPML, PPML/T, and variable JLYT jobs have similar workflows. There are two major differences from
the standard workflow:
● The variable job files themselves are not RIPped, although their components may be.
● The job files are loaded into press memory and are processed from the press, instead of the
Production Pro Print Server pre-RIP processors.
The effect of these differences is that some of the settings in the Job Ticket are ignored. See Job Ticket
for VDP jobs for more information. Other changes can be made on the press jobs.

Variable JLYT, PPML/T, and PPML workflow
1. A variable data order is submitted. Additional job files are identified as part of the submission
process.
2. For Internet orders, the download processor retrieves additional files.
● If a file is missing from the image server, an error message occurs.
● Contact the ISV to tell them the name of the missing file.
● The ISV must correct the problem and submit another order. The Master Job cannot be
reprocessed or resubmitted from the Production Pro Print Server.
3. Production Pro Print Server creates the Master Job in the Master Jobs list.
4. Production Pro Print Server sends the variable job file to the Production RIP Manager for handling.
● Any file with a .ppml, .ppm, or .ppmlt extension is treated as a variable job file.
● If the file has a .jlyt extension, the contents are tested for references to variable data.
● Nothing is RIPped at this point, and variable images are not located yet.
5. The press software begins to read the job and database files, locating the asset files that are
referenced.
● If an asset file (usually an image) is missing, an error message offers the option to skip the
image and print the job without it or abort the job.
● If you choose to abort the job, the Master Job status changes to Needs attention. You can
find the missing image, put it in the image directory for the job, and use Resubmit as new to
process the Master Job again. (Reprocess will not work in this situation.)
6. For each embedded or referenced image, the press software determines if RIPping is necessary.
If so, the job consumer software on the press manages RIPping the asset. RIPped images are
streamed to press imaging memory.
● Postscript/PDF images are RIPped by a RIP engine. Raster images (JPEG, TIFF) are
processed by a separate image reader job consumer.
● The color settings used for RIPping are based on the Ticket Template.
● Any errors that occur here appear in the Press System log.
7. For SNAP text, the press software retrieves the font images.
● SNAP fonts are already RIPped and available in imaging memory.
● If a SNAP font is missing, the system will attempt to automatically create the SNAP font from
the appropriate RIP font.
● PostScript fonts embedded in the job or asset files are only used for RIPping images (for
example, EPS images with text).
● The Job Control setting in the Job Ticket for skipping/finding missing fonts does not apply.
8. When all components are processed, the press job is ready to print. The components are merged
during printing.
The Workflow for PPML and Variable JLYT Jobs 143

Using the Jobs Share for VDP assets
The Jobs Share and the use of UNC paths are very important for VDP assets because they provide a
way of specifying a consistent location for VDP assets. This is important because the RIPs need to know
the location of the assets in order to retrieve them.
● The RIP engines must have access to the folder(s) containing the assets. The installation scripts
handle this.
● The embedded file path to assets must use a syntax that is not specific to a particular system. File
drive letters (for example, S:) do not meet this requirement, whereas UNC paths are consistent
across the network.
The Jobs Share should be used for both Import dialog box and hot folder job submission:
● Import Job dialog box — the Image folder and template file entered in the Specify Asset Locations
dialog box must specify a UNC path within the Jobs Share.
● The images, database, and template folders associated with a hot folder must be located in the
Jobs Share.
Reusing Job Components in Variable Data Jobs

The files in the images, database, and template folders remain until they are manually deleted, which
allows them to be used for multiple jobs:
● In the images folder, keep a set of frequently used image files, like company logos or signatures.
Always use the same file names to refer to these images in variable data jobs.
● For recurring jobs that use the same database, such as monthly personalized mailings to a
customer list, keep the database in the database folder. Replace the database file with updates as
needed, so that it will be ready when the job files are dropped in the hot folder.
● Keep a variable job file in the template folder when it is intended for multiple orders with different
sets of variable data, such as a reminder that is sent to a different customer group each week.
Matching Database Files to Variable Job Files

When a variable data order is submitted via a hot folder, file names are used to match the database file
with the variable job file (template).
● The matching process compares the files' base names (the name minus the file type extension).
● Matching is not case-sensitive.
When the template file is placed in the main hot folder, the database file name must match the template
file name exactly, excluding file extensions.
When the database file is placed in the main hot folder, the template file name must be the same as the
database file name or very similar, using hyphens, underscores, and periods to add characters to the
base name.
For example, if a database named brochure.txt is dropped into a hot folder, it will match any of the
following template files:
brochure.ppml
Brochure.jlt
brochure_1.ppml

brochure-2.ppml
brochure.5.14.jlt
If a variable job file named brochure_1.ppml is dropped into the hot folder, it will match:
brochure_1.txt
Brochure_1.csv
but not:
brochure.csv
brochure_2.txt
brochure.3.1.txt
Exporting and reprinting variable data jobs

Exporting variable data jobs
The process for exporting variable data jobs is the same as for static press jobs. The result of the export
is a JLYT archive file that contains the job as it was printed, with all the variable data merged into a
single static file. The job can be re-imported, but it is no longer variable and the printed data cannot be
changed.
Reprinting jobs with new variable data

The best way to print an existing variable data job with new data is to submit a new order.
● Exporting and re-importing the job will not work because it “freezes” the job's variable data.
● Resubmit as new does not save time or effort, because the job elements must be processed in
the same way as before.
To handle a recurring variable data job more easily:
● Create a Ticket Template with the information specific to the recurring job, including the customer's
billing and shipping information in the Order form.
● Create a new input method that uses the Ticket Template.
● If the input method is a hot folder, you can save either the database file or the template (variable
job) file in a sub-folder for reuse. See Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders
on page 138.
● Establish a procedure so that each time the recurring order is submitted, it uses the new input
method and places assets in the same locations.
● Set up a naming convention so that it is easy for you to recognize the recurring order.
Restricting RIPping of VDP jobs

You can configure RIP groups to handle only static jobs.
To specify whether or not a RIP group will accept VDP jobs

1. In the Admin menu, click Production RIP Manager.
2. In the Production RIP Manager's Configure menu, click RIP Groups.
Exporting and reprinting variable data jobs 145

3. Select a RIP Group and click Edit.
4. Click the Job Acceptance and Filtering tab.
5. Click to clear the Enable Variable Data Processing option.
ISV job submission of VDP jobs

VDP jobs submitted via the ISV interface must include an intent Job Ticket. This Job Ticket contains the
file names and locations of the VDP job components. When the Job Ticket is processed, the components
are downloaded and automatically processed. When processing is finished, the job is loaded and is
ready to print.

16 The Production RIP Manager
Overview of the Production RIP Manager

Note to remote users: Your user permissions determine whether you can open the Production RIP
Manager and perform RIP Manager tasks.
A RIP (Raster Image Processor) converts a vector image into a ready-to-print bitmap. The Production
RIP Manager coordinates the RIPs that Production Pro Print Server uses to process vector job files.
The Production RIP Manager has two main functions:
● Handling orders through the RIP process.
● Configuring RIP groups, RIP engines, RIP disk space, and RIP fonts.
The Production RIP Manager is not used to set job controls and RIP parameters. Those are set in the
order's Job Ticket. Some Job Ticket settings are used by the RIP, such as color balance. Others are
just copied into the press job properties, such as number of copies.
How the Production RIP Manager handles jobs

The Production RIP Manager handles all functionality for properly RIPping an order, including:
● Queuing orders as they wait to be RIPped.
● Sending orders to appropriate RIP engines.
● Load-balancing across multiple RIP engines.
The Production RIP Manager organizes individual processors (RIP engines) into RIP groups. An order
is assigned to a RIP group using acceptance criteria in the group's configuration. If the order does not
match the criteria for any of the RIP groups, it is placed in Needs attention status and requires user
intervention.
Overview of the Production RIP Manager 147

The RIP group manages its order queue, distributing orders between its RIP engines. Large orders can
be worked on by multiple RIP engines.
What happens during RIP?

The following process applies to static jobs. See The Workflow for PPML and Variable JLYT Jobs
on page 142 for information on variable data jobs.
1. During order processing, Production Pro Print Server evaluates the job file and determines whether
it needs RIPping.
2. The RIP Processor sends the job file(s) to the Production RIP Manager.
3. The Production RIP Manager assigns each file to the appropriate RIP group. The RIP group:
● Assigns the file to a RIP engine, or
● (PDF files only) partitions the file and sends the pieces to multiple RIP engines depending on
the job acceptance criteria.
4. The RIP engine(s) convert the vector data (images and text) into bitmap images.
5. The Production RIP Manager creates a press job and:
● Embeds the RIPped images, or
● Sends the RIPped image files to press memory (fast reaggregation) and embeds references
to them.
6. The press job is loaded on the press (or Post-RIP storage in Production Pro Print Server).
● The Production RIP Manager can use job streaming to start loading a job on the press while
it is still RIPping.
NOTE: Some job files do not require RIPping (JLYT, PPML) before they are loaded on the press, but
they may include items that need to be RIPped, like embedded vector graphics. During job loading, the
items in the job file are evaluated and sent to the Production RIP Manager if needed.
Opening the Production RIP Manager window

Use the Production RIP Manager window to configure RIP engines, groups, fonts, or disk space.
Manager and perform Production RIP Manager tasks.
To open the Production RIP Manager window:
● In the Admin menu, click RIP Manager.
Viewing RIP engine status

To view RIP engine status in the Production RIP Manager:
1. Open the Production RIP Manager window.
2. Expand the appropriate RIP groups to display their RIP engines.
3. A status icon appears next to each RIP engine. See RIP engine status icons on page 270
148 Chapter 16 The Production RIP Manager

To view RIP engine status in the main Production Pro Print Server window:
● The System Explorer lists all the available RIP engines with status information for each engine.
When the list is contracted, the indicates that there is a problem with one or more RIP engines.
Viewing RIP job status

To see the progress of a job file being RIPped, monitor the status of the order on the Order Manager
tab. The tab displays RIP job status in several ways.
To view order progress during RIPping:
The order progress state indicates RIP progress:
● Waiting to RIP — the order is held or queued in the RIP Processor before being sent to the
Production RIP Manager.
● Scheduled to RIP — the order has been sent to the Production RIP Manager. It can no longer be
held before RIP.
● RIPping — the order is accepted by a RIP group and sent to one or more RIP engines.
● RIPping page— the RIP is processing the page indicated.
● Press — the order has RIPped and loaded successfully.
● The order progress changes to RIP and the status changes to Needs attention if the order fails to
complete RIPping or if the RIP parameters in the Job Ticket cause the order to RIP incorrectly.
Re-RIPping a job
There are several situations where an order might require re-RIPping:
● An error occurs in the Production RIP Manager, setting the order status to Needs attention.
◦ Open the order's Job Ticket and edit if necessary. Click Reprocess in the Actions menu to
send the order back to the RIP Processor.
● The order RIPs without problems, but when the job is loaded, the press detects an error. The order
status/progress remains Processing/press, and the press job status reflects the error (usually
Imposition error).
◦ Use Resubmit as new to create a new order, editing the Job Ticket to avoid the error.
● The RIP Processor is set to hold orders after RIPping. The order status is Held awaiting review.
The reviewer decides to RIP the order again.
◦ Use Fail approval to change the order status to Needs attention, then reprocess the order.
● A user wants to RIP a successful order again, using different Job Ticket settings.
◦ If the order status is not Completed, resubmit the order.
Whether you use Reprocess or Resubmit as new to re-RIP an order depends on the order status:
● Reprocess is available only when the order status is Needs attention. Orders Held awaiting
review can be reset to Needs attention by failing approval.
● Resubmit as new is available for all order statuses except Completed.
Viewing RIP job status 149

Controlling RIPping with the RIP processor
The RIP processor controls the flow of jobs to the Production RIP Manager. The RIP processor is
managed in the Administer Processors dialog box.
Pausing the RIP processor

When the RIP processor is paused, orders do not flow to the Production RIP Manager. The RIP engines
will continue processing orders in the RIP group queues, but no additional jobs flow into the queues.
When the processor is resumed, order flow to the Production RIP Manager is restored.
To pause and resume the RIP processor:

1. Click Processors in the Admin menu.
2. In the Processor Behaviors list, click RIP.
3. Click Pause processor.
4. When ready to RIP again, click Resume processor.
Setting the hold behavior of the RIP processor

An order can be held automatically:
● Before it flows to the Production RIP Manager (Hold before).
● After RIPping is complete (Hold for review). This provides an opportunity to view the press job
created for the order and reprocess or resubmit the order if necessary.
To set the hold behavior of the RIP processor:

1. Click Processors in the Admin menu.
2. In the Processor behaviors list, click RIP.
3. Check the Hold before box to set orders to Hold status before they enter the Production RIP
Manager.
NOTE: Orders must be manually released to continue processing.

4. Check the Hold for review box to set orders to Awaiting review status after RIPping.
a. The Production RIP Manager processes each order and creates a press job as usual. The
Awaiting review status of the order does not affect the press job, which can be printed.
b. To change the order status/progress to Processing/press, approve the order.
c. To move the order into Needs attention status, fail the order. The order can then be
reprocessed or resubmitted. See Re-RIPping a job on page 149.
5. Click Apply.
Managing RIP fonts

The Font Manager window shows the fonts that are loaded into the Production RIP Manager to be used
by RIP engines as they create bitmap images of text characters.
This procedure explains how to add fonts using the Production RIP Manager's Font Manager dialog
box. Fonts can also be added using the fonts hot folder. See Adding fonts using the fonts hot folder
on page 152
To add fonts to RIP engines:
1. If the font to be added is a Mac font:

If necessary, convert the font:
● PostScript fonts, font suitcases, and data fork fonts must be converted to a format
readable by the PC using an appropriate font conversion tool.
● Open Type, True Type, and any other fonts having a file extension recognized by
Windows can be directly installed.
2. In the Production RIP Manager Configure menu, click Fonts.
3. Choose the font files to add:
a. Click Browse to open the Select Font Directory dialog box.
b. Select the folder containing the fonts and click Select. This closes the Select Font Directory
dialog box. In the Font Manager window:
● The Font Directory field displays the path to the selected folder.
● The Available Fonts list displays the files recognized as fonts from the selected folder.
4. Select the desired fonts for installation from the available fonts list (use Ctrl + Click or Shift + Click
to select multiple fonts).
5. Select the check boxes by the RIP engine(s) on which to install the listed fonts.
● All fonts in the Selected Fonts list will be installed on all selected RIP engines.
6. Click Add Fonts.
Managing RIP fonts 151

7. A confirmation dialog box gives an estimate of the installation time. Click Yes or No.
● Installation starts for each selected RIP engine when it finishes its current job.
● The selected RIP engines will be busy during font installation.
8. To make the new fonts available immediately, click Rebuild to rebuild the RIP font lists. See
Rebuilding RIP font lists on page 152.
To remove fonts from RIP engines:

2. In the Installed Fonts list, highlight the fonts to remove.
● A font can appear in the list multiple times, once for each RIP engine where it is installed.
● Removing a font from one RIP engine does not affect it on other RIP engines.
● To sort the list by RIP engine or font name, click the appropriate column head.
3. Click Delete.
● The selected fonts are removed from the displayed list.
● Fonts are deleted from each RIP engine when it finishes RIPping its current job.
Adding fonts using the fonts hot folder

A shared folder S:\Jobs\fonts is created when the Production Pro Print Server is installed.
This folder is configured to behave as a fonts hot folder. Fonts placed in this folder are added to all the
RIP engines.
The fonts hot folder supports the following file types:
● .pfa
● .pfb
● .otf
● .ttf
● .ps
● files with no extension.
The behavior of the font hot folder is not configurable. The folder is always active.
The Production RIP Manager provides a way to install fonts on specific RIP engines. See Managing
RIP fonts on page 151
Rebuilding RIP font lists

Each RIP engine keeps a list of its installed fonts, and the Production RIP Manager keeps an overall
font list for all RIP engines. These lists are updated automatically:
● When the system is rebooted.
● When the HP RIP Services are restarted.

● When the Font Manager window is opened.
● When fonts are installed or removed from a RIP engine.
Manually rebuilding the substitute font list

The substitute font list is a copy of the overall font list that is used during static job processing. The list
can be found in the Job Control tab of any Ticket Template. The list is also used for variable data
processing. When a required SNAP font is not available for a variable data job, the system will attempt
to automatically create the SNAP font in the particular point size and with the name of the RIP font, and
store this new SNAP font in its library.
The substitute font list is updated:
● When the system is rebooted.
● When the HP RIP Services are restarted.
To rebuild RIP engine font lists manually:

2. Select the check boxes by the RIP engine(s) whose font lists have changed.
3. Click Rebuild.
● The font list is updated for each selected RIP engine when it finishes its current job.
● The overall Production RIP Manager font list is rebuilt when all selected RIP engine lists have
been rebuilt.
Proofing RIP Fonts

Even though two fonts may have the same name, it is possible for these fonts to appear differently when
printed. The font proofing feature allows you to run a “proof sheet” containing all of the glyphs in a
particular font. This lets you verify that the proper fonts are installed on the RIP.
This feature can be accessed from the Production RIP Manager Font Management Dialog.
To automatically remove temporary files for all RIP engines:

1. In the Production RIP Manager dialog box, click Fonts in the Configure menu and then click the
Proof button to bring up a list of fonts available for proofing.
2. After selecting the desired font or fonts, the proof will be submitted as any other job in the system
with the FontNameProof as the name of the job.
FontName is the name of the selected font, or in the case of multiple fonts, the first font in the list
that was selected.
3. Once in the loaded list, the proof can be previewed with the Job Editor, Job Preview, or the job
can be printed.
Table 16-1 Font Proofing
Description Any font can be printed to verify proper appearance.
Pre-conditions Production Pro Print Server is up and running.
Proofing RIP Fonts 153

Table 16-1 Font Proofing (continued)
Normal scenario User wishes to see glyph examples of a particular font printed
on the press.
1. First open the Production RIP Manager Font Manager

UI
2. Click the Proof… button.
3. Select the desired font (s) from the Proof Font dialog that
appears.
4. Click OK (Click Cancel to exit the Proof Fonts dialog.)
Post conditions Jobs will be submitted to the system named (FontName)-Proof
Exceptions and recovery Any errors will be reported as they are with any other job
submitted into the system. This includes messages in the job
log and/or system log.
Managing RIP disk space

RIP engines generate temporary files that consume disk space. The Production RIP Manager lets you
specify how these temporary files will be handled.
To automatically remove temporary files for all RIP engines:
1. In the Production RIP Manager dialog box, click Disk Space Management in the Configure menu.
2. Check the Automatically remove temporary files box.
3. Specify how often the Production RIP Manager queries the RIP engines for their disk space usage:
● Immediately after each job is RIPped.
● Each time the HP RIP Services are started (when the Production Pro Print Server server is
rebooted or when the HP RIP Services are restarted manually).
4. Click OK.
To manually remove temporary files for a single RIP engine:
1. In the Production RIP Manager dialog box, click RIP Engines in the Configure menu.
2. Select a RIP engine and click Edit.
3. On the Disk Space Management tab, click Remove Temp Files.
4. Click Update Disk Space to update the pie chart.
5. Click OK.
Handling missing fonts

The Job Ticket's Job Control tab specifies what happens when a job requires a font that is not available
to the RIP engine that is RIPping the job. The setting applies only to static jobs.

There are several options:
● Stop RIPping and set the order status to Needs Attention.
An error message is logged, specifying any missing fonts found on the page at which RIPping
stopped.
● Continue to RIP with a substitute font.
All missing fonts in the document will be replaced with the substitute font specified in the Job Ticket.
If the required size of this substitute font isn't already available as a SNAP font, that SNAP font
size will be auto-created and stored in the SNAP font library.
● Use font emulation. There are two options on the action to take if font emulation fails—to stop
RIPping (setting the order status to Needs Attention), or to use a substitute font.
The missing font behavior for VDP jobs is determined by the setting specified in the VDP Ticket
Template. The default behavior is to use font emulation.
Font emulation
The Harlequin RIP v7.0 and later supports font emulation.
Font Emulation provides the ability to create an unlimited number of variations of a font. The font
emulation feature in the Harlequin RIP v7.0 and later release has these characteristics:
● The ability to recognize the missing font by name.
● A database of style, spacing, height, and width for each font name.
● The database currently contains over 1600 specified fonts. For more information, see Fonts that
can be emulated on page 281.
● Only the standard Latin characters are supported.
To use font emulation

Font emulation is configured in the Job Control tab of the Ticket Template and Job Ticket.
In the Missing Font section of the Job Control tab, select one of the two font emulation behaviors.
They differ with respect to the behavior if font emulation fails.
Creating and editing RIP groups

A RIP group contains one or more RIP engines. A RIP group can contain both on-press and off-press
RIP engines.
To create a new RIP group:

1. In the Production RIP Manager Configure menu, click RIP Groups.
2. Create the new RIP group.
● To start with a new blank group, click New.
● To start with the settings from an existing group, select a RIP group and click Copy. Enter a
name for the new RIP group and click OK. Then, select the new RIP group and click Edit.
Font emulation 155

3. Enter the General Settings for the new RIP group.
● The RIP Group Name must be unique.
4. Enter the Job Acceptance and Filtering criteria.
● Check Enable Variable Data Processing if you want to use the RIP group for variable data
jobs.
● Check Each RIP Engine handles a single job if you do not want to partition PDF jobs
processed by this group.
● Automatically Accept Jobs must be checked for the RIP group to process jobs. If you
deselect it, RIPs in this RIP group will not process jobs.
5. Click OK.
6. If necessary, change the new RIP group's priority.
To edit a RIP group:

2. Select an existing RIP group and click Edit.
3. Modify data as needed.
Changes will not affect jobs in progress. For example, if you deselect Automatically Accept
Jobs, the RIP group will finish processing the jobs in its queue and will not accept any new jobs.
4. Click OK.
Taking a RIP group off-line

When Automatically Accept Jobs is disabled for a RIP group, it is effectively off-line. Although it may
be running and connected to the system, it will not accept new jobs.
If no RIP group is available to accept an incoming job, its status is set to Needs attention and it will
require manual intervention to continue processing.
To stop a RIP group from accepting jobs:

2. Select the RIP group and click Edit.
3. On the Job Acceptance & Filtering tab, uncheck Automatically Accept Jobs.
4. Click OK.
The RIP group finishes processing any jobs already in its queue, but does not accept new jobs.
RIP group priority

When a job enters the Production RIP Manager, it is assigned to a RIP group based on:
1. The RIP group's priority
2. The RIP group's acceptance criteria

RIP group priority is determined by the group's position in the Existing RIP Groups list in the Configure
RIP Groups dialog box.
When a job enters the Production RIP Manager, its properties are compared to the acceptance criteria
of the top RIP group. If it matches, it enters the job queue for the top RIP group. If it does not match,
the comparison is repeated with the second RIP group in the list. Comparisons continue until a match
is found.
To change a RIP group's priority:

2. Select the RIP group in the Existing RIP Groups list.
3. Click Move Up or Move Down.
4. Click OK.
Partitioning jobs across multiple RIP engines

NOTE: To use partitioning when a static press job's post-RIP destination is a Folder device, you must
route the job through a press controller.
Partitioning is one of the Production RIP Manager's load balancing activities. The Production RIP
Manager breaks a large job into segments and assigns different segments to different RIP engines within
a RIP group for simultaneous RIPping.
To enable partitioning
1. Open the Production RIP Manager.
2. Select RIP Groups from the Configure menu.
3. In the Configure RIP Groups dialog box, select a RIP group and click Edit.
4. Open the Job Acceptance and Filtering tab.
5. Uncheck the Each RIP Engine handles a single job check box.
Currently, PDF files are the only job files that can be partitioned. The Production RIP Manager will
partition PDF jobs larger than 25 pages. Whether or not a specific job is partitioned, and how many
partitions to use, is determined automatically by the Production RIP Manager.
In general, partitioning enhances RIP performance when the RIP workload consists primarily of a small
number of large jobs. It is better to limit RIPping to one RIP per job when the RIP workload consists
primarily of a large number of small jobs.
Since a RIP group can contain both on-press and off-press RIP engines, partitioning may split a job
between on-press and off-press RIPs.
Using fast reaggregation

NOTE: To use fast reaggregation when a static press job's post-RIP destination is a Folder device,
you must route the job through a press controller.
Partitioning jobs across multiple RIP engines 157

Fast reaggregation is a performance enhancement that facilitates sending RIPped jobs to press
memory.
● When fast reaggregation is enabled, RIPping sends the RIPped image data directly to press
memory. The RIP generates a JLYT output file as normal, but it contains references to the RIPped
image data. The resultant JLYT file is much smaller because it contains just the references to the
data and not the data itself.
● When fast reaggregation is turned off, RIPping generates a JLYT output file that contains the entire
output job including the RIPped image data.
In most cases, it is preferable to enable fast reaggregation.
To enable fast reaggregation

1. Open the Production RIP Manager.
2. Select RIP Groups from the Configure menu.
3. In the Configure RIP Groups dialog box, select a RIP group and click Edit.
4. On the General tab, check Enable Fast Reaggregation.
Creating and editing RIP engines

When you acquire a new RIP for processing Production Pro Print Server orders, it can be added to the
Production RIP Manager as a RIP engine and placed in a new or existing RIP group.
To add a RIP engine to the Production RIP Manager:

1. Install the RIP hardware and software.
2. If the RIP engine will belong to a new RIP group, create the RIP group. See Creating and editing
RIP groups on page 155.
3. In the Production RIP Manager Configure menu, click RIP Engines.
4. Create the new RIP engine.
● To start with default settings, click New.
● To start with the settings from an existing RIP engine:
a. Select a RIP engine and click Copy.
b. Enter a name for the new RIP engine and click OK.
c. Select the new RIP engine and click Edit.

5. Enter the data for the new RIP engine.
a. Enter the hostname of the computer where the RIP is installed. (RIP computers should be set
up with non-routable IP addresses.)
b. Select a RIP group for the new RIP engine.
If you select Unassigned, the RIP engine will be added but it will not be able to accept jobs
because it is not part of an active RIP group.
c. Check the Enabled box if you want the RIP engine to accept jobs as soon as it is added.
6. Click OK.
To edit a RIP engine:

2. Select the RIP engine and click Disable.
3. Once again, select the RIP engine and click Edit.
4. Modify data as needed.
5. Click OK.
6. Re-enable the selected RIP engine by clicking Enable.
To delete a RIP engine:

3. Select the RIP engine and click Delete.
Taking a RIP engine offline

When a RIP engine is offline, it does not accept jobs.
There are two ways to take a RIP engine offline:
● Disable it by deselecting Enabled in the Edit RIP Engine dialog box. This keeps the RIP engine in
its group but stops it from accepting jobs.
● Reassign the engine to the Unassigned RIP group. This is useful if you will be assigning the RIP
engine to a different group when it is re-enabled.
When a RIP engine is disabled or unassigned, the System Explorer icon indicates that the RIP engine
is unavailable to accept jobs.
To disable an existing RIP engine:

3. Click OK.
Taking a RIP engine offline 159

NOTE: A RIP engine cannot be disabled if it is currently processing a job. If you attempt to disable a
RIP engine when it is processing a job, the engine will be disabled after it has completed processing
the job.
To unassign a RIP engine:

3. Select the RIP engine again and click Edit.
4. Change the Assigned RIP Group to Unassigned and click OK.

17 General administration
The delete behavior for press jobs

The System “Delete Press Job” Behavior portion of the System Settings dialog box lets you select how
deleting a press job affects its order. You can choose to:
● Cancel the Master Job.
● Move the Master Job to the next progress/status state in its workflow. This next state is usually
complete (unless a custom processor has been added).
If there are multiple press jobs associated with the Master Job, the “delete press job” behavior takes
effect when the last press job associated with the Master Job is deleted.
To specify what happens to a Master Job when all of its press jobs are deleted:
1. In the Admin menu, click System Settings.

2. Choose an option under System “Delete Press Job” Behavior:
● Move the Master Job to the next step in the workflow. The Master Job moves to the next
processor.
If the press is the last processor in the workflow, the Master Job is set to complete or awaiting
review (see Configuring order completion on page 161).
● Cancel the Master Job. The Master Job is set to canceled status.
● Ask – allow the user to choose. A dialog box will be displayed to query the user about the
desired behavior.
3. Click OK.
An exception occurs if the last press job deleted is in the retain list and the option is set to cancel the
Master Job. The Master Job will not be canceled; it will be set to complete.
NOTE: The system can be configured to do automatic order cleanup by checking the Automatically
delete Master Jobs… check box. See Deleting jobs automatically on page 59.
Configuring order completion

A Master Job's progress and status are set to complete when the Master Job has passed through all
the processors in its workflow.
In the default configuration, the press is the last processor in the workflow. (This may not be the case if
custom processors have been added.) In the default configuration, the Master Job will become complete
when it moves forward out of the press processor.
For a Master Job to move forward beyond the press processor, one of the following must occur:
● All of its press jobs must be deleted
● One or more of its press jobs must be set to Printing done.
The delete behavior for press jobs 161

The status/progress of the Master Job when it moves forward depends on workflow settings in the
System Settings dialog box.
To specify Master Job behavior at the end of its workflow:
1. In the Admin menu, click System Settings.

2. Choose an option under Workflow Settings:
Workflow Setting When the Master Job is finished with its last processor
(usually the press processor)
Set the Master Job to Complete The Master Job progress and status automatically moves
to Complete.
Set the Master Job to “awaiting review” The Master Job moves into awaiting review status until
manually set to Complete (by clicking Approve and
release in the Actions menu).
3. Click OK.
NOTE: The system can be configured to do automatic order cleanup by checking the Automatically
delete Master Jobs… check box. See Deleting jobs automatically on page 59.
Setting the default units

The default units are a user preference used as defaults in the application, such as Ticket Template,
Job Ticket dialog, and job properties boxes. The units of measure are applied in fields where a Ticket
Template or Job Ticket has no value defined. Defined default values will keep their original units of
measure.
User preferences are applied on a per-user basis.
To set the default units:

1. In the Admin menu, click User Preferences.
2. Select a unit from the Default units list.
3. Click OK.
System settings
The System Settings dialog box controls global system behaviors, including:
● The order in which press jobs are printed. See System Settings dialog box on page 209.
● Behavior when deleting press jobs. See The delete behavior for press jobs on page 161.
● Behavior when orders reach the end of the workflow. See Configuring order completion
on page 161.
● Default location for success and error hot folders.
Default hot folders

Root Hot Folder: This is the default location for new hot folders. This value cannot be changed.
However, when a hot folder is created, a different location can be specified.
162 Chapter 17 General administration

Default Common Success and Error Folders for Hot Folders: When you create or modify the
configuration of a hot folder, the New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box lets you specify the On success (order
completed) and On error (order canceled) behavior for orders submitted via that hot folder. One of the
settings in this dialog box is Send to default.
Use the System Settings dialog box to set the hot folder behavior when the Send to default option is
selected:
● When Use common success and error folder is not checked, the Send to default option copies
the job file to the success or error sub-folders of the hot folder.
● When Use common success and error folder is checked, the Send to default option copies the
job file to the system-wide success or error folder specified in the System Settings dialog box.
Exporting system data

The Data Export dialog box saves the following system data in comma-separated value (.csv) files:
● Production System log - same data as on the Log Viewer tab; includes all messages
● Master Job log - same data as on the Log Viewer tab; includes all messages
● Master Jobs list - same data as on the Master Job Manager tab; includes only the default columns
● Press Job list - same data as in a press or press controller view (excluding the Print Queue);
includes only the default columns
Use Microsoft Excel or a regular text editor to view the .csv files.
To export log messages or job lists:

1. In the Admin menu, click Data Export.
2. Select the data to export or select All to export each data type as a separate file.
3. Click Browse to specify a folder for the export files.
● Each export file has a fixed name. You cannot specify a new file name during export.
● If you select Press Job list, a separate file is created for each press and press controller.
● Be careful not to accidentally overwrite earlier export files.
4. Click Export.
Managing impositions
Imposition is the positioning of pages on a spread. The imposition for a Master Job is specified in its
Job Ticket. The initial setting is acquired from the Ticket Template when the Master Job is submitted.
Impositions are .imp or .impp files. You can create these files in Yours Truly Designer™ by Indigo®.
You can add or delete impositions using the Manage Impositions dialog box.
NOTE: Reformatting image memory does not remove impositions.
To add an imposition:
1. From the Admin menu, click Impositions.
2. Click Browse to browse to the location of the imposition (.imp or .impp) file you want to add.
Exporting system data 163

3. Click Open.
4. Click Add.
NOTE: Imposition template files (.imp or .impp) may not be added from the content store (the
directory in which they already reside), since this would result in a circular add/replace.
To delete an imposition:
1. From the Admin menu, click Impositions.
2. Select the imposition you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
Configuration backup/restore
The backup/restore tool allows you to save and retrieve Production Pro Print Server configurations,
including:
● Input methods, Ticket Templates, and ISV accounts.
● HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server: RIP configurations that are managed by the
HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server and stored in its database (colorants, ICC profiles, LUTS,
impositions, and RIP Fonts).
● System settings.
● User accounts, user preferences, and View options.
The backup/restore tool does NOT handle:
● Press configurations in Production Pro Print Server.
● Production Pro Print Server: RIP configurations stored on local and remote RIP systems.
● SNAP fonts.
● Orders, press jobs, and job assets.
◦ Orders, jobs, and job assets remain intact when the restore tool is run. However, order cleanup
may occur. Furthermore, if the restoration is done because of a serious system malfunction,
there is a possibility that order data could be lost.
◦ Since the backup/restore tools do not handle SNAP fonts, press jobs requiring missing SNAP
fonts may be deleted when the press is restarted after a restore operation.
● Press configurations. Press configuration can be backed up using:
◦ The press software (click Press Configuration in the Options menu) or use the press backup
tool (HP Indigo Press Backup) to backup everything drive partitions to DVD.
◦ The press backup tool (HP Indigo Press Backup).
To run the backup tool

1. Open a Microsoft Windows Command Prompt Window.
2. Use the cd command to switch to the folder prodflow\tools\BackupRestore
3. Run the command:
backup [folder_path]

where folder_path is the destination folder for the backup file. If you omit the folder_path, the file
will be saved in the folder specified by the UNICORN_DATA environment variable.
4. The configuration will be saved in a file using the naming convention:
backup<timestamp>.bk (for example, backup2005-06-09-113816.bk)
A backup log with the naming convention:
Backup<timestamp>.err (for example, backup2005-06-09-113816.err)
is also created.
To run the restore tool

1. Close Production Pro Print Server.
2. Open a Microsoft Windows Command Prompt Window and switch (cd) to the folder containing the
backup file.
3. Run the command:
restore backup_file <component_number>
where component number is an integer that defines which data you want to restore:
Component Restores
0 All configuration data except fonts
1 XML configurations
2 RIP configurations (including ICC Profiles, LUTs, impositions, RIP groups, and RIP engines).
3 Device management configurations
4 Input methods and Ticket Templates
5 ISV accounts
6 Processor configurations
7 Special colors
8 User interface settings
9 User accounts
10 Workflow configurations
11 System settings
12 All font files except SNAP fonts
To view a list of all components and their corresponding numbers, type:

restore help
Configuration backup/restore 165

The restore command will:
● Do an automatic backup of the current configuration prior to doing the restore.
● Restore the specified data.
● Create a restore log.
4. Restart Production Pro Print Server and the RIP systems.
Dealing with RIP synchronization issues

RIP synchronization issues can occur because:
● Production Pro Print Server maintains a master copy of RIP settings (colorants, ICC profiles, LUTs,
and impositions).
● Each RIP system has a copy of the RIP settings.
● The backup/restore utility does not directly back up RIP configurations stored on local and remote
RIP systems.
In most situations, the RIP system settings will be identical to the Production Pro Print Server settings
because they are synchronized. However, there are situations where the Production Pro Print Server
and RIP system settings can get out of sync.
When Production Pro Print Server is returned to a backed up configuration, any new RIPs that were
added since the backup will be found when Production Pro Print Server is started. If any RIP systems
and or RIP configurations were deleted after the backup was created, these will be restored.
However, if any individual RIP systems were modified after the backup was created, restoring that
backup will cause Production Pro Print Server and RIPs to be out of synchronization.
A synchronization scenario
The following scenario illustrates a situation in which Production Pro Print Server and individual RIPs
may lose synchronization.
1. You add a new imposition named Imposition_A to Production Pro Print Server. It is a 4_up_step
simplex imposition.
2. You restart Production Pro Print Server. This synchronizes the RIP settings, so that the RIPs now
know about the 4_up_step simplex imposition.
3. You then perform a backup.
4. You modify Imposition_A, changing it to a 4_up_step duplex imposition.
5. Due to a system problem, you perform a restore operation for RIP settings.
Production Pro Print Server does not perform a synchronization after the restore. Thus, Production Pro
Print Server now shows Imposition_A as 4_up_step simplex, whereas the RIPs process Imposition_A
as 4_up_step duplex.

Handling synchronization issues
There are several ways to fix a RIP synchronization issue:
● Option 1: Re-install the RIP systems. When the RIPs are restarted, the Production RIP Manager
will perform the synchronization.
● Option 2: Delete the color settings, LUTs, ICC profiles and impositions on the individual RIP
systems. These items are located in the folders:
%SOAR_HOME%\hp2rip\SW\Devices\opindigo\Colorants
%SOAR_HOME%\hp2rip\SW\Devices\opindigo\Imposition
%SOAR_HOME%\hp2rip\SW\Devices\opindigo\ICCProfiles
When the RIPs are restarted, the Production RIP Manager will perform the synchronization.
● Option 3: Copy the colorant, LUTs, ICCProfiles and impositions files from the Production Pro Print
Server folders:
prodflow\exe\tomcat\webapps\prodflow\Colorants
prodflow\exe\tomcat\webapps\prodflow\ICCProfiles
% UNICORN_BASE%\Import\Imposition
to the individual RIP systems. (See Option 2 for the destination folders.)
Scheduling Automatic Backups

You can use the Scheduled Tasks tool in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel to schedule automatic
backups.
The command to run is:
prodflow\tools\BackupRestore\backup.bat
This will save the backup files in the folder specified by the UNICORN_DATA environment variable.
To use a different location:

1. Create a shortcut for prodflow\tools\BackupRestore\backup.bat
2. Select Properties from the shortcut's popup menu.
3. Edit the Target field to add a location. For example:
C:\prodflow\tools\BackupRestore\backup.bat S:\backup
Backing up SNAP fonts

For information on backing up (exporting) and restoring (importing) SNAP fonts, see Importing and
exporting SNAP fonts on page 187.
Releasing a system lock

It is sometimes necessary to override a system lock. For example, if a user opens a Job Ticket and does
not close it before leaving for the day, other users will be blocked from opening the Job Ticket until the
lock is broken (released).
Administration permission is required to release a lock.
Backing up SNAP fonts 167

To release a lock:
1. Make sure you are logged on with administration permission.

2. Attempt to open the dialog box that is locked.
3. When the “in use” dialog box appears, click:
● Release Lock — The original user's lock will be broken so that another user can open the
dialog box.
● Release/Obtain Lock — The original user's lock will be broken, and the dialog box will open.
Thus, the lock will be transferred to the person releasing it.
4. The original user (whose lock was released) will receive a dialog box-based message stating that
changes made to the open dialog box cannot be saved.
Managing remote connections

When multiple users access the system via the remote client, there may be an effect on server
performance due to:
● Synchronization - for example, updating job and device status.
● Data transfer - for example, copying jobs.
For this reason, the system administrator may want to:
● See who is currently logged in.
● Limit the number of users who can be logged in simultaneously.
To see who is logged in:

Click Remote Connections in the Admin menu.
To change maximum number of simultaneous users:
1. Click Remote Connections in the Admin menu.

2. Type an integer into the Maximum Connections text box and click Apply.
How processors work

A Master Job may go through one or more processors during its workflow.
Each processor maintains a queue of Master Jobs awaiting processing.
The processor can be configured to:
● Automatically process all Master Jobs in priority order. Master Jobs of the same priority are
processed in the order in which they arrive.
● Place all jobs arriving at the processor queue on hold. The Master Jobs must be manually released
from hold in order to be processed.
When a Master Job moves to a particular processor, its job progress may change. For example, when
a Master Job moves into the RIP processor queue, its progress changes to Waiting to RIP.
When the Master Job reaches the top of the queue, it is processed. If processing generates an error,
the Master Job is placed in a Needs attention status .

The post-processing behavior is configurable. Processing behavior is set in the Manage Processors
dialog box. The processor can be configured to:
● Automatically move Master Jobs to the next step in the workflow. This is the default behavior.
● Place all processed Master Jobs into an Awaiting review status. The user must manually intervene
to approve or fail the review. See Dealing with Master Jobs held for review on page 53
If the Master Job has been placed in an Awaiting review status, it must be manually approved and
released. See Dealing with Master Jobs held for review on page 53
The Master Job moves to the next step in its workflow.
If the processor was the final step, the Master Job's progress is set to complete.
Configuring processor behavior

Configuring processor behavior allows you to fine-tune the way that orders flow through Production Pro
Print Server. You can:
● Configure how Master Jobs flow into a processor.
● Configure how Master Jobs flow to the next processor.
To configure how Master Jobs flow into a processor:

1. In the Admin menu, click Processors to open the Administer Processors dialog box.
2. In the Processor behaviors list, select the processor.
3. In Processor Hold Behavior, check Hold before.
4. Click OK.
All Master Jobs entering the processor's queue are put on hold. The Master Jobs must be manually
released. This allows you to control the flow of Master Jobs through the processor.
To configure how orders flow to the next processor:
1. In the Admin menu, click Processors to open the Administer Processors dialog box.
2. In the Processor behaviors list, select the processor.
3. In Processor Hold Behavior, check Hold for review.
4. Click OK.
After processing, the Master Job is placed in Awaiting review status. The Master Job must be manually
approved or failed.
● Approving the Master Job clears its Awaiting review status and allows it to proceed to the next
workflow step.
● Failing the Master Job changes its status to Needs Attention.
Controlling re-RIP with the RIP processor

You can use the RIP processor Hold for review setting to make it easy to re-RIP orders. When the RIP
processor is configured to hold for review:
● The RIP creates a press job and loads it onto the press.
● When RIPping finishes, the Master Job status is set to Awaiting review.
Configuring processor behavior 169

If re-RIP is required:
1. Select the Master Job.

2. In the Actions menu, click Fail approval.
3. Correct the problem. For example, you may need to edit the Job Ticket.
4. In the Actions menu, click Reprocess.
Pausing a processor
Generally, processors are kept running.
However, there may be times when it is desirable to pause a processor. For example, suppose you
wanted to temporarily “turn off” processing of Internet-submitted jobs. This can be accomplished by
pausing the download processor.
When a processor is paused, it displays the icon in the System panel.
To pause a processor:
1. In the Admin menu, click Processors.

2. In the Processors behaviors list, select the processor.
3. Click Pause processor.
To resume processing, repeat steps 1 and 2, then click Resume processing.
Changing a Production Pro NAS hostname

Do not change a Production Pro NAS hostname after the server is installed and initially configured.
Doing so requires special assistance from HP and might cause production delays.

18 Managing Job Input
Overview of input methods

There are two general ways to submit Master Jobs:
● Using the Import Job dialog box. The Import Job dialog box is an all-purpose method. It accepts
any supported file type, and provides places for entering information necessary to process the
Master Job.
● Using input methods.
What is an input method?

An input method is a previously-configured way of submitting a Master Job. There are three general
types of input methods:
● Hot folders. These are folders into which users can drop job files.
● Network printers. These are input methods that act like printers on the shop intranet. Once a
Production Pro Print Server network printer has been added to a Mac or PC workstation, the user
can “print” to Production Pro Print Server directly from Adobe Acrobat or other compatible
applications.
● Internet (ISV accounts). This method uses configured connections between Production Pro Print
Server and external servers maintained by the customer.
Input methods and Ticket Templates

When an input method is created, it is assigned a Ticket Template. The Ticket Template contains
information about how to process the file. The Ticket Template information is copied into the Master
Job's Job Ticket when the Master Job is submitted.
Example of using input methods

Production Pro Print Server contains a built-in Ticket Template named 4colors. The 4colors Ticket
Template is a collection of settings useful for many four-color jobs. It contains a great deal of processing
information, including:
● Basic workflow settings.
● Imposition.
● Page size.
● RIP color settings, such as ICC profiles, rendering intents, and LUTs.
Overview of input methods 171

Suppose you would like to make it easy to assign the 4colors settings to new Master Jobs. You could:
● Create one or more hot folders that use the 4colors Ticket Template. Any Master Job submitted
by dropping a job file into the hot folder(s) would have the 4colors settings copied into the Job
Ticket.
● Create a special networked printer using the 4colors Ticket Template. When a user printed to that
printer, the Master Job would be submitted to Production Pro Print Server and the 4colors settings
would be copied into the Master Job's Job Ticket.
● Create one or more Internet input methods using the 4colors Ticket Template. The assignment
takes place when the name of the Internet input method (previously supplied to the ISV) matches
the name of the job specification in the incoming intent ticket.
Creating and editing hot folders

Before you start
Determine which Ticket Template to attach to the hot folder. The settings in this Ticket Template are
acquired by all jobs submitted via this hot folder.
Components of a hot folder

When you create a hot folder, you must specify four locations:
● The hot folder into which the job file will be placed.
● An images folder used for the image assets for variable data jobs.
● A database folder used for the database assets for variable data jobs.
● A template folder used for the template asset for variable data jobs.
Creating and editing hot folders

To create a new hot folder:
1. Click Input Methods in the Admin menu to open the Manage Input Methods dialog box.
2. Select the Hot Folder radio button and click New to open the New Hot Folder dialog box.
3. Enter a Hot folder name. This becomes the name of the folder created in the file system. Type a
simple name, not a folder path.
NOTE: The name of the input methods is fixed when it is created; it cannot be edited.
4. Optional: enter a Description.

5. Specify the Ticket Template to be assigned to Master Jobs submitted via this hot folder. If you
need to edit the Ticket Template first, click the Manage Ticket Template button.
6. The Hot folder text box displays the default hot folder location. If necessary, modify the location
for this hot folder.
a. Uncheck the Use default hot folder location box.
b. Click Browse to browse for a folder to contain the hot folder.
NOTE: It is highly recommended that you place all hot folders in the Jobs Share. See The
Jobs Share on page 6.
172 Chapter 18 Managing Job Input

7. The images, template, and database folders default to sub-folders of the hot folder. If necessary,
modify the locations.
NOTE: It is highly recommended that you place these folders in the Jobs Share.
8. Specify the Hot Folder Behavior when a job is submitted via the hot folder is successfully
completed. There are three choices:
● Delete the job file from the file system.
● Send the job file to the default “on success” folder.
If Use common success and error folders is checked in the System Settings dialog box,
this will be the common folder specified in System Settings. Otherwise, it will be the success
sub-folder of the hot folder.
● Send the job file to specified folder. Click Browse to specify the folder.
9. Specify the Hot Folder Behavior when the Master Job is not successfully completed (Master Job
status is set to canceled).
● Delete the job file from the file system.
● Move the job file to the default “on error” folder.
If Use common success and error folders is checked in the System Settings dialog box,
this will be the common folder specified in System Settings. Otherwise, it will be the error sub-
folder of the hot folder.
● Move the job file to specified folder. Click Browse to specify the folder.
10. Click OK.
To edit a hot folder:

2. Double-click the hot folder in the list, or select it and click Edit.
3. Modify data as needed. You cannot change the hot folder name.
4. Click OK.
To copy a hot folder:

2. Select the hot folder in the list and click Copy.
The Copy Input Method dialog box opens.
3. Enter the name you want to assign to the copy.
If you do not enter a name, the default name is “copy of <file name>.” Subsequent copies are
numbered sequentially. You cannot change the name of an input method once it is created.
4. Click OK.
To delete a hot folder:

2. Select the hot folder in the list and click Delete.
3. Click OK when the dialog box asks if you want to delete the selected hot folder.
Creating and editing hot folders 173

Setting default locations for hot folders
The default location for hot folders is shown in the System Settings dialog box. This setting is part of the
initial configuration of the software, and cannot be modified. However, the New Hot Folder dialog box
allows you to override the default location.
The System Settings dialog box allows you specify whether or not you want to use the same success
and error folders for all hot folders. If you check Use common success and error folders, you must
then specify the location for the common folders. These folders will then be used if, when creating a hot
folder, you select the Hot Folder Behavior option Send to default.
Managing Ticket Templates

Every Master Job submitted to the system is associated with a Ticket Template. Settings in the Ticket
Template provide information about how the job will be processed. Ticket Template settings are copied
into the Job Ticket.
Ticket Templates are managed in the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box. The dialog box contains a
list of the available Ticket Templates. From this dialog box, you can create, edit, copy, and delete Ticket
Templates.
To open the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box:
● Choose Ticket Templates from the Admin menu.
To create a new Ticket Template:
● See Creating a new Ticket Template on page 175.
To edit an existing Ticket Template:
Note that only custom Ticket Templates can be edited, not built-ins.
1. Choose Ticket Templates from the Admin menu to open the Manage Ticket Templates dialog
box.
2. Select a Ticket Template to edit from the list.
3. Click the Edit button.
● The Ticket Template dialog box opens, displaying the current settings.
4. Change the settings as desired.
5. Click OK.
To copy an existing Ticket Template:
This is a useful procedure for creating a new Ticket Template based on an existing one.
box.
2. From the list, select a Ticket Template to copy.
3. Click the Copy button.
● The Copy Ticket Template dialog box appears, requesting a name for the copy being made.
4. Optional: enter a name for the copy. If you do not, the copy is named “copy of <the selected
template>.” Subsequent copies are numbered sequentially.
5. Click OK to close the Copy Ticket Template dialog box.

To delete a Ticket Template:
Deleting a Ticket Template causes all its associated input methods to be deleted. This may cause ISV
jobs to fail; be sure to notify ISVs. The input method associated with a particular job is displayed on the
General tab of the Job Ticket and the Ticket Template.
box.
2. From the list, select a Ticket Template to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
● A message appears, warning that if you delete the template, you delete its associated input
methods.
4. Click OK to delete the selected Ticket Template and all its associated input methods.
Creating a new Ticket Template

If you use specific settings repeatedly, it might be helpful to create a Ticket Template and input method
to automatically apply these settings to new Master Jobs. Ticket Templates are created and managed
using the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
To create a new Ticket Template:
1. Choose Ticket Templates from the Admin menu.

● The Manage Ticket Templates dialog box opens.
2. Click New to open a blank Ticket Template dialog box.
3. Enter a descriptive name for the new Ticket Template.
4. Optional: enter descriptive text to help identify the new Ticket Template.
5. Enter the information for the settings:
● General
● Media
● Color Management
● Color Separations
● Page
● Imposition
● Job Control
6. Click OK to save the settings.
● The new Ticket Template appears in the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box.
Creating and editing network printers

Before you start
Determine which Ticket Template to attach to the network printer input method. The settings in this
Ticket Template are acquired by all jobs submitted via this network printer.
Creating a new Ticket Template 175

For information on setting up access to the networked printer on users' systems, see:
● Network printer configuration (PC) on page 44
● Network printer configuration (Macintosh) on page 45
Adding and Editing a Networked Printer

To create a new network printer:
2. Start the new network printer.
● To start with a new blank record:
a. Select the networked printer radio button and click New.
b. Enter a name for the network printer. This is the name that is added to the shared printer
lists on intranet workstations.
● To start with the settings from an existing record:
a. Select a network printer in the input methods list and click Copy.
b. Enter a name for the network printer and click OK.
3. Fill in remaining information. The selected Ticket Template will be assigned to Master Jobs
submitted via this network printer. If necessary, click Manage Ticket Templates to create or
change Ticket Templates.
4. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the new network printer appears in the input method list.
To edit a network printer:

2. Double-click the network printer in the list, or select it and click Edit.
3. Modify data as needed. You cannot change the network printer name.
4. Click OK.
Creating and editing Internet input methods

Once an Internet input method is in use, be very careful about deleting it. Always communicate with the
ISV first. Unexpectedly deleting an Internet input method can cause incoming ISV Master Jobs to fail.
Before you start

Determine which Ticket Template to attach to the Internet input method. Incoming jobs from any ISV
will use the settings in this Ticket Template when the Internet input method name matches the job
specification in their intent tickets.

Creating and editing Internet input methods
To create a new Internet input method:
2. Start the new Internet input method.
● To start with a new blank record:
a. Select the Internet connection radio button and click New.
b. Enter a name for the input method. This is the name that is matched to the intent ticket
job specification.
● To start with the settings from an existing record:
a. Select an Internet method in the input methods list and click Copy.
b. Enter a name for the input method and click OK.
3. Fill in remaining information. The selected Ticket Template will be assigned to Internet Master Jobs
that use this input method. If necessary, click Manage Ticket Templates to create or change Ticket
Templates.
4. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the new Internet input method appears in the list.
To edit an Internet input method:
2. Double-click the Internet input method in the list, or select it and click Edit.
3. Modify data as needed. You cannot change the input method name.
4. Click OK.
Creating and editing Internet input methods 177

19 User Administration
Adding users
To add a remote user:
1. In the Admin menu, click Remote Accounts to open the Manage Remote Accounts dialog box.
2. If the new account (user) requires a role that is not already defined, click Remote Roles and define
a new role. See Managing user roles on page 178
3. In the Manage Remote Accounts dialog box, click New to open the New Remote Account dialog
box.
4. Enter a unique User ID (login name).
5. Enter the Full name of the user.
6. Enter and confirm the user's initial password. The user will be able to change the password later.
Passwords must be 6 to 8 characters and must contain at least one letter and one number.
7. Select a user role from the list.
8. Check Active user if you want the account to be active immediately.
9. Click OK.
Managing user roles

A user role is a set of permissions. Once a user role is created, it can be assigned to one or more users.
A user role specifies:
● Which data the user can see.
● Which tasks the user can perform.
To create a new user role

1. In the Admin menu, click Remote Accounts.
2. In the Manage Remote Users dialog box, click Remote Roles.
3. Remote roles list, select a role whose permissions are closest to the permissions of the new role.
4. Click Copy to open the Edit Remote Role dialog box.
5. Edit the contents of the Remote role text box to provide a descriptive name for the new role.
6. Specify the permissions for the role. See Setting permissions for a role on page 179.
7. Type a brief description of the role into the Description text box.
8. Click OK to create the new role and close the dialog box. The new role will be listed in the Remote
Roles list.
9. In the Manage Remote Roles dialog box, click Close.
178 Chapter 19 User Administration

To modify an existing user role
When you modify a user role, the changes apply to all users assigned that role.
2. In the Manage Remote Accounts dialog box, click Remote Roles.
3. In the Remote roles list, select the role to be modified and click Edit.
4. Modify the permissions.
5. Click OK.
To delete a user role

2. Find the role in the Remote roles list. If there are any users assigned to that role (Number of Users
is not 0), you must reassign those users to other roles first. See Modifying a users role (permissions)
on page 179.
3. Select the role to be deleted and click Delete.
NOTE: The four pre-installed user roles cannot be deleted.
Modifying a users role (permissions)

To change the role assigned to a user:
1. Log on as administrator.
3. In the Manage Remote Users dialog box, select the user and click Edit.
4. Select a different User role from the list, then click OK.
Setting permissions for a role

The Edit Remote Role dialog box is used to:
● Assign names and permissions to new roles.
● Edit permissions to existing roles.
See Managing user roles on page 178 for instructions on creating and editing roles.
The permissions list contains the following items:
● A list of the major categories of permissions.
Category Permission to:
Master Jobs list View the Master Job List and manipulate Master Jobs.
Job Ticket Editor View and modify Job Tickets.
Press controller views View and manipulate jobs in the press controller view and
jobs in the off press jobs list in the press view.
Held (Loaded) Jobs list View and manipulate jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list of
press views.
Modifying a users role (permissions) 179

Category Permission to:
Print Queue View and manipulate jobs in the Print Queue of press views.
Administration Open and modify dialog box associated with system and
user administration.
Log View Open the Log Viewer tab and view system logs.
● Expand ( ) and contract ( ) buttons for each category.

● Check boxes to turn a category on and off.
◦ When a category is turned off, none of the tasks beneath that category are permitted.
◦ When a category is turned on, individual tasks in the expanded list can be turned on and off
to fine-tune the permissions.
● Detailed tasks within each category. The icon indicates whether the task is permitted:
Permitted. Click to change to “not permitted.”
Not permitted. Click to change to “permitted.”
This task is not available.
Resetting user passwords

Users are allowed to change their own passwords. However, it is sometimes necessary for the
administrator to change the password for a user — for example, if the user forgets the password.
To reset a password:
2. Select the user in the Remote Users list and click Set Password.
3. Enter and confirm the new password, then click OK.
180 Chapter 19 User Administration

20 Managing devices
Adding and deleting presses

To add a press
1. In the Admin menu, click Devices.
2. In the Manage Devices window, display the Presses tab and, click New.
3. Enter a descriptive press name. Create a name that will help you identify the press later. Press
names must be unique.
4. Enter the network location. You must enter a valid hostname or IP address.
NOTE: You must specify the IP address if you will be running the HP Remote Production Client
on MacOS systems and the print shop does not use DNS networking.
5. Click OK. Production Pro Print Server will search the network for the specified system. If it is found,
the press will be added to the presses list.
If a connection to the press cannot be established using the hostname, try entering a fully-qualified
hostname (for example, pressabc.pressshop.com). If the problem persists, check to see whether:
● The press server is running.
● Connection between this press and Production Pro Print Server is supported.
To delete a press
2. In the Manage Devices window, click the Presses tab.
3. Select the press to be deleted and click Delete.
The system will not allow you to delete a press if any Ticket Templates reference it as a destination (in
the Job Control tab).
When a PrintLink press is deleted:
● The press is removed from the list of presses in the Job Manager view. All jobs that were on the
press are transferred to the press controller.
● The mapping between the press and press controller is removed.
● The press jobs are no longer visible to the press operator.
● Master Jobs that specify that press, but have not generated a press job yet, are set to status Needs
Attention. In order to process the job, you must:
1. Modify the Job Ticket to specify a new destination.
2. Reprocess the job.
Adding and deleting presses 181

When a non-PrintLink press is deleted:
● The press is removed from the list of presses in the Job Manager view.
● Press jobs that were in the Loaded Jobs list / Held list and Print Queue remain loaded on the press
and can be printed. These press jobs cannot be seen by the Production Pro Print Server. However,
the Master Jobs associated with those press jobs remain in the Master Jobs list and can be
manually deleted.
● Jobs that were in the Press Controller list can still be seen in the press controller view.
● Master Jobs that specify that press, but have not generated a press job yet, are set to status Needs
Attention. In order to process the job, you must:
◦ Modify the Job Ticket to specify a new destination.
◦ Reprocess the job.
Modifying the properties of an existing press

You can change the name or network location of an existing press.
To modify a press

2. In the Manage Devices window, display the Presses tab and click Edit.
If the press name is changed, Ticket Templates that reference that press are updated to reflect the new
name. Note that the new name cannot already be in use.
If the Network location is changed, the new network location will be used. For example, if a press named
“PressA” has its network location changed from hostnameA to hostnameB, orders using a template
referencing PressA will have their press jobs sent to hostnameB.
Adding press controllers

To add a press controller:
1. In the Admin menu, click Manage Devices.
2. In the Manage Devices dialog box, open the Press Controller tab and click New.
3. Enter a descriptive name for the press controller. If you already know the name of the press to
which the controller will be mapped, you may want to use a similar name
4. Enter the Network location. You must enter a valid hostname or IP address.
NOTE: You must specify the IP address if you will be running the HP Remote Production Client
on MacOS systems AND if the printshop does not use DNS networking.
5. Click OK.
If the system finds a press controller at the specified location, it is added to the system. You can now
proceed to map the controller (see Mapping presses and press controllers on page 183).
182 Chapter 20 Managing devices

Mapping presses and press controllers
The following mapping rules apply:
● A press controller can be mapped to only a single PrintLink press.
● A press controller can be mapped to multiple non-PrintLink presses. No maximum is enforced;
however, performance may degrade if too many presses are mapped to a single controller.
● For optimal performance, the ICF format of the press controller and press should match.
● A press controller must be PrintLink-enabled in order to map it to a PrintLink press. However, a
PrintLink-enabled controller can be mapped to non-PrintLink presses.
Presses and press controllers are administered using the Manage Devices dialog box. To open the
dialog box, click Devices in the Admin menu.
To map a press controller:

1. Add the press controller to the system (if it hasn't already been added). See Adding press
controllers on page 182.
2. Add the press(es) to the system (if they haven't already been added). See Adding and deleting
presses on page 181.
3. In the Press Controllers tab of the Manage Devices dialog box, select a press controller and click
Mapping.
4. Select a suitable press or folder device and click Map.
The Unmapped Devices list shows only those devices eligible for mapping. You are prevented from
doing illegal mappings. For example, if the Devices mapped to this controller list contains a
PrintLink press, no other presses can be mapped to the controller.
5. If necessary, use Unmap to remove devices that you no longer want mapped to the press controller.
NOTE: Each folder device must be mapped to a press controller in order to handle VDP jobs.
6. Click OK.
Creating and managing press groups

When you create a press group, it appears as a destination option in the Job Ticket and Ticket Template.
Press groups provide a mechanism for load-balancing. When the order is ready to be RIPped, the
system uses a load-balancing algorithm to select the press to which the press job will be routed when
it is created.
There is no actual storage associated with a press group. When a job is sent to a press group, it is
immediately assigned to one of its members.
A press can be a member of multiple press groups.
To create a press group:

1. In the Admin menu, click Devices to open the Manage Devices dialog box. Display the Press
Groups tab.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a descriptive Press group name.
Mapping presses and press controllers 183

4. Select a Load-balancing method. (See Load balancing on page 184).
5. To add a press to the group, select it in the Available presses list and click Add. A group must
have at least one member. There is no limit on the number of presses in a group.
6. Click OK.
Load balancing
Load balancing is used to distribute press jobs amongst the members of a press group. See Creating
and managing press groups on page 183.
There are two built-in load-balancing mechanisms:
● Next Available. This mechanism distributes the press jobs in a simple sequence: press 1, press 2,
press 3, press 1, press 2, press 3, etc. If a press is unavailable, it is skipped.
● Least Busy. The job is assigned to the press with lowest amount of printing activity in the Print
Queue. The amount of printing activity is computed by calculating the number of impressions
required to print each job:
number of spreads x number of copies x number of separations x 2 (if duplex)
When the Job Ticket specifies a press group as a destination, the system assigns the job to an actual
press prior to RIPping.
Creating folder devices for RIP output

Folder devices allow you to save RIP output (a press job) directly to a file rather than sending the press
job to a press or Production Pro Press Controllers. Folder devices appear as a destination option in the
Job Ticket and Ticket Template.
To create a folder device:
1. In your operating system (for example, Windows Explorer), create the folder that will become the
folder device.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that folder devices be located in the Jobs Share. (See The
Jobs Share on page 6). If you do not use the Jobs Share, you must use your operating system to
share the folder on the network. This is necessary because the location of the folder devices must
identify the folder by its share name and UNC path.
2. In the Admin menu, click Devices to open the Manage Devices dialog box. Display the Folder
Devices tab.
3. Click New.
4. Enter a descriptive folder device name.
NOTE: If you will be using both ICF 96 and ICF 05 folder devices, it may be helpful to include the
format as part of your folder naming convention: for example, calendars95 or indichrome05.
5. Click Browse to open the Folder Device Location dialog box. The dialog box automatically selects
the Jobs Share. Expand it and select the folder that will become a folder device. (The folder will be
listed by its share name.) Then, click OK.
NOTE: If the folder is not in the Jobs Share, select its share name beneath My Network Places.
This will ensure that the Location is written as a UNC path.
6. Check the location that was placed in the Location text box to make sure that it is in UNC format.
184 Chapter 20 Managing devices

7. Select the file format: ICF 96 or ICF 05. See What is ICF? on page 195 for more information.
8. Select a connection limit.
A connection limit may be necessary because certain operating systems have licensing restrictions
on the number of external devices that can be connected. Folder devices require a network
connection between the RIPs and the system where the folder device is located.
● If the operating system has no licensing limitations, select Unlimited.
● If the folder is located on a system running Microsoft Windows® XP or Microsoft Windows
Vista®, select Use value for operating system and choose the operating system from the
list.
● To set a custom limit, select Custom and enter an integer value for Maximum number of
connections.
9. Click OK.
Deleting folder devices

Because folder devices are used in automated workflows, it is important to use caution in deleting them.
In particular, you should never delete the (Windows) folder from the file system before you have removed
the folder device from Production Pro Print Server.
To remove a folder device:
1. Edit or remove any Ticket Templates that specify the folder device as the Press Job Destination
on the Job Control tab.
If you remove a Ticket Template, any input method that uses that template will also be deleted.
2. If possible, edit any Job Tickets that specify the folder device as the destination. Use the Print
Destination column in the Master Jobs list to locate those jobs.
3. Remove the folder device using the Manage Devices dialog box
4. If desired, you can now remove the folder from the file system.
Deleting folder devices 185

21 Press Controller administration
Managing SNAP fonts on a press controller

A SNAP font is a rasterized version of a particular font that has been RIPped in a particular size, with a
particular character set and kerning applied. Additional sizes of any given font can be created, but in
order to change the kerning or character set for a given font, you must delete those SNAP fonts and re-
create them with different attributes. SNAP fonts are used by variable text in VDP jobs.
SNAP fonts are stored on the press controller. Each press controller maintains its own list of SNAP
fonts. Some SNAP fonts are installed with the press controller software and cannot be deleted. These
“built-in” fonts have a checkmark in the “Built-in” column in the SNAP Font Manager.
The use of SNAP fonts differs for workflows involving PrintLink and non-PrintLink presses:
● PrintLink presses — The SNAP fonts reside entirely on the press controller. All VDP text processing
is done on the press controller.
● non-PrintLink presses — When the VDP job arrives at the press controller, the system determines
whether the required SNAP font is installed on the press. If a SNAP font is not available on the
press, it is sent to the press with the job.
Automatic SNAP font creation

When a Production Pro RIP job contains SNAP fonts, the SNAP Font Manager checks to see if the
requested font exists in its SNAP fonts library. If a particular SNAP font does not yet exist, the SNAP
Font Manager creates the new SNAP font, in the particular point size and with the name of the RIP font,
and stores this new SNAP font in its library. This speeds future jobs containing the same SNAP font,
since the new font will not have to be RIPped again. In this way, SNAP Font Manager “learns as it goes”,
creating new SNAP fonts in specific point sizes, automatically.
NOTE: SNAP fonts that are auto-created by SNAP Font Manager will use the same character set and
kerning as existing SNAP fonts with the same font name. If an existing font does not yet exist in the
SNAP Font Manager, then the auto-created SNAP font will use default values of the Windows character
set and kerning. If this is undesirable, you must manually create at least one size of the font in SNAP
Font Manager. Then, any future auto-created fonts with that font name will take on the same attributes
as the font you manually created.
Adding SNAP fonts to a press controller

If a SNAP font has been previously created on one press controller, it does not necessarily need to be
re-created on all other press controllers. Instead, it can be exported from the original press controller
and then be imported to as many other press controllers as necessary. See Importing and exporting
SNAP fonts on page 187
Use this procedure if the SNAP font must be created.
186 Chapter 21 Press Controller administration

To manually create a SNAP font on a press controller:
1. In the Admin menu, click SNAP Font Manager and choose the appropriate Production Pro Press
Controller.
2. Click Add to open the Add SNAP Fonts window.
3. Select the desired font from the Select Font list.
NOTE: If a desired font is not available, install that font using the Production RIP Manager before
creating the SNAP font.
4. Type the Font sizes as a comma-separated list of point sizes; or accept the default size list.
NOTE: No more than 16 comma-separated sizes are allowed, and no size above 400 points is
allowed.
5. Select the appropriate Character set, and check Apply kerning if you want kerning applied to the
SNAP font.
6. Click OK. The Adding Fonts message window appears, displaying the progress as the SNAP font
is RIPped and installed on the Production Pro Press Controller.
Importing and exporting SNAP fonts

Exporting a SNAP font from a press controller saves it to the file system as a JLYT file and a meta-data
file. These files can later be imported back to the same press controller or to another press controller.
By exporting and importing SNAP fonts this way, you can transfer SNAP fonts between Production Pro
Press Controllers without using RIP resources.
To export or “back up” a SNAP font from a press controller:

1. In the Admin menu, click SNAP Font Manager, then click the name of the appropriate press
controller.
2. Select all the fonts you want to export (back up) from the Press Font List.
3. Click Export and specify the directory to which the SNAP font will be exported and click OK.
The SNAP font(s) are exported as one or more JLYT (.jlt) and one or more meta-data files (.dat).
Both of these files must be present to later import the SNAP font.
To import or “restore” a SNAP font into a press controller:
1. In the Admin menu, click SNAP Font Manager, then click the name of the appropriate press
controller.
2. Click the Import button and navigate to the directory containing the backed up fonts.
3. Select all of the fonts you want to restore from the file list. Only the JLYT (.jlt) fonts will appear in
the Open dialog box.
4. Click Open to restore the font(s).
NOTE: You cannot restore a SNAP font file that has the same font name and font size as an
existing font on a Press Controller. If you attempt this, you will see an error message saying that
certain SNAP font files failed to Import. However, all other font files that did not have duplicate
SNAP font problems will Import correctly. Note also that reformatting image memory does not
remove SNAP fonts.
Importing and exporting SNAP fonts 187

The press controller Look Up Table (LUT) library
Each press controller has a Look Up Table (LUT) library for saving and loading LUTs for press jobs.
See Creating and managing press job Look Up Tables (LUTs) on page 96 for information on accessing
and using the LUT libraries.
Press Controller Configuration

The Press Controller Properties dialog allows you to configure the press controller (iPC) either locally
or remotely. It provides configuration information and settings for the elements and parameters.
The Press Controller Properties dialog can be launched in two different ways:
1. From the Admin menu, select Press Controllers. Then, select the desired Press Controller. The
Press Controller Properties dialog is displayed. Click on the Edit button to display the Edit Press
Controller dialog.
2. From the Admin menu, select Devices. The Manage Devices dialog is displayed. Select a Press
Controller and click the Properties button. The Edit Press Controller box is displayed.
3. From the Job Manager tree view, right-click on a Press Controller. Select the Press Controller
Properties option.
The Press Controller Properties dialog displays information such as: hostname and IP address; disks
and memory capacity, the reformat image memory option; missing images options; press controller and
press compatibility and the job elements information.
Viewing system parameters of a press controller

Information about a press controller can be seen in the Edit Press Controller dialog. Some information
can also be edited.
2. Click the Press Controllers tab.
3. Select the press controller.
4. Click Edit. The Edit Press Controller dialog contains the following information:
● Press controller name. The name can be edited.
● Network location (host name or IP address). This location can be edited.
● Type of press controller (PrintLink or non-PrintLink).
● ICF format (ICF 96 or ICF 05).
● Press controller mapping.
188 Chapter 21 Press Controller administration

22 Administering ISV accounts
Overview of ISV accounts

An ISV account establishes an Internet connection between Production Pro Print Server and an Internet
service vendor (ISV). The ISV account includes:
● A unique account name.
● Company contact information.
● Connections to the ISV's RPP servers, which provide incoming Job Tickets (intent tickets).
● Connections to the ISV's image servers, which provide files needed to process the job.
Production Pro Print Server supports an unlimited number of ISV accounts, and each account can have
multiple RPP and image servers. At least one Remote Printing Protocol (RPP) server is required for
each account. An image server is not required.
Creating and editing ISV accounts

Before adding an ISV account, obtain the following information from the ISV:
● The location (URL) of each of the ISV's RPP servers.
● The Authenticated Unique User Identifier (AUUID) for each RPP server.
● The location (URL) of each of the ISV's image servers.
● A user ID and password to connect to each image server, if required.
To create an ISV account:

1. In the Admin menu, click ISV Accounts to open the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box.
2. Click New to open the ISV Account Properties dialog box.
3. On the General tab:
a. Enter a unique account name.
b. Enter the customer's company name.
c. Fill in any additional contact information you want to add.
4. On the RPP Profiles tab, add at least one RPP server. See Creating RPP profiles on page 190.
5. On the Image Server Profiles tab, add image server(s) as needed. See Creating image server
profiles on page 191.
6. Click OK.
To edit an ISV account:
2. Select an ISV account and click Edit.
Overview of ISV accounts 189

3. To change information on the General tab, type over the existing information.
4. To change an RPP or image server profile:
a. Double-click the profile in the appropriate list, or select it and click Edit.
b. Modify the profile data.
c. Click Apply edit.
Creating RPP profiles

When an ISV account is set up, one or more RPP servers must be specified for that account. An RPP
server is identified by its Internet address (URL) and its AUUID. An AUUID is a character string that is
used to validate Production Pro Print Server when it attempts to connect to the RPP server.
An RPP server transmits a job's intent ticket to Production Pro Print Server. The intent ticket is generated
by the customer's job-generating application, and may contain:
● Customer information such as company name and address.
● Information such as billing and shipping information.
● Job information such as quantity, due date.
● A named job specification.
When the Master Job is submitted, Production Pro Print Server attempts to match up the fields in the
intent ticket with the Job Ticket. Customer and job information is copied from the intent ticket to the
matching fields in the Job Ticket.
Production Pro Print Server also compares the job specification to its list of input methods of type
Internet. When a match is found, the Ticket Template associated with the input method is assigned to
the new Master Job. Information from the Ticket Template is used in the Job Ticket when it is not included
in the intent ticket.
To add or edit an RPP server profile:

2. Open the ISV Account Properties dialog box:
a. For a new account, click Add.
b. For an existing ISV account, select the account and click Edit.
190 Chapter 22 Administering ISV accounts

3. Click the RPP Profiles tab.
4. Click New to add a new profile, or select a profile and click Edit to modify an existing profile.
5. Enter the Internet address of the RPP server (RPP server URL).
6. Enter the server's AUUID.
7. Use the Polling on check box to establish when Production Pro Print Server connects to the RPP
server to retrieve jobs:
● To poll the server automatically, check the box and enter the number of seconds between
connection attempts in Polling period.
● To specify that the server must be polled manually, uncheck the box.
8. Use the Drain RPP queue check box to set download behavior when the server is polled:
● To download all available jobs (intent tickets), check the box.
● To download only one job per polling connection, uncheck the box.
9. Click Test connection. If the test fails:
a. Verify that the Production Pro Print Server can access external web sites. If not, the Windows
proxy may not be set.
b. Verify the RPP server URL and AUUID with the ISV customer.
10. Click Apply new or Apply edit.
Creating image server profiles

The image server(s) associated with an ISV account are used to download press job components,
including:
● The job file.
● Image assets for variable data jobs.
● Database assets for variable data jobs.
An ISV account may have one image server, multiple images servers, or no image servers.
Before you add an image server profile

Find out from the ISV which protocol the image server uses:
● HTTP
● HTTPS
● WebDAV
To add or update an image server profile:

2. Open the ISV Account Properties dialog box:
a. For a new account, click Add.
b. For an existing ISV account, select the account and click Edit.
3. Click the Image Server Profiles tab.
Creating image server profiles 191

4. Click New to add a new profile, or select a profile and click Edit to modify an existing profile.
5. Enter the Internet address of the image server (Image server URL).
6. Enter a user ID (login name) for an existing account on the image server.
7. Enter the account password twice.
8. Specify the image server protocol:
● Check the box if the image server uses WebDAV.
● If the image server uses HTTP or HTTPS, leave the box unchecked.
9. Click Test connection. If the test fails:
a. Verify that the Production Pro Print Server server can access external web sites. If not, the
Windows proxy may not be set.
b. Verify the image server URL, user name, and password with the ISV customer.
10. Click Apply new or Apply edit.
Testing ISV accounts

Testing ISV account connections provides information about whether Production Pro Print Server can
connect to the RPP and image servers associated with the ISV account.
To test all the server connections for an ISV account:

1. Click ISV accounts in the Administration menu to open the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box.
2. Select an ISV account and click Test connection.
To test a specific server connection for an account:
1. In the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box, select an ISV account.

2. Click Edit to open the ISV Account Properties dialog box.
3. Select the server on the appropriate tab and click Test Connection.
Test results are displayed in the Test Connection Results dialog box. The dialog box contains an entry
for each server tested.
Polling for Jobs at an ISV

Polling downloads jobs (intent tickets) from the RPP servers at an ISV and submits them as new Master
Jobs.
Polling can be done automatically at established intervals or manually. Use manual polling to:
● Download jobs when automatic polling is turned off
● Download jobs without waiting for the automatic polling period to elapse

Automatically polling RPP servers
To turn automatic polling on or off for an ISV account:
1. In the Admin menu, click ISV Accounts to open the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box. The icons
in the Polling column indicate whether automatic polling is on or off:
- Automatic polling is on for all RPP (intent ticket) servers for the account.
- Automatic polling is off for all RPP (intent ticket) servers for the account.
- Automatic polling is on for some of the ISV's RPP servers, but not all.
2. Highlight the ISV account and click Edit.
3. In the ISV Account Properties dialog box, open the RPP Profiles tab.
4. Select the RPP server and click Edit.
5. Check the Polling on check box.
6. Use the Drain RPP queue check box to set download behavior when the server is polled:
● To download all available jobs (intent tickets), check the box.
● To download only one job per polling connection, uncheck the box.
7. Click Apply edit.
8. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 6 for other RPP servers.
Manually Polling RPP Servers

To manually poll all RPP servers for an account:
1. Click ISV accounts in the Admin menu to open the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box.
2. Select an ISV account and click Manual poll.
To manually poll a particular RPP server:
1. In the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box, select an ISV account.

2. Click Edit to open the ISV Account Properties dialog box.
3. Select a server on the RPP Profiles tab and click Manual poll. HP Production Pro Print Server will
check to see whether there are jobs (intent tickets) to download.
● If Drain RPP queue is checked, all waiting jobs will be downloaded.
● If Drain RPP queue is unchecked, one job will be downloaded for each manual poll.
Troubleshooting ISV account problems

If Production Pro Print Server is unable to obtain tickets from a customer:
● Make sure the ISV account is active (that polling is turned on). See Polling for Jobs at an ISV
on page 192.
● Make sure the RPP profile information is correct. Test the connection. See Creating RPP profiles
on page 190.
Troubleshooting ISV account problems 193

If Production Pro Print Server is unable to obtain the job file and other assets from a customer:
● Make sure the image server information is correct. Test the connection. See Creating image server
profiles on page 191.
● Contact the customer to verify that the required files have been placed on the specified image
server.
● Check that the customer intent ticket contains valid URL strings.
NOTE: Space and non-ASCII characters in an “http” URL are invalid. Non-ASCII characters
should be converted to UTF-8, then %-escaped.
If Production Pro Print Server is having difficulties with multiple ISV accounts, verify that the Ethernet
network connections are working.
If jobs submitted via the Internet go into a needs attention state immediately upon submission, check to
see whether there are appropriate Internet input methods configured for the jobs. There must be an
Internet input method whose name matches the value of the job specification identified in the incoming
intent ticket.

23 ICF Formats and Production Pro Print
Server Workflows
What is ICF?
ICF is an abbreviation for Indigo Compression Format. It refers to both the internal format of press jobs
(JLYT files) and the version of software running on the presses and press controllers. All press jobs
loaded onto a press or press controller are internally stored in the ICF format of that device.
Currently, there are two ICF formats:
● ICF 96 – This format is used by the non-upgraded HP 5000 and older presses. ICF 96 presses do
not support ICF 05.
● ICF 05 – This format is used by newer presses and press controllers. It supports the printing
enhancements such as line thinning, line smoothing, and multiple resolutions.
ICF format and press controller configuration

Press controllers can be configured for either ICF 96 or ICF 05 format. The version can be configured
after installation.
In general, these guidelines apply to selecting the ICF version to run:
If the press controller is mapped to… Recommended press controller format
PrintLink press match the press format
non-PrintLink presses — all ICF 96 ICF 96
non-PrintLink presses — all ICF 05 ICF 05
non-PrintLink presses — both ICF 96 and ICF 05. Not ICF 05

generating a large volume of VDP jobs to be printed on ICF 96
presses.
non-PrintLink presses — both ICF 96 and ICF 05. Generating ICF 96

a large volume of VDP jobs to be printed on ICF 96 presses.
non-PrintLink presses — both ICF 96 and ICF 05. Jobs do not ICF 96
use/require ICF 05 features
non-PrintLink presses — both ICF 96 and ICF 05. Jobs use/ ICF 05.
require ICF 05 features.
NOTE: When a press controller is configured for ICF 05, VDP jobs whose destination is an ICF 96
press will experience longer processing times due to the need to convert those jobs to ICF 96.
What is ICF? 195

Determining the press job ICF format for static jobs
Press jobs are created by the RIPs. The RIPs can create press jobs in either format. Therefore,
Production Pro Print Server needs a workflow scheme to determine the format for the press jobs it
creates.
The Job Ticket contains settings that specify the post-RIP destination for the press job.
The choices are:
● A press.
● A press group that has been created in the Manage Devices dialog box.
● A folder device that has been created in the Manager Devices dialog box.
● A press controller.
For static jobs, the RIPs use the format of the post-RIP destination to determine which ICF format to
create. This creates workflow with maximum compatibility between press jobs and the devices to which
they are routed.
For press groups, the system determines which press in the group will receive the press job before the
job is RIPped.
Determining the press job ICF format for VDP job

All VDP press jobs are internally routed through a press controller before being sent to the destination
specified in the Job Ticket. This internal routing determines the ICF version of the press job that is
created. The ICF format of the press controller determines the format of the press job that is created.
196 Chapter 23 ICF Formats and Production Pro Print Server Workflows

Copying press jobs to other devices (ICF format issues)
In a press shop that has devices with different ICF formats, manually copying a press job from one
device to another has ICF implications:
● When a press job is copied from an ICF 96 device to an ICF 05 device, the destination ICF 05
device converts the job to ICF 05 at load time. This may cause loading to be slower.
● When a press job is copied from an ICF 05 device to an ICF 96 device, the behavior depends on
the RIP resolution:
◦ If the job was RIPped at 800 dpi, the source (ICF 05) device can convert the job to ICF 96.
However, the system will first display a warning that certain enhancements included in the
press job will be lost in the conversion to ICF 96. Furthermore, the image may be clipped if
the job was RIPped for the A3+ media size.
◦ If the job was RIPped using the resolution enhancements featured in ICF 05 (non-800 dpi),
the copy operation cannot be done.
The following figure shows these situations.
Copying press jobs to other devices (ICF format issues) 197

Exporting and importing press jobs (ICF format issues)
Exporting
Exporting a press job saves it in its current format. Therefore:
● Jobs exported from ICF 96 devices are saved in ICF 96 format.
● Jobs exported from ICF 05 devices are saved in ICF 05 format.
Importing
When a previously-exported press job is re-imported, the Ticket Template assigned during import
determines the destination.
The following guidelines apply:
● Do not use a Ticket Template that specifies a folder device as the destination. This wastes system
resources because the end result is simply to copy the job to the destination folder.
● If the press job is in ICF 05 format, do not import it using a template that specifies an ICF 96 device.
The device will not be able to load the job.
● If the press job is in ICF 96 format, you can use a Ticket Template that specifies either format
device. Keep in mind that the press job will require conversion by an ICF 05 device.
198 Chapter 23 ICF Formats and Production Pro Print Server Workflows

24 Main window and panels reference
Production Pro Print Server tab and Master Jobs list

The Production Pro Print Server tab contains these components:
Job Manager panel Provides navigation controls and status information. Click Production Queue, Master Jobs list or
the name of a press or press controller to view jobs.
See The Job Manager panel on page 10.
Search panel Panel that lets you shorten (filter) the job lists by showing only entries that match the search criteria.
See Searching and Sorting Lists on page 17. Print queues cannot be filtered.
Clear
Click the button to display all the items in the list. This button is active when Search has
been used to filter the list.
Search
Click the button to filter the list to include only those items that match the search expression.
Search expression Enter a Search expression:
● Select a column to filter on.
● Select a condition; for example, contains or is (exactly).
● Select or type value(s) to complete the filter expression.
System panel Provides quick status information on system devices.
Production queue Displays Master jobs in overall processing order.
Master Jobs list Displayed when Master Jobs list is selected in the Job Manager. Displays the Master Jobs that
match the current search criteria.
Press jobs for Master Job Displayed when Master Jobs list is selected in the Job Manager. When a Master Job is selected
<name> that has generated one or more press jobs, those press jobs are shown. Click the job name to
switch to the press view of that job.
Thumbnail panel Displays a small preview image of the press job associated with the Master Job. See Using the
Thumbnail panel on page 18.
Log Viewer tab

The Log Viewer tab displays system messages in a single interface. It contains the following areas:
Log Viewer Settings Panel that lets you specify the kinds of messages displayed in the Log listing.
Monitor mode Displays the most recent 50 messages in the Press System log as they are
generated. The filter criteria are inactive. Monitor mode is useful for
troubleshooting.
History mode Allows you to search for previously logged messages that match a particular
criteria. The log listing is not automatically updated. (Click Filter Log to update
the log listing.)
Production Pro Print Server tab and Master Jobs list 199

Log Type Specifies the type of log messages to be displayed. Depending on the Log Type
you specify, another drop-down list may be presented below the Log Type, giving
you further options.
Processor This drop-down list appears when you select the Master Job Log log type. It allows
filtering of messages according to where they are generated in the workflow.
Press This drop-down list appears when you select the Press System Log log type. It is
used to select the press or press controller whose log you want to view.
RIP Hostnames This drop-down list appears when you select the RIP Log log type. It is used to
provide a filtered view of RIP logs.
Subsystem A list activated when the Press Consumables Log is the selected Log Type. Allows
filtering of Press Consumables Log messages by the type of consumable: BID,
Inks, Substrate, Blanket, PIP, and Corona.
Machine State, Machine Mode, Service Lists that are activated when the Press System Log is the selected Log Type.
Category, Error Urgency Allows filtering of Press System Log messages in these categories.
Filter log entries Allows filtering based on time and severity.
Filter Log Filters the selected log according to the criteria set below.
Maximum entries Maximum number of items shown in a particular log.
Limit entries to Use the controls below to set the message time frame.
Since last startup Filters the selected log type so that only messages since the last system startup
appear in the Log listing (up to the maximum specified above).
Most recent Displays the most recent messages, up to the maximum specified. This may
include messages prior to the last startup.
Generated on Specify a particular day.
Message type Select one or more severity levels. See Severity of logged events on page 130.
Log listing Panel that displays messages matching the Log Type and current filter criteria.
Message details Panel that displays details of the message selected in the Log listing.
Thumbnail preview
The Thumbnail Preview panel is on the lower left of the Production Pro Print Server tab.
Thumbnail preview shows the special images of a press job. Thus, if you select a Master Job, the
thumbnail is a view of the Master Job's corresponding press job. If the Master Job has multiple press
jobs, the first one is shown.
When you first select a job, the Thumbnail panel displays a button to indicate a preview image is
available. Click the button to open the image.
Thumbnails are not available for a press job that is:
● Currently printing
● Currently imposing
● Currently being edited in the Job Editor dialog
● Currently being exported to archive
● Currently being sent to another press
200 Chapter 24 Main window and panels reference

The panel contains the following areas:
<panel border> Click and drag up to expand the panel.
<browse buttons> Click to select a spread in the job: first, previous, next, and last.
Current and total spread indicators in center.
<image> Preview image of the selected spread.
Master Jobs List columns

The Master Jobs list has a number of columns available that supply information on Master Jobs.
● You can select the columns to display for the Master Jobs list. See Customizing the main window
on page 21.
● You can sort the Master Jobs list by the values in a column. See Searching and Sorting Lists
on page 17.
● You can select the Master Jobs to show in the Master Jobs list. See Searching and Sorting Lists
on page 17.
Master Job Name The column contains:
● The Master Job status icon. See Master Job status icons
on page 268.
● Descriptive name for the Master Job. Sorting on this

column sorts by job name.
Progress General workflow state. See Master Job progress states

on page 268.
Priority Rush, high, medium, or low.
Submit Time Date and time the Master Job was entered into the system.
Due Date Date the Master Job is needed by the customer.
Quantity Number of copies ordered. (This may be different than the

number of copies or sheets printed due to imposition or printing
extra copies.)
Locked/Unlocked In remote-enabled systems, specifies whether another user is

modifying the Master Job.
Locked by The login ID of the user who has the Master Job locked.
Lock Time The time at which the Master Job was locked.
Billing Code Billing code provided by the customer.
Customer Job Name The job name specified in the incoming (intent) Job Ticket for
ISV Master Jobs.
Customer Order Number the Master Job number specified in the incoming (intent) Job
Ticket for ISV Master Jobs.
External Job ID For ISV jobs. An identifier provided by the customer. This ID is
usually unique for the customer, but may not be unique within
Production Pro Print Server.
Master Jobs List columns 201

Internal ID A unique identifier assigned to each Master Job that is
submitted.
Master Job Status Displays additional status information.
Organization Name The customer who submitted the job.
Print Destination Production Pro Print Server only. The Press Job Destination
specified in on the Job Control tab of the Job Ticket. If the press
job has been moved to a different press, this column will not
reflect its new location.
Processor/Location The specific processor location of the Master Job, or the

specific location of the press job.
Purchaser The buyer of the job; usually the name of the customer
company.
Ticket Template The Ticket Template that was used to supply initial Job Ticket
values. See Using Ticket Templates on page 36.
Locked “Yes” indicates the Job Ticket is currently locked because it is

open for editing by another user.
Lock Time The time at which the Job Ticket was locked.
Locked By The user who has the Job Ticket open for editing.
Completed time The time the Master Job status was set to “complete.”
Held (Loaded) Jobs list and Print Queue columns

The Loaded Jobs list and the Print Queue have the same columns available to display press job
information. Most of the information for a press job can be modified in the Job Properties dialog.
● You can select the columns to display for each list. See Customizing the main window
on page 21.
● You can sort the Loaded Jobs list by the values in a column. See Searching and Sorting Lists
on page 17.
● You can select the jobs to show in the Loaded Jobs list. See Searching and Sorting Lists
on page 17.
Name The column contains:
● Job status icon. See Press job status and icons on page 269.
● Descriptive name for press job
Job Status Press job status.
Submit Time Date and time job was loaded on the press.
Adaptive halftoning Whether or not to use adaptive halftoning. Values are on and off.
Copy Range Copies to print, as defined in job properties.
Sheet Range Sheets to print in each copy.
Collation Yes - print all pages of each copy before printing the next copy.
No - print all copies of page 1, then all copies of page 2, etc.
Comment Added in job properties.

Copies Loaded Original number of copies to print, as defined in the Master Job.
Delivery Delivery Name, part of delivery information included in the JLYT file. Can be set on the
Information tab of the Job Properties dialog. Note: This is not the same as the Order Form
information from the Job Ticket.
Duplex Print Mode Simplex, side 1 only, side 2 only, both (standard duplex), swapped (switch sides 1 and 2)
Hold Affects how job is handled when it is sent to a press.
Yes - place job in Held (Loaded) Jobs list.
<empty> - send job directly to Print Queue.
Initially set in the Job Ticket and modifiable in job properties.
Internal ID Unique identifier for press job.
Job Index Identifies job in a system table. Job indexes start at 50, run to 350, and then start over.
Job Size (kb) Size of job file in kilobytes.
Left Offset from substrate left edge.
Light cyan and magenta Whether or not to use these inks if they are available. Values are on, off, and use press default.
Line thinning Whether or not to use these inks if they are available. Values are on, off, and use press default.
Mirror Flip job image horizontally (mirrored), flip vertically, rotate 180°, or print normally.
No. Dot Gain Yes - bypass color LUTs for separations used in the job and print job without reference to a LUT.
No. of Separations Number of color separations used in the job.
PR Yes - personalized (variable data) job.
Priority Value from 1 to 100. Setting in the master Job Ticket is translated as 25 (low), 50 (medium), 75
(high), 100 (rush).
Proof Yes - job is marked to print a single proof copy when it reaches the press.
Resolution The resolution at which the job was RIPped.
Retain Length of time (days.hours.minutes) the job will be stored in the retain list after printing.
Reverse Yes - print the job from last page to first page.
Screening Type Sequin, HDI_set_2, HDI-175, HDI-180, HDI-160, or press default.
Sent to Name of the last network press that job was sent to.
Side 2 Left Offset from substrate's left edge for the duplex side.
Side 2 Top Offset from substrate's top edge for the duplex side.
Size X Horizontal (X) size of job sheet in millimeters.
Size Y Vertical (Y) size of job sheet in millimeters.
Spreads Loaded Displays progress as spreads in job are loaded in press memory. The job can be moved to the
Print Queue to start printing loaded spreads while the rest of the job is still loading.
Substrate Name Lists substrate(s) for the job and the sheet ranges.
Top Offset from substrate top edge.
Held (Loaded) Jobs list and Print Queue columns 203

Press controller view columns
Press Controllers
Controller Name Displays the unique controller's name.
Hostname/IP Address Displays the hostname or the IP address.
Type Displays the type of press.
ICF Format Displays the ICF format information.
Mapped Devices Displays the information on the mapped devices.
Press status panel

The press status panel appears at the top of each press view.
pressStatus The press status icon (a larger version of the icon left of the press name in the navigation area)
and text message description.
pressName The friendly name of this press, specified in the Manage Print Destinations dialogs.
pressControllerStatus If a nominal status, then this area is left blank.
Details button This button, when clicked, causes the press status details dialog to be displayed.
Now printing document If a document is currently being printed by the press, then this field displays the document name.
name
Copies The number of copies printed so far, and the total number of copies in the job.
% Complete A percentage complete, based on the copies values.
Progress Bar A graphical representation of the “% Complete”.
Thumbnail The static thumbnail for the job. This is NOT a thumbnail of the page currently being printed.

25 General user dialog boxes reference
Copy Job to and Move Job to dialog boxes

This dialog box is used to send a copy of the selected press job(s) to another press or press controller.
To open the dialog box, select one or more press jobs in the Held (Loaded) Jobs list, Press Controller
Jobs list, or press controller view and:
● In the Actions menu, click Copy to, or
● Right-click and select Copy to from the pop-up menu, or
●
Click the Copy to toolbar button.
Destination list Enter the IP address or the hostname of the destination device. You can type information or select from
the menu. The menu is pre-filled with the names of all available presses and press controllers.
OK Sends the selected jobs and closes the dialog box. For copy operations, a duplicate is created and sent.
For move operations, the original job is sent.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without sending jobs.
Retained Jobs dialog box

The Retained Job dialog box displays the list of press jobs that have been saved after printing. The
dialog box provides a way for users to reactivate jobs by moving them back to the Held/Loaded Jobs
list or Print Queue.
Each press has a separate list of retained jobs.
Jobs can be deleted manually from the Retained Job dialog box. Otherwise, the jobs are deleted
automatically after an interval set in the job properties.
To open the dialog box:

1. In the Job Manager select the press whose retained job you want to view. This opens the press
view for that press.
● In the Jobs menu, click Retained Jobs
●
Click the Retained Jobs toolbar button.
The Retained Jobs dialog box contains:
<retained jobs table> Displays jobs currently retained by the press. The Retain until value is determined by the Job
Retention setting in the job properties.
Move to Held/Loaded List Moves the selected job to the Loaded Jobs list and removes it from the retain list.
Copy Job to and Move Job to dialog boxes 205

Move to Print Queue Moves the selected job to the Print Queue and removes it from the retain list.
Delete Deletes the selected job from the press. The job will no longer be available.
View Options dialog box

The View Options dialog box lets you select which columns appear in system lists.
To open the View Options dialog box, click Options in the View menu.
The View Options dialog box contains the following areas:
List Selects the list — Production Queue, Master Jobs list, Held/ Loaded Jobs list, Print Queue,
or Press Controller Jobs list — whose columns you want to customize.
Available fields The columns that can be displayed for a selected list.
Show these fields in this order The columns currently selected for display in the order in which they will appear in the
window, left-most column on top. Starts with a default list of columns. Lets you add and
remove columns, and determine the order of the columns.
Move Up, Move Down Moves the selected field up or down in Show these fields in this order.
Add Adds the column selected in Available fields to the list of columns to be displayed.
Remove Removes the selected column from the list of columns to be displayed and returns it to the
list of Available fields.
Restore Defaults Restores the default columns for the selected list.
Group Jobs dialog box

The Group Jobs dialog box creates a new press job based on the content of a selected set of press
jobs.
The jobs table contains a list of the jobs that were selected for grouping. The job at the top of the list
has special significance:
● The job properties of the new job are based on it.
● The new press job is associated with the same Master Job.
To open the dialog box, select two or more press jobs and click Group Jobs in the Job menu. (Jobs in
the Print Queue cannot be grouped)
The Group Jobs dialog box contains the following areas:
<jobs table> Displays the jobs to be grouped and their priorities. Job Properties are derived from the first job
in the list. When the grouped job is sent to the press, the jobs will be printed in the order they
are listed here.
Move Up/Move Down Move the selected job up or down one position in the list.
Delete Removes the selected job from the group. The original press job remains in the Loaded Jobs
list.
Group job name Defaults to the first job name in the list followed by _group_n, where n is the number of jobs in
the group.
206 Chapter 25 General user dialog boxes reference

Uses job properties from Specifies the job whose properties will be copied to the new grouped job. This is always the
first job in the list.
Delete original jobs Deletes the included original jobs when the grouped job is created.
Import Job dialog box

The Import Job dialog box is used to import new job files or jobs that have been exported to archive
files.
● In the Job menu, click Import, or
●
Click the Import toolbar button.
The Import Job dialog box contains the following areas:
File name The files to import, selected through the browse window. Select job files or database files (for VDP
jobs).
Browse Opens a browse window to select the file(s) to import.
Delete Removes the selected file from the File name list.
Job Options Set individually for each file in the list (each file typically generates a separate order).
Master Job name The name that will be given to the new Master Job. Defaults to the file name.
Quantity Number of copies to print.
Import Options Set once for all files in the list.
Ticket Template Selects the Ticket Template to be used (all the jobs imported at the same time use the same Ticket
Template).
Edit Job Ticket Opens the Job Ticket created from the specified Ticket Template. Any modifications you make
will be applied to all the jobs being imported at this time.
Needed by Select the checkbox and choose the required date.
Prompt to confirm the After import, opens a dialog box to select templates, database files, or image folders for variable
location(s) of variable data data jobs.
assets
Do not prompt Select only when importing variable data job file(s) that contain all necessary data (for example,
a PPML job file with an embedded database).
Import Submits the Master Job and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Close the dialog box without submitting the Master Job(s).
Export dialog box

The Export dialog box is used to save press jobs as press-ready JLYT files. The exported files can later
be re-imported.
Import Job dialog box 207

To open the dialog box, select one or more jobs in the Loaded Jobs list, and:
● In the Job menu, click Export, or
● Right-click and select Export from the popup menu, or
●
Click the Export toolbar button.
The Export dialog box contains the following areas:
<browse window> Allows browsing to the folder destination for the exported file.
File name Enter the name for archive file. The default name is job_name.jlt.
Save as type Archive file format; only JLYT files (.jlt) are allowed.
Save Saves the press job as a .jlt file and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Close the dialog box without exporting the job.
Specify Asset Locations dialog box

The Specify Asset Locations dialog box is used to specify the location of the assets (templates, images,
databases) for variable jobs submitted through the Import Jobs dialog box.
The Import Jobs dialog box detects variable job files or databases and automatically opens the Specify
Asset Locations dialog box unless the Do not prompt option is selected. If multiple variable job files
are selected to import, a separate Specify Asset Locations dialog box appears for each of them.
The Specify Asset Locations dialog box contains the following areas:
File name The name of the job file originally selected in the Import Jobs dialog box. This may be a .ppml file or a
database file.
Master Job name The names assigned to the Master Job in the Import Job dialog box.
Image folder If the job requires image assets, select the folder containing the images. All the images for a job must
be in the same folder. The folder path must be specified in UNC syntax(\\servername\Sharename\path).
Browse Opens the Browse for Folder dialog box. Locate the folder within My Network Places to provide a UNC
path.
Template file If the imported job file was a database file, select the template file for the variable job. Clicking
Browse opens a window to browse for the file. The path can use a drive letter (for example, C:
\mytemplate) or UNC syntax.
Database file If required, select a database file for the variable job. Database files must be text files with a delimiter
character separating the column values in each row. Clicking Browse opens a window to browse for
the file. The path can use a drive letter (for example, C:\mytemplate) or UNC syntax.
<database display> The selected database file in column format. Use the navigation controls to page through the database.
Database delimiter Choose the delimiter used in the selected database or type it in the Other field.
Has header row When checked, the first row in the database is regarded as column headers rather than VDP data.
All Include all database rows in the job (except the header row, if any).
Selected records Include only checked database rows. Activates check boxes in database display.
Record range Enter range of rows to include. Separate page numbers with commas and use hyphens to indicate page
ranges; for example, 1,4–6,12.

Update Applies the Record range to the database display
Previous/Next (For multiple job file imports) Display the Specify Asset Locations dialog box for the previous or next
variable data job.
Finish Submit new order(s) and close the dialog box.
Cancel Close the dialog box without saving the job.
Administer Processors dialog box

Use the Administer Processors dialog box to:
● Pause and resume processors.
● Configure a processor to hold Master Jobs before processing.
● Configure a processor to hold Master Jobs for review after processing.
To open the dialog box, click Processors in the Admin menu.
The Administer Processors dialog box contains the following areas:
<processor table> Displays the configurable processors that are available in the system, their current statuses,
and their hold behavior settings. See Processor status and icons on page 271.
Pause/Resume processor Pause processor temporarily stops the selected processor (appears when the processor is
active).
Resume processor starts the selected processor at the point where it was paused (appears
when the processor is paused).
Hold before Master Jobs are put on hold as they enter the processor and are not processed until manually
released.
Hold for review Master Jobs are put in awaiting review status after they finish processing and do not move to
the next processor until manually reviewed and released.
Apply Applies the checked settings.
System Settings dialog box

Use the System Settings dialog box to manage default settings that are used in the Production Pro Print
Server workflow.
To open the dialog box, click System Settings in the Admin menu.
The System Settings dialog box contains the following areas:
System “Delete Press Job” Behavior Determines what happens to a Master Job when its last press job is deleted.
Move the Master Job to the next step in Only the press job is deleted. The Master Job moves to the next processor. If the
the workflow press is the last processor, the Master Job is set to complete or awaiting review,
according to the Workflow Settings.
Cancel the Master Job The Master Job is set to Canceled status.
Ask - allow user to choose A dialog box is displayed asking the user which behavior they prefer.
Workflow Settings Sets certain workflow behaviors.
Administer Processors dialog box 209

Place all newly-submitted jobs on hold All new Master Jobs are placed on hold. This is useful if you frequently need to edit
the Job Ticket prior to RIP.
Use First In First Out (FIFO) to Directs the system to process each job in the order in which it was submitted. This
determine the job processing priority. option prevents a smaller job from being press processed ahead of a larger job, even
if the smaller job is ready before the larger job.
Automatically delete Master Jobs This is an auto-cleanup setting for Master Jobs. If this is checked, a Master Job will
be automatically deleted when either of the following conditions occur:
● The Master Job is canceled.
● The Master Job reaches the status of “complete” and all of its associated press
jobs have been deleted.
Set the Master Job progress to The Master Job is automatically set to complete after its final processing step. Usually,
complete the last processing step is printing.
Set the Master Job to awaiting review The Master Job is set to awaiting review after its final processing step.
Hot Folder
Root hot folder Default location for new hot folders. This field is not editable. Changing the default
hot folder location does not affect the location of existing hot folders.
Default Common Success/Error

Folder for Job Import
Use common success/error folder Establishes the default destination that is displayed in the New Hot Folder dialog box.
Checked: use default folders designated below for all hot folders
Not checked: create separate default success and error folders within hot folder.
Default success folder When using common success and error folders: Sets the default location shown in
the New Hot Folder dialog box. When the Master Job status is set to complete, the
original job file is copied to this folder.
Default error folder When using common success and error folders: Sets the default location shown in
the New Hot Folder dialog box. Default destination for unsuccessful Master Jobs.
When the Master Job status is set to canceled, the original job file is copied to this
folder.
Default export folder Default location for the creation of exported job files.
Log Settings dialog box

The Log Viewer provides a single location for viewing messages generated by the Production Pro Print
Server, the Production RIP Manager, the Production Pro Press Controllers, and the presses. The Log
Settings dialog box lets you determine:
● How often messages should be cleared.
● What messages should generate pop-ups.
To open the Log Settings dialog box, click Log Settings in the Admin menu.
The Log Settings dialog box contains the following areas:
Delete log entries older than <number> Sets the number of days after which log messages should be deleted. The default
days is 180 days.
Configure Popup Messages Determines which messages should be displayed in pop-up windows. By default,
the system displays fatal, error, and warning messages from production, press,
and RIP in pop-up windows.

Display a popup message for: Specifies the severity needed to trigger a pop-up message.
fatal, error, warning and info
fatal, error, and warning
fatal and error
fatal only
custom message popup options Allows you to specify different severity criteria for production, press, and RIP
messages.
Production events Check to display pop-ups for production events of the chosen severity.
Press events Check to display pop-ups for press and press controller events of the chosen
severity.
RIP events Check to display pop-ups for RIP events of the chosen severity.
Data Export dialog box

The Data Export dialog box saves log information in .csv (comma-separated values) format.
Exported data is not filtered; all data is exported for the selected export type.
To open the Data Export dialog box, click Data Export in the Admin menu.
NOTE: Information associated with deleted jobs is removed from the Production Pro Print Server
database. Therefore, it is not available to be exported.
The Data Export dialog box contains the following areas:
Export Type Select an option:
● All: each of the following options, saved into separate files
● Production System Log: events and errors generated by the Production Pro Print Server
processors
● Master Job Log: Master Job-related errors and events occurring within Production Pro Print
Server.
● Master Jobs list: database contents of the Master Jobs list.
● Press Job List: database contents of the non-queued jobs on all presses and press
controllers. The database for each device is written to a separate file.
Export To Destination folder for the exported files.
Browse Opens a browse window to select the Export To folder.
Export Saves selected data as .csv files in the destination folder. The file name is fixed.
Create Composition Preview dialog box

The Create Composition Preview dialog box is displayed by selecting a press job and clicking
Composition preview in the Actions menu. It is used to save all or portions of a press job to a PDF
file that can be viewed in a PDF file reader.
See Saving a PDF preview on page 127 for more information.
Data Export dialog box 211

All Saves all spreads in the press job.
Spreads Enter values to define the range of spreads.
Destination file Specifies the PDF file to be created. Type a path or click
Browse.
Export Current Log dialog box

This dialog box is used export the contents of the currently-viewed log to a .csv file.
To open this dialog box, click Export on the Log Viewer tab. The button is in the upper right corner of
the window.
Selected items only When checked, only the selected log entries are saved.
Export To: Specifies the name of the .csv file to be created. Click Browse to specify the location.
Browse Opens the dialog for selecting the export location. Navigate to a folder and specify a File
name. You cannot change the file type. Click Save to return to the Export Current Log dialog.
Export Starts the export.
Cancel Cancels the export.

26 Resource Management reference
Substrate Catalog reference

The Substrate Catalog is displayed from:
● The Job Ticket: Choose Substrate Catalog from the Default job substrate or Substrate list.
● The Job Properties dialog box: In the Edit Substrate Selection area, click Substrate Catalog in
the Substrate list.
When you open the Substrate Catalog, the system acquires the substrate information from the press
(es). There can be a delay in displaying the list to allow for communication with the presses.
Substrate table Contains a sortable list of substrates and their properties:
● When the catalog is opened from the Job Ticket, all defined substrates on all presses are listed.
If a substrate is defined on multiple presses, each definition is listed separately.
● When the catalog is opened from the Job Properties dialog, only substrates defined on the
assigned press are shown. (If the job's workflow sent the press job to a press controller, the
job does not have a press assignment, all substrates are shown.)
● The catalog includes the pre-defined intended substrates. It does not list custom intended
substrates that may have been created on non-PrintLink presses.
● If a press is down or off-line, its substrates are not listed.
Select Substrate Selects the highlighted substrate and closes the catalog.
Manage LUTs dialog box

Use the Manage LUTs dialog box to make custom RIP Look Up Tables (LUTs) available for processing
color separations. LUTs can be selected in Default job LUT for separations in the Separations tab of
the Job Ticket and Ticket Template dialog boxes.
To open the Manage LUTs dialog box, click Import LUTs next to the Default job LUT for
separations list.
● Click Import LUTs next to the Default job LUT for separations list, or
● Click LUTs in the Admin menu.
Note to remote users: Your user permissions determine whether you can open and use this dialog
box.
The Manage LUTs dialog box contains the following areas:
<text box> Displays the filename of the currently selected LUT.
Import Opens a window for browsing for the LUT to be added.

Pressing Open in the window adds the LUT to the list of
available LUTs.
Delete Deletes the selected LUT from the list. Built-in (preloaded)
LUTs cannot be deleted.
Substrate Catalog reference 213

Manage ICC Profiles dialog box
Use the ICC Profiles Manager to make new ICC profiles available for color management in Production
Pro Print Server. Profiles added in the ICC Profiles Manager are displayed in the Color Management
dialog box.
To open the ICC Profiles Manager, click ICC Profiles in the Admin menu, or:
1. Click the Color Management tab from either the Job Ticket or the Ticket Template dialog box, and
2. Click the ICC Profile Manager button.
The ICC Profiles Manager contains the following areas:
Choose a profile type Choose the type of profile you want to add.
Profiles list Contains the names of the available profiles of the type
selected above.
<text box> Displays information about the selected profile.
Delete Deletes the selected input profile. Built-in profiles cannot be

deleted.
Import Opens a dialog box to browse for the profile (.icc or .icm file)
to import.
Manage Impositions dialog box

Use the Manage Impositions dialog box to add and delete imposition templates. Impositions added in
the Manage Impositions dialog box are displayed in the lists in the Imposition tab of the Job Ticket and
Ticket Template dialog boxes.
To open the Manage Impositions dialog box, click Impositions in the Admin menu.
The Manage Impositions dialog box contains the following areas:
Imposition Name, Pages/Spread, Rotation Columns of the table that give basic information about the
imposition.
Delete Deletes the imposition selected in the table. Pre-loaded

imposition cannot be deleted.
Imposition file The imposition template file to be added.
Browse Opens a Browse dialog box.
Add Adds the imposition file to the list of impositions.
SNAP Font Manager dialog box

This dialog allows you to manage all the SNAP (Swift Native Accelerated Personalization) fonts available
on a press controller. From this dialog, you can create new SNAP fonts, export fonts, and import
previously-created SNAP fonts.
To open this dialog box, click SNAP Font Manager in the Admin menu to display a list of press
controllers. Select the press controller.
214 Chapter 26 Resource Management reference

Press Font List Lists the SNAP fonts available on the press controller.
There are 35 built-in fonts in sizes: 6, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 28, 36, 48, and 72 points.
Delete Deletes the font in all sizes shown in the “Font Sizes” column for the selected row(s). When you
delete a SNAP font, any jobs that rely on that font and size will be deleted as well. If any such
jobs are in the system, you will be prompted whether to confirm the delete of the SNAP fonts and
job(s) or to abort the delete.
Add Opens the Add Font dialog box for creating new SNAP fonts on the press controller.
Export Opens an Export dialog box to specify the location for the exported SNAP font(s). All the existing
sizes of the font are saved in a single JLYT file. The button is disabled if no font is selected in the
list. See Importing and exporting SNAP fonts on page 187.
Import Opens an Import dialog box that is used to browse for a previously exported SNAP font (JLYT
file).
Add SNAP Fonts dialog box

This dialog box allows you to create new SNAP fonts from existing fonts installed on the RIP. The
process of creating a SNAP font involves RIPping the font.
To open this dialog box, click Add in the SNAP Font Manager window.
Select font A list of all the available fonts on the RIP.
Font sizes Type a comma-separated list of font sizes; for example: 8,10,12, 20
Character set There are five options: 7–bit ASCII, Windows, Standard, Right-To-Left and Central European.
Apply Kerning Check this to apply kerning to the font. This option is not available for Right-To-Left fonts.
Job LUT Library dialog box

To open the LUT library for a press job, display the job properties for a press job. On the Color Control
page, click LUT Library.
LUT table Lists the LUTs stored on the press controller.
● The LUT name is used to identify the LUT.
● For Separations identifies the source job separation(s)

for which the LUT was created. For the default
separations, the value is a row of asterisks, indicating that
these are general LUTS designed for all separations.
If the LUT was saved with All separations chosen in the

Save Job LUT dialog box, a set of multiple LUTs are
associated with that name — one for each separation.
If the LUT was saved with Selected separation chosen in

the Save Job LUT dialog box, a single LUT is associated
with that name.
Add SNAP Fonts dialog box 215

Load job LUT to selected separation(s). Select the separations) into which the selected LUT(s) will be
loaded.
● Choose a separation name here to load the selected LUT

into that separation. If the selected LUT is a set (multiple
separations are listed), only the LUT for that separation
will be loaded.
● Choose All to load the selected LUT (or set of LUTs) into
all separations in the job. If the selected LUT is a set, each
separation will receive its corresponding LUT. If the
selected LUT is a single curve (only one separation is
listed), that LUT will be loaded into all the job separations.
Load Loads the highlighted LUT into the selected separation(s) and
closes the dialog box.
Save LUT dialog box

This dialog box is displayed when you click Save As on the Color Control page of the Job Properties
dialog box. It is used to save the current LUT(s) defined for the job into the LUT library so that they can
be reused. Each press controller has its own LUT library.
Job LUT name Type a descriptive name for the LUT.
All separations Use this option to save the LUTs defined for all the separations.
For example, if the job has CMYK separations, this options
saves a set of 4 LUT curves as a single set.
Selected separation Saves a single LUT curve for the separation specified in the
Select a separation to view/edit list on the Color Page.
216 Chapter 26 Resource Management reference

27 Device management dialogs reference
Manage Devices dialog box — Presses tab

To open this dialog, click Devices in the Admin menu. The Presses tab is used to add and manage
presses.
list of presses List the registered presses:
● Press Name — The name used to identify the press in the

system.
● Model — the type of press
● Location — the network address of the press.
New Opens the Add Press dialog box for adding a new press.
Edit Opens a dialog box for editing the properties of the selected
press.
Delete Deletes the selected press.
New Press dialog box

This tab of the dialog box is used to add a press to the system. Once a press has been added and
mapped to a press controller, it can be specified as a workflow destination in a Ticket Template or Job
Ticket.
To open this dialog box, click Add Press in the Manage Print Destination dialog box.
Press name The name used to identify the press in the system. It does not
have to be the same as the network name. Maximum length is
255 characters.
Network location The IP address or host name. If you will be running the remote
client on MacOS systems, you must specify the IP address.
Edit Press dialog box

This dialog box is used to edit the name or network location of a press that has already been added to
the system.
To open this dialog box, select a press in the Manage Print Destination dialog box and click Edit.
Press name The name used to identify the press in the system. It does not
have to be the same as the network name. Maximum length is
255 characters.
Network location The IP address or host name.
Manage Devices dialog box — Presses tab 217

Manage Devices dialog box – Press Controllers tab
This tab is used to add, manage, and map press controllers.
List of press controllers Lists the press controllers that have been added to the system.
● Controller Name — each controller must have a unique

name that you supplied when it is added.
● Hostname/IP address — the network location, provided

when the controller was added.
● Type — PrintLink or non-PrintLink. The Type field

indicates what type of press(es) can be mapped to the
controller.
● ICF format — the internal format used to store press jobs.

See ICF formats and post-RIP destinations on page 81.
● Mapped devices — lists the press(es) and folder devices

that have been mapped to this press controller.
New Opens the New Press Controller dialog box for adding a press
controller to the system.
Edit Opens the Edit Press Controller dialog box for modifying the
properties of a press controller.
Mapping Opens the Map Press Controller dialog box for mapping press
controllers to presses and folder devices.
Delete Deletes the selected press controller. When a press controller

is deleted, any press to which it was mapped must be re-
mapped.
New Press Controller dialog box

When you create a new press controller, it is added to the list on the Press Controllers tab of the Manage
Devices dialog box. After the controller has been added, it can be mapped to a press.
To open this dialog box, click New on the Press Controller tab of the Manage Devices dialog box.
Press controller name Enter a unique name that helps identify the press controller.
Network location Enter a hostname or IP address. The address is validated

when you click OK.
Edit Press Controller dialog box

Use this dialog box to change the name or network location of an existing press controller. To open this
dialog box:
1. Select an existing press controller on the Press Controller tab of the Manage Devices dialog box.
2. Click Edit.
Press controller name The descriptive name of the press controller
Network location The hostname or IP address of the press controller.
218 Chapter 27 Device management dialogs reference

Type The system is able to detect whether the press controller has
been configured for a PrintLink or non-PrintLink press. This
cannot be modified.
ICF format The system is able to detect the ICF format of the press
controller. This must match the ICF format of the press(es) and
folder devices to which it is mapped. This cannot be modified.
Mapped to devices Lists the press(es) and folder devices to which the press
controller is mapped. Click Mapping to make changes.
Mapping Opens the Map Press Controller dialog box, which allows you
to modify mappings.
Map Press Controller dialog box

Use this dialog to set up or modify the mappings between a press controller and press(es) and/or folder
devices that have already been added to the system. To open this dialog box, click Mapping on the
Press Controllers tab of the Manage Devices dialog box.
Press Controller Displays descriptive information about the press controller —

name, type, and ICF format.
Unmapped devices (filtered) Lists the presses and folder devices that can be mapped to this
press controller:
● Only presses with matching Type and ICF format are

listed.
● If the Devices mapped to this controller list contains a

PrintLink press, no presses are shown because a press
controller can manage only one PrintLink press.
● Only folder devices with matching ICF format are listed.
Devices mapped to this controller List the devices that will be mapped to the controller.
Map Moves the selected item from the Unmapped devices list to
the Devices mapped to this controller list.
Unmap Moves the selected item from the Devices mapped to this
controller list to the Unmapped devices list.
Manage Devices dialog box — Press Groups tab

To open the dialog box, click Devices in the Admin menu. The Press Groups tab is used to create
and manage press groups.
List of press groups List the press groups that have been created:
● Press group name — the name given to the press group

when it was created.
● Members — the presses assigned to the press group.
● Load Balancing Method — the rule used to assign jobs to

presses in the group.
New Opens the New Press Group dialog box.
Map Press Controller dialog box 219

Edit Opens the Edit Press Group dialog box for the selected press
group.
Delete Deletes the selected press group. The members of the press
group are not deleted. You cannot delete a press group if there
are Ticket Templates that reference it.
Add/Edit Press Group dialog box

To open this dialog box, click New or Edit in the Press Groups tab of the Manage Devices dialog box.
Press group name Enter a descriptive name.
Load balancing method There are two built-in choices:
● Next Available. This method distributes the press jobs in

a simple sequence: press 1, press 2, press 3, press 1,
press 2, press 3, etc. If a press is unavailable, it is
skipped.
● Least busy: The job is assigned to the press with lowest

amount of printing activity in the print queue. The amount
of printing activity is computed by calculating the number
of impressions required to print each job:
number of spreads x number of copies x number of

separations x 2 (if duplex)
Available presses Lists the presses that can be added to the group. An asterisk
indicates that the press is already a member of a group. A
press can be a member of multiple groups.
Press group members Lists the presses that will be added to the group.
Add Moves the selected press from the Available Presses list to
the Press group members list.
Remove Moves the selected press from the Press group members list
to the Available presses list.
Manage Devices dialog box — Folder Devices tab

To open the dialog box, click Devices in the Admin menu. The Folder Devices tab is used to create
folder devices.
Folder devices are alternative destinations for RIP output; you can specify the folder device as the press
job destination instead of a press or press group. The job can later be imported and printed.
When a folder device is created, you must specify the ICF format for that folder. When a folder is specified
as the press job destination in the Job Ticket, the ICF format assigned to the folder is communicated
back to the RIP so that the proper format is created.
220 Chapter 27 Device management dialogs reference

folder device list A list of all the folder devices that have been defined:
● Folder Device Name — A friendly name assigned to the

folder device. This name appears in Press Job
Destination section of the Job Ticket and Ticket Template
● Location — The file system path to the folder.
● ICF Format — The internal format in which the press job

will be created.
New Opens the New Folder Device dialog box.
Edit Opens the Edit Folder Device dialog box for the selected folder
device.
Delete Deletes the selected folder device.
The built-in folder device cannot be deleted. You cannot delete

a folder device if there are Ticket Templates that reference it.
New/Edit Folder Device dialog box

To open this dialog box, click New or Edit in the Folder Devices tab of the Manage Devices dialog box.
Folder Device Name Enter a short descriptive name. This name will appear in the
Press Job Destination section of the Job Ticket.
Location The UNC path (for example, \\system_name\share_name) to

an existing folder that has been shared on the network. It is
recommended that folder devices be placed in the Jobs Share.
For detailed information about specifying the folder location,
see Creating folder devices for RIP output on page 184.
ICF Format The internal format in which the press job will be created. See
What is ICF? on page 195.
Maximum number of connections Sending RIP output to a folder requires a dynamically-created

connection between the RIP system and the system where the
folder resides. The license for some operating systems (for
example, Microsoft Window® XP and Microsoft Windows
Vista®) specify a maximum number of simultaneous
connections.
● If you specify No limit, the value will be set to unlimited.
● If you specify Use value for operating system with

Microsoft Windows® XP or Microsoft Windows Vista®,
the value will be set to 10.
● If you specify Use value for operating system with

Other, the value will be set to unlimited.
● If you specify Custom, the text box is writable so that you

can enter a value.
New/Edit Folder Device dialog box 221

28 Input methods reference
Manage Input Methods dialog box

The Manage Input Methods dialog box is used to create hot folders, networked printers, and Internet
connections that can be used to submit jobs.
To open the dialog box, click Input Methods in the Admin menu.
Input Method Type One of four types: hot folder, Internet, network printer, and port 6000.
Input Method Name Unique name assigned to the input method.
Ticket Template The Ticket Template that has been assigned to the input method.
Hot Folder Location or Printer ● For hot folders - the path of the hot folder.
Name
● For network printers - the network printer's name.
● For Internet - empty.
Edit Opens the edit dialog box for the selected input method.
Copy Displays a dialog box that prompts for a new input name, then copies the properties of the
selected input method to the new method.
Delete Deletes the selected input method. If the input method is a hot folder containing jobs, those
jobs are not submitted. However, the associated folders are not deleted: the hot folder itself,
and the images, database, templates, success, and error folders. The hot folder is no longer
polled for incoming Master Jobs.
Create a New Input method Radio buttons used to choose the kind of input method to be created.
New Opens the new input method dialog box for the selected type of input method.
New/Edit Input Method dialog box

The content of this dialog box depends on the type of input method being created or modified:
● See New/Edit Input Method dialog box on page 222 .
● See New/Modify Networked Printer dialog box on page 224.
● See New/Modify Internet Input Method dialog box on page 224.
New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box

This dialog box is displayed from the Manage Input Methods dialog box by:
● Selecting Hot Folder and clicking New. This displays the New Hot Folder dialog box for creating
a new hot folder.
● Selecting an existing hot folder in the Input Methods list and clicking Edit.
222 Chapter 28 Input methods reference

When creating a new hot folder:
● The hot folder will be created when you click OK. You cannot designate an existing folder as a hot
folder.
● You can specify new or existing folders for image assets, database assets, templates, on success,
and on failure. If the folder you specify does not exist, it is created when you click OK.
See Submitting variable data jobs using hot folders on page 138 for more information on folders for
image assets, database assets, and templates.
The New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box contains the following areas:
Hot Folder name Unique name of the input method. This name becomes the hot folder name. The field is read-only
in the Edit Hot Folder dialog box.
Description Text description.
Ticket Template Contains a list of all the currently configured Ticket Templates. It is used to specify the Ticket
Template that will be assigned to all Master Jobs submitted via the hot folder.
Manage Ticket Templates Opens the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box where you can define a new Ticket Template or
edit an existing one.
Hot folder The path to the hot folder. This field cannot be edited by typing; you must use Browse to specify
a different location.
Use default hot folder Uncheck to specify a location other than the default location. Then, use Browse to locate a
location different parent folder in which the hot folder will be created.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that hot folders be located within the Jobs Share. This
ensures that job assets will be available to all system components.
Images folder Defines the folder where image assets for variable data Master Jobs should be placed. The default
is the images subfolder of the hot folder.
Use default images folder Uncheck to specify a location other than the default location. The Browse button becomes active
location and the text box becomes writable.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that image folders be located within the Jobs Share.
Database folder Defines the folder where database assets for variable data jobs should be placed. The default is
the database subfolder of the hot folder.
Use default database Uncheck to specify a location other than the default location. The Browse button becomes active
folder location and the text box becomes writable.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that database files be placed within the Jobs Share.
Template folder Defines the folder where the templates for variable data Master Jobs should be placed. The default
is the template subfolder of the hot folder.
Use default template folder Uncheck to specify a location other than the default location. The Browse button becomes active
location and the text box becomes writable.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that template files be placed within the Jobs Share.
On success Specifies what happens to the job file after the Master Job is successfully completed (on success)
or canceled (on error).
On error
● Delete: deletes the job file
● Send to default: moves the job file to the default folder. This may be common success/error
folders specified in the System Settings dialog box, or sub-folders of the hot folder.
● Send to: moves the file to the specified folder.
New/Edit Hot Folder dialog box 223

New/Modify Networked Printer dialog box
● Selecting networked printer and clicking New.
● Selecting an existing network printer in the Input Methods list and clicking Edit.
Network Printer Name Unique name of the input method. The field is read-only in the Edit Networked Printer dialog
box.
Ticket Template Select the Ticket Template to be assigned to all jobs submitted via the network printer.
Manage Ticket Templates Opens the Ticket Template dialog box to create or edit Ticket Templates.
Print driver name The print driver that converts job files printed from layout applications to Postscript so that
they can be submitted to Production Pro Print Server. This field is read-only and set to
HP Production RIP.
Modify Port 6000 Input Method dialog box

The Edit Port 6000 Input Method dialog box is used to edit Port 6000 input methods. A port 6000 input
method is used to assign a Ticket Template to an incoming job downloaded to port 6000 on the local
machine. This type of submission can be performed with Yours Truly Designer or custom applications.
This dialog box is displayed from the Message Input Methods dialog box by:
● Selecting the existing port 6000 method in the Input Methods list and clicking Edit.
Port Input Method Name Unique name of the input method. The field is read-only in the
Edit Port 6000 Connection dialog box.
Description Text description
Ticket Template Select the Ticket Template to be assigned to all jobs submitted
to port 6000.
Manage Ticket Templates Open the Tickets template dialog box to create or edit Ticket
Templates.
New/Modify Internet Input Method dialog box

The New/Edit Internet Input Method dialog box is used to create and edit Internet input methods. An
internet input method is used to assign a Ticket Template to an incoming job downloaded via internet.
● Selecting Internet Input Method and clicking New.
● Selecting an existing Internet method in the Input Methods list and clicking Edit.
Internet Input Method Name Unique name of the input method. A match between this name and the job specification
in the incoming intent ticket assigns a Ticket Template to the job. The field is read-only
in the Edit Internet Connection dialog box.

Ticket Template Select the Ticket Template to be assigned to all jobs that specify this Internet input
method in their intent tickets.
Manage Ticket Templates Opens the Ticket Template dialog box to create or edit Ticket Templates.
Test Connection Results dialog box

The Test Connection Results dialog box opens when you click Test connection in the:
● Manage ISV Accounts dialog box (to test all servers for an ISV account), or
● RPP Server Profiles tab of the ISV Account Properties dialog box (to test a single RPP server), or
● Image Server Profiles tab of the ISV Account Properties dialog box (to test a single image server).
ISV Account Name ISV account whose server connection(s) are being tested.
Server type RPP, Image.
Results OK, Failed.
Server url Internet address of server.
Message Describes success or reason why connection failed.
Manage ISV Accounts dialog box

The Manage ISV Accounts dialog box is the starting point for creating and modifying ISV accounts. It
also allows manual polling to retrieve new jobs, turning automatic polling on or off, and testing account
connections.
To open the dialog box, click ISV Accounts in the Admin menu.
Polling - Automatic polling is on for all RPP (intent ticket) servers for the account.
- Automatic polling is off for all RPP (intent ticket) servers for the account.
- Automatic polling is on for some of the ISV's RPP servers, but not all.
ISV Account Name Name specified when the account is created.
New Opens the ISV Account Properties dialog box to create a new account.
Edit Opens the ISV Account Properties dialog box for an existing account.
Test connection Tests the connection to all RPP and image servers for the selected account.
Manual poll Polls all RPP server(s) for the selected account.
Delete Deletes the selected account.
ISV Account Properties dialog box

Use this dialog box to define a new ISV account or to edit an existing one.
Test Connection Results dialog box 225

To open this dialog box:
1. In the Admin menu, click ISV Accounts.

2. In the Manage ISV Accounts dialog box:
● Click New to open a blank ISV Account Properties dialog box, or
● Select an ISV account and double-click or click Edit to open the account for editing.
The ISV Account Properties dialog box contains the following tabs:
● General. See ISV Account Properties - General tab on page 226.
● RPP Profiles. See ISV Account Properties - RPP Profiles tab on page 226.
● Image Server Profiles. See ISV Account Properties - Image Server Profiles tab on page 227.
ISV Account Properties - General tab

The General tab appears when the ISV Account Properties dialog box is opened. In the Manage ISV
Accounts dialog box:
● Click New, or
● Select an account and click Edit.
Account name A name for the ISV account. Should be unique to distinguish it from other accounts.
Company name The name of the ISV company.
Contact Information Optional reference information about the company.
ISV Account Properties - RPP Profiles tab

The RPP Profiles tab displays the RPP (intent ticket) servers set up for an ISV account. In the Manage
ISV Accounts dialog box:
● Click New, or
Click the RPP Profiles tab.
See Creating RPP profiles on page 190 for task instructions.
RPP Profiles
Profiles list All RPP server profiles for the account.
New Activates the profile information fields for adding a new profile.
Edit Copies the selected profile into the Profile information fields for editing.
Test connection Attempts to contact the selected server.
Manual poll Performs an immediate poll on the selected server.
Delete Deletes the selected profile. The server will no longer be polled.
Profile information
RPP server URL Address of an RPP server that holds intent tickets to be obtained from this ISV.

AUUID Authenticated Unique User Identifier. Allows Production Pro Print Server to connect to the RPP
server (unique for each ISV and for each RPP profile).
Polling on Production Pro Print Server automatically connects to the RPP server to retrieve new intent
tickets.
Polling period Frequency of automatic polling (between 1 second and 3600 seconds/1 hour). Default value is
60 seconds.
Drain RPP queue Checked - Each poll retrieves all intent tickets in the RPP server.
Unchecked - Each poll retrieves a single ticket.
Test connection Attempts to contact the RPP server to verify that the URL and AUUID are correct.
Apply new Adds the new server profile, or applies the edits made to an existing profile.
Apply edit
Cancel new Clears the Profile information fields without saving changes.
Cancel edit
ISV Account Properties - Image Server Profiles tab

The Image Server Profiles tab displays the image servers set up for an ISV account. In the Manage ISV
Accounts dialog box:
● Click New, or
Click the Image Server Profiles tab.
See Creating image server profiles on page 191 for task instructions.
Profiles list All image servers for the account.
New Activates the profile information fields for adding a new profile.
Edit Copies the selected profile into the Profile information fields for editing.
Test connection Attempts to contact the selected server.
Delete Deletes the selected profile.
Image server URL Address of the image server that holds image files used in print jobs from this ISV.
Image server user ID Valid login account ID for the image server.
Imager server Valid password for login account.

password
and
Verify password
Use WebDAV protocol Image server uses WebDAV protocol. If server uses only HTTP or HTTPS, leave unchecked.
Test connection Attempts to contact the server to verify that the URL, user ID, and password are correct.
ISV Account Properties - Image Server Profiles tab 227

Apply new Adds the new server profile, or applies the edits made to an existing profile.
or
Apply edit
Cancel new Clears the Profile information fields without saving changes.
or
Cancel edit
Manual Poll Results dialog box

The Manual Poll Results dialog box opens when you click Manual poll in the:
● Manage ISV Accounts dialog box (to poll all RPP servers for an ISV account)
● RPP Server Profiles tab of the ISV Account Properties dialog box (to poll a single RPP server)
ISV Account Name ISV account whose RPP server(s) are being polled.
Results Passed, Failed.
Server url Internet address of RPP server.
Message Describes number of tickets retrieved or reason why polling failed.
Close Closes the dialog box.

29 Job Ticket reference
Manage Ticket Templates dialog box

A Ticket Template is a collection of settings assigned to a Master Job. Each input method has an
associated Ticket Template. This dialog box lets you define new Ticket Templates, and edit, copy, and
delete existing settings.
To open this dialog box, click Ticket Templates in the Admin menu.
The Manage Ticket Templates dialog box contains the following areas:
Name The name of the Ticket Template.
Device type The printing device for which a Ticket Template is intended;
currently digital press is the only option.
Description Text that describes the Ticket Template.
New Opens the Ticket Template dialog box to create a new Ticket
Template. See Ticket Template dialog box on page 229.
Edit Opens the Ticket Template dialog box to modify the selected
Ticket Template. Built-in templates cannot be edited.
Copy Creates a copy of the selected Ticket Template and adds it to

the list of Ticket Templates.
Delete Removes the selected Ticket Template.
Ticket Template dialog box

Use this dialog box to define a new Ticket Template or to edit an existing one. Note: RIP-related settings
that are not applicable to personalized jobs are indicated by a dagger sign.
To open the Ticket Template dialog box:

1. Choose Ticket Templates from the Admin menu.
2. From the Manage Ticket Templates dialog box, click a button to open the Ticket Template dialog
box:
● New opens a blank Ticket Template dialog box.
● Edit opens the Ticket Template dialog box populated with the settings of the selected Ticket
Template.
Manage Ticket Templates dialog box 229

Alternatively, you can:
1. Choose Input Methods from the Admin menu.

2. Select an existing input method and click Edit, or select the type of input method to be created and
click New.
● A dialog box appears for creating or editing the selected input method.
3. Click Manage Ticket Templates.
The Ticket Template dialog box contains the following tabs:
● General (see Job Ticket - General tab on page 231 (Different than the General tab of the Job
Ticket Editor)
● Substrate (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Substrate tab on page 232)
● Separations (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab on page 232)
● Color Management (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab on page 235)
● Page (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Page tab on page 238)
● Imposition (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Imposition tab on page 240)
● Job Control (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Job Control tab on page 242)
Job Ticket dialog box

This dialog box displays the Job Ticket for the Master Job. It includes processing settings copied from
the Ticket Template dialog box, order forms with customer information, and a job log. To open this dialog
box, see Opening a Job Ticket on page 62. Note: RIP-related settings that are not applicable to
personalized jobs are indicated by a dagger sign.
The Job Ticket tabs are:
● General (see Job Ticket - General tab on page 231)
● Substrate (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Substrate tab on page 232)
● Separations (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab on page 232)
● Color Management (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab on page 235)
● Page (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Page tab on page 238)
● Imposition (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Imposition tab on page 240)
● Job Control (see Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Job Control tab on page 242)
● Order form (see Order Form tab on page 244)
◦ Customer Information (see Order Form tab - Customer Information on page 244)
◦ Billing Information (see Order Form tab - Billing Information on page 245)
◦ Shipping Information (see Order Form tab - Shipping Information on page 246)
◦ Finishing (see Order Form tab - Finishing on page 247)
● Job Log (see Job Ticket - Job Log on page 244)
230 Chapter 29 Job Ticket reference

Ticket Template - General tab
The General tab of the Ticket Template dialog box contains the basic descriptive information about the
template in the following areas:
Ticket Template name Text box for entering or editing the name of a Ticket Template,
limited to 128 characters. Contains the name of the selected
Ticket Template, if one is selected for editing. Built-in Ticket
Templates cannot be edited.
Description Text box for entering or editing a description of the Ticket

Template, limited to 255 characters.
Device type The printing device for which a Ticket Template is intended;
currently Digital Press is the only option.
Used by input methods Read-only text box that lists the input methods associated with
this Ticket Template.
Use the quantity embedded in the job PostScript file Check this box to override the default number of copies
specified in the Ticket Template and use the number of copies
specified in the incoming Postscript file, if present.
Default copies [Used when the number of copies is not Specifies the default number of copies expressed as an integer
specified in the import dialog box or incoming ISV Job Ticket] with a maximum 9 digits. The default value is 1 copy.
Job Ticket - General tab

The General tab of the Job Ticket dialog box contains basic information about the Master Job. To open
the General tab, see Opening a Job Ticket on page 62.
The General tab of the Job Ticket contains the following areas:
Master Job name Name associated with the Master Job. May be read into the
Job Ticket from information supplied through the input method
(hot folder, network printer, ISV, import dialog box). Limited to
128 characters.
File names File(s) submitted for the Master Job, including any image and
database file(s) required for variable data jobs.
Needed by Deadline for completing the job. Dates can be changed using
the list boxes.
Priority Rush, high, medium, or low. Initially copied from the Ticket
Template (for jobs submitted by hot folder, network printer), or
ISV) or import dialog box.
Quantity The number of copies of the item that the customer wants
delivered.
Use the quantity embedded in the job PostScript file Check this box to override the default quantity specified in the
Job Ticket and use the quantity specified in the incoming
PostScript file.
Special comments Can be used for anything, but generally for special handling
instructions
Customer job name Optional: included if it is pulled from the incoming Job Ticket
(ISV job).
Ticket Template - General tab 231

External job ID Optional: included if it is pulled from the incoming Job Ticket
(ISV job). Otherwise, is set to Default.
Images directory For VDP jobs: the folder where the system expects to find the
image assets.
Submit time Date and time the Master Job was submitted.
Submit method Method by which the job was submitted: hot folder, Internet,
network printer, or import dialog box.
Ticket Template The Ticket Template assigned to the Master Job based on its
input method.
Internal ID A unique job identification number generated by the system;

combines the date-time the serial number was created with the
Internet address of the machine that created it.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Substrate tab

A job's substrate(s) can be specified in the Substrate tab in the Job Ticket or Ticket Template dialog
box.
The substrate choices include:
● All actual substrates that have been defined on all the presses in the system.
● All the built-in intended substrates. These are provided to support workflows to non-PrintLink
presses.
To open the Substrate tab, open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Substrate tab.
The Substrate tab contains the following areas:
Personalized JLYT Uses the substrate specified in the job. If not specified, the press default substrate is
used.
Default job substrate Specifies the substrate that will be used for all sheets except those specified below. You
can select a substrate from the list or open the Substrate Catalog to see a list of all
substrates registered on all presses. The Substrate Catalog also contains system's built-
in intended substrates.
Additional Substrate — Substrate Specifies a substrate to use for specific sheets.
Additional Substrate — Sheets Specifies the sheets that will use the substrate. Sheet numbers must be separated by
commas; use hyphens for page ranges. For example, “1,4–6,12” means pages 1, 4, 5,
6, and 12.
<table> Lists the selected substrates and their sheet ranges.
Add Displays the selected substrate intent and page number in the table under the
appropriate headings.
Delete Deletes the selected Intended substrate from the table.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab

The Separations tab is part of both the Job Ticket and the Ticket Template dialog boxes. To open the
Separations tab, open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template, and click the Separations tab.

Use the Separations tab to set or edit various options for a Master Job's color separations. See
Specifying RIP color separations in the Job Ticket on page 66.
The Separations tab contains overprint options for the RIP, screen frequency options, and options for
separations, including the ability to modify, delete, or add new separations.
The Separations tab includes the following areas:
Pre-separated jobs Check this box to allow pre-separated jobs to be RIPped and the separations recombined on
each page as expected. If not selected, pre-separated jobs produce a page of output for each
separation. PDF jobs require that DSC (Document Structuring Convention) comments be
included in Master Job to be recombined and prepared correctly for print.
Leave the box clear for non-separated jobs for the highest reliability. If this box is checked for
non-separated jobs, PDF 1.4 transparency and pattern color spaces may cause RIP problems.
Indigo transparency Check this box to allow unpainted parts of a page or element to be transparent. Useful for
variable data jobs so elements can be overlaid on one another without each element having
to be in a rectangle with a white background.
Enable overprint Normally, as an object is painted over other objects, the color is opaque and replaces all
separations under it. Check this box to enable an object to “overprint” or image only the
separations with ink tints specified. Separation colors that have a value of 0 will not clear or
“knockout” the color already painted underneath the new object.
Both Enable Overprint and the overprint property from the Level 2 Postscript set overprint
operator must be set to enable overprint.
Drop white objects With Enable overprint selected, check this box to cause the RIP to do nothing when white is
drawn (CMYK 0,0,0,0).
Overprint gray With Enable overprint selected, check this box to cause the RIP to treat device Gray as a
CMYK color with tints on the K channel with regard to its overprint behavior.
Overprint black Check this box to cause 100% blacks (CMYK 0,0,0,1) to overprint regardless of the overprint
property of the object painted with that color. Checking this box activates the Overprint black
only option.
Overprint black only Check this box to force the overprint of any color with a 100% K component regardless of the
overprint property of the object. When this box is clear, any color with a 100% K component
will print as if it were (CMYK 0,0,0,1) with overprint on regardless of the overprint property of
the object.
Screen frequency Sets the line screen frequency for the press. The options are: Sequin (144 lpi), HDI-160 (160
lpi), HDI-175 (175 lpi), HDI-180 (180 lpi), HDI_set_3 (175 lpi), HDI_set_2 (lpi 230), and default.
The default option causes the RIP to omit a specification of the line screen in the job properties
and use the default line screen defined on the press.
Separation mode A list containing four separation modes. See Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab
on page 232.
Separation mode table Displays the separations contained in the Separation mode selected above. Provides two
columns:
● Separation name is the name of the separation.
● Modified From Default? indicates whether the separation has any non-default settings.
Default job LUT for Separations A list of LUTs you can apply to all separations in the separation mode table. The choices are
linear, exp_025, exp_05, exp_075, and cromalin, which provide increasing dot gain from linear
to cromalin. The default is exp_05, which provides a dot gain simulation of 14%. Override the
LUT by editing an individual separation and selecting a separation-specific LUT.
Import LUTs Brings up the Manage LUTs dialog box to add custom LUT files to the system.
New Brings up the New Color Separation dialog box to create a new color separation. Active only
when the Separation mode is Custom.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab 233

Edit Brings up the Edit Color Separation dialog box to edit color separations. To use this dialog
box, a Separation mode and a separation must be selected.
Delete Deletes the selected color separation. Active only when the Separation mode is Custom.
Use light cyan and light This value is passed to the press and becomes part of the press job properties. If the value
magenta inks if they are is set to On or Use press default when the press default is on, the press will split the Cyan
available on press and Magenta separations into separate separations for the light and dark inks. If the inks are
not available on the press, the job is loaded as a regular CMYK job.
New/Edit Color Separation dialog box

Use the New Color Separation dialog box to create a new color separation, and the Edit Color Separation
dialog box to edit an existing one. Except for their names, the dialog boxes are identical.
To open the dialog boxes:

1. Open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template.
2. Click the Separations tab.
3. Make a selection and press a button as follows:
● To bring up the New Color Separation dialog box, select Custom from the Separation
mode list, and press New Separation.
● To bring up the Edit Color Separation dialog box, select a Separation mode and a separation,
and press Edit separation.
The New Color Separation dialog box and the Edit Color Separation dialog box contain the following
areas:
Separation name: A unique text string associated with the separation. This name must match the name of the
spot color in the application. Can be specified for Custom separation only; otherwise, it is
disabled.
Ink name: To specify the ink name, choose either use separation name or specify name.
use separation name By default, assigns the name of the separation to the ink. To override, choose specify
name.
specify name Provides a text box for specifying the name of the ink.
# of ink applications: Specifies the number of ink applications as an integer value. The default is 1.
Override screen angle Overrides the default press screen angle, and activates the Screen angle text box below.
Screen angle Specifies the angle of the ink screen, expressed as a number between 0–90.
Separation LUT: Specifies the LUT to use for this separation. Choose use default job LUT (which was
specified in the Separations tab), See Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Separations tab
on page 232 or Separation-specific LUT.
use default job LUT Specifies use of the default LUT for this separation.
Separation-specific LUT Specifies use of the LUT selected from the list for the separation. The Separation-specific
LUT list contains the names of all available LUTs.

Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab
The Color Management tab is part of both the Ticket Template and the Job Ticket dialog boxes. To open
the Color Management tab, open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template, and click the Color Management
tab.
Use the Color Management tab to set color management properties for a Master Job. See Specifying
RIP color management in the Job Ticket on page 64.
The editable properties are:
● The ICC (International Color Consortium) profiles to be used for the job. Use the profiles provided,
or click the button to open the ICC Profile Manager to import new ICC profiles.
● Rendering intents
● Color management type (or override color management)
● Pantone substitution
● Preservation of process black
The Color Management tab is disabled when Grayscale is the selected Separation mode in the
Separation tab.
The Color Workflow

The Color Management tab lets you set control the color processing of a Master Job using industry
standard's ICC profiles and rendering intents. Here's how they are used in the color management
workflow of Production Pro Print Server:
The process works as follows:

1. Color Spaces - Master Jobs enter Production Pro Print Server as PostScript, PDF, TIFF, or JPG
files that specify color spaces for their objects.
● Different color spaces may be defined for different objects, even within a single file.
● Color spaces may be calibrated (defined within the file) or device colors (undefined
deviceRGB, deviceCMYK, or deviceGray).
2. Input Profiles - The RIP uses the input profiles selected in the Color Management tab to convert
undefined device colors to device-independent colors. The RGB Input Profile is used to convert
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab 235

deviceRGB colors to device-independent colors. Similarly, the CMYK Input Profile is used for
deviceCMYK colors, and the Gray Input Profile for deviceGray.
● DeviceCMYK and deviceGray colors bypass any color conversion when the None option is
chosen.
● If an input profile is a device-link profile, it defines the conversion of colors from the input color
space directly to the press output color CMYK space. No output files or rendering intents are
used for this conversion.
● For embedded input profiles, the RIP uses the calibrated color information from the Master
Job to convert the colors to device-independent colors. Calibrated colors can be encoded as
parameter-based color spaces, ICC profiles, or PostScript Color Space Arrays (CSA).
3. Emulation Profile - If defined in the dialog box, the emulation profile limits the colors to the
reproduction gamut of the device described by the profile.
4. Output Profiles - The RIP uses the output profiles selected in the Color Management tab to convert
the device-independent colors to the printer's native CMYK. Each output profile can have four color
conversion algorithms that are used based on the selected rendering intent:
● Perceptual - best for good reproduction of images and all RGB inputs
● Relative Colorimetric - best for proofing or accurate color reproduction of CMYK colors
● Saturation - useful for colorful business graphics where color accuracy is not as important as
saturation
● Absolute Colorimetric - similar to Relative Colorimetric, except that color can be added to
white areas to simulate the media color defined in the input profile
5. Device CMYK - Ultimately, the job is output with the correct CMYK values for the press.
Color Management Areas

The Color Management tab contains the following areas:
Profile settings may depend on the Some settings in this tab are filled in or grayed out, based on selections made in the
selected Separation Mode Separation tab. For example, choosing IndiChrome in the Separation tab creates the
following effects in the Color Management menus:
● Adds Rgb2Indi7 to RGB input profiles and sets it as the selected profile. This
profile causes device RGB data to be separated into the seven high fidelity
separations for IndiChrome inks.
● Disables the Press Output Profile. The Press Output Profile is not user-selectable
for the IndiChrome Separation Mode.
● Disables the PANTONE CMYK Licensed Lookup Table option and enables the
PANTONE Indichrome Licensed Lookup Table option.
CMYK input profile Sets the input profile for all the job's CMYK data, if not already specified in the file.
Converts a Master Job's CMYK colors to device-independent color according to the
transform in the profile, then re-separates the colors into CMYK for the press using the
current device output profile and rendering intent. Choosing None bypasses any color
conversions of CMYK data.
RGB input profile Sets the default input profile for all the job's device RGB (untagged RGB) data. The
HP Production RIP converts RGB colors through the transform in the RGB profile to
device-independent color, then re-separates the colors into CMYK for the press using the
current press output profile and rendering intent. The press-specific sRGB profiles
convert sRGB data directly to the press output CMYK color space without an intermediate
conversion.

Gray input profile Sets the input profile for any color represented as grayscale. The HP Production RIP
converts grayscale colors to device-independent colors according to the transform in the
profile, then re-separates the colors into CMYK for the press using the current press
output profile and rendering intent. Choosing None, the default, causes grayscale data
to be treated as black CMYK data. There are no preloaded input profiles. To add input
profiles, use the ICC Profile Manager.
Press output profiles Sets the press output profile. On the HP Indigo press, it is not necessary to change the
output profile for gloss, semi-matte, and matte media because the press compensates
for the media automatically by using different calibration values for the ink 100% optical
density.
Emulation profile Enables reproduction of the color characteristics of another device with a smaller gamut.
Emulation profiles allow simulation of not only CMYK data, but also RGB and other color-
managed colors. When an emulation profile is used, the media color specified by the
profile is also simulated. The current CMYK rendering intent choice is used for the color
transformations into the Emulation color space, but Absolute colorimetric is always used
for the conversions from the emulation space through the press output profile. If this
behavior is not desired, the emulation can be created for CMYK data by assigning the
profile as a CMYK Input Profile instead of as an emulation profile.
In the Emulation profile list on the Color Management tab, None is the default, and there
are no profiles loaded. To add emulation profiles, use the ICC Profile Manager. CMYK
input profiles may be imported as emulation profiles with the ICC Profile Manager.
ICC Profile Manager Click to open a window for adding input profiles, emulation profiles, and output profiles.
Rendering intent Sets the job's rendering intent, an adjustment of its print qualities based on the needs of
the job. The list includes the four standard ICC rendering intents:
● Perceptual - best for good reproduction of images and all RGB inputs.
● Saturation - intended to be used for colorful business graphics where accuracy is

not as important as color saturation.
● Relative Colorimetric - best for proofing or accurate color reproduction of CMYK

colors. If this intent is used for RGB content or with non-gloss media, Blackpoint
compensation may be required for optimal results.
● Absolute Colorimetric - similar to relative colorimetric except that color can be added
to “white” areas to simulate the media color defined in the input profile.
CMYK image rendering intent Allows you to set the rendering intent for a Master Job's CMYK images separately from
the job's rendering intent. If a CMYK image intent is specified, it overrides the default
rendering intent for CMYK images.
RGB image rendering intent Allows you to set the rendering intent for a Master Job's RGB images separately from the
job's rendering intent. Recommended when the Relative Colorimetric intent is chosen for
the job, but documents may contain RGB data that require Perceptual intent.
Use Black Point Compensation Affects the relative colorimetric rendering intent only. It causes the RIP color management
engine to normalize the black points of the input and output profiles, mapping input black
to output black. This is useful for color management of RGB content as well as Matte and
uncoated media. In these cases, the press output black can be lighter than the input black.
With the relative colorimetric intent, the black is preserved causing the dark shadows and
near blacks to block up when the input is darker than the output can reproduce. Blackpoint
compensation scales the lightness of the images to normalize the black points to eliminate
this effect.
Pantone colors can be emulated using the wide gamut of the Indichrome ink set using the Pantone licensed lookup table. In
addition, there are four Pantone Emulation options for simulating Pantone colors with CMYK inks:
HP Professional Pantone Converts named Pantone colors in the job file to process CMYK values using a special
Emulation HP-proprietary form of gamut mapping. This method provides a “best visual match” on
the press for each individual Pantone color. This method uses the Pantone name suffix
to differentiate between the Pantone Coated, Matte and Uncoated libraries. This method
is good at matching the individual Pantone colors.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Color Management tab 237

PANTONE CMYK licensed lookup Converts named Pantone colors in the job file to process CMYK values using the Pantone
table licensed lookup table for Pantone coated colors. This method is good at preserving
differences between adjacent colors.
Pantone Indichrome Licensed Active when the Separation mode is set to IndiChrome.
Lookup Table
Compatibility mode Converts named Pantone colors in the job file to CMYK values using the standard press
output profile. This is compatible with the Automatic Pantone Substitution option in
other products such as the HP SmartStream OnBoard Print Server.
None Ignores any named Pantone colors in the job file and uses the alternate CMYK values
supplied in the job file instead.
Use Embedded Profiles Uncheck this box to disregard any embedded ICC profiles and most PostScript Color
Space Arrays included in the job file. Instead, the color conversion specified in the input
profiles is used.
Preserve 100% process black Check this box to use 100% process black inks only rather than blacks created with cyan,
magenta, and yellow inks for RGB black colors. When this box is not checked, RGB black
lines and text are not as sharp and clear, but blacks are darker because all four inks are
used.
Color management type Choose either Better or Faster.
● Better provides the most accurate color conversions. Recommended choice.
● Faster improves the speed of the color conversions for some documents, but is not
recommended for documents with large solid fills of colors that need color
management.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Page tab

The Page tab is part of both the Job Ticket dialog box and the Ticket Template dialog box. To open the
Page tab, open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Page tab.
Use the Page tab to set options for page size, pad smaller jobs, resolution, scale, and orientation used
by the RIP. See Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket on page 71.
The Page tab contains the following areas:
Default page size Sets the default page size of the job being rendered. May be either predefined or custom.
Pre-defined size Sets the Default page size from a list of predefined page sizes. The default page size is
320 x 470 mm (approximately 12.6 x 18.5 inches).
Custom size Sets the width and length of a custom Default page size in the chosen unit of measure.
Automatically recomputes width and length if you change the unit of measure.
● Units
● Width
● Length
Pad smaller jobs ● If this box is unchecked, the final job size is the image size specified in the job file.
● If this box is checked, the final dimensions of the job will be the Default page size
specified in the Page tab.
See Specifying page settings in the Job Ticket on page 71.
PDF Bounding Box Provides control of the PDF object used for determining the final page size generated by the
RIP. Choices are: Media Box, Bleed Box, Trim Box, Art Box, Crop Box.

Fit to page ● If selected, oversized jobs are scaled down to the Default page size. The original
aspect ratio is maintained. Jobs that fit the page are not altered.
● If not selected, the job dimensions will equal the image size from the job file. If the job
image is larger than Default page size, the job is cropped.
Fit to page is executed after Auto-rotate so that the output image is scaled as little as
possible.
Scale Manually sets percentages of the initial horizontal and vertical dimensions of the image.
● horizontal
● vertical
Auto-rotate For landscape jobs. Checking Auto-rotate automatically adds a 90-degree

counterclockwise rotation to the image if needed to fit the page.
This function assumes a portrait-type page that is longer than it is wide. It does not rotate
portrait jobs to fit on a page that is more wide than long.
Rotate: (degrees) Rotates the page by the chosen number of degrees. Rotation is done after Scale, Auto-
rotate, and Fit to page options are executed. Rotation is not included in the Auto-rotate
calculations and can be used to change the results of the Auto-rotate.
The default is no Rotate.
Negative print Specifies a photographic negative of the job.
Personalized JLYT Uses the mirror settings in the job
Mirror Specifies a mirror image of the job. Applied only if the job itself doesn't specify mirroring.
Specify resolution These settings are active if the destination press is capable of multiple resolutions.
In order to implement resolutions other than 800 dpi, the destination press must support
multi-resolution printing. This support is provided by ICF 05. (See What is ICF?
on page 195)
Use object-level resolution for If the PPML job file contains embedded information about the resolution of individual objects,
PPML and PPML/T jobs you can select how these resolutions are interpreted by the press. Check the box and then
select resolution values for Low, Medium, Normal, and High.
Linework and Halftoning Options For all three settings, you can select to:
● Turn the feature on or off for this job.
● Use prior settings if present, or otherwise use the press default (“not set here” option).
Line smoothing (RET) Line smoothing enhances the quality of line work in low-resolution jobs. It is implemented on
the press. Options are:
● Not set here. The setting will be taken from the incoming file, if present, or from the
press default setting.
● Yes or no. This value will be passed to the job properties of the press job.
In order to implement line smoothing, the destination press must support it. This support is
provided by ICF 05. (See What is ICF? on page 195)
Regardless of the setting, line smoothing is not available for job resolution above and equal
to 800 dpi.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Page tab 239

Line thinning Line thinning compensates for the dot gain generated by the press. It improves the
consistency in line thickness, and is effective for solid line work and text. Options are:
● Yes. Select a value. This value will be passed to the job properties of the press job.
● No. This value will be passed to the job properties of the press job.
In order to implement line thinning, the destination press must support it. This support is
provided by ICF 05. (See What is ICF? on page 195)
Regardless of the setting, line thinning is not implemented when printing jobs RIPped at 1200
dpi.
Adaptive halftoning Halftoning is a technique for reproducing continuous tone images with a small number of ink
colors using dot size and placement. It increases edge sharpness. Options are:
● Yes or no. This value will be passed to the job properties of the press job.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Imposition tab

The Imposition tab is part of both the Job Ticket dialog box and the Ticket Template dialog box (The
Job Properties dialog box also displays the Imposition tab.) To open the Imposition tab, open the Job
Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Imposition tab.
To specify an imposition for a Job Ticket:

1. Right-click on a Job Ticket under a Production Queue or Master Jobs list, and select Job Ticket
from the pop-up menu.
2. Click the Imposition tab.
3. Select an Imposition template (other than None) from the Imposition Template drop-down list.
To specify an imposition for a Ticket Template:

1. In the Admin menu, click Ticket Templates.
2. Select the Ticket Template you want to edit and click Edit.
NOTE: System-supplied Ticket Templates (those supplied with the system) cannot be edited.
However, you may edit new templates you have created, or copies you have made from built-in
Imposition templates.
3. Click the Imposition tab.
4. Select an Imposition template (other than None) from the Imposition Template drop-down list.
The Imposition tab contains the following areas:
Imposition Template Initially displays the Master Job's current imposition template,
but can be changed to any other in the list. If None is selected,
the Master Job will not be imposed. Note that the 1-up
imposition and the None imposition are not the same.
For imposition descriptions, see Built-in imposition templates

on page 272.

Paper Size Select a substrate from a list of actual substrates on the press.
Make sure that the substrate you select on the Imposition tab
matches the substrate selected on the Substrate tab of the Job
Ticket.
Duplex A read-only value that shows whether Duplex printing has

been specified for the Imposition template you've selected.
This value is pre-set each time you create an Imposition
template. The Duplex setting on an Imposition template
overrides the Duplex setting in a Job Ticket / Ticket Template's
Job Control tab.
Rotate (degrees) Specify the setting by which to rotate each individual whole
page on the spread.
Margins Specify the margin settings for the job. Use the Symmetric
check box to use identical margin settings on opposite sides
of the page. Margins use the unit of measure you specify in the
User Preferences.
Step and Repeat Specify the number of instances of the print job that you want
printed side by side (in columns and rows). For example, if you
are printing a postcard as a 1-up, and two of those postcards
can fit on the same sheet of paper, you can use Step and
Repeat to image two copies of the 1-up on a single sheet of
paper (thus saving paper). Note however, that if you use Step
and Repeat to multiply the number of instances of the print job
per sheet of paper, you must also reduce the number of copies
by the same ratio. Otherwise you will end up with more copies
than you intended.
Position Specify the horizontal / vertical position of the entire imposition

on the spread. The position alignment buttons provide
calculated position values, adjacent to the margins of the
corner or side you select.
Warning Message Area The area above the Preview can sometimes display warning
messages in red. A couple of the more common messages are:
● The layout is outside of the media size (This usually

means that the paper size you've selected is too small to
accommodate the imposition.)
● The layout is outside of the margins (This usually means

that imposition print elements, such as cross hairs, will
not print within the margins you have specified for the
imposition.)
Preview Displays a layout preview of the sheet, showing:
● a dimensional form of the page
● a corner triangle for orientation
● a page number
● crop marks (if any)
● image size
The Image Size field displays the size of the image, calculated
using the imposition parameters you have specified.
There are two sub-tabs at the bottom of the Imposition tab: Layout and Marks. The Layout sub-tab has
been described above. The Marks sub-tab contains these additional options:
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Imposition tab 241

Crop Marks, Type Allows you to apply three different types of crop marks: Every
Page, every Signature, or Outside. You can suppress crop
marks by selecting None.
Crop Marks, Offset Sets the distance between the crop mark and the edge of the
page.
Crop Marks, Length Sets the length of the crop mark's crosshairs.
Crop Marks, Bleed Size Sets how far to bleed the image beyond the crop marks.
Outside Bleed Only Applies the bleed only to the outside edges and not to the
inside binding edge of the page. Note that for this setting to be
applied, you must also select Automatic Gutters and Gaps, or
manually set the Gutters and Gaps horizontal and vertical to a
value greater than “0”.
Automatic Gutters and Gaps Automatically calculates and applies gutters and gaps to
remove overlap among pages, and/or the overlap of crop
marks on pages.
Gutters, Horizontal and Vertical Specifies the amount of space to apply to gutters (the internal
gaps between each printed page).
Gaps, Horizontal and Vertical Specifies the amount of space to add between signatures. This
option takes effect when you use a column and row setting
greater than 1 in the Step and Repeat option of the Imposition
tab.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Job Control tab

The Job Control tab is part of both the Ticket Template and Job Ticket dialog boxes. To open the Job
Control tab, open the Job Ticket or Ticket Template and click the Job Control tab.
Use the Job Control tab to define properties for controlling a Master Job's missing font behavior, image
quality, press workflow, and print properties. See Specifying job control parameters in the Job Ticket
on page 74.
The Job Control tab contains the following areas:
Press Job Destination Specifies the post-RIP destination of the press job. Select an option and choose a
specific device from the list.
Press Routes the press job to the selected press. Both PrintLink and non-PrintLink presses
are listed. See Selecting a destination press on page 79.
Press group Select a press group that has been created in the Manage Devices dialog box. See
Using press groups on page 82. The press job will be assigned to a member of that
group prior to RIPping.
Press controller If you select a press controller, the press job will not be assigned to a particular press.
The job will not appear in the off-press jobs list for any press. To view the job, you
must use the Job Manager to go to a press controller view. See Using press
controllers as the destination on page 83.
Folder device Select a folder device that has been created in the Manage Devices dialog box. The
RIP output will be saved directly to a file in this folder.
When a job loaded onto a press, place Select the behavior of the job when it is loaded onto the press. It can be placed in the
it in the: Loaded Jobs List or directly into the Print Queue.
Job Retention Displays jobs currently retained by the press.

Retain press job on press for: Retains the press job for a specified amount of time. At the end of the specified time,
the press job is deleted. To check the jobs that are currently retained, check the
Retained Job List.
Retain press job indefinitely: Retains the press job on the press after the printing is complete until you manually
delete it.
Delete the job: Removes the press job as soon as it is printed.
Information button Provides information on the Job Retention options.
Print Properties These settings are transferring directly to the job properties of the press job when it
is created.
Duplex ● Yes specifies duplex printing
● No specifies no duplex printing
NOTE: The Duplex setting on an Imposition template overrides the Duplex setting
in a Job Ticket / Ticket Template's Job Control tab.
Collate ● Yes specifies collation
● No specifies no collation
Reverse order ● Yes specifies reverse order
● No specifies no reverse order (in other words, forward order)
Stack Destination Specifies the stacker to a press.
Select a stack destination: Use press defaults, Stacker 1, Stacker 2, Stacker 3, Proof Tray, and Divert Path
OPI (Open Prepress Interface) See Using OPI for high resolution images on page 56
use OPI for jobs (replace images in Activates OPI. Substitutes high-resolution images for the low-resolution images
documents) embedded in input files. See Using OPI for high resolution images on page 56 for
more information.
OPI Options: abort job when Aborts the job if Production Pro Print Server was told to use OPI and it can't find the
replacement file(s) not found specified high-resolution files.
require an exact file name match By default, OPI allows substitution of a different file type; for example, myfile.jpg is a
match for myfile.pdf. Check this box to require an exact match in file name.
Search these locations for images Table that displays the search path(s) for the high-resolution images.
Add Adds the locations you browsed for to the Drive or network folder and Folder path.
Delete Deletes the selected search path in the table Search these locations for images.
If a font is not found: Describes the behavior if a RIP font is not available.
Stop and change the Master Job status Performs as described.

to Needs Attention
NOTE: This setting works for static jobs only. For variable data jobs, RIPping stops
and a dialog box is displayed requesting a substitute font.
Continue with a substitute font Continues RIPping the job using the substitute font you specify in the list.
Use font emulation (RIP fonts only) . If Uses font emulation and stops RIPping if font emulation fails.
unsuccessful, stop and change the
Master Job status to Needs Attention.
Use font emulation (RIP fonts only). If If font emulation fails, the RIP engine continues RIPping the job using the substitute
unsuccessful, continue with a substitute font you specify in the list.
font.
Job Ticket / Ticket Template - Job Control tab 243

Job Ticket - Job Log
The Job Log tab of the Job Ticket dialog box displays the processing history and error messages for
the job. It includes the job ID and a table that lists the audit records associated with the job, in descending
order by audit time, with a rating of their severity.
To open the Job log, open the Job Ticket and click the Job log tab.
The Job Log tab contains the following areas:
Audit records for internal ID A unique job identification number generated by the system. Appears in the General tab of
the Job Ticket.
Severity An icon indicating the severity.
Error events that might still allow the Master Job to continue. Probably requires user
Error
attention.
Potentially harmful situation. May require user attention.

Warning
Messages that highlight the progress of the job.

Information
Audit Time Time when a Master Job check was made and information was generated.
Processor Processor for which the audit message was generated.
Detail Description of the problem or information.
Author Originator of the information.
Detail Text box that displays the information in the Detail column.
Order Form tab

The Order Form tab in the Job Ticket stores contact information about the customer and finishing
information about the Master Job. The information in the order form is not automatically used during the
Master Job's workflow.
To open the Order form tab, open the Job Ticket and click the Order form tab.
The Order form contains:
● Customer Information (see Order Form tab - Customer Information on page 244)
● Billing Information (see Order Form tab - Billing Information on page 245)
● Shipping Information (see Order Form tab - Shipping Information on page 246)
● Finishing (see Order Form tab - Finishing on page 247)
Order Form tab - Customer Information

The Customer Information view provides fields for entering contact information for the company and
company contact person associated with a print job. For ISV jobs, some information is entered for you.
To open the Customer Information view, open the Job Ticket and click the Order form tab. The Customer
Information view is the default first page of the Order Form tab.
The Customer Information view contains the following areas:

Customer Information
Company ID Identification for the company associated with the print job
Company name Name of the company associated with the print job
Address1 Street address of the company associated with the print job
Address2 Street address continued, if necessary
City Address continued
State/Province Address continued
Zip/Postal code Address continued
Country/Region A list of country/region names in uppercase with a country/region name selected if there is
a shipping address with a country/region. The default is the UNITED STATES.
Comments Optional information to help you service this account
Contact Information
Purchaser/contact
First name First name of the customer's contact person
Last name Last name of the customer's contact person
Phone Phone number for the customer's contact person
Mobile Mobile or cell phone for the customer's contact person
Pager Pager number for the customer's contact person
Fax Fax number for the customer's contact person
Order Form tab - Billing Information

The Billing Information view provides fields for entering the billing code, billing address, and comments
associated with a print job. For ISV jobs, some information is entered for you.
To open the Billing Information view:

1. Open the Job Ticket and click the Order form tab.
2. Select Billing Information from the list of views at the top of the page.
The Billing Information view contains the following areas:
Billing code Customer's accounting or finance code used for cost tracking.
Billing Address
Use company information Check this box to import the address information from the Customer Information view. The
billing address fields become read-only. When not checked, the billing address fields are
active and you can edit them.
Company name The same name as the Customer Information view. A read-only field.
Address1 Customer's street address. Imported from the Customer Information view and read-only if
Use company information is checked; otherwise, editable.
Order Form tab - Billing Information 245

Address2 Customer's street address continued, if necessary. Imported from the Customer
Information view and read-only if Use company information is checked; otherwise, editable.
City Customer's address continued. Imported from the Customer Information view and read-only
if Use company information is checked; otherwise, editable.
State/Province Customer's address continued. Imported from the Customer Information view and read-only
Zip/Postal code Customer's address continued. Imported from the Customer Information view and read-only
Country/Region A list that contains all country/region names in uppercase. The country/region name is
selected if there is a shipping address that includes the country/region. The default is UNITED
STATES.
Comments Optional information to help service the account.
Order Form tab - Shipping Information

The Shipping Information view provides fields for entering the shipping address, the name of the person
who should receive the completed job, and special handling instructions.
To open the Shipping Information view:

2. Select Shipping Information from the list of views at the top of the page.
The Shipping Information view contains the following areas:
Shipping Address Provides three choices for the shipping address: Enter Shipping Address, Use Company
Information, and Use Billing Address.
Enter Shipping Address Makes all address fields active so you can enter new information.
Use Company Information Enters address information from the Company Information view into the shipping
address fields below; fields become read-only.
Use Billing Address Enters address information from the Billing Information view into the shipping address
fields below; fields become read-only.
Attention Who should receive the printed job.
First name First name of the person to receive the printed job.
Last name Last name of the person to receive the printed job.
Company name Name of the company to receive the printed job.
Address1 Address job should be sent to.
Address2 Second line of address, if needed.
City Shipping address continued.
State/Province Shipping address continued.
Zip/Postal code Shipping address continued.

Country/Region List that contains all country/region names in uppercase. The country/region name is
selected if there is a shipping address that includes the country/region. The default is
UNITED STATES.
Handling instructions Special instructions on how the job should be shipped.
Order Form tab - Finishing

The Finishing view lets you specify information on finish size, binding, folding, and other details
concerning how a job is processed after printing. Some information may be fed into this window through
the input method, but all fields are editable.
To open the Finishing view:
2. Select Finishing from the list of views at the top of the page.
The Finishing view contains the following areas:
x: Width of the finished job in points.
y: Length of the finished job in points.
Type Type of binding, such as saddle stitch or perfect bind.
Location The side of the page where binding should be executed.
Special binding instruction Additional instructions for binding, if needed.
Type Type of folding, such as French fold, gate fold, accordion fold, etc.
Comment Additional folding instructions, if needed.
Perforation Check this box to specify perforation for the job.
Drill Check this box to specify drilling for the job; enter the size of the drill in the text box Size.
Order Form tab - Finishing 247

30 Press job properties and editing
reference
Job Properties dialog box - General page

Use this page to specify general job properties for post-RIP jobs.
Controls for static jobs
Job name When the press job is created, it is assigned a default name
based on the Master Job name. Use this field to edit the name.
The maximum job name is 210 characters for PrintLink presses
and 128 characters for non-PrintLink presses.
Priority Values are 1–100:
● 76–100: Rush
● 51–75: High
● 26–50: Medium
● 1–25: Low
The initial value is obtained from the Job Ticket. The default
value is 50.
Number of copies Use this option to specify the number of copies to be printed.
The default is 1. The maximum number is 99999. For
personalized JLYT jobs, the number of copies is set to 1 and
cannot be changed.
Type Indicates whether the job is static or personalized.
Sheet range per copy — All Use this option to print all sheets in the job.
Sheet range per copy — Range Use this option to specify which sheets you want to print. If you
have specified multiple copies, the same sheets will be printed
for all copies. You can enter up to ten ranges.
Simplex Use this option to print on one side of the sheet.
Duplex Use this option to print on both sides of the sheet. Then choose
a duplex option from the list:
Both: prints both odd- and even-numbered

spreads.
Side 1: prints only odd-numbered spreads.
Side 2: prints only even-numbered spreads.
248 Chapter 30 Press job properties and editing reference

Tumble
When tumble is off (the default), the top of side 1 and

the top of side 2 are along the same edge of the substrate.
When tumble is on, the top edge of side 1 is the bottom

edge of side 2.
List selection — Print Queue or Held (Loaded) Jobs List The list selection options let you choose what happens to the
press job when it arrives at a press (for example, when the job
is copied). You select whether you want the job to go directly
to the Print Queue or to the Held Jobs List (or Loaded Jobs list
for non-PrintLink presses).
Job retention — Retain press job on press for Use this option to keep in the job in the press' retain list for a
specified length of time. Type a number and select a unit (days,
hours, or minutes) from the list.
Job retention — Retain press job indefinitely Use this option to keep the job in the press' retain list until it is
manually deleted.
Job retention — Delete the job Use this option to remove the job from the press as soon as it
is printed.
Additional controls for personalized jobs
Print range per copy — Print all Use this option to print the specified number of copies of the
entire job.
Print range per copy — Specify sheet/cycle range Use this option to print specified sheets and cycles of the job.
See Understanding sheets and cycles in personalized JLYT
jobs on page 116.
Sheets — All Use this option to print all sheets in the job.
Sheets — Range Use this option to specify a range of sheets to print. You can
enter up to ten ranges.
Cycles — All Use this option to print all cycles in the job.
Cycles — Range Use this option to specify a range of cycles to print. You can
enter up to ten ranges.
Total sheets to print This field displays the total sheets that will be printed based on
the current sheet, cycle, and copy settings.
Job Properties dialog box - Substrate page

Use this page to link the job's intended substrate for sheets or sheet ranges to actual substrate stored
in press drawers.
Substrate Selection table Displays the current substrate settings for the job.
Sheet range Enter a page range for a substrate. Type individual numbers
or page ranges. When combining ranges, use commas as
separators (for example, 1, 4–8, 12).
Job Properties dialog box - Substrate page 249

Substrate Choose a substrate from the list of available actual substrates.
For PrintLink presses, this list contains the first 20 actual
substrates in the substrate catalog for the assigned press. For
non-PrintLink presses, this list contains the first 20 actual or
intended substrates in the substrate catalog for the assigned
press. Click the Substrate Catalog link at the bottom of the list
to view the full catalog. Because PrintLink presses do not
utilize intended substrates, any substrate specified in the Job
Ticket must have a match in the substrate catalog or the job
will go to a Needs Attention state when sent to the print queue.
Maximum different substrate for a job is 14.
Drawer/Forced drawer Choose the drawer the machine will use to supply the
substrate. Any drawer can be chosen by the operator
regardless of intended substrate for the job or the actual
substrate in a forced drawer.
Job Properties dialog box - Imposition page

Use this page to specify imposition properties.
Imposition Template Initially displays the Master Job's current imposition template,
but can be changed to any other in the list. If None is selected,
the Master Job will not be imposed. Note that the 1-up
imposition and the None imposition are not the same.
For imposition descriptions, see Built-in imposition templates

on page 272.
Paper Size Select a substrate from a list of actual substrates on the press.
Make sure that the substrate you select on the Imposition tab
matches the substrate selected on the Substrate tab of the Job
Ticket.
Duplex A read-only value that shows whether Duplex printing has

been specified for the Imposition template you've selected.
This value is pre-set each time you create an Imposition
template. The Duplex setting on an Imposition template
overrides the Duplex setting in a Job Ticket / Ticket Template's
Job Control tab.
Rotate (degrees) Specify the setting by which to rotate each individual whole
page on the spread.
Margins Specify the margin settings for the job. Use the Symmetric
check box to use identical margin settings on opposite sides
of the page. Margins use the unit of measure you specify in the
User Preferences.
Step and Repeat Specify the number of instances of the Master Job that you
want printed side by side (in columns and rows). For example,
if you're printing a postcard as a 1-up, and two of those
postcards can fit on the same sheet of paper, you can use Step
and Repeat to image two copies of the 1-up on a single sheet
of paper (thus saving paper). Note however, that if you use
Step and Repeat to multiply the number of instances of the
print job per sheet of paper, you must also reduce the number
of copies by the same ratio. Otherwise you will end up with
more copies than you intended. Note that the Preview area
shows an approximation of how the job will fit on the paper.
Select the Automatic check box to have the software attempt
to calculate the best fit for you.

Position Specify the horizontal / vertical position of the entire imposition
on the spread. The position alignment buttons provide
calculated position values, adjacent to the margins of the
corner or side you select.
Warning Message Area The area above the Preview can sometimes display warning
messages in red. A couple of the more common messages are:
● The layout is outside of the media size (This usually

means that the paper size you've selected is too small to
accommodate the imposition.)
● The layout is outside of the margins (This usually means

that imposition print elements, such as cross hairs, will
not print within the margins you have specified for the
imposition.)
Preview Displays a layout preview of the sheet, showing:
● a dimensional form of the page
● a corner triangle for orientation
● a page number
● crop marks (if any)
The Show Thumbnail check box is available only when you

have accessed the Imposition tab from the Job Properties
dialog box. To open the Job Properties dialog box, double-click
a press job in a press or press controller view.
Job Properties dialog box - Stacking page

Use this page to specify the printing order and substrate orientation on the designated stacker.
Collate When this box is checked, copies are collated on the stacker.
For example, if you are printing two copies of a three-sheet job,
all sheets of copy 1 are printed in order, followed by all sheets
of copy 2.
● copy1 (sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
● copy2 (sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
If collate is off, all copies of sheet 1 are printed, followed by all

copies of sheet 2, followed by all copies of sheet 3.
● sheet1 (copy1, copy2)
Destination Select a specific stacker on this press. Other choices include

last used Stacker 1, Stacker 2, Stacker 3, Proof Tray, and
Divert Path.
Page up — Last to first (printing one side) Sheets are stacked page up with the first sheet of the job on
top.
Page up — First to last (printing one side) Sheets are stacked page up with the last sheet of the job on
top.
Page down — Last to first (printing one side) Sheets are stacked page-down with the first sheet of the job
on top.
Job Properties dialog box - Stacking page 251

Page down — First to last (printing one side) Sheets are stacked page-down with the last sheet of the job
on top.
Odd up — Last to first (printing both sides) Sheets are stacked odd-page up with the first sheet on top.
Odd up — First to last (printing both sides) Sheets are stacked odd-page up with the last sheet on top.
Even up — Last to first (printing both sides) Sheets are stacked even-page up with the first sheet on top.
Even up — First to last (printing both sides) Sheets are stacked even-page up with the last sheet on top.
Stack with jog offset Select this check box to use a jog offset. Jogging helps the
operator assess the number of sets/copies/sheets printed by
shifting the position of the printed output.
Jog offset interval Specify the number of sets/copies/sheets to be collected in the

stacker before the stacker jogs the stack.
Job Properties dialog box - Image Placement page

Use the page to visually adjust the position of the image on the spread.
Top (Side 1 or Side 2) Shows the distance (in user preferred unit specified via User
Preference Dialog) from the top edge of the sheet to the top
edge of the page.
Left (Side 1 or Side 2) Shows the distance (in user preferred unit specified via User
Preference Dialog) from the left edge of the sheet to the left
edge of the page.
Bottom (Side 1 or Side 2) Shows the distance (in user preferred unit specified via User
Preference Dialog) from the bottom edge of the sheet to the
bottom edge of the page.
Right (Side 1 or Side 2) Shows the distance (in user preferred unit specified via User
Preference Dialog) from the right edge of the sheet to the right
edge of the page.
Orientation — Mirror
Mirrors the image on the spread.
Orientation — Rotate
Rotates the image 180° on the spread.
Orientation — Mirror and Rotate
Mirrors the image and rotates the image 180° on the

spread.
Image size Displays the current image size. Displays Custom if you are
not using a standard size. Select a new size from the drop-
down box if desired.
Length Displays the current image length. If you are using a custom
image size, this number can be edited.
Width Displays the current image width. If you are using a custom
image size, this number can be edited.
Substrate name Displays the current substrate name and dimensions.

Length
Width
Job Properties dialog box - Color Control page

Use this page to modify the LUT for a selected separation.
Job LUT Displays the current LUT name if the job's LUT data matches
a known LUT on the press controller. If the LUT data does not
match, this field displays Custom.
Select a separation to view/edit Select a separation name to populate the LUT table with that
separation's values. On the LUT graph, the data points of the
selected separation are surrounded by squares.
LUT graph Displays the selected separation LUT data in a Bezier curve
from the 0,0 point to the 100,100 point.
Show all Check to view LUTs for all separations. If unchecked, the LUT
graph shows only the selected separation. The selected
separation is on top.
Show diagonal Displays a diagonal line from the 0,0 point to the 100,100 point.
Edit Separation LUT table Displays all of the x/y points for the selected separation. The
table can contain up to 40 pairs of values. The spinners below
the LUT are used to set values for new or selected rows. Input
and output values must be separated from the surrounding
values by at least a tenth of a point.
Insert a row before the selected row. The new input and output
values must be separated from the surrounding values by at
least a tenth of a point. This button is inactive if the LUT has
reached the maximum of 40 pairs of values.
Delete the selected row.
Smooths the LUT curve by altering values in the LUT.
Undoes all LUT changes made since the dialog was opened.
Redoes the LUT changes that were previously undone.
Save LUT As Click this button to save the current LUT(s) for future use. If
you choose the All separations option, the LUT curves for
every separation are saved as a set and will only be able to be
loaded for jobs that have the same separations marked for
printing. If you save a single separation's current LUT, it can
be loaded for any separation in future jobs.
LUT Library Click this button to open the LUT Library dialog. From here you
can load single-separation LUTs and apply them to any
separation on the current job. If you are loading a saved LUT
set (the saved LUT contains curves for more than one
separation), you will only be able to load the LUT to a job that
has the same separations marked for printing. This dialog also
allows you to delete a saved LUT. A LUT library is specific to
a press controller.
Job Properties dialog box - Color Control page 253

Copy to All Seps Click this button to copy the selected LUT to all the separations.
Dot Area (DA) of 50% Select a new DA value by typing a number in the
accompanying field or by moving the sliding bar to the desired
position. The graph is updated with a new curve that is
appropriate for the selected value, and the list is updated with
the new points in the curve. A negative value displays below
the diagonal line in the graph, and a positive value displays
above it.
Dot area is the percentage of an area covered by a halftone

dot, ranging from 1% to 99%. The size of the dots is stated in
percentage of the area occupied. This setting determines what
the dot area will be at the 50% mark on the LUT graph.
Optical density adjustment of 100% Select a new optical density (OD) value by typing a number in
the accompanying field or by moving the sliding bar to the
desired position. You can only select a value that is within the
tolerance range.
OD is a measure of the relative difference between a white

area and a toned or black area. It is inversely proportional to
the amount of light reflected or transmitted through the sample.
Contrast Type a new value or use the sliding bar to adjust the image
contrast plus or minus 15% for the selected LUT. Changes to
the contrast affect all LUT values and the LUT curve. After you
change the contrast for a LUT, a new contrast baseline is
established; therefore, the contrast value will always reset to 0
if you attempt to adjust the contrast again at a later time.
NOTE: The Contrast control is only active if the job has at

least CMY or CMYK separations marked for printing on the
Separations page.
Brightness Type a new value or use the sliding bar to adjust the image
brightness plus or minus 15% for the selected LUT. Changes
to the brightness affect all LUT values and the LUT curve. After
you change the brightness for a LUT, a new brightness
baseline is established; therefore, the brightness value will
always reset to 0 if you attempt to adjust the brightness again
at a later time.
NOTE: The Brightness control is only active if the job has at

least CMY or CMYK separations marked for printing on the
Separations page.
Job Properties dialog box - Separations page

Use this page to define separation properties and ink printing order and repetition.
Separation Properties This table lists the job separations and their properties:
● Print: Indicates whether the separation is printed.
● Separation: Shows the name of the separation.
● Ink: Displays the ink used for the separation.
● Double hit: Indicates whether the press doubles the

separation levels during printing for the selected ink, and
it also doubles the repeat levels of the ink in the printing

order. Separation levels or repeat levels for one ink
cannot be more than 16.
● Screen angle: Displays the current screen angle for the

separation. Screen angles are predefined in screen sets
that are designed to provide the best print results for each
ink. The ink and the screen angle are press specific, they
are disabled if the job is not assigned to a press, or the
assigned press is not connected.
Edit Click this button to edit the separation properties for the
selected separation.
Job screen Select a screen set from the drop-down list.
Print job with light inks Select whether to print this job using light inks. Several
restrictions apply:
● The job must include CMY inks.
● Each separation must use a different ink.
● The default ink printing order must be used.
● The double-hit option must not be selected.
See Using light inks on page 76 for more information.
Printing ink order This table describes the order in which ink will be applied for
the separations. It allows you to specify repeated ink
applications.
● Order: Shows the printing order of the separations.
● Ink: Shows the ink used for the separation.
● Separation: Shows the separation name.
● Repeat: Displays the number of ink repetitions for the

separation.
: After selecting a separation in the ink order, click

this button to move it up one position.
●
: After selecting a separation, click this button to add
another instance of the selected separation. The
additional separation is added to the end of the ink
printing order.
●
: After selecting a separation, click this button to
delete the separation from the ink order table. You cannot
delete an ink from the ink-printing order if it is the only
instance of an ink that is marked for printing.
: After selecting a separation in the ink order, click

this button to move it down one position.
Use default ink printing order Select this check box to use a default printing order. The Use
ink printing order drop-down box becomes active.
Each PrintLink press has one default ink printing order defined
on the press. non-PrintLink presses can have more than one
default ink printing order defined on the press. Because default
ink-printing order definitions are press specific, the default ink-
Job Properties dialog box - Separations page 255

printing controls are disabled if the job is not assigned to a
press, or assigned press is not connected.
Use ink printing order Select a default ink printing order from the list.
Job Properties dialog box - Linework and Resolution

page
Use this page to view and modify line smoothing, halftoning, and thinning settings. These options might
not be available for all presses. See Enhanced printing options on page 84 for more information.
Resolution Displays the resolutions of the job.
Adaptive halftoning Activates HP Adaptive Halftoning. When using HP Adaptive

Halftoning, the system analyzes text and images as they are
being printed, adding dots to fill gaps at the edges to produce
sharp text and images that enhance the quality of printed
pieces without affecting color stability. See Adaptive halftoning
Line smoothing (RET) Smooths solid lines if the resolution is less than 800 dpi. Not
available if any resolution is over 800 dpi. See Line smoothing
Line thinning Compensates solid linework width for dot gain changes. See
Line thinning on page 86 for more information.
Line thinning adjustment Use the sliding bar to modify the thinning adjustment from –10
to +10 microns.
Job Properties dialog box - Comments tab

Use this tab to view or modify the comments associated with the job.
Enter your comments Edit the comment text. This field has a 128-character limit.
Comments originate in the Job Ticket's Special Comments

field. Comments can also be edited by the press operator.
Job Properties dialog box - Job Log tab

This tab displays a list of events that have occurred since the press job was created. This includes load
times, print start time, print end time, and the number of copies or sheets printed. None of the information
can be edited.
Job Preview window

To open the Job Preview window, select a press job and click the job preview toolbar button . The
Job Previewer does not modify the press job.

Separations This area lists the color separations in the job and allows you to select which
separations are shown in the preview.
● — the separation is a special named color that has been defined for
previewing.
● — the separation is a special named color that has not been defined for
previewing. Click the color name to open the Special Colors dialog box.
Composite button Select this option to view all separations in the job.
Separation check boxes Use these check boxes to select which separations are shown.
Spread preview bar Provides a thumbnail images to help you select spread. Click a spread to preview it.
The spreads are numbered sequentially. Use the scroll buttons, if necessary.
For VDP JLYT jobs, only thumbnail images for the current cycle are shown.
Quality Allows you to choose the resolution of the displayed image:
● Best — 100%
● Normal — 60%
● Fast — 30%
Spread Provides another way to switch spreads:
●
previous spread
●
first spread
● Text box — displays the spread number. You can type a number into this box
to switch to that spread
●
next spread
●
final spread
Cycles For VDP JLYT jobs only. Select a cycle number to view the spreads of that cycle.
Zoom Zoom in to get a close-up view, or zoom out to see more of the spread at a reduced
size. The Zoom feature uses the following predefined values: 32%, 50%, 75%, 100%,
150%, 200%, 300%, and 400%.
●
zoom in
●
zoom out
●
resizes the preview to fit best in the allotted space
Hand tool. When only part of the image is shown, the hand tool moves the image to
show other areas.
Rotate tool. Click the tool to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
Job Preview window 257

Special Colors dialog box
This dialog box is displayed by clicking Special Colors in the Job Preview window. It allows you to
specify the RGB value the Job Preview window uses to display separations for special name colors.
NOTE: The RGB values are for display only. They are not used for printing.
Special colors are defined for each press controller.
Special Color table Lists the special colors in the job and allows you to enter RGB
values for the color. The values must be in the range 0–255.
Remove Removes the definition for the selected color.
Add Creates a new row in the Special Color table for defining a new
color.
Color Chooser Opens the Color dialog box for viewing colors and their RGB
values.

31 User account reference
My Account dialog box

The My Account dialog box is used to change settings for your account.
To open the dialog box, click My Account in the Admin menu.
User ID Your unique user ID that identifies your account. This cannot be edited.
Full name Your full name.
Change password Displays the Change Password dialog box for changing your password.
Change Password dialog box (users)

The Change Password dialog box is displayed by clicking Change Password in the My Account dialog
box.
Old password Enter your current password .
New password Enter a new password. Passwords must be 6 to 8 characters and must contain at least one letter
and one number.
Confirm password Re-enter the new password.
Manage Remote Accounts dialog box

The Manage User Accounts dialog box is displayed by clicking Remote Accounts in the Admin menu.
It is used to add and delete users.
You must have administration permission to access this dialog box.
See Adding users on page 178 for more information.
Remote Users The list of remote user accounts.
New Opens the New Remote Account dialog box for adding a new user account.
Edit Opens the Edit Remote Account dialog box for editing properties of the selected account.
Delete Deletes the selected account.
Set Password Opens the Change Password dialog box for resetting a user's password.
Remote Roles Opens the Manage Remote Roles dialog box. Use this dialog box to create new roles and edit
existing ones.
My Account dialog box 259

New Remote Account dialog box
The New User Account dialog box is displayed by clicking New in the Manage Remote Accounts dialog
box.
User ID The unique user name associated with the account. This is the name used to log in. The maximum
length is 10 characters.
Full name The user's full name.
Password The initial password for the user's account. Passwords must be 6 to 8 characters and must contain
at least one letter and one number.
Confirm password Re-enter the password.
User role Select a role from the list. This sets the user's permissions.
Active user When checked, the user account becomes active immediately and the user can log in.
Edit Remote Account dialog box

The Edit remote Account dialog box is displayed by clicking Edit in the Manage Remote Accounts dialog
box. It is used to modify the account properties of an existing user.
User ID The unique user name associated with the account. This is the name used to log in.
Full name The users full name.
User role Select a role from the list. This sets the user's permissions.
Active user When checked, the user is allowed to log in.
Change Password dialog box (administrators)

The Change Password dialog box is displayed by clicking Set Password in the Manage Remote
Accounts dialog box. It is used by administrators to change the password of the selected user.
New password Enter a new password. Passwords must be 6 to 8 characters and must contain at least one letter and
one number.
Confirm password Reenter the new password.
Edit Remote Role dialog box

The Edit User Roles dialog box is displayed by clicking Edit or Copy in the Manage Remote Roles
dialog box.
● If you clicked Edit, you are editing an existing role. Changes will affect all users assigned to that
role.
● If you've clicked Copy, the new role is initially named “Copy of role.”
Remote role The name of the remote role. Editing the name of an existing role retains user assignments to that
role.
260 Chapter 31 User account reference

Permissions area Defines the permissions assigned to the role. See Setting permissions for a role on page 179.
Description Enter a descriptive phrase or sentence to help identify the role.
Manage Remote Roles dialog box

The Manage User Roles dialog box is displayed by clicking Remote Roles in the Manage Remote
Accounts dialog box. It is used to create new roles and to edit existing ones.
See Managing user roles on page 178 for more information.
Remote roles Lists the existing remote roles and the number of users assigned to each role
Edit Opens the Edit Remote Role dialog box to edit the selected role.
Copy Used to create new roles. Copies the selected role and opens the Edit Remote Role dialog box to edit
the permissions of new role.
Delete Deletes the selected role.
Locked function dialog box

This dialog box is displayed when a user tries to open a dialog box to perform a task that is currently
being performed by another user—for example, attempting to:
● Open a Job Ticket or Ticket Template that another user has open.
● Perform an administrative task such as changing system settings, editing a user account, editing
an input method, and managing LUTs.
If your user account provides permission to release locks (this is an administrative task), this dialog box
will contain the following controls:
Release Lock This releases the lock so that another user can perform the task. See Releasing a system lock
on page 167.
Release/Obtain Lock This releases the lock and then opens the dialog box so that you can use it. (You now have the
lock).
View Read-only Opens a read-only version of the dialog box. This allows you to view settings, but you cannot
save changes. The lock is retained by the current user.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without any action. The lock is retained by the current user.
Login dialog box

The Login dialog box is used to log into the HP Remote Production Client.
User ID The ID you have been assigned. You can change your user ID by editing your profile.
Password The password for your account.
If you forget your user ID:

● Contact your administrator and request it.
Manage Remote Roles dialog box 261

If you forget your password:
● Contact your administrator and request that your password be reset.
User Preferences dialog box

The User Preferences dialog box is used to set the locale (language) and default units for your account.
To open the dialog box, click User Preferences in the Admin menu.
Locale Select a locale (language) from the list. You must log out and back in for the changes to take effect.
Default units Select a unit of measure from the list. This becomes the default units used in Production Pro Print Server
dialog boxes.
Manage Remote Connections dialog box

This dialog box allows you to see the list of users currently logged into the system. You can also modify
the maximum number of connections allowed. (Each user logged into the system generates a remote
connection.)
To open this dialog box, click Remote Connections on the Admin menu.
Remote Connections List the users who are currently logged in.
Current connections Number of remote users currently using the system.
Maximum connections Maximum number of allowable remote connections. To modify this number, type a new value
and click Apply.
Apply Becomes active when you modify the Maximum connections text box. Click this to apply the
new value.
For more information, see Managing remote connections on page 168.
262 Chapter 31 User account reference

32 Production RIP Manager reference
The Production RIP Manager

The Production RIP Manager handles the tasks associated with RIPping jobs and managing RIPs. The
Production RIP Manager dialog box is used to update and view the configuration of RIP groups and
engines.
To open the Production RIP Manager dialog box, click RIP Manager in the Admin menu, or click the
RIP Manager toolbar button.

The Production RIP Manager dialog box contains the following:
RIP Groups Top of the tree.
<first level of the tree> Displays the names of the RIP groups and Unassigned, a virtual group for RIP engines that are
not assigned to any group.
<second level of the tree> Displays the names of the RIP engines assigned to each RIP group and icons indicating engine
status. See RIP engine status icons on page 270.
Menu bar
File Exit - closes the Production RIP Manager
Configure RIP Groups - create, edit, and set priorities for RIP groups
RIP Engines - create, edit, and assign RIP engines to groups
Fonts - install/uninstall fonts on RIP engines
Disk Space Management - configure automatic disk space update and temporary file removal
Help About - displays version of Production RIP Manager software
Configure RIP Groups dialog box

Use the Configure RIP Groups dialog to perform any of the following tasks:
● Create a new RIP group
● Select an existing RIP group for viewing, editing, duplicating, or deleting
● Change the priority of RIP groups
To open the Configure RIP Groups dialog box, click RIP Groups in the Configure menu in the
Production RIP Manager
The Configure RIP Groups dialog box contains the following areas:
Existing RIP Groups Lists the RIP groups that are currently configured.
New Opens the Edit RIP Group dialog box See Edit RIP Group dialog box on page 264 to create a
new RIP group.
The Production RIP Manager 263

Edit Opens the Edit RIP Group dialog box See Edit RIP Group dialog box on page 264 to view or
edit the selected RIP group.
Copy Copies the selected RIP group; opens a dialog box for naming it. By default, the name is
<existing group> copy.
Delete Deletes the selected RIP group.
Priority The order in which each RIP group is queried on whether or not it can accept an incoming job.
RIP groups are queried in order, top-to-bottom.
Move Up Moves the selected RIP group one step up in the list of RIP groups.
Move Down Moves the selected RIP group one step down in the list of RIP groups.
Edit RIP Group dialog box

Use this dialog to perform any of the following tasks:
● Create a new RIP group
● Edit the properties of an existing RIP group
● Allow or prevent the RIP group from accepting jobs
● Set up filters for accepting jobs
To open the Edit RIP Group dialog box:

1. In the Production RIP Manager window, click RIP Groups in the Configure menu.
2. Click New, or select an existing RIP group and click Edit.
The Edit RIP Group dialog box contains two tabs:
General Settings tab
RIP Group Name Unique name for the RIP Group.
Communication Timeout The amount of time (in seconds) a RIP group waits for a message from a RIP engine when
a job is being processed by that engine. If the specified time elapses without receiving any
messages, the Production RIP Manager cancels RIPping the job, and the Master Job status
is set to needs attention.
Enable Fast Reaggregation Partitioned jobs will use fast reaggregation for reassembly.
Job Acceptance and Filtering tab
General Options
Enable Variable Data When checked, the RIP group will be available to process assets for variable data jobs.
Processing
Each RIP Engine handles a When checked, PDF jobs will not be partitioned among multiple RIP engines.
single job
Job Acceptance Filters
Automatically accept jobs Allows the RIP group to accept jobs. If this option is not checked, the RIP group will not accept
new jobs after it finishes processing the jobs in its queue.
264 Chapter 32 Production RIP Manager reference

Accept jobs with size (in bytes) RIP group acceptance is based on file size. Specify the size.
between <> and <>
Accept files of type RIP group acceptance is based on file type. Specify the file types accepted. The default is All
file types.
Configure RIP Engines dialog box

Use the Configure RIP Engines dialog to perform either of the following tasks:
● Create a new RIP engine
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the installation software be used to add new RIP engines
to the system.
● Select an existing RIP engine for editing, duplicating, or deleting.
To open the Configure RIP Engines dialog box, click RIP Engines in the Configure menu in the
Production RIP Manager.
The Configure RIP Engines dialog box contains the following areas:
RIP System Names of RIP engines in the system.
RIP Group Names of RIP group to which the RIP is assigned.
New Opens the Configure RIP Engine dialog box to add a new RIP engine to the system.
Edit Opens the Edit RIP Engine dialog box to view and edit the selected RIP engine. You must disable the
RIP engine by clicking Disable to activate this button.
Copy Copies the configuration of the selected RIP engine and opens the Configure RIP Engine dialog box to
add a new RIP engine to the system. You must disable the RIP engine by clicking Disable to activate
this button.
Delete Deletes the selected RIP engine. You must disable the RIP engine by clicking Disable to activate this
button.
Enable Enables the RIP engine after it has been manually disabled.
Disable Disables the RIP engine so that it can be edited.
New/Edit RIP Engine dialog box

Use this dialog box to define new RIP engines, or to change the properties of existing RIP engines.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you use the installation software to add RIP engines to the
system. There may be a system limitation on the number of RIP engines you can add.
1. In the Production RIP Manager window, click RIP Engines in the Configure menu.
2. Click New, or select an existing RIP engine and click Edit.
NOTE: You must disable the RIP engine before making editing changes. This prevents the RIP engine
from accepting a job while you are in the process of modifying it. To disable the engine, first select the
RIP engine and then click Disable.
General Settings tab
Configure RIP Engines dialog box 265

RIP Engine Hostname The host name of the computer where the RIP is installed and running.
Assigned RIP Group The RIP group to assign this RIP engine to. “Unassigned” adds the engine, but places it off-
line.
Enabled When checked, the RIP engine will accept jobs that have been assigned to its RIP group. When
un-checked, the RIP is off-line but remains assigned to its RIP group.
Disk Space Management tab
<pie chart> Shows the allocation of disk space in megabytes.
<key> Shows the color that corresponds to a particular type of disk usage.
Remove Temp Files Removes the temporary files created by the RIP engine.
Update Disk Space Updates the pie chart to reflect the current disk space usage.
Font Manager dialog box

Use the Font Manager dialog to perform any of the following tasks:
● View installed fonts
● Add and delete fonts from any or all of the RIP engines
● Update the font list for any engine
● Proof fonts
To open the Font Manager dialog box, click Fonts in the Configure menu in the Production RIP
Manager.
The Font Manager dialog box contains the following areas:
Browse Open the Select Font Directory dialog box for selecting the folder containing the fonts to be added.
Font Directory Displays the selected folder.
Available Fonts Displays the fonts located in the specified Font Directory folder.
RIP Engine list Lists the system's RIP engines. Check the engine(s) to include it when Add or Rebuild is clicked.
Add Fonts Begins adding the font(s) displayed in the Available Fonts list. The fonts are added to the selected
(checked) RIP engine(s). Activates a dialog box that gives the number of seconds the operation will
take and warns that RIPs will be busy while adding fonts. (Note: all the fonts are added to the selected
engines; any highlight within the list is ignored.)
Delete Deletes the font(s) selected in the Installed Font list from the engine specified in the RIP Engine list. To
select multiple fonts, use the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Rebuild Rebuilds the list of fonts installed on the checked RIP engines and updates the list of installed fonts in
the Font Manager. Rebuilding takes several seconds, during which the RIP engine does nothing else.
If a RIP engine is busy when asked to rebuild, it completes the current job before rebuilding the font list.
Installed Fonts Lists all the installed fonts in all the RIP engines.
Font Name Displays the names of installed fonts.
RIP Engine Display the RIP engine on which the font is installed.
266 Chapter 32 Production RIP Manager reference

Configure Disk Space Management dialog box
Use this dialog box to set the following automatic options:
● Remove temporary files used by the RIP
● Update disk space
Options set here apply to all RIP engines in the system.
To open this dialog box, click Disk Space Management in the Configure menu of the Production RIP
Manager.
Note to remote users: Your user permissions determine whether you can open and use the Production
RIP Manager.
This dialog box contains the following areas:
Automatically remove temporary Check the box to remove unnecessary temporary files automatically at the specified time.
files If the box is not checked, these files are retained until you remove them in the Edit RIP
Engine dialog box.
Update disk space automatically Specifies when temporary files are removed.
After each job Updates disk space after each job is RIPped.
At boot time Updates disk space when RIP services are started.
Configure Disk Space Management dialog box 267

33 Status and processor reference
Master Job status icons

Each Master Job in the Master Jobs list has a status icon that indicates its state.
Processing. Master Job is proceeding normally. The same icon also indicates ready and ready for next processor.
Needs attention.
Held.
Awaiting review.
Canceled.
Canceling. In the process of being canceled.
Complete. The workflow has been completed.
Master Job progress states

The Master Job progress states are displayed in the Progress column in the Master Jobs list. The
progress state provides a general view of where the Master Job is in its workflow.
For additional information, see Monitoring job progress on page 50.
submitted The Master Job has been submitted. Workflow processing has not started yet. This
designation is applied to Master Jobs that are automatically held on submission.
pre-RIP The order is being processed through its pre-RIP workflow.
waiting to RIP The Master Job is queued or held before the RIP processor.
scheduled to RIP The Master Job has been sent to the Production RIP Manager, and can no longer be
held before RIP.
RIP The Master Job is at the RIP, but is awaiting review, or needing attention.
RIPping page x The Master Job is being RIPped, and RIPping is complete for x pages. The total number
of pages in the Master Job is unknown.
RIPping page x of y The Master Job is being RIPped, and RIPping is complete for x pages. y is the total
number of pages in the Master Job.
waiting to route to The workflow is paused because the next workflow step or destination device is
throttled. A device is throttled when it has insufficient resources to accept additional
jobs or connections.
routing to The job is being sent to the next step in the workflow.
waiting for device The RIP output is ready to be loaded onto the press controller or non-PrintLink press.
sending to device The RIP output is being streamed to the destination device.
268 Chapter 33 Status and processor reference

(20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%) sent to The RIP output is being transferred to the destination device at the indicated state of
device progress.
at print device [device name] The Master Job has generated at least one press job that has been loaded onto a press
controller or press.
saving to folder The Master Job has been RIPped. Its press job is in the process of being saved to a
folder device.
saved to folder The Master Job's press job has been saved to the specified folder device.
printed The job is printed. It is marked complete and waiting for review.
post press The Master Job is printed and in a finishing processor, if a finishing processor has been
added to the system.
complete The Master Job's workflow is complete. (This is also an Master Job status. See Master
Job status icons on page 268)
canceled The Master Job has been canceled, and its workflow has been terminated.
canceling The user has requested that the Master Job be canceled. The system will cancel the
job at an appropriate time.
in process Used for jobs that don't fit the other progress states.
Press job status and icons

In the process of deleting.
Editing the job in the Job Editor.
Imposing the job in the Imposition Editor.
In the process of being loaded.
Being printed.
Held for print. The job must be released before it can be printed.
Imposition error.
Waiting to print.
Load error.
Partially loaded.
Suspended during load.
Loaded.
Printing done. Indicates that the job printed successfully and is ready to move to the next processing step. Not
a press job status - appears as a green check mark on top of the job status icon.
Press job status and icons 269

RIP engine status icons
These icons are used to indicate RIP engine status in the System Explorer.
Ready. RIP engine is ready to accept jobs.
Processing. RIP engine is currently processing a job.
Error or Initializing. View the RIP Log for details.
Disabled. The RIP will not be used for processing. All unassigned RIPs are automatically disabled.
Unknown. The state of the RIP is unknown.
Indicates that one or more RIP engines needs attention.
Press status icons

These icons are used to indicate press status in the System Explorer.
Ready
Printing
Standby
Off, offline.
Hold
Fatal error
Production Pro Print Server only. Indicates that one or more presses needs attention.
System processors
The system processors are the operations that control the workflow of Master Jobs in the system.
download Acquires job files and other assets for Master Jobs submitted via Internet (ISV jobs).
RIP Sends job files to the Production RIP Manager and sends RIP output to the press.
PPML ZIP Extracts and uncompresses archive files containing PPML jobs and their assets.
In addition to these processors, there is an overall system processor that holds all Master Jobs in the
system. For example, Master Jobs that have just been submitted and Master Jobs that are complete
are in the system processor.
270 Chapter 33 Status and processor reference

Processor status and icons
These icons are used to indicate processor status in the System Explorer.
The processor is currently processing. It will continue to process Master Jobs in the processor queue.
Idle. The processor is not currently processing, but is prepared to process Master Jobs entering its queue.
The processor has been paused in the Manage Processors dialog.
Needs attention.
Processor status and icons 271

34 Built-in settings reference
Built-in imposition templates

Production Pro Print Server includes a number of built-in imposition templates that can be specified for
an order in the Job Ticket or the Ticket Template. See Managing impositions on page 163.
Table abbreviations:
● cnc — cut and collate. The pages are ordered so that after folding, all folded edges are cut
● ss — saddle stitch. The binding edge is folded and stitched together in the binding. Only about 16
pages can be successfully imposed this way before page creep begins to occur. All non-binding
folded edges are trimmed.
● pb — perfect bound. The binding edge is cut and glued together into the cover.
● step — step and repeat. A page is repeated n times on a printed page.
Template name Description Front Back
1-up 1 page per sheet, duplex,

tumble (top of side 1 = top of
side 2), portrait orientation (no
page rotation); outside crop
marks = 2.125 mm offset, 3.0
mm length.
2-up-cnc 2 pages per sheet, duplex, no

tumble (top of side 1 = bottom
of side 2), landscape
orientation (pages rotate 90
degrees CCW); outside crop
mm length.
2-up-cnc-nr 2 pages per sheet, duplex, no

of side 2), portrait orientation
(no page rotation); outside
crop marks = 2.125 mm offset,
3.0 mm length.
272 Chapter 34 Built-in settings reference

2-up-cnc-nr-sim 2 pages per sheet, no duplex,

no tumble (top of side 1 =
bottom of side 2), portrait
orientation (no page rotation);
outside crop marks = 2.125
mm offset, 3.0 mm length.
2-up-pb 2 pages per sheet, duplex, no

mm length.
2-up-pb2 4 pages per sheet, duplex,

side 2) portrait orientation (no
mm length. This imposition
does a step and repeat of an
existing 2-up imposed page.
2-up-ss 2 pages per sheet, duplex, no

mm length.
2-up-ss2 4 pages per sheet, duplex,

mm length. This imposition
does a step and repeat of an
existing 2-up imposed page.
Built-in imposition templates 273

2-up-step_sim 2 pages per sheet. No duplex,

no tumble (top of side 1 =
bottom of side 2), landscape
mm length. These two pages
are the SAME page; the
pages are REPEATED once
on a page.
3-up 3 pages per sheet, duplex, no

mm length.
4-up-cnc 4 pages per sheet, duplex,

rotation); outside crop marks
= 2.125 mm offset, 3.0 mm
length.
4-up-pb 4 pages per sheet, duplex,

length.

4-up-ss 4 pages per sheet, duplex,

length.
4-up-step_sim 4 pages per sheet. All four

pages on a sheet are the
SAME page. No duplex,
length.
8-up_pb 8 pages per sheet, duplex, no

mm length.
8-up_ss 8 pages per sheet, duplex, no

mm length.
Built-in imposition templates 275

8_up_postcards 8 identical postcards per

sheet. 0 rotation
8_up_post_seq 8 different postcards per

sheet. 0 rotation
Built-in LUTs
HP Production Pro Print Server includes built-in job LUT tables that can be used to adjust color values
in printing.
LUT tables can be specified for an order's various color separations on the Separations tab of the Job
Ticket or Ticket Template. New LUTs can be added to the system using the Manage LUTs dialog box.
Six of the built-in LUT tables provide increasing dot gain from linear to cromalin, as described in the
table.
LUT Simulated dot gain
linear 0%
exp_025 7.1%
exp_05 (default) 14%
exp_075 20.3%
Cromalin 25%
cmykplus 18%
In addition, there is a default LUT specific to each separation. See Managing LUTs.
CMYK input profiles

The following table describes the preloaded CMYK input profiles.
EuroscaleCoated.icc Describes prints using Euroscale ink separations with 350% total area of ink
coverage and positive plates on bright white coated stock.

EuroscaleUncoated.icc Describes prints using Euroscale ink separations with 260% total area of ink
coverage and positive plates on white uncoated offset stock.
JapanColor2001Coated.icc Describes the Japan Color 2001 printing standards on coated stock.
JapanColor2001Uncoated.icc Describes the Japan Color 2001 printing standards on uncoated stock.
JapanWebCoated.icc Describes prints using Japan Standard inks with 300% total area of ink
coverage and positive plates on coated publication-grade stock.
USSheetfedCoated.icc Describes prints using U.S. inks with 350% total area of ink coverage and
negative plates on bright white coated stock.
USSheetfedUncoated.icc Describes prints using U.S. inks with 260% total area of ink coverage and
negative plates on white uncoated white offset stock.
USWebCoatedSWOP.icc Describes prints using U.S. inks with 300% total area of ink coverage and
negative plates on coated publication-grade stock.
USWebUncoated.icc Describes prints using U.S. inks with 260% total area of ink coverage and
negative plates on white uncoated white offset stock.
EURO.ICC Emulation profile for typical Eurostandard presses. Provided for backward
compatibility. The EuroscaleCoated.icc profile is recommended as an
alternative.
SWOP.ICC US Web Coated Offset Press emulation profile based on the CGATS TR001
data characterization. Provided for backward compatibility. The
USWebCoatedSWOP.icc profile is recommended as an alternative.
RGB input profiles

The following table describes the preloaded RGB input profiles.
sRGBLinkExp05.icc Recommended RGB input profile for use with the exp_05 job LUTs and version
4 ElectroInk sets. It is a device link profile, so the press output profile and
rendering intent choices will not affect the RGB conversions. If these are
required, use sRGBColorSpace.icm instead. The use of a device link profile
provides a slight performance improvement over the use of two profiles for RGB
conversions.
sRGBLinkCMYKPlus.icc Recommended RGB input profile for use with the cmykplus job LUTs and
version 4 ElectroInk sets. It is a device link profile, so the press output profile
and rendering intent choices will not affect the RGB conversions. If these are
required, use sRGBColorSpace.icm instead. The use of a device link profile
provides a slight performance improvement over the use of two profiles for RGB
conversions.
HP3000_sRGB_exp05.icc HP Indigo Press RGB input profile for use with the exp_05 job LUT and version
3 ElectroInk sets. It is a device link profile, so the press output profile and
(Photographic_exp05.icc) rendering intent choices will not affect the RGB conversions. If these are
required, use sRGBColorSpace.icm instead. This profile is compatible with the
Production Flow system and the IPTech version 5.1 RIP Photographic RGB
table choice.
adobe_d65_22.icm Compatible with RGB data created in Adobe applications using AdobeRGB.
Has a wider gamut in the green and cyan regions of the color space than
profiles with typical monitor phosphors. Provided for backward compatibility.
The AdobeRGB1998.icc profile is recommended as an alternative.
app_d65_18.icm Compatible with RGB data created on most Mac OS systems and Photoshop
4. Provided for backward compatibility. The AppleRGB.icc profile is
recommended as an alternative.
RGB input profiles 277

colormatch_d50_18.icm Similar to a Radius PressView monitor gamut. Used for print material
production in many environments. Provided for backward compatibility. The
ColorMatchRGB.icc profile is recommended as an alternative.
gen_d93_18.icm Representative of a normal monitor on a Mac system with an uncorrected

(default) white color setting of 9300K. Provided for backward compatibility. The
sRGBColorSpace.icm profile is recommended as an alternative.
gen_d93_22.icm Representative of a normal monitor on a Windows-based system with an

uncorrected (default) white color setting of 9300K. Provided for backward
compatibility. The sRGBColorSpace.icc profile is recommended as an
alternative.
hp_press_srgb.icm RGB device link color conversion profiles provided for backward compatibility
with the Production Flow system and the IPTech version 5.0 RIP Photographic
(Photographic_v5_exp05.icc) RGB table choice. Deprecated and not recommended.
hp_press_srgb_graphics.icm More saturated sRGB device link color table for business graphics. Compatible
with the IPTech Presentation Graphics RGB color table.
(PresentationGraphics_exp05.icc)
sRGBColorSpace.icm Standard sRGB IEC61966 input profile. Represents a standard computer

monitor. The sRGB international standard has been adopted as the default
(sRGBColorSpaceProfile.icm) color space of many input and printing devices. It is the best choice of RGB
color spaces for working with the Web and office applications.
AdobeRGB1998.icc Represents a larger gamut of colors than sRGB. Documents designed in

Adobe RGB can result in higher fidelity conversions to CMYK than with sRGB.
Use only when the job was designed using Adobe RGB.
AppleRGB.icc Represents the colors displayed on the average Mac OS monitor. Use only
when the job was designed using Apple RGB.
ColorMatchRGB.icc Represents the color space of Radius PressView monitors. Use only when the
job was designed using ColorMatchRGB.
Press output profiles

The following table describes the preloaded press output profiles.
HP5000GlossExp05.icc Default press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the exp_05 job LUT
with version 4 ElectroInk sets.
HP5000GlossCMYKPlus.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the cmykplus job LUT with
version 4 ElectroInk sets.
HP5000GlossLinear.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the linear job LUT with
HP5000GlossExp025.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the exp_025 job LUT with
HP5000GlossExp075.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the exp075 job LUT with
HP5000GlossCromalin.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the cromalin job LUT with
HP3000Gloss_exp05.icc Press output profile calibrated for Gloss media and the exp_05 job LUT with
HP5000SemimatteExp05.icc Press output profile calibrated for Matte-Coated media and the exp_05 job LUT
with version 4 ElectroInk sets. The media is classified and calibrated as “Semi-
matte” in the press.

HP5000SemimatteCMYKPlus.icc Press output profile calibrated for Matte-Coated media and the cmykplus job
LUT with version 4 ElectroInk sets. The media is classified and calibrated as
“Semi-matte” in the press.
HP5000SemimatteLinear.icc Press output profile calibrated for Matte-Coated media and the linear job LUT
with version 4 ElectroInk sets. The media is classified and calibrated as “Semi-
matte” in the press.
HP5000SemimatteExp025.icc Press output profile calibrated for Matte-Coated media and the exp_025 job
HP5000SemimatteExp075.icc Press output profile calibrated for Matte-Coated media and the exp_075 job
HP5000MatteCromalin.icc Press output profile calibrated for uncoated media and the cromalin job LUT
with version 4 ElectroInk sets. The media is classified and calibrated as “Matte”
in the press.
hpus_CYMK.icm TurboStream profile provided for backward compatibility with the Production
Flow system and the IPTech version 5.0 RIP CRD. Deprecated and not
recommended.
hpts_CMYK.icm UltraStream profile provided for backward compatibility with the Production
Flow system and the IPTech version 5.0 RIP CRD. Deprecated and not
recommended.
HPIndigoPhotoBook.icc Profile optimized for printing RGB consumer photo products. Press output
profile with perceptual intent designed for consumer photo applications
calibrated for Gloss media and the exp_05 job LUT.
Color separation modes

The following table describes the four built-in color separation modes.
Custom Allows you to create a custom list of separations. Starts with CMYK as default.
Separations or spot colors may be added or deleted in this mode.
CMYK (Default) Consists of four separations (C, M, Y, and K) with default values. Adjust the
separation properties by using the Edit Separation button. No separations may
be created or deleted.
Grayscale Consists of a single separation (Black) with default values. The separation may
be edited, but no separations may be created or deleted. Grayscale disables
the Color Management tab since no items apply. Choosing Grayscale in the
Separation tab disables all of the Color Management tab, since none of the
areas apply.
Indichrome Consists of seven separations adding Orange, Violet, and a second Magenta
as process colors. Separations may be edited, but not created or deleted.
Choosing Indichrome in the Separation tab creates the following effects in the
Color Management tab:
● Adds Rgb2Indi7 to RGB input profiles and sets it as the selected profile.
This choice provides an in-RIP separation of RGB objects into Indichrome
color separations.
● Disables the Device Output Profile.
● Causes the RIP to use the built-in Pantone licensed Indichrome table
instead of the alternate CMYK color for Pantone named colors when the
Automatic Pantone Substitution option is true.
Color separation modes 279

Pre-installed RIP Fonts
The following table lists the pre-installed RIP fonts.
Table 34-1 Pre-Installed RIP Fonts
AlbertusMT GillSans-Condensed NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
AlbertusMT-Italic GillSans-ExtraBold NewYork
AlbertusMT-Light GillSans-Italic Optima
AntiqueOlive-Bold GillSans-Light Optima-Bold
AntiqueOlive-Compact GillSans-LightItalic Optima-BoldItalic
AntiqueOlive-Italic Goudy Optima-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Roman Goudy-Bold Oxford
Arial Goudy-BoldItalic Palatino-Bold
Arial-Bold Goudy-ExtraBold Palatino-BoldItalic
Arial-BoldItalic Goudy-Italic Palatino-Italic
Arial-Italic Harlequin Palatino-Roman
AvantGarde-Book Helvetica StempelGaramond-Bold
AvantGarde-BookOblique Helvetica-Bold StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
AvantGarde-Demi Helvetica-BoldOblique StempelGaramond-Italic
AvantGarde-DemiOblique Helvetica-Condensed StempelGaramond-Roman
Bodoni Helvetica-Condensed-Bold Stick
Bodoni-Bold Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl Symbol
Bodoni-BoldItalic Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique Taffy
Bodoni-Italic Helvetica-Narrow Times-Bold
Bodoni-Poster Helvetica-Narrow-Bold Times-BoldItalic
Bodoni-PosterCompressed Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique Times-Italic
Bookman-Demi Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique Times-Roman
Bookman-DemiItalic Helvetica-Oblique TimesNewRoman
Bookman-Light HoeflerText-Black TimesNewRoman-Bold
Bookman-LightItalic HoeflerText-BlackItalic TimesNewRoman-BoldItalic
Chicago HoeflerText-Italic TimesNewRoman-Italic
Clarendon HoeflerText-Ornaments Univers
Clarendon-Bold HoeflerText-Regular Univers-Bold
Clarendon-Light HP-Courier Univers-BoldExt
CooperBlack HP-Times-Roman Univers-BoldExtObl
CooperBlack HP-Times-Roman Univers-BoldExtObl
CooperBlack-Italic JoannaMT Univers-BoldOblique

Table 34-1 Pre-Installed RIP Fonts (continued)
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC JoannaMT-Bold Univers-Condensed
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC JoannaMT-BoldItalic Univers-CondensedBold
Coronet-Regular JoannaMT-Italic Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
CID-Bullet LetterGothic Univers-CondensedOblique
Courier LetterGothic-Bold Univers-Extended
Courier-Bold LetterGothic-BoldSlanted Univers-ExtendedObl
Courier-BoldOblique LetterGothic-Slanted Univers-Light
Courier-Oblique LubalinGraph-Book Univers-LightOblique
Eurostile LubalinGraph-BookOblique Univers-Oblique
Eurostile-Bold LubalinGraph-Demi ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo LubalinGraph-DemiOblique ZapfDingbats
Eurostile-ExtendedTwo Marigold
Geneva Monaco
GillSans MonaLisa-Recut
GillSans-Bold NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
GillSans-BoldCondensed NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
GillSans-BoldItalic NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
Fonts that can be emulated

The following table lists the fonts that can be emulated.
Table 34-2 Emulatable fonts
ACaslon-AltBold 0 ACaslon-AltBoldItalic 1 ACaslon-AltItalic 1
ACaslon-AltSemibold 0 ACaslon-AltSemiboldItalic 1 ACaslon-Bold 0
ACaslon-BoldItalicOsF 1 ACaslon-BoldOsF 0 ACaslon-Italic 1
ACaslon-Regular 0 ACaslon-RegularSC 0 ACaslon-Semibold 0
ACaslon-SemiboldItalicOsF 1 ACaslon-SemiboldSC 0 ACaslon-SwashBoldItalic 1
ACaslon-SwashSemiboldItalic 1 ACaslonExp-Bold 0 ACaslonExp-BoldItalic 1
ACaslonExp-Regular 0 ACaslonExp-Semibold 0 ACaslonExp-SemiboldItalic 1
AGaramond-BoldItalic 1 AGaramond-BoldItalicOsF 1 AGaramond-BoldOsF 0
AGaramond-ItalicOsF 1 AGaramond-Regular 0 AGaramond-RegularSC 0
AGaramond-SemiboldItalic 1 AGaramond-SemiboldItalicOsF 1 AGaramond-SemiboldSC 0
AGaramondExp-Bold 0 AGaramondExp-BoldItalic 1 AGaramondExp-Italic 1
AGaramondExp-Semibold 0 AGaramondExp-SemiboldItalic 1 AlbertusMT-Italic 3
AlbertusMT 2 Aldus-Italic 1 Aldus-ItalicOsF 1
Aldus-RomanSC 0 Alexa 2 Americana-Bold 0
Fonts that can be emulated 281

Table 34-2 Emulatable fonts (continued)
Americana-Italic 1 Americana 0 AmericanTypewriter-Bold 4
AmericanTypewriter-BoldCond 4 AmericanTypewriter-BoldCondA 4 AmericanTypewriter-Cond 4
AmericanTypewriter-Light 4 AmericanTypewriter-LightA 4 AmericanTypewriter-LightCond 4
AmericanTypewriter-Medium 4 AmericanTypewriter-MediumA 4 Amigo 0
AntiqueOlive-Black 2 AntiqueOlive-Bold 2 AntiqueOlive-BoldCond 2
AntiqueOlive-Italic 3 AntiqueOlive-Light 2 AntiqueOlive-Nord 2
AntiqueOlive-Roman 2 ApolloMT-Expert 0 ApolloMT-Italic 1
ApolloMT-ItalicOsF 1 ApolloMT-SC 0 ApolloMT-SemiBold 0
ApolloMT-SemiBoldOsF 0 ApolloMT 0 Arcadia-A 2
Ariadne-Roman 6 AshleyScriptMT 4 Auriol-Black 0
Auriol-Bold 0 Auriol-BoldItalic 1 Auriol-Italic 1
AvantGarde-Bold 2 AvantGarde-BoldObl 2 AvantGarde-Book 2
AvantGarde-CondBold 2 AvantGarde-CondBook 2 AvantGarde-CondDemi 2
AvantGarde-Demi 2 AvantGarde-DemiOblique 3 AvantGarde-ExtraLight 2
AvantGarde-Medium 2 AvantGarde-MediumObl 2 Avenir-Black 2
Avenir-Book 2 Avenir-BookOblique 3 Avenir-Heavy 2
Avenir-Light 2 Avenir-LightOblique 3 Avenir-Medium 2
Avenir-Oblique 3 Avenir-Roman 2 BakerSignet 0
Banco 2 BauerBodoni-Black 0 BauerBodoni-BlackCond 0
BauerBodoni-Bold 0 BauerBodoni-BoldCond 0 BauerBodoni-BoldItalic 1
BauerBodoni-BoldOsF 0 BauerBodoni-Italic 1 BauerBodoni-ItalicOsF 1
BauerBodoni-RomanSC 0 Bauhaus-Bold 2 Bauhaus-Demi 2
Bauhaus-Light 2 Bauhaus-Medium 2 Beesknees 2
BellCentennial-BoldListing 2 BellCentennial-BoldListingAlt 2 BellCentennial-NameAndNumber 2
BellGothic-Black 2 BellGothic-Bold 2 BellGothic-Light 2
Belwe-Condensed 0 Belwe-Light 0 Belwe-Medium 0
Bembo-BoldExpert 0 Bembo-BoldItalic 1 Bembo-BoldItalicExpert 1
Bembo-BoldOsF 0 Bembo-Expert 0 Bembo-ExtraBold 0
Bembo-ExtraBoldItalic 1 Bembo-ExtraBoldItalicExpert 1 Bembo-ExtraBoldItalicOsF 1
Bembo-Italic 1 Bembo-ItalicExpert 1 Bembo-ItalicOsF 1
Bembo-Semibold 0 Bembo-SemiboldExpert 0 Bembo-SemiboldItalic 1
Bembo-SemiboldItalicOsF 1 Bembo-SemiboldOsF 0 Bembo 0
Benguiat-Bold 0 Benguiat-Bold duplicate ignored Benguiat-BoldItalic 1
Benguiat-Book 0 Benguiat-Book duplicate ignored Benguiat-BookItalic 1
Benguiat-MediumItalic 1 BenguiatGothic-Bold 2 BenguiatGothic-BoldOblique 3

BenguiatGothic-BookOblique 3 BenguiatGothic-Heavy 2 BenguiatGothic-HeavyOblique 3
BenguiatGothic-MediumOblique 3 Berkeley-Black 0 Berkeley-BlackItalic 1
Berkeley-BoldItalic 1 Berkeley-Book 0 Berkeley-BookItalic 1
Berkeley-Medium 0 Berling-Bold 0 Berling-BoldItalic 1
Berling-Roman 0 Bernhard-BoldCondensed 2 BernhardModern-Bold 2
BernhardModern-Italic 3 BernhardModern-Roman 2 BiffoMT 2
Blackoak 0 Bodoni-Bold 0 Bodoni-BoldCondensed 0
Bodoni-Book 0 Bodoni-BookItalic 1 Bodoni-Italic 1
Bodoni-PosterCompressed 0 Bodoni-PosterItalic 1 Bodoni 0
Bookman-BoldItalic 1 Bookman-Demi 0 Bookman-DemiItalic 1
Bookman-LightItalic 1 Bookman-Medium 0 Bookman-MediumItalic 1
BulmerMT-BoldAlt 0 BulmerMT-BoldDisplay 0 BulmerMT-BoldDisplayAlt 0
BulmerMT-BoldItalDisplayAlt 0 BulmerMT-BoldItalic 1 BulmerMT-BoldItalicAlt 1
BulmerMT-BoldItalicExpert 1 BulmerMT-Italic 1 BulmerMT-ItalicAlt 1
BulmerMT-ItalicDisplayAlt 1 BulmerMT-ItalicExpert 1 BulmerMT-Regular 0
BulmerMT-RegularDisplay 0 BulmerMT-RegularDisplayAlt 0 BulmerMT-RegularExpert 0
BulmerMT-SemiBold 0 BulmerMT-SemiBoldAlt 0 BulmerMT-SemiBoldExpert 0
BulmerMT-SemiBoldItalic 1 BulmerMT-SemiBoldItalicAlt 1 BulmerMT-SemiBoldSC 0
Caecilia-BoldItalic 5 Caecilia-BoldItalicOsF 5 Caecilia-BoldItalicSC 5
Caecilia-BoldSC 4 Caecilia-Heavy 4 Caecilia-HeavyItalic 5
Caecilia-HeavyItalicSC 5 Caecilia-HeavyOsF 4 Caecilia-HeavySC 4
Caecilia-ItalicOsF 5 Caecilia-ItalicSC 5 Caecilia-Light 4
Caecilia-LightItalicOsF 5 Caecilia-LightItalicSC 5 Caecilia-LightOsF 4
Caecilia-Roman 4 Caecilia-RomanOsF 4 Caecilia-RomanSC 4
CalvertMT-Bold 4 CalvertMT-Light 4 CalvertMT 4
Candida-Italic 5 Candida-Roman 4 CantoriaMT-Bold 2
CantoriaMT-ExtraBold 2 CantoriaMT-ExtraBoldItalic 3 CantoriaMT-Italic 3
CantoriaMT-LightItalic 3 CantoriaMT-SemiBold 2 CantoriaMT-SemiBoldItalic 3
Carolina-Dfr 2 Carolina 2 CascadeScript 2
CaslonFiveForty-ItalicOsF 1 CaslonFiveForty-Roman 0 CaslonFiveForty-RomanSC 0
CaslonThree-Italic 1 CaslonThree-ItalicOsF 1 CaslonThree-Roman 0
CaslonTwoTwentyFour-Black 0 CaslonTwoTwentyFour-BlackIt 1 CaslonTwoTwentyFour-Bold 0
CaslonTwoTwentyFour-Book 0 CaslonTwoTwentyFour-BookIt 1 CaslonTwoTwentyFour-Medium 0
Caxton-Bold 0 Caxton-BoldItalic 1 Caxton-Book 0
Caxton-Light 0 Caxton-LightItalic 1 CentaurMT-Bold 0

CentaurMT-BoldItalic 1 CentaurMT-BoldItalicExpert 1 CentaurMT-BoldItalicOsF 1
CentaurMT-Expert 0 CentaurMT-Italic 1 CentaurMT-ItalicA 1
CentaurMT-ItalicExpert 1 CentaurMT-ItalicOsF 1 CentaurMT-SC 0
CentaurMT 0 Centennial-Black 0 Centennial-BlackItalic 1
Centennial-BlackOsF 0 Centennial-Bold 0 Centennial-BoldItalic 1
Centennial-BoldOsF 0 Centennial-Italic 1 Centennial-ItalicOsF 1
Centennial-LightItalic 1 Centennial-LightItalicOsF 1 Centennial-LightSC 0
Centennial-RomanSC 0 Century-Bold 0 Century-BoldCondensed 0
Century-BoldItalic 1 Century-Book 0 Century-BookCondensed 0
Century-BookItalic 1 Century-HandtooledBold 0 Century-HandtooledBoldItalic 1
Century-LightCondensed 0 Century-LightCondensedItalic 1 Century-LightItalic 1
Century-UltraCondensed 0 Century-UltraCondensedItalic 1 Century-UltraItalic 1
CenturyExpanded 0 CenturyOldStyle-Bold 0 CenturyOldStyle-Italic 1
Cerigo-Bold 0 Cerigo-BoldItalic 1 Cerigo-Book 0
Cerigo-Medium 0 Cerigo-MediumItalic 1 Charlemagne-Bold 0
Charme 6 Cheltenham-Bold 0 Cheltenham-BoldCond 0
Cheltenham-BoldItalic 1 Cheltenham-Book 0 Cheltenham-BookCond 0
Cheltenham-BookItalic 1 Cheltenham-HandtooledBdIt 1 Cheltenham-HandtooledBold 0
Cheltenham-LightCond 0 Cheltenham-LightCondItalic 1 Cheltenham-LightItalic 1
Cheltenham-UltraCond 0 Cheltenham-UltraCondItalic 1 Cheltenham-UltraItalic 1
Clairvaux 0 Clarendon-Bold 0 Clarendon-Light 0
Clearface-Black 0 Clearface-BlackItalic 1 Clearface-Bold 0
Clearface-Heavy 0 Clearface-HeavyItalic 1 Clearface-Regular 0
ClearfaceGothicLH-Black 2 ClearfaceGothicLH-Bold 2 ClearfaceGothicLH-Light 2
ClearfaceGothicLH-Roman 2 Cochin-Bold 0 Cochin-BoldItalic 1
Cochin 0 CooperBlack-Italic 1 CooperBlack 0
Copperplate-ThirtyBC 2 Copperplate-ThirtyOneAB 2 Copperplate-ThirtyOneBC 2
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoAB 2 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC 2 Copperplate-TwentyNineAB 2
Corona-Bold 0 Corona-Italic 1 Corona 0
Cushing-BoldItalic 1 Cushing-Book 0 Cushing-BookItalic 1
Cushing-HeavyItalic 1 Cushing-Medium 0 Cushing-MediumItalic 1
Delphin-IA 0 Delphin-II 0 Delphin-IIA 0
DidotLH-BoldOsF 0 DidotLH-Headline 0 DidotLH-HeadlineOsF 0
DidotLH-Italic 1 DidotLH-ItalicOsF 1 DidotLH-Roman 0
DidotLH-RomanSC 0 DINEngschrift-Alternate 2 DINEngschrift 2

DINMittelschrift 2 DINNeuzeitGrotesk-BoldCond 2 DINNeuzeitGrotesk-Light 2
Diotima-ItalicOsF 1 Diotima-Roman 0 Diotima-RomanOsF 0
DomCasual-Bold 2 DomCasual 2 DorchesterScriptMT 6
DucDeBerry-Dfr 0 DucDeBerry 0 Eccentric 4
EgyptienneF-Bold 0 EgyptienneF-Italic 1 EgyptienneF-Roman 0
EhrhardtMT-Regular 0 EhrhardtMT-Semibold 0 EhrhardtMT-SemiboldItalic 1
ElectraLH-BoldCursive 0 ElectraLH-BoldCursiveDisplay 0 ElectraLH-BoldCursiveOsF 0
ElectraLH-BoldOsF 0 ElectraLH-BoldSC 0 ElectraLH-Cursive 0
ElectraLH-CursiveOsF 0 ElectraLH-Display 0 ElectraLH-Regular 0
ElectraLH-RegularSC 0 EllingtonMT-Bold 0 EllingtonMT-BoldItalic 1
EllingtonMT-ExtraBoldItalic 1 EllingtonMT-Italic 1 EllingtonMT-Light 0
EllingtonMT 0 ElseNPL-Bold 0 ElseNPL-Light 0
ElseNPL-SemiBold 0 EngraversLH-BoldFace 0 Esprit-Black 0
Esprit-Bold 0 Esprit-BoldItalic 1 Esprit-Book 0
Esprit-Medium 0 Esprit-MediumItalic 1 Eurostile-Bold 2
Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo 2 Eurostile-BoldOblique 3 Eurostile-Condensed 2
Eurostile-DemiOblique 3 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo 2 Eurostile-Oblique 3
Excelsior-Bold 0 Excelsior-Italic 1 Excelsior 0
FairfieldLH-BoldItalic 1 FairfieldLH-BoldSC 0 FairfieldLH-CaptionBold 0
FairfieldLH-CaptionLight 0 FairfieldLH-CaptionMedium 0 FairfieldLH-Heavy 0
FairfieldLH-HeavySC 0 FairfieldLH-Light 0 FairfieldLH-LightItalic 1
FairfieldLH-Medium 0 FairfieldLH-MediumItalic 1 FairfieldLH-MediumSC 0
FairfieldLH-SwHeavyItalicOsF 1 FairfieldLH-SwLightItalicOsF 1 FairfieldLH-SwMediumItalicOsF 1
Fenice-Bold 0 Fenice-BoldOblique 1 Fenice-Light 0
Fenice-Regular 0 Fenice-RegularOblique 1 Fenice-Ultra 0
FetteFraktur-Dfr 0 FetteFraktur 0 Flora-Bold 2
Flyer-BlackCondensed 2 Flyer-ExtraBlackCondensed 2 Folio-Bold 2
Folio-ExtraBold 2 Folio-Light 2 Folio-Medium 2
FranklinGothic-Book 2 FranklinGothic-BookCmpr 2 FranklinGothic-BookCmprItal 2
FranklinGothic-BookCndItal 2 FranklinGothic-BookItal 2 FranklinGothic-BookOblique 3
FranklinGothic-Condensed 2 FranklinGothic-Demi 2 FranklinGothic-DemiCmpr 2
FranklinGothic-DemiCnd 2 FranklinGothic-DemiCndItal 2 FranklinGothic-DemiItal 2
FranklinGothic-DemiXCmpr 2 FranklinGothic-ExtraCond 2 FranklinGothic-Heavy 2
FranklinGothic-HeavyOblique 3 FranklinGothic-MedCnd 2 FranklinGothic-MedCndItal 2
FranklinGothic-MediumItal 2 FranklinGothic-Roman 2 FrizQuadrata-Bold 0

Frutiger-Black 2 Frutiger-BlackCn 2 Frutiger-BlackItalic 3
Frutiger-BoldCn 2 Frutiger-BoldItalic 3 Frutiger-Cn 2
Frutiger-Italic 3 Frutiger-Light 2 Frutiger-LightCn 2
Frutiger-Roman 2 Frutiger-UltraBlack 2 Futura-Bold 2
Futura-Book 2 Futura-BookOblique 3 Futura-Condensed 2
Futura-CondensedBoldOblique 3 Futura-CondensedExtraBold 2 Futura-CondensedLight 2
Futura-CondensedOblique 3 Futura-CondExtraBoldObl 2 Futura-ExtraBold 2
Futura-Heavy 2 Futura-HeavyOblique 3 Futura-Light 2
Futura-Oblique 3 Futura 2 Galahad-Alternate 2
Galahad-Regular 2 Galliard-Black 0 Galliard-BlackItalic 1
Galliard-BoldItalic 1 Galliard-Italic 1 Galliard-Roman 0
Galliard-UltraItalic 1 Garamond-Bold 0 Garamond-BoldCondensed 0
Garamond-BoldItalic 1 Garamond-Book 0 Garamond-BookCondensed 0
Garamond-BookItalic 1 Garamond-HandtooledBold 0 Garamond-HandtooledBoldItalic 1
Garamond-LightCondensed 0 Garamond-LightCondensedItalic 1 Garamond-LightItalic 1
Garamond-UltraCondensed 0 Garamond-UltraCondensedItalic 1 Garamond-UltraItalic 1
GaramondThree-BoldItalic 1 GaramondThree-BoldItalicOsF 1 GaramondThree-BoldSC 0
GaramondThree-ItalicOsF 1 GaramondThree-SC 0 GaramondThree 0
GarthGraphic-Bold 0 GarthGraphic-BoldCondensed 0 GarthGraphic-BoldItalic 1
GarthGraphic-ExtraBold 0 GarthGraphic-Italic 1 GarthGraphic 0
GazetteLH-Italic 1 GazetteLH-Roman 0 Giddyup-Thangs 6
GillSans-Bold 2 GillSans-BoldCondensed 2 GillSans-BoldExtraCondensed 2
GillSans-Condensed 2 GillSans-ExtraBold 2 GillSans-ExtraBoldDisplay 2
GillSans-Light 2 GillSans-LightItalic 3 GillSans-LightShadowed 2
GillSans-UltraBold 2 GillSans-UltraBoldCondensed 2 GillSans 2
Giovanni-BlackItalic 1 Giovanni-Bold 0 Giovanni-BoldItalic 1
Giovanni-BookItalic 1 Glypha-Black 4 Glypha-BlackOblique 5
Glypha-BoldOblique 5 Glypha-Light 4 Glypha-LightOblique 5
Glypha-Thin 4 Glypha-ThinOblique 5 Glypha 4
Goudy-Bold 0 Goudy-BoldItalic 1 Goudy-BoldItalicOsF 1
Goudy-ExtraBold 0 Goudy-Heavyface 0 Goudy-HeavyfaceItalic 1
Goudy-ItalicOsF 1 Goudy-SC 0 Goudy 0
GoudyModernMT 0 GoudySans-Black 0 GoudySans-BlackItalic 1
GoudySans-BoldItalic 1 GoudySans-Book 0 GoudySans-BookItalic 1
GoudySans-MediumItalic 1 GoudyTextMT-Alternate 0 GoudyTextMT-Dfr 0

GoudyTextMT 0 Granjon-Bold 0 Granjon-BoldOsF 0
Granjon-ItalicOsF 1 Granjon-SC 0 Granjon 0
GrotesqueMT-Bold 2 GrotesqueMT-BoldExtended 2 GrotesqueMT-Condensed 2
GrotesqueMT-Italic 3 GrotesqueMT-Light 2 GrotesqueMT-LightCondensed 2
GrotesqueMT 2 Guardi-Black 0 Guardi-BlackItalic 1
Guardi-BoldItalic 1 Guardi-Italic 1 Guardi-Roman 0
Hadriano-ExtraBold 0 Hadriano-ExtraBoldCondensed 0 Hadriano-Light 0
Helvetica-BlackOblique 3 Helvetica-Compressed 2 Helvetica-Condensed-Black 2
Helvetica-Condensed-Bold 2 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl 2 Helvetica-Condensed-Light 2
Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique 3 Helvetica-Condensed 2 Helvetica-ExtraCompressed 2
Helvetica-FractionBold 2 Helvetica-Light 2 Helvetica-LightOblique 3
HelveticaInserat-Roman 2 HelveticaNeue-Black 2 HelveticaNeue-BlackCond 2
HelveticaNeue-BlackExt 2 HelveticaNeue-BlackExt 2 HelveticaNeue-BlackItalic 3
HelveticaNeue-BoldCond 2 HelveticaNeue-BoldCondObl 2 HelveticaNeue-BoldExt 2
HelveticaNeue-BoldItalic 3 HelveticaNeue-BoldOutlineEuro 2 HelveticaNeue-Condensed 2
HelveticaNeue-ExtBlackCond 2 HelveticaNeue-ExtBlackCondObl 2 HelveticaNeue-Extended 2
HelveticaNeue-Heavy 2 HelveticaNeue-HeavyCond 2 HelveticaNeue-HeavyCondObl 2
HelveticaNeue-HeavyExt 2 HelveticaNeue-HeavyItalic 3 HelveticaNeue-Italic 3
HelveticaNeue-LightCond 2 HelveticaNeue-LightCondObl 2 HelveticaNeue-LightExt 2
HelveticaNeue-LightItalic 3 HelveticaNeue-Medium 2 HelveticaNeue-MediumCond 2
HelveticaNeue-MediumExt 2 HelveticaNeue-MediumExt 2 HelveticaNeue-MediumItalic 3
HelveticaNeue-Thin 2 HelveticaNeue-ThinCond 2 HelveticaNeue-ThinCondObl 2
HelveticaNeue-ThinExt 2 HelveticaNeue-ThinItalic 3 HelveticaNeue-UltraLigCond 2
HelveticaNeue-UltraLigExt 2 HelveticaNeue-UltraLigExt 2 HelveticaNeue-UltraLight 2
HelveticaRounded-Black 2 HelveticaRounded-BlackObl 2 HelveticaRounded-Bold 2
HelveticaRounded-BoldCondObl 2 HelveticaRounded-BoldObl 2 Herculanum 6
Hiroshige-BlackItalic 1 Hiroshige-Bold 0 Hiroshige-BoldItalic 1
Hiroshige-BookItalic 1 Hiroshige-Medium 0 Hiroshige-MediumItalic 1
HorleyOldStyleMT-Bold 0 HorleyOldStyleMT-BoldItalic 1 HorleyOldStyleMT-Italic 1
HorleyOldStyleMT-LightItalic 1 HorleyOldStyleMT-SbItalic 1 HorleyOldStyleMT-SemiBold 0
Impact 2 Impressum-Bold 0 Impressum-Italic 1
Industria-Inline 2 Industria-InlineA 2 Industria-Solid 2
InflexMT-Bold 0 Insignia-A 2 Insignia 2
Isadora-Bold 0 Isadora-Regular 0 Italia-Bold 4
Italia-Medium 4 ItalianOldStyleMT-Bold 0 ItalianOldStyleMT-BoldItalic 1

ItalianOldStyleMT 0 ItcEras-Bold 2 ItcEras-Book 2
ItcEras-Light 2 ItcEras-Medium 2 ItcEras-Ultra 2
ItcKabel-Book 2 ItcKabel-Demi 2 ItcKabel-Medium 2
JansonText-Bold 0 JansonText-BoldItalic 1 JansonText-BoldItalicOsF 1
JansonText-Italic 1 JansonText-ItalicOsF 1 JansonText-Roman 0
JoannaMT-Bold 0 JoannaMT-BoldItalic 1 JoannaMT-ExtraBold 0
JoannaMT-SemiBold 0 JoannaMT-SemiBoldItalic 1 JoannaMT 0
Kabel-Book 2 Kabel-Heavy 2 Kabel-Light 2
Kaufmann 6 KinoMT 2 KlangMT 2
Kompakt 0 Korinna-Bold 2 Korinna-KursivBold 2
Korinna-Regular 2 KuenstlerScript-Black 6 KuenstlerScript-Medium 6
LatinMT-Condensed 0 Leawood-Black 0 Leawood-BlackItalic 1
Leawood-BoldItalic 1 Leawood-Book 0 Leawood-BookItalic 1
Leawood-MediumItalic 1 LegacySans-Bold 2 LegacySans-BoldItalic 3
LegacySans-BookItalic 3 LegacySans-Medium 2 LegacySans-MediumItalic 3
LegacySerif-Bold 0 LegacySerif-BoldItalic 1 LegacySerif-Book 0
LegacySerif-Medium 0 LegacySerif-MediumItalic 1 LegacySerif-Ultra 0
LetterGothic-BoldSlanted 2 LetterGothic-Slanted 2 LetterGothic 2
Life-Italic 1 Life-Roman 0 LinoLetter-Black 4
LinoLetter-BlackItalicOsF 5 LinoLetter-BlackOsF 4 LinoLetter-BlackSC 4
LinoLetter-BoldItalic 5 LinoLetter-BoldItalicOsF 5 LinoLetter-BoldOsF 4
LinoLetter-Italic 5 LinoLetter-ItalicOsF 5 LinoLetter-Medium 4
LinoLetter-MediumItalicOsF 5 LinoLetter-MediumOsF 4 LinoLetter-MediumSC 4
LinoLetter-RomanOsF 4 LinoLetter-RomanSC 4 Linoscript 6
Linotext 0 Lithos-Black 2 Lithos-Bold 2
Lithos-Light 2 Lithos-Regular 2 LubalinGraph-Book 4
LubalinGraph-Demi 4 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique 5 Lucida-Bold 0
Lucida-Italic 1 Lucida 0 LucidaSans-Bold 2
LucidaSans-Italic 3 LucidaSans 2 LucidaSansTypewriter-Bd 2
LucidaSansTypewriter 2 LucidaSansTypewriter 2 LucidaTypewriter-Bold 4
LucidaTypewriter 4 LucidaTypewriter 4 Machine-Bold 2
Madrone 0 Marigold 0 MaturaMT-ScriptCapitals 2
Maximus 0 MediciScript 6 Melior-Bold 0
Melior-Italic 1 Melior 0 Memphis-Bold 4
Memphis-ExtraBold 4 Memphis-Light 4 Memphis-LightItalic 5

Memphis-MediumItalic 5 MendozaRoman-Bold 0 MendozaRoman-BoldItalic 1
MendozaRoman-BookItalic 1 MendozaRoman-Medium 0 MendozaRoman-MediumItalic 1
Meridien-BoldItalic 1 Meridien-Italic 1 Meridien-Medium 0
Meridien-Roman 0 Minion-Black 0 Minion-BlackOsF 0
Minion-BoldItalic 1 Minion-BoldItalicOsF 1 Minion-BoldOsF 0
Minion-DisplayItalicSC 1 Minion-DisplayRegular 0 Minion-DisplayRegularSC 0
Minion-ItalicSC 1 Minion-Regular 0 Minion-RegularSC 0
Minion-SemiboldItalic 1 Minion-SemiboldItalicSC 1 Minion-SemiboldSC 0
Minion-SwashItalic 1 Minion-SwashSemiboldItalic 1 MinionExp-Black 0
MinionExp-BoldItalic 1 MinionExp-DisplayItalic 1 MinionExp-DisplayRegular 0
MinionExp-Regular 0 MinionExp-Semibold 0 MinionExp-SemiboldItalic 1
Minister-BlackItalic 1 Minister-Bold 0 Minister-BoldItalic 1
Minister-BookItalic 1 Minister-Light 0 Minister-LightItalic 1
ModernMT-BoldItalic 1 ModernMT-Condensed 0 ModernMT-CondensedItalic 1
ModernMT-ExtendedItalic 1 ModernMT-Wide 0 ModernMT-WideItalic 1
MonaLisa-Solid 0 MonolineScriptMT 6 Myriad-CnBold 2
Myriad-CnItalic 3 Myriad-CnSemibold 2 Myriad-CnSemiboldItalic 3
Myriad-Tilt 2 NeueHammerUnziale-One 6 NeueHammerUnziale-OneAlt 6
NeueHammerUnziale-TwoAlt 6 Neuland 2 NeuzeitS-Book 2
NewAster-Black 0 NewAster-BlackItalic 1 NewAster-Bold 0
NewAster-Italic 1 NewAster-SemiBold 0 NewAster-SemiBoldItalic 1
NewBaskerville-Bold 0 NewBaskerville-BoldItalic 1 NewBaskerville-BoldItalicOsF 1
NewBaskerville-Italic 1 NewBaskerville-ItalicOsF 1 NewBaskerville-Roman 0
NewBerolinaMT 6 NewCaledonia-Black 0 NewCaledonia-BlackItalic 1
NewCaledonia-BoldItalic 1 NewCaledonia-BoldItalicOsF 1 NewCaledonia-BoldSC 0
NewCaledonia-ItalicOsF 1 NewCaledonia-SC 0 NewCaledonia-SemiBold 0
NewCaledonia 0 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold 0 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic 1
NewCenturySchlbk-FractionBold 0 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic 1 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman 0
NewsGothic-BoldOblique 3 NewsGothic-Oblique 3 NewsGothic 2
NotreDame-RomanDfr 0 Novarese-Bold 0 Novarese-BoldItalic 1
Novarese-BookItalic 1 Novarese-Medium 0 Novarese-MediumItalic 1
NuptialScript 6 Nyx 0 OCRA-Alternate 4
OCRB-Alternate 2 OCRB 2 OctavianMT-Expert 0
OctavianMT-ItalicExpert 1 OctavianMT-ItalicOsF 1 OctavianMT-SC 0
OfficinaSans-Bold 2 OfficinaSans-BoldItalic 3 OfficinaSans-Book 2

OfficinaSerif-Bold 4 OfficinaSerif-BoldItalic 5 OfficinaSerif-Book 4
OldStyleSeven-Italic 1 OldStyleSeven-ItalicOsF 1 OldStyleSeven-SC 0
Olympian-Bold 0 Olympian-BoldItalic 1 Olympian-Italic 1
Omnia 6 Ondine 6 OnyxMT 0
Optima-BlackItalic 3 Optima-Bold 2 Optima-BoldItalic 3
Optima-DemiBold 2 Optima-DemiBoldItalic 3 Optima-ExtraBlack 2
Optima-Italic 3 Optima-Medium 2 Optima-MediumItalic 3
Optima 2 Orator-Slanted 2 Orator 2
Ozwald 0 PalaceScriptMT-SemiBold 6 PalaceScriptMT 6
Palatino-BlackItalic 1 Palatino-Bold 0 Palatino-BoldItalic 1
Palatino-BoldOsF 0 Palatino-Italic 1 Palatino-ItalicOsF 1
Palatino-LightItalic 1 Palatino-Medium 0 Palatino-MediumItalic 1
Palatino-SC 0 Parisian 2 ParkAvenue 6
Peignot-Demi 2 Peignot-Light 2 Pelican 6
Perpetua-Bold 0 Perpetua-BoldExp 0 Perpetua-BoldItalic 1
Perpetua-BoldItalicOsF 1 Perpetua-BoldOsF 0 Perpetua-Exp 0
Perpetua-ItalicExp 1 Perpetua-ItalicOsF 1 Perpetua-SC 0
PhotinaMT-Bold 0 PhotinaMT-BoldItalic 1 PhotinaMT-Italic 1
PhotinaMT-SemiBoldItalic 1 PhotinaMT-UltraBold 0 PhotinaMT-UltraBoldItalic 1
Plantin-Bold 0 Plantin-BoldCondensed 0 Plantin-BoldItalic 1
Plantin-Light 0 Plantin-LightItalic 1 Plantin-Semibold 0
Plantin 0 Pompeijana-Roman 6 Ponderosa 0
Present-Black 6 Present-BlackCondensed 6 Present-Bold 6
Present-Condensed 6 Present 6 Present 6
PrestigeElite-BoldSlanted 4 PrestigeElite-Slanted 4 PrestigeElite 4
Quorum-Bold 0 Quorum-Book 0 Quorum-Light 0
Raleigh-Bold 0 Raleigh-DemiBold 0 Raleigh-Medium 0
Revue 2 Rockwell-Bold 4 Rockwell-BoldCondensed 4
Rockwell-Condensed 4 Rockwell-ExtraBold 4 Rockwell-Italic 5
Rockwell-LightItalic 5 Rockwell 4 Romic-Bold 0
Romic-Light 0 Romic-LightItalic 1 Romic-Medium 0
Rotation-Italic 1 Rotation-Roman 0 RotisSansSerif-Bold 2
RotisSansSerif-Italic 3 RotisSansSerif-Light 2 RotisSansSerif-LightItalic 3
RotisSemiSans-Bold 2 RotisSemiSans-ExtraBold 2 RotisSemiSans-Italic 3
RotisSemiSans-LightItalic 3 RotisSemiSans 2 RotisSemiSerif-Bold 0

RotisSerif-Bold 0 RotisSerif-Italic 1 RotisSerif 0
RussellSquare 2 RussellSquare 2 Rusticana-Roman 2
RuzickaFreehandLH-BoldSC 6 RuzickaFreehandLH-Roman 6 RuzickaFreehandLH-RomanSC 6
Sabon-BoldItalic 1 Sabon-BoldItalicOsF 1 Sabon-BoldOsF 0
Sabon-ItalicOsF 1 Sabon-Roman 0 Sabon-RomanSC 0
SanMarco 0 Sassoon-Primary 2 ScotchRomanMT-Italic 1
ScriptMT-Bold 6 Serifa-Black 4 Serifa-Bold 4
Serifa-Light 4 Serifa-LightItalic 5 Serifa-Roman 4
SerifGothic-Bold 2 SerifGothic-ExtraBold 2 SerifGothic-Heavy 2
SerifGothic 2 SerlioLH 0 Serpentine-Bold 2
Serpentine-Light 2 Serpentine-Light 2 Serpentine-Medium 2
Shannon-Bold 2 Shannon-Book 2 Shannon-ExtraBold 2
Shelley-AllegroScript 6 Shelley-AndanteScript 6 Shelley-VolanteScript 6
SimonciniGaramond-Italic 1 SimonciniGaramond 0 Slimbach-Black 0
Slimbach-Bold 0 Slimbach-BoldItalic 1 Slimbach-Book 0
Slimbach-Medium 0 Slimbach-MediumItalic 1 SnellRoundhand-BlackScript 6
SnellRoundhand-Script 6 Souvenir-Bold 0 Souvenir-BoldItalic 1
Souvenir-DemiItalic 1 Souvenir-Light 0 Souvenir-LightItalic 1
Souvenir-MediumItalic 1 Spartan-BookClassified 2 Spartan-HeavyClassified 2
SpectrumMT-Italic 1 SpectrumMT-ItalicExpert 1 SpectrumMT-ItalicOsF 1
SpectrumMT-SemiBold 0 SpectrumMT-SemiBoldExpert 0 SpectrumMT-SemiBoldOsF 0
StempelGaramond-Bold 0 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic 1 StempelGaramond-BoldItalicOsF 1
StempelGaramond-Italic 1 StempelGaramond-ItalicOsF 1 StempelGaramond-Roman 0
StempelSchneidler-Black 4 StempelSchneidler-BlackItalic 5 StempelSchneidler-Bold 4
StempelSchneidler-Italic 5 StempelSchneidler-Light 4 StempelSchneidler-LightItalic 5
StempelSchneidler-Medium 4 StempelSchneidler-Roman 4 StoneInformal-Bold 0
StoneInformal-Italic 1 StoneInformal-Semibold 0 StoneInformal-SemiboldItalic 1
StoneSans-Bold 2 StoneSans-BoldItalic 3 StoneSans-Italic 3
StoneSans-PhoneticIPA 2 StoneSans-Semibold 2 StoneSans-SemiboldItalic 3
StoneSerif-Bold 0 StoneSerif-BoldItalic 1 StoneSerif-Italic 1
StoneSerif-PhoneticIPA 0 StoneSerif-Semibold 0 StoneSerif-SemiboldItalic 1
Syntax-Black 2 Syntax-Bold 2 Syntax-Italic 3
Syntax-UltraBlack 2 Tekton-Bold 2 Tekton-BoldOblique 3
Tekton 2 Tempo-HeavyCondensed 2 Tempo-HeavyCondensedItalic 3
Tiepolo-BlackItalic 1 Tiepolo-Bold 0 Tiepolo-BoldItalic 1

Tiepolo-BookItalic 1 Tiffany-Demi 0 Tiffany-DemiItalic 1
Tiffany-HeavyItalic 1 Tiffany-Italic 1 Tiffany 0
Times-BoldSC 0 Times-ExtraBold 0 Times-ItalicOsF 1
Times-PhoneticIPA 0 Times-RomanSC 0 Times-Semibold 0
TimesEuropa-Bold 0 TimesEuropa-BoldItalic 1 TimesEuropa-Italic 1
TimesNewRomanMT-BoldCond 0 TimesNewRomanMT-Cond 0 TimesNewRomanMT-CondItalic 1
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalic 1 TimesNewRomanPS-Italic 1 TimesNewRomanPS 0
TimesTen-BoldItalic 1 TimesTen-BoldItalicOsF 1 TimesTen-BoldOsF 0
TimesTen-ItalicOsF 1 TimesTen-Roman 0 TimesTen-RomanSC 0
TradeGothic-BoldCondTwenty 2 TradeGothic-BoldCondTwentyObl 2 TradeGothic-BoldOblique 3
TradeGothic-BoldTwoOblique 3 TradeGothic-CondEighteen 2 TradeGothic-CondEighteenObl 2
TradeGothic-LightOblique 3 TradeGothic-Oblique 3 TradeGothic 2
TradeGothicLH-Extended 2 Trajan-Bold 0 Trajan-Regular 0
TrumpMediaeval-BoldItalic 1 TrumpMediaeval-BoldItalicOsF 1 TrumpMediaeval-BoldOsF 0
TrumpMediaeval-ItalicOsF 1 TrumpMediaeval-Roman 0 TrumpMediaeval-SC 0
Univers-BlackExt 2 Univers-BlackExtObl 2 Univers-BlackOblique 3
Univers-BoldExt 2 Univers-BoldExtObl 2 Univers-BoldOblique 3
Univers-CondensedBold 2 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique 3 Univers-CondensedLight 2
Univers-CondensedOblique 3 Univers-Extended 2 Univers-ExtendedObl 2
Univers-ExtraBlackExt 2 Univers-ExtraBlackExtObl 2 Univers-ExtraBlackObl 2
Univers-LightOblique 3 Univers-LightUltraCondensed 2 Univers-Oblique 3
Univers-UltraCondensed 2 Univers 2 Universal-GreekwithMathPi 2
UniversityRoman 0 Usherwood-Black 0 Usherwood-BlackItalic 1
Usherwood-BoldItalic 1 Usherwood-Book 0 Usherwood-BookItalic 1
Usherwood-MediumItalic 1 Utopia-Black 0 Utopia-BlackOsF 0
Utopia-BoldItalic 1 Utopia-BoldItalicOsF 1 Utopia-BoldOsF 0
Utopia-ItalicOsF 1 Utopia-Regular 0 Utopia-RegularSC 0
Utopia-SemiboldItalic 1 Utopia-SemiboldItalicOsF 1 Utopia-SemiboldSC 0
UtopiaExp-Black 0 UtopiaExp-Bold 0 UtopiaExp-BoldItalic 1
UtopiaExp-Regular 0 UtopiaExp-Semibold 0 UtopiaExp-SemiboldItalic 1
VAGRounded-Bold 2 VAGRounded-Light 2 VAGRounded-Thin 2
VectoraLH-BlackItalic 3 VectoraLH-Bold 2 VectoraLH-BoldItalic 3
VectoraLH-Light 2 VectoraLH-LightItalic 3 VectoraLH-Roman 2
Veljovic-BlackItalic 1 Veljovic-Bold 0 Veljovic-BoldItalic 1
Veljovic-BookItalic 1 Veljovic-Medium 0 Veljovic-MediumItalic 1

Versailles-BlackItalic 1 Versailles-Bold 0 Versailles-BoldItalic 1
Versailles-Light 0 Versailles-LightItalic 1 Versailles-Roman 0
Weidemann-BlackItalic 5 Weidemann-Bold 4 Weidemann-BoldItalic 5
Weidemann-BookItalic 5 Weidemann-Medium 4 Weidemann-MediumItalic 5
Weiss-ExtraBold 0 Weiss-Italic 1 Weiss 0
WilhelmKlingsporGotisch-Dfr 0 WilhelmKlingsporGotisch 0 Wilke-Black 0
Wilke-Bold 0 Wilke-BoldItalic 1 Wilke-Italic 1
Willow 0 WittenbergerFrakturMT-Bd 0 WittenbergerFrakturMT-BdDfr 0
WittenbergerFrakturMT 0 ZapfChancery-Bold 6 ZapfChancery-Demi 6
ZapfChancery-Light 6 ZapfChancery-LightItalic 6 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic 6
Error Handling
Error messages can appear because of a number of reasons. For example, Imposition error, Load error,
missing fonts, and missing images among others. Error messages may also appear if there is a
potentially harmful situation that may require user attention.
Whenever a user inputs an incorrect command or chooses an incorrect option, or process an invalid
job, a pop-up message is displayed. This pop-up message specifies the severity of the error. Such
messages have their own icons to represent the severity type.
Table 34-3 Severity Values
Icons Severity Value
Informational only, no IPC pop-up, only in Log Viewer

Information
Abnormal condition, but job can continue to process, no IPC

Warning pop-up, only in Log Viewer
Abnormal condition, job errors out, JC will not function

Error/Fatal properly, IPC pop-up
NOTE: Information and Warning messages can be viewed only in the Log Viewer. However, the Error
and Fatal messages will be displayed as pop-up and can also be viewed in the Log Viewer.
In addition, each error message in the Log Viewer or the pop-up displays the exact reason for the error
occurrence. Also, these messages can appear in many different languages. Depending on the installed
language during setup, you can see two different languages for the same error message using two
different HP Remote Production Clients.
Error Handling 293

Index
A BPC 95 Color Management tab 64, 71,

absolute colorimetric (rendering breaking a lock 167 235
intent) 64, 235 brightness 123, 253 color management type 64
accepted file types 34 built-in resources color profile
accounts for users 259, 260 CMYK input profiles 276 RGB input 277
activating OPI 56 color separations 279 color profiles
adaptive halftoning 87, 124, 256 ICC profiles 235 CMYK 276
Add Press dialog box 217 imposition templates 272 press output 278
Add SNAP Fonts dialog box 215 LUTs 276 color separation mode 279
adding press output profiles 278 color separation modes 232
custom ICC profiles 92 Ticket Templates 229 color separations
custom impositions 163 adding 66, 234
custom LUTs 95 C color separations for
fonts to RIP engines 151 canceling Master Jobs 55 RIPping 66
image server profiles 191 changing imposition of a press configuring color for
network printer (MAC) 45 job 108 RIPping 90
network printer (PC) 44 changing priority 49, 156 deleting 66
adding and deleting presses 181 changing system settings 162, editing 66, 234
administration locks 167 209 light 76
after-print behavior for press choosing a log type to view 129 color spaces
jobs 109 cleaning up logs 135 and ICC profiles 64, 92
after-RIP behavior for press CMYK input profile 235 defined 235
jobs 74, 242 CMYK input profiles 235, 276 in the color workflow 235
approving Master Jobs held for CMYK separation 279 color workflow 235
review 53 collate 120, 251 columns
archive files 42 collation adding and removing 21, 206
archiving press jobs 41, 106, in imposition templates 272 customizing 21, 206
145 specifying collation for a Master Load list columns 202
ArtBox 238 Job 74, 242 Master Jobs list columns 201
auto-rotate 71, 238 color management Press System Log
automatic Master Job deletion 59 about 89 columns 132
AutoPantone 92 better or faster 64 Print Queue columns 103
AUUID color separations for reordering 21, 206
defined 190, 226 RIPping 66, 232 comments 124, 256
identifies RPP servers 190 color settings for RIPping 64, completing a press job 109
needed for ISV accounts 189 235 components
configuring color for press job 101
B RIPping 90 variable data jobs 137
backup and restore 164 creating and editing color composition preview 127, 211
Billing Information tab 245 separations 234 configuration backup 164
binding 247 ICC profiles 64, 92, 235 Configure Disk Space Management
black point compensation 95 LUTs 95, 213, 276 dialog box 267
blank lines in database files 140 Pantone 92 Configure RIP Engines dialog
BleedBox 238 rendering intents 64, 235 box 265
294 Index

Configure RIP Groups dialog panels in the interface 206 delimited text format 137, 142,
box 263 Production Pro Print Server 208
configuring OPI 56 window 21 destination 120, 251
configuring order completed cycles 116, 248, 256 device type 229, 231
status 161 disabled RIP engine 159
configuring pop-up log D dot area (DA) 123, 253
messages 135 DA. See dot area dot gain 276
configuring processor Data Export dialog box 211 double hit 123
behavior 169 database files download processor
contrast 123, 253 and supported file types 34 in Internet job submission 40
copies associated with hot folders 36 with supported file types 34
copy range 202 associated with imported drawer 120, 249
number to print 207 jobs 207 drill size 247
order quantity 201 associated with Master driver for networked printers
overriding the default number Jobs 46 installing a printer driver for
of 231 blank lines 140 MACs 45
quantity 231 how database files name Master needed to create networked
set by hot folders 36 Jobs 48 printer input method 224
set during job import 39 in the PPML and variable JLYT used in submitting Master
setting the number of 231 workflow 142 Jobs 43
Copy Job to dialog box 205 matching database files to drop white objects 66, 71, 232
copying variable job files 144 duplex 119, 248
hot folders 172 specifying the location of duplex printing 74, 242
press jobs 105 variable job assets 208 duplicating press jobs 105
Ticket Templates 174 submitting variable jobs using
creating hot folders 138 E
hot folders 172 triggering order Edit RIP Engine dialog box 265
Internet input methods 176 submission 138 Edit RIP Group dialog box 264
ISV accounts 189 database folder editing
network printers 175 defining it for hot folders 172, hot folders 172, 222
press jobs 128 222 input methods 222
RIP groups 155 using it for multiple jobs 144 Internet input methods 176
Ticket Templates 175 DCS file format 34, 66 ISV accounts 189
CropBox 238 default copy count 39, 231 Job Tickets 62
CSV files default locations for hot Master Job Form 78
how CSV files name Master folders 174 network printers 175, 224
Jobs 48 default page size 71, 238 press job properties 125
save Production Pro Print Server default system settings 162 press jobs 127
data 163, 211 default units 162 RIP engines 265
Custom color separation deleting RIP groups 155, 264
mode 279 custom ICC profiles 92 emulation profiles
Customer Information tab 244 custom impositions 163 adding and deleting 92
customer job name custom LUTs 95 defined 235
defined 201 fonts from RIP engines 151 in the color workflow 235
in ISV Master Jobs 48 Master Jobs 59 using 64
in the Job Ticket 231 press jobs 107 enhanced printing support 84
customizing retained jobs 112 event ID 129
columns in lists 21, 206 Ticket Templates 174 expiration of log entries 135, 199
imported Master Jobs 39 deleting press jobs 161 Export dialog box 207
Index 295

exporting Job Ticket 231 HP Professional Pantone
and reprinting VDP jobs 145 Ticket Template 231 emulation 92
Data Export dialog box 211 gray input profile
Export dialog box 207 adding and deleting 92 I
press jobs 106 defined 235 ICC profiles
system data 163 in the color workflow 235 adding and deleting 92
system logs 135 using 64 built-in 235
variable data jobs 145 grayscale separation 279 defined 64, 235
external job ID Group Jobs dialog box 206 in the color workflow 235
defined 201 grouping press jobs 110 using 64
for ISV jobs 48 icons
in the Job Ticket 231 H job log icons 244
halftoning 87 Master Job status icons 268
F Held (Loaded) Jobs list press job status icons 269
failing Master Jobs held for about 103 processor status icons 271
review 53 moving jobs to Print RIP engine status icons 270
fast reaggregation 157 Queue 104 image server
file name matching for hot folder Held Jobs list 79 adding or updating 191, 227
submission 144 held jobs list 120, 248 download job
file name matching for OPI 56 help for the Job Editor 125 components 191
file shares with OPI 56 hide/show columns 21 password 191, 227
filtering History mode 129 protocol 191, 227
Master Job Log 131 hold after setting 150, 168, 169, image size 71, 238, 252
Press Consumables log 134 209 image substitution 56
Press System Log 132 hold before setting 150, 168, images folder
Production System log 130 169, 209 defining it for hot folders 172,
RIP Log 130 holding and resuming Master 222
system logs 130 Jobs 51 using 36
filtering lists 17 holding new Master Jobs 52 Import Job dialog box 39
finding hot folders importing
a job's errors 131 components 172 ICC profiles 92
a Master Job's press job(s) 52 copying 172 impositions 163, 214
a press job's Master Job 107 creating and editing 172 jobs 207
Finishing tab 247 database folder 36, 138, LUTs 95, 213
fit to page 71, 238 144, 172, 222 press jobs 41
folder devices 82 deleting 172 Imposition tab 76, 240
folding 247 fonts hotfolder 152 impositions
font emulation 155 images folder 36, 138, 144, adding and deleting 163
Font Manager 151, 266 172, 222 built-in 272
fonts locations 174 changing impositions for a press
adding RIP fonts 151, 152 on success and on error job 108
missing 74, 142 folders 174 specifying imposition in the Job
re-building RIP font lists 152 root hot folder 162, 209 Ticket 76
removing RIP fonts 151 template folder 36, 138, 144, in process state 268
fonts hotfolder 152 172, 222 Indichrome separation 279
forced drawer 120, 249 using 36 Indigo transparency 66, 232
how processors work 168 ink 123
G HP Integer Scalable Printer ink printing order 124, 254
General tab PPD 45 input methods
ISV Account Properties 226 about 171
296 Index

copy 222 testing connections for 192, job properties
delete 222 225 Color Control page 253
edit 222 troubleshooting problems color corrections 123
hot folders 36 with 193 color LUT 122
Import Jobs dialog box 39, ISV jobs comments 124
207 customer job name for 48, Comments tab 256
Internet 40, 176 201, 231 General page 248
network printers 43 customer order number Image Placement page 252
input profile, RGB 277 for 201 Job Log tab 256
input profiles external job ID for 48, 201, linework 124
adding and deleting 92 231 Linework and Resolution
ICC Profiles Manager 92 fail if input method page 256
in the color workflow 235 deleted 176 LUT library 122
list of profiles 235 fail if Ticket Template orientation 121
setting profiles before deleted 174 overview 114
RIPping 64, 66, 90 how ISV jobs get press job log 125
using preloaded profiles 64 submitted 40 printing ink order 124
input profiles, CMYK 276 input methods for 176, 224 printing range 116
installing fonts 151, 152, 266 named in the intent ticket 48 resolution 124
installing the AdobePS printer driver polling for jobs at an ISV 192 retention 120
(MAC) 45 variable data ISV jobs 137 separations 123
installing the PPD (MAC) 45 workflow for 47 Separations page 254
intended substrate 63, 232 workflow for PPML and variable sheets and cycles 116
intended substrates 100, 213 JLYT jobs 142 simplex and duplex 119
internal ID 48, 201, 202, 244 stacking order 120
internet connection name 176, J Stacking page 251
224 JLYT files Substrate page 249
Internet input methods archiving with the Export substrates 120
creating and editing 176, 224 dialog 145 viewing 114
submitting Master Jobs archiving with the Export dialog workflow 120
with 40 box 106, 207 Job Ticket
intranet workstation 43 how JLYTs name Master about 61
ISML files Jobs 48 compared with Ticket
cannot be imported 39 importing archived JLYTs 41 Templates 36
in variable data jobs 137 in RIP reaggregation 157 in the Master Jobs
supported file type 34 in variable data jobs 137 workflow 47
ISV Account Properties dialog box submitted using the Import Job locked 54
about 225 dialog box 39 modifying 62
General tab 226 supported file type 34 opening 62
Image Server Profiles tab 227 variable JLYT accepted by hot printing 78
RRP Profiles tab 226 folders 138 Job Ticket dialog box
ISV accounts workflow for variable Color Management tab 64,
about 189 JLYTs 142 235
creating and editing 189, 225 job control parameters 74, 242 General tab 231
deleting 225 Job Control tab 74, 242 Imposition tab 76, 240
image server profiles 191, Job Editor 127 Job Control tab 74, 242
227 Job Log tab 77, 244 Job Log tab 77, 244
naming 189 Job Manager 199 Master Job Form tab 78
polling 192, 228 Job Manager panel 10 Order Form tab 244, 245,
RPP profiles for 190, 226 job preview 256 246, 247
Index 297

Page tab 71, 238 Press System Log 132 Master Job list 12
Separations tab 66, 232 Production System Log 131 Master Job Log 131
Substrate tab 63, 232 RIP Log 132 Master Job names and IDs 48
JobLUT Library dialog box 215 searching 129, 130 Master Job quantity
jog offset 120, 251 severity definitions for logged in the Import Job dialog
events 130 box 39
K LUT 122, 253 Master Jobs
keyboard shortcuts 23 LUT library 122, 253 canceling 33, 55
LUT Library dialog box 215 defining 46
L LUTs deleting 59
language 31 about 66, 232 finding a Master Job's press
light inks 76, 254 managing LUTs 95, 213 job 52
line smoothing 86 saving 216 finding a press job's Master
line smoothing (RET) 124, 256 LUTs, built-in 276 Job 107
line thinning 86, 124, 256 held for review 53
linework 256 M holding and resuming 51
lists MAC workstation 43, 45, 171 image (thumbnail) 200
Print Queue 103 Manage Devices dialog box 181 locking 54
sorting 17 Manage ICC Profiles dialog Master Job status 49
load balancing 82 box 92 monitoring progress for 50
Loaded Job Filter 202 Manage Impositions dialog names and IDs 48
Loaded Jobs list box 163, 214 priority 49
columns of 202 Manage Input Methods dialog progress states 268
locale 31 box 222 setting Master Job status to
locking Master Jobs 54 Manage ISV Accounts dialog box Master Job complete 58
locks 32, 167, 261 about 225 status icons 268
log 125, 256 New/Edit ISV Accounts dialog submitting 33, 34, 36, 39,
log behavior box 226 43
configuring pop-up log polling 228 viewing Master Job status 49
messages 135 test connection 192 workflow 47
exporting a system log 135 Manage LUTs dialog box 95, Master Jobs list
filtering a system log 130 213 columns of 201
log cleanup 135, 210 Manage Ticket Templates dialog matching database files to variable
log entries 135, 199 box 229 job files 138, 144
Log Settings dialog box 210 managing media size
Log Viewer tab ICC profiles 92 defined 71
about 199 impositions 163 in imposition 76
tour 19 ISV accounts 226 setting media size 76, 240
logging in 31, 261 LUTs 95, 213 MediaBox 238
logs RIP disk space 154 merge processor
choosing the log type 129 RIP engines 265 defined 270
configuring popup log RIP fonts 151, 153 filtering errors for 129, 131
messages 135 RIP groups 264 how processors work 168
exporting system logs 135 Ticket Templates 174 in Internet job submission 40
filtering system logs 130 Manual Polling Results dialog in the PPML workflow 142
Log Viewer tab 19, 199 box 228 supported file types for 34
Master Job Log 131 Master Job Form tab mirror 71, 121, 238, 252
modes 129 using 78 missing files
monitoring 129 Master Job List for OPI 74, 242
Press Consumables Log 134 auto-cleanup 59
298 Index

for variable data jobs being New/Edit Hot Folder dialog in the color workflow 235
imported 140 box 222 list of profiles 235
for variable data jobs using hot New/Edit Input Method dialog setting profiles before
folders 138 box 222 RIPping 64, 66, 90
in the PPML and variable JLYT New/Edit Internet Input Method using preloaded files 64
workflow 142 dialog box 224 output profiles, press 278
missing fonts New/Edit Networked Printer dialog overprint behaviors 71
RIP fonts 74, 242 box 224 override color management 64,
SNAP fonts 142 235
specifying behavior for 74, O overviews
242 object-level resolution 85 color management 33, 89
modifying Job Tickets 62 OD. See optical density input methods 171
Monitor mode 129 on error behavior 36, 172, 222 ISV accounts 189
monitoring Master Job on success behavior 36, 172, Job Tickets 61
progress 50 222 Master Job submission 33
Move Job to dialog boxes 205 Open Prepress Interface 56 variable data jobs 137
moving jobs between Held opening
(Loaded) Jobs and Print ICC Profiles Manager 92 P
Queue 104 Job Properties dialog box 125 pad smaller jobs 71, 238
moving jobs in the Print Job Tickets 62 page orientation 71, 238
Queue 104 Manage Impositions dialog page resolution 71, 238
multiple resolution 85 box 163 page rotation 71, 238
multiple substrates 63, 232 Manage Ticket Templates dialog page scaling 71, 238
box 174 page settings 71, 238
N Master Job Log 131 page size 71, 238
name matching for OPI 56 Press Consumables Log 134 Page tab 71, 238
naming conventions for Master Press System Log 132 panel visibility 206
Jobs 48 Production System log 131 Pantone emulation 92
needed by date RIP Log 132 Pantone substitution 64, 235
for imported jobs 39, 207 RIP Manager 148 password reset 180
for imported press jobs 41 OPI 56 path for OPI images 56
for variable data jobs 140 optical density (OD) 123, 253 pausing processors 170
in the Job Ticket 231 order completed status 161 pausing the RIP processor 150
in the Master Jobs list 201 Order Form tab PC workstation 43, 44, 171
negative print 71, 238 about 244 PDF files
network printers Billing Information 245 partitioned in the RIP 147,
creating and editing network Customer Information 244 157
printer input methods 175, Finishing 247 supported file type 34
224 Shipping Information 246 PDF options 71
in the Master Job workflow 47 order quantity PDF preview 127
MAC configuration for 45 in the Master Jobs list perceptual (rendering intent) 64,
PC configuration for 44 columns 201 235
require Ticket Templates 36 orders perforation 247
spooler 43 locking 32 permissions 178, 179
submitting Master Jobs setting order completed permissions of users 179
with 43 status 161 polling
variable data jobs 43, 137 orientation 76, 240, 252, 272 automatic polling 192
New/Edit Color Separations dialog output profiles for ISV jobs 40, 189, 192
box 234 adding and deleting 92 Manage ISV Accounts dialog
ICC Profiles Manager 92 box 225
Index 299

manual polling 192, 225, 228 exporting 106 consume Job Ticket
setting polling of RPP finding a Master Job's press settings 62
servers 190, 226 job 52 download processor 40, 142
troubleshooting 193 finding a press job's Master errors displayed in Production
popup messages 135 Job 107 System log 131
post press state 268 grouping 110, 206 imported jobs bypass
PostScript file copy count 231 importing 41 processors 41
PostScript files properties 125 in the Job Log 244
color specifications can be sending to another press 111 in the Log Viewer tab 19, 199
overridden 64 submitting 41, 128 in the Master Jobs list 201
embedded copy count in press output profiles 235, 278 in the PPML workflow 142
file 36, 231 press processor 58, 109, 268, in the System Status
in the variable data 270 panel 206
workflow 142 press status icons 270 in the workflow for Master
overprint behavior 71 Press System Log 132 Jobs 47
printer driver converts to 43 presses pausing and holding 49, 52,
specify color spaces 89, 235 adding and deleting 181 170
supported file types 34 previewing jobs 127, 200 press is last processor 58,
PostScript Printer Description 45 Print Queue 109
PPD 45 about 103 priority in processing 49
PPML files columns of 202 progress states 268
don't require RIPping 48, 147 moving jobs between Held reprocessing Master Jobs 54
for variable data jobs 137 (Loaded) Jobs and Print RIP processor 147, 149,
hot folders accept 138 Queue 104 150, 157, 263
how PPML files name jobs 48 re-ordering jobs in the Print settings 169
importing with Import Queue 104 status and icons 271
dialog 140 print queue 120, 248 system processors 270
importing with Import Job dialog printer driver 43, 45, 224 Production Manager tab 199
box 39 printing a Job Ticket 78 Production System Log 131
supported file type 34 printing a proof 108 products supporting enhanced
workflow for PPML jobs 142 printing done 109 printing 84
PPML Master Job submission 42 printing from workstation 43 progress states 268
pre-separated jobs 66 printing ink order 254 proof 90, 108
preserve 100% process black 64, printing range 116 putting new jobs on hold 52
235 priority 248
Press Consumables Log 134 priority of Master Jobs 49 Q
Press Controller Jobs list 79, 80 process black quantity
press font list 214 configuring before RIPping 90 in the Job Ticket 231
press groups 82 setting preservation of 64, queue
press job destination 80 235 processor queues 49, 51,
press job log 125 Process Pantone 92 168, 271
press job status 269 processor
press jobs zip 42 R
changing imposition 108, 128 processor queue 49, 51, 168, re-RIPping a job 149
creating a new press job 128 271 reactivating retained jobs 112
defined 101 processors reaggregation 157
delete behavior 58, 162 about 168 rebuilding RIP font lists 152
deleting 107, 161 and supported file types 34 refreshing a log 134
duplicating 105 configuring 169, 209 relative colorimetric (rendering
editing 127 intent) 64, 235
300 Index

releasing locks 167 in the Log Viewer 19 partitioning and
releasing Master Jobs 49, 51, in the PPML workflow 142 reaggregation 157
53 in the RIP Manager 263 pausing and resuming 150
releasing orders 150, 209 managing RIP disk space 154 RIP services
remote accounts 178 partitioning and rebuilds font lists on
removing RIP temporary files 154 reaggregation 157 restart 152
renaming Master Jobs 48 rebuilding RIP font lists 152 restart may query disk
rendering intents 64, 235 RIP engine status 148 usage 154
reordering the Print Queue 104 RIP Master Job status 268 stop when configuring OPI 56
repeat 124 RIP order status 149 RIP to folder 82
reprinting jobs 41, 106, 145 view RIP engine status 148 RIPping 149, 268
reprocessing a Master Job 54 RIP groups roles
resetting passwords 180 assigning an engine to 158 assigning 179
resizing panels 21 changing RIP group creating 260
resolution priority 156 root hot folder 162, 209
multiple 85 coordinated by RIP rotate 252
object-level 85 Manager 147, 263 rotate 180° 121
restarting creating and editing 155, rotation of pages
the workflow for held Master 263, 264 in imposition templates 214,
Jobs 53 deleting 263 272
resubmitting a Master Job 54 duplicating 263 specifying rotation 71, 238
resuming processing 49, 51, partition and reaggregation RPP servers
150, 209 of 157 adding or editing 190, 226
resuming the RIP processor 150 setting RIP group priority 156 AUUID 190, 226
RET. See line smoothing taking a RIP group offline 156 in Internet job submission 40
retain list 112, 161 RIP Log 132 needed for ISV
Retained Jobs dialog box 205 RIP Manager accounts 189
retaining jobs 109 about 147 polling 190, 192, 226, 228
reusing job components 144 configure error message pop- testing connections for 192,
reverse Master Job 74 ups for 210 225
reviewing and releasing Master error messages for 129, 132
Jobs 53 in the Master Job workflow 47 S
RGB input profiles 235, 277 in the PPML workflow 142 saturation (rendering intent) 64,
RIP engine managing RIP disk space 154 235
disabling 159 managing RIP fonts 153 Save LUT dialog box 216
taking offline 159 partitioning and scaling of pages 71, 238
unassigning 159 reaggregation 157 screen angle 123
RIP engines pausing RIP Manager screen frequency 66, 232
adding and editing 158 jobs 150 search 17
adding and removing progress for RIP Manager Search panel 199
fonts 151 jobs 268 search path for OPI 56
configuring disk space show RIP Manager send to press 111, 205
management 267 subpanel 206 sending a job to another
coordinated by RIP status 19, 148, 199 press 111
Manager 147, 263 RIP Manager dialog box 263 sending to press state 201, 268
creating and editing 265 RIP processors separation mode 64, 66, 232,
deleting 158 controlling RIPping with 150 234, 235, 279
duplicating 265 in the RIP Manager 147, 263 separations 122, 256
engine status icons 270 Separations tab 66, 232, 234
in OPI search paths 56
Index 301

setting Master Job status to Master substrate Page tab 71, 238
Job complete 58 intended 100 Separations tab 66, 232
severity of logged events 130 post-RIP 100 Substrate tab 63, 232
sheet size 87 pre-RIP 98 Ticket Templates
sheets 116, 248 workflow 97 about 36
Shipping Information tab 246 Substrate Catalog 99 assigned to input
shortcuts 23 substrate catalog 213 methods 171
show/hide columns 21 Substrate tab 63, 232 compared to Job Tickets 36,
show/hide panels 21 substrates 120 61
simplex 119, 248 supported file types 34 creating 175
SNAP Font Manager dialog system hold 56 managing 174, 229
box 214 system lock 32 using 36
SNAP fonts System panel 11, 199 tours
adding 215 system processors 270 Log Viewer tab 19
SOAR Core Java 56 system settings 161, 162, 209 Thumbnail panel 18
sorting lists 17 System Settings dialog box 209 workflow for Master Jobs 47
special colors 258 TrimBox 238
spooler 43 T troubleshooting
spread preview 256 template folder ISV account problems 193
spreads 18, 76, 202, 214 database filename must tumble 74, 119, 242, 248
stacking 120 match 144 turning on partitioning and fast
static jobs 34, 36, 90 defined 137 reaggregation 157
status for hot folders 172, 222
Master Job complete not deleted when input method U
status 58 deleted 222 unassigned RIP engine 159
Master Job status 49, 268 reusing with variable data units
order complete status 161 jobs 144, 145 custom default page size 71,
processor status and specifying location of 208 238
icons 271 submitting jobs using 36, default units of measure 162,
RIP engine status 148, 270 138, 140 209
RIP job status 149 using 36 media size 76, 240
system status icons 268, Test Connection Results dialog resolution 71, 238
269, 270 box 225 system settings 162, 209
status icons 268, 270 testing ISV account units (RPM) 262
submitting connections 192 updating image server
ISV jobs 192 throttled Master Job profiles 191
submitting Master Jobs submission 43 user accounts 30, 178, 260
about 33, 171 throttling 56 user permissions 179
from a workstation 43 thumbnail images user preferences 31, 262
importing press jobs 41 of impositions 76, 240, 272 user roles 178, 179
ISV jobs 40 show/hide 206
network printer Master Thumbnail panel 199 V
Jobs 43 Thumbnail Preview panel 18, variable data jobs
resubmitting a Master Job 54 200 about 137
static Master Jobs using hot Ticket Template dialog box and SNAP fonts 152
folders 36 Color Management tab 64, components 137
submitting orders 235 copy counts 36, 39
variable data jobs 138, 140 General tab 231 enabling a RIP group for 155,
with the Import Jobs dialog Imposition tab 76, 240 264
box 207 Job log 77, 244 exporting 106, 145
302 Index

image servers download files
for 191
Job Ticket options don't apply
to 66, 90, 232, 238
Master Job contains assets
for 46
matching database files to
variable job files 144
reprinting 145
reusing job components
for 144
specifying asset locations
for 208
submitting with hot folders 36,
138, 172, 222
submitting with Import Jobs
dialog 140
submitting with Import Jobs
dialog box 39, 207
supported file types for 34
variable data jobs 43
workflow for PPML jobs 142
View Options dialog box 206
viewing
ICC profile descriptions 92
Job Log 77
job status during RIPping 149
Master Job status 49
RIP engine status 148
W
WebDAV protocol 191, 227
workflow
color management
workflow 235
for Master Jobs 47
for PPML jobs 142
Y
Yours Truly Designer
can create imposition
templates 76, 163
can send PPML or JLYT jobs
directly to press 34, 137
Z
zip files 42
Index 303

© 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CA394-00200*
*CA394-00200*
CA394-00200
© 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CA394-00200*
*CA394-00200*
CA394-00200

HP Smartstream Production

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Smartstream Production

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Smartstream Production

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP SmartStream Production

Pro Print Server

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

© 2002 – 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard

Reproduction, adaptation or translation

The information contained herein is subject

The only warranties for HP products and

Copyright © 1999–2003 The Apache

Copyright © 1999–2001 Intalio Inc. All rights

Copyright © 2000–2002 Bob McWhirter &

Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All

Copyright © 2001 Bret McLaughlin & Jason

Copyright © 2000–2001 Werken Digital. All

Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®

Java™ is a US trademark of Sun

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 System Building Blocks

2 Tour of Production Pro Print Server

3 Initial setup and administration

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 HP Remote Production Client user accounts

6 Managing Master Jobs

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 The Job Ticket

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Press job destinations and workflows

9 Enhanced printing options

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Color and substrate workflow

11 Managing press jobs

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

12 Modify press job properties

13 Previewing and editing press jobs

14 The Log Viewer

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

15 Variable data (VDP) jobs

16 The Production RIP Manager

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Managing Job Input

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

21 Press Controller administration

22 Administering ISV accounts

23 ICF Formats and Production Pro Print Server Workflows

24 Main window and panels reference

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

25 General user dialog boxes reference

26 Resource Management reference

27 Device management dialogs reference

28 Input methods reference

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

29 Job Ticket reference

30 Press job properties and editing reference

31 User account reference

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

32 Production RIP Manager reference

33 Status and processor reference

34 Built-in settings reference

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 294

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Overview — a system map